HD64F38104FPV - Renesas Electronics

Revision Date: Mar. 16, 2004

8H8/3802, H8/38004,

H8/38104 Group

Hardware Manual

Renesas 8-Bit Single-Chip Microcomputer

H8 Family / H8/300L Super Low Power Series

Rev. 4.00

REJ09B0024-0400O

The revision list can be viewed directly by

clicking the title page.

The revision list summarizes the locations of

revisions and additions. Details should always

be checked by referring to the relevant text.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page ii of l

1. These materials are intended as a reference to assist our customers in the selection of the Renesas

Technology Corp. product best suited to the customer's application; they do not convey any license

under any intellectual property rights, or any other rights, belonging to Renesas Technology Corp. or

a third party.

2. Renesas Technology Corp. assumes no responsibility for any damage, or infringement of any third-

party's rights, originating in the use of any product data, diagrams, charts, programs, algorithms, or

circuit application examples contained in these materials.

3. All information contained in these materials, including product data, diagrams, charts, programs and

algorithms represents information on products at the time of publication of these materials, and are

subject to change by Renesas Technology Corp. without notice due to product improvements or

other reasons. It is therefore recommended that customers contact Renesas Technology Corp. or

an authorized Renesas Technology Corp. product distributor for the latest product information

before purchasing a product listed herein.

The information described here may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.

Renesas Technology Corp. assumes no responsibility for any damage, liability, or other loss rising

from these inaccuracies or errors.

Please also pay attention to information published by Renesas Technology Corp. by various means,

including the Renesas Technology Corp. Semiconductor home page (http://www.renesas.com).

4. When using any or all of the information contained in these materials, including product data,

diagrams, charts, programs, and algorithms, please be sure to evaluate all information as a total

system before making a final decision on the applicability of the information and products. Renesas

Technology Corp. assumes no responsibility for any damage, liability or other loss resulting from the

information contained herein.

5. Renesas Technology Corp. semiconductors are not designed or manufactured for use in a device or

system that is used under circumstances in which human life is potentially at stake. Please contact

Renesas Technology Corp. or an authorized Renesas Technology Corp. product distributor when

considering the use of a product contained herein for any specific purposes, such as apparatus or

systems for transportation, vehicular, medical, aerospace, nuclear, or undersea repeater use.

6. The prior written approval of Renesas Technology Corp. is necessary to reprint or reproduce in

whole or in part these materials.

7. If these products or technologies are subject to the Japanese export control restrictions, they must

be exported under a license from the Japanese government and cannot be imported into a country

other than the approved destination.

Any diversion or reexport contrary to the export control laws and regulations of Japan and/or the

country of destination is prohibited.

8. Please contact Renesas Technology Corp. for further details on these materials or the products

contained therein.

1. Renesas Technology Corp. puts the maximum effort into making semiconductor products better and

more reliable, but there is always the possibility that trouble may occur with them. Trouble with

semiconductors may lead to personal injury, fire or property damage.

Remember to give due consideration to safety when making your circuit designs, with appropriate

measures such as (i) placement of substitutive, auxiliary circuits, (ii) use of nonflammable material or

(iii) prevention against any malfunction or mishap.

Keep safety first in your circuit designs!

Notes regarding these materials

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page iii of l

General Precautions on Handling of Product

1. Treatment of NC Pins

Note: Do not connect anything to the NC pins.

The NC (not connected) pins are either not connected to any of the internal circuitry or are

used as test pins or to reduce noise. If something is connected to the NC pins, the

operation of the LSI is not guaranteed.

2. Treatment of Unused Input Pins

Note: Fix all unused input pins to high or low level.

Generally, the input pins of CMOS products are high-impedance input pins. If unused pins

are in their open states, intermediate levels are induced by noise in the vicinity, a pass-

through current flows internally, and a malfunction may occur.

3. Processing before Initialization

Note: When power is first supplied, the product’s state is undefined.

The states of internal circuits are undefined until full power is supplied throughout the

chip and a low level is input on the reset pin. During the period where the states are

undefined, the register settings and the output state of each pin are also undefined. Design

your system so that it does not malfunction because of processing while it is in this

undefined state. For those products which have a reset function, reset the LSI immediately

after the power supply has been turned on.

4. Prohibition of Access to Undefined or Reserved Addresses

Note: Access to undefined or reserved addresses is prohibited.

The undefined or reserved addresses may be used to expand functions, or test registers

may have been be allocated to these addresses. Do not access these registers; the system’s

operation is not guaranteed if they are accessed.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page iv of l

Configuration of This Manual

This manual comprises the following items:

1. General Precautions on Handling of Product

2. Configuration of This Manual

3. Preface

4. Contents

5. Overview

6. Description of Functional Modules

• CPU and System-Control Modules

• On-Chip Peripheral Modules

The configuration of the functional description of each module differs according to the

module. However, the generic style includes the following items:

i) Feature

ii) Input/Output Pin

iii) Register Description

iv) Operation

v) Usage Note

When designing an application system that includes this LSI, take notes into account. Each section

includes notes in relation to the descriptions given, and usage notes are given, as required, as the

final part of each section.

7. List of Registers

8. Electrical Characteristics

9. Appendix

10. Main Revisions and Additions in this Edition (only for revised versions)

The list of revisions is a summary of points that have been revised or added to earlier versions.

This does not include all of the revised contents. For details, see the actual locations in this

manual.

11.Index

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page v of l

Preface

The H8/3802 Group, H8/38004 Group, and H8/38104 Group are single-chip microcomputers

made up of the high-speed H8/300L CPU employing Renesas technology’s original architecture as

their cores, and the peripheral functions required to configure a system. The H8/300L CPU has an

instruction set that is compatible with the H8/300 CPU. Below is a table listing the product

specifications for each group.

3802 38004 38104

Item ZTAT Mask ROM Flash Mask ROM Flash Mask ROM

Memory ROM 32k 8kto32k 16k/32k 8kto32k 32k 8kto32k

RAM 1 k 512 or 1 k 1 k 512 or 1 k 1 k 512 or 1 k

4.5to5.5V 16MHz 16MHz — — 16MHz 16MHz

2.7to5.5V 10MHz 10MHz — — 16MHz 16MHz

1.8to5.5V 4MHz4MHz————

2.7to3.6V — — 10MHz 10MHz — —

Operating

voltage and

operating

frequency

1.8to3.6V — — 4MHz(2.2V

or more) 4MHz — —

I/OportsInput 999999

Output 666655

I/O 515151515151

TimersClock(timerA) 111111

Compare(timerF)111111

AEC 111111

WDT 1111

WDT (discrete) 11

SCI UART/Clock frequency 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch

A-D 10 ×410×410×410×410×410×4

LCD seg 25 25 25 25 25 25

com 444444

External interrupt (internal wakeup) 11(8) 11(8) 11(8) 11(8) 11(8) 11(8)

POR(power-onreset) ———— 1 —

LVD ———— 1 —

Package FP-64A FP-64A FP-64A FP-64A FP-64A FP-64A

FP-64E FP-64E FP-64E FP-64E FP-64E FP-64E

DP-64S DP-64S

die die die

Operating temperature Standard specifications: –20 to 70°C, WTR: –40 to 85°C

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page vi of l

Target Users: This manual was written for users who will be using the H8/3802 Group,

H8/38004 Group, and H8/38104 Group in the design of application systems.

Target users are expected to understand the fundamentals of electrical circuits,

logical circuits, and microcomputers.

Objective: This manual was written to explain the hardware functions and electrical

characteristics of the H8/3802 Group, H8/38004 Group, and H8/38104 Group to

the target users.

Refer to the H8/300L Series Programming Manual for a detailed description of the

instruction set.

Notes on reading this manual:

•In order to understand the overall functions of the chip

Read the manual according to the contents. This manual can be roughly categorized into parts

on the CPU, system control functions, peripheral functions and electrical characteristics.

•In order to understand the details of the CPU's functions

Read the H8/300L Series Programming Manual.

•In order to understand the details of a register when its name is known

Read the index that is the final part of the manual to find the page number of the entry on the

List of Registers.

Example: Bit order: The MSB is on the left and the LSB is on the right.

Notes:

The following limitations apply to H8/38004, H8/38002, H8/38104, and H8/38102 programming

and debugging when the on-chip emulator is used.

1. Pin P95 is not available because it is used exclusively by the on-chip emulator.

2. Pins P33, P34, and P35 are unavailable for use. In order to use these pins additional hardware

must be mounted on the user board.

3. The address range H'7000 to H'7FFF is used by the on-chip emulator and is unavailable to the

user.

4. The address range H'F780 to H'FB7F must not be accessed under any circumstances.

5. When the on-chip emulator is being used, pin P95 is I/O, pins P33 and P34 are input, and pin

P35 is output.

6. When using the on-chip emulator, pins OSC1 and OSC2 should be connected to an oscillator,

or an external clock should be supplied to pin OSC1, even if the on-chip oscillator of the

H8/38104 Group is selected.

Related Manuals: The latest versions of all related manuals are available from our web site.

Please ensure you have the latest versions of all documents you require.

http://www.renesas.com/eng/

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page vii of l

H8/3802 Group and H8/38004 Group manuals:

Document Title Document No.

H8/3802 Group, H8/38004 Group, H8/38104 Group Hardware Manual This manual

H8/300L Series Programming Manual ADE-602-040

User's manuals for development tools:

Document Title Document No.

H8S, H8/300 Series C/C++ Compiler, Assembler, Optimizing Linkage Editor

User's Manual REJ10B0058-0100H

(ADE-702-247)

H8S, H8/300 Series Simulator/Debugger User's Manual ADE-702-282

H8S, H8/300 Series High-performance Embedded Workshop, High-

performance Debugging Interface Tutorial ADE-702-231

High-performance Embedded Workshop User's Manual ADE-702-201

Application notes:

Document Title Document No.

Single Power Supply F-ZTATTM On-Board Programming ADE-502-055

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page viii of l

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page ix of l

Main Revisions and Additions in this Edition

Item Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)

All H8/38104 Group added

Preface vii

3802 38004 38104

Item ZTAT Mask ROM Flash Mask ROM Flash Mask ROM

I/O ports Input 9 9 9 9 9 9

Output 66665

I/O 51 51 51 51 51 51

viii Note 6 and specifications added

6. When using the on-chip emulator, pins OSC1 and OSC2 should be

connected to an oscillator, or an external clock should be supplied to

pin OSC1, even if the on-chip oscillator of the H8/38124 Group is

selected.

1.1 Features 1 Description amended

Complete instruction set compatibility with H8/300 CPU

Watchdog timer (WDT) (H8/38004 Group and H8/38104 Group only)

Power-on reset and low-voltage detect circuits (H8/38104 Group only)

2• On-chip memory

H8/38104 HD64F38104 32 kbytes 1kbyte

H8/38102 HD64F38102 16 kbytes 1kbyte

H8/38104 HD64338104 32 kbytes 1kbyte

H8/38103 HD64338103 24 kbytes 1kbyte

H8/38102 HD64338102 16 kbytes 1kbyte

H8/38101 HD64338101 12 kbytes 512 bytes

H8/38100 HD64338100 8kbytes 512 bytes

• General I/O ports

Output-only pins: 6 output pins (5 pins on H8/38104 Group)

3 • Compact package

The chip is not supported by the H8/38104 Group.

1.2 Internal Block

Diagram

Figure 1.3 Internal

Block Diagram of

H8/38104 Group

6 Newly added

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page x of l

Item Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)

1.3 Pin Arrangement

Figure 1.6 Pin

Arrangement of

H8/38104 Group

(FP-64A, FP-64E)

9 Newly added

Figure 1.9 Pad

Arrangement of

HCD64F38004 and

HCD64F38002 (Top

View)

16 Figure 1.9: Table amended

HCD64F38004

HCD64F38004C4

HCD64F38002

HCD64F38002C4

HD64F38004

Product Model Name Model Name on Chip

HD64F38004-4

HD64F38004

HD64F38004-4

1.4 Pin Functions 19 to 22 Table amended and notes amended

Power

source

pins

CVCC*453 — — — Input This is the internal step-down power

supply pin. To ensure stability, a

capacitor with a rating of about 0.1

µF should be connected between

this pin and the VSS pin.

Interrupt

pins IRQAEC 56 64 57 56 Input Asynchronous event counter

interrupt input pin. Enables

asynchronous event input.

On the H8/38104 Group, this must

be fixed at VCC or GND because the

oscillator is selected by the input

level during resets. Refer to section

4, Clock Pulse Generators, for

information on the selection method.

I/O ports P95 to

P90 54 to

49 62 to

57 55 to

50 54 to

49 Output 6-bit output port. When the on-chip

emulator is used, pin P95 is

unavailable to the user because it is

used exclusively by the on-chip

emulator. In the F-ZTAT version, pin

P95 should not be open but pulled

up to go high in user mode.

Note that the H8/38104 Group is not

equipped with a pin 94.

Vref 52 — — — Input Reference voltage input pin.

extD 62 — — — Input Power supply drop detection voltage

input pin.

Low-

voltage

detection

circuit

(LVD)*4extU 63 — — — Input Power supply rise detection voltage

input pin.

Note: 4. H8/38104 Group only

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xi of l

Item Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)

2.2 Address Space

and Memory Map

Figure 2.1(4)

H8/38004, H8/38104

Memory Map

Figure 2.1(5)

H8/38003, H8/38103

Memory Map

Figure 2.1(6)

H8/38002, H8/38102

Memory Map

Figure 2.1(7)

H8/38001, H8/38101

Memory Map

Figure 2.1(8)

H8/38000, H8/38100

Memory Map

27 to 31 Title amended

65 Table amended

P37 P36 P35 P34 P33 P32 P31 





Input/output Input Input Output Output Output Output Output 

2.9.4 Bit Manipulation

Instructions

Example 2:

After executing BSET Pin state Low

level High

level Low

level High

level 

PCR3 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1

PDR3 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

RAM0 100000 11

Section 3 Exception

Handling 69, 70 Note on HD64F38004 added

71 Table amended and note added

IRQ0/Low-voltage

detect interrupt*4 H'0008toH'0009

IRQ1 5 H'000A to H'000B

External interrupt

pin/Low-voltage

detect circuit

(LVD)*

IRQAEC 6 H'000C to H'000D

3.1 Exception Sources

and Vector Address

Table 3.1 Exception

Sources and Vector

Address

Note: *The low-voltage detection circuit and low-voltage detection

interrupt are implemented on the H8/38104 Group only.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xii of l

Item Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)

3.3 Reset Exception

Handling 78 Description added

When the RES pin goes low, all processing halts and this LSI enters the

reset. The internal state of the CPU and the registers of the on-chip

peripheral modules are initialized by the reset. To ensure that this LSI is

reset at power-on, hold the RES pin low until the clock pulse generator

output stabilizes. To reset the chip during operation, hold the RES pin

low for at least 10 system clock cycles. When the RES pin goes high

after being held low for the necessary time, this LSI starts reset

exception handling. The reset exception handling sequence is shown in

figure 3.1. The reset exception handling sequence is as follows.

However, refer to section 14.3.1, Power-On Reset Circuit, for

information on the reset sequence for the H8/38104 Group, which has a

built-in power-on reset function.

84 Table amended

IWPR IWPF7 When PMR5 bit WKP7 is changed from 0 to 1 while pin

WKP7 is low and WEGR bit WKEGS7 = 0.

When PMR5 bit WKP7 is changed from 1 to 0 while pin

WKP7 is low and WEGR bit WKEGS7 = 1.

IWPF6 When PMR5 bit WKP6 is changed from 0 to 1 while pin

WKP6 is low and WEGR bit WKEGS6 = 0.

When PMR5 bit WKP6 is changed from 1 to 0 while pin

WKP6 is low and WEGR bit WKEGS6 = 1.

3.5.3 Notes on

Rewriting Port Mode

Registers

Table 3.3 Conditions

under which Interrupt

Request Flag is Set to 1

IWPF5 When PMR5 bit WKP5 is changed from 0 to 1 while pin

WKP5 is low and WEGR bit WKEGS5 = 0.

When PMR5 bit WKP5 is changed from 1 to 0 while pin

WKP5 is low and WEGR bit WKEGS5 = 1.

IWPF4 When PMR5 bit WKP4 is changed from 0 to 1 while pin

WKP4 is low and WEGR bit WKEGS4 = 0.

When PMR5 bit WKP4 is changed from 1 to 0 while pin

WKP4 is low and WEGR bit WKEGS4 = 1.

IWPF3 When PMR5 bit WKP3 is changed from 0 to 1 while pin

WKP3 is low and WEGR bit WKEGS3 = 0.

When PMR5 bit WKP3 is changed from 1 to 0 while pin

WKP3 is low and WEGR bit WKEGS3 = 1.

IWPF2 When PMR5 bit WKP2 is changed from 0 to 1 while pin

WKP2 is low and WEGR bit WKEGS2 = 0.

When PMR5 bit WKP2 is changed from 1 to 0 while pin

WKP2 is low and WEGR bit WKEGS2 = 1.

IWPF1 When PMR5 bit WKP1 is changed from 0 to 1 while pin

WKP1 is low and WEGR bit WKEGS1 = 0.

When PMR5 bit WKP1 is changed from 1 to 0 while pin

WKP1 is low and WEGR bit WKEGS1 = 1.

IWPF0 When PMR5 bit WKP0 is changed from 0 to 1 while pin

WKP0 is low and WEGR bit WKEGS0 = 0.

When PMR5 bit WKP0 is changed from 1 to 0 while pin

WKP0 is low and WEGR bit WKEGS0 = 1.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xiii of l

Item Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)

4.1 Features

Figure 4.1 Block

Diagram of Clock Pulse

Generators (H8/3802,

H8/38004 Group)

Figure 4.2 Block

Diagram of Clock Pulse

Generators (H8/38104

Group)

87 Description added

Clock oscillator circuitry (CPG: clock pulse generator) is provided on-

chip, including both a system clock pulse generator and a subclock

pulse generator. In the H8/38104 Group, the system clock pulse

generator includes an on-chip oscillator. The system clock pulse

generator consists of a system clock oscillator and system clock

dividers. The subclock pulse generator consists of a subclock oscillator

and a subclock divider.

Figure 4.1 shows a block diagram of the clock pulse generators of the

H8/3802 and H8/38004 Group. Figure 4.2 shows a block diagram of the

clock pulse generators of the H8/38104 Group.

Figure 4.1: Title amended

Figure 4.2: Newly added

4.2 Register

Description 89 Newly added

4.3 System Clock

Generator 90 Description added

As shown in figure 4.2, the H8/38104 Group supports selection between

a system clock oscillator and an on-chip oscillator. See section 4.3.4,

on-chip oscillator selection method, for information on selecting the on-

chip oscillator.

90, 91 Description amended

Figure 4.4(1) shows a typical method of connecting a crystal oscillator to

the H8/3802 Group, and figure 4.4(2) shows a typical method of

connecting a crystal oscillator to the H8/38004 and H8/38104 Group.

Figure 4.4(1): Title amended

Figure 4.4(2): Newly added

Table 4.1: Table amended

Frequency (MHz) 4.10 4.193

4.3.1 Connecting

Crystal Resonator

Figure 4.4(1) Typical

Connection to Crystal

Resonator (H8/3802

Group)

Figure 4.4(2) Typical

Connection to Crystal

Resonator (H8/3804,

H8/38104 Group) RS(max) 100 Ω

C0(max) 16 pF

4.3.2 Connecting

Ceramic Resonator

Figure 4.6(1) Typical

Connection to Ceramic

Resonator (H8/3802

Group)

Figure 4.6(2) Typical

Connection to Ceramic

Resonator (H8/38004,

H8/38104 Group)

91, 92 Description amdended

Figure 4.6(1) shows a typical method of connecting a ceramic oscillator

to the H8/3802 Group, and figure 4.6(2) shows a typical method of

connecting a crystal oscillator to the H8/38004 and H8/38104 Group.

Figure 4.6(1): Title amended

Figure 4.6(2): Newly added.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xiv of l

Item Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)

4.3.4 On-chip

Oscillator Selection

Method (H8/38104

Group Only)

92 Newly added

4.4 Subclock

Generator 93 Description added

Figure 4.8 shows a block diagram of the subclock generator.

Note that on the H8/38104 Group the subclock oscillator can be

disabled by programs by setting the SUBSTP bit in the OSCCR

should be made in the active mode. When restoring operation of

the subclock oscillator after it has been disabled using the

OSCCR register, it is necessary to wait for the oscillation

stabilization time (typ = 8s) to elapse before using the subclock.

4.4.1 Connecting

32.768-kHz/38.4-kHz

Crystal Resonator

93 Description added

Clock pulses can be supplied to the subclock divider by connecting a

32.768-kHz or 38.4-kHz crystal resonator, as shown in figure 4.9. Figure

4.10 shows the equivalent circuit of the 32.768-kHz or 38.4-kHz crystal

resonator. Note that only operation at 32.768 kHz is guaranteed on the

H8/38104 Group.

4.4.3 External Clock

Input 94 Description added

Connect the external clock to pin X1 and leave pin X2 open, as shown

in figure 4.12. Note that input of an external clock is not supported on

the H8/38104 Group.

4.6.4 Notes on Use of

Crystal Resonator

(Excluding Ceramic

Resonator)

100 Description and note added

For example, if erroneous operation occurs with a standby time setting

of 16 states, check the operation with a standby time setting of 1,024*

states or more.

If the same kind of erroneous operation occurs after a reset as after a

state transition, hold the RES pin low for a longer period.

Note: *This figure applies to the H8/3802 and H8/38004 Groups. The

number of states on the H8/38104 Group is 8,192 or more.

4.6.5 Notes on

H8/38104 Group 100 Newly added

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xv of l

Item Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)

102 Bit table amended

5.1.1 System Control

STS2

STS1

STS0

R/W

Standby Timer Select 2 to 0

Designate the time the CPU and

peripheral modules wait for stable clock

operation after exiting from standby mode,

subactive mode, subsleep mode, or watch

mode to active mode or sleep mode due to

an interrupt. The designation should be

made according to the operating

frequency so that the waiting time is at

least equal to the oscillation stabilization

time. The relationship between the

specified value and the number of wait

states is shown in tables 5.1(1) and 5.1(2).

When an external clock is to be used, the

minimum value (STS2 = 1, STS1 = 0,

STS0 = 1) is recommended. 8,192 states

(STS2 = STS1 = STS0 = 0) is

recommended if the on-chip oscillator is

used on the H8/38104 Group. If the setting

other than the recommended value is

made, operation may start before the end

of the waiting time.

Table 5.1(1) Operating

Frequency and Waiting

Time (H8/3802 Group,

H8/38004 Group)

Table 5.1(2) Operating

Frequency and Waiting

Time (H8/38104 Group)

103, 104 Table 5.1(1): Title amended

Table 5.1(2): Newly added

Note amended

When the on-chip clock oscillator is used on the H8/38104

Group, a setting of 8,192 states (STS2 = STS1 = STS0 = 0) is

recommended.

105 Bit table amended5.1.3 Clock Halt

Registers 1 and 2

(CKSTPR1 and

CKSTPR2)

• CKSTPR2

7LVDCKSTP 1R/W LVD module standby

The LVD module enters standby

status when this bit is cleared to 0.

Note: On products other than the

H8/38104 Group, this bit is

reserved like bits 6 and 5.

6, 5 All 1 Reserved

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xvi of l

Item Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)

Table amended, notes amended

109,

110 WDT Function-

ing/reta-

ined*9

Function-

ing/reta-

ined*8

Function-

ing/reta-

ined*9

Function

ing/reta-

ined*10

5.2 Mode Transitions

and States of LSI

Table 5.3 Internal

State in Each Operating

Mode LVD Func-

tioning Func-

tioning

Notes: 8. On the H8/38104 Group, operates when φw/32 is selected

as the internal clock or the on-chip oscillator is selected;

otherwise stops and stands by. On the H8/38004 Group,

operates when φw/32 is selected as the internal clock;

otherwise stops and stands by.

9. On the H8/38104 Group, operates when φw/32 is selected

as the internal clock or the on-chip oscillator is selected;

otherwise stops and stands by. On the H8/38004 Group,

stops and stands by.

10. On the H8/38104 Group, operates only when the on-chip

oscillator is selected; otherwise stops and stands by. On the

H8/38004 Group, stops and stands by.

Section 6 ROM 119 Description amended

The H8/3802 has 16 kbytes of the on-chip mask ROM, the H8/3801 has

12 kbytes, and the H8/3800 has 8 kbytes. The H8/38004 and H8/38104

have 32 kbytes of the on-chip mask ROM, the H8/38003 and H8/38103

have 24 kbytes, the H8/38002 and H8/38102 have 16 kbytes, the

H8/38001 and H8/38101 have 12 kbytes, and the H8/38000 and

H8/38100 have 8 kbytes. The ROM is connected to the CPU by a 16-bit

data bus, allowing high-speed two-state access for both byte data and

word data. The H8/3802 has a ZTAT version with 16-kbyte PROM. The

H8/38004, H8/38002, H8/38104, and H8/38102 have F-ZTAT™

versions with 32-kbyte flash memory and 16-kbyte flash memory,

respectively.

6.5.1 Features 129 Description amended, note added

• Programming/erase methods

— The flash memory is programmed 128 bytes at a time. Erase is

performed in single-block units. The flash memory of the

HD64F38004 and HD64F38104 are configured as follows: 1 kbyte

×4 blocks and 28 kbytes ×1 block. The flash memory of the

HD64F38002 and HD64F38102 are configured as follows: 1 kbyte

×4 blocks and 12 kbytes ×1 block. To erase the entire flash

memory, each block must be erased in turn.

Note: The system clock oscillator must be used when programming or

erasing the flash memory of the HD64F38104, HD64F38102.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xvii of l

Item Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)

134 Bit table amended

6.6.3 Erase Block

Value R/W Description

4 EB4 0 R/W When this bit is set to 1, 28 kbytes of H'1000 to H'7FFF

will be erased in the HD64F38004 and HD64F38104.

When this bit is set to 1, 12 kbytes of H'1000 to H'3FFF

will be erased in the HD64F38002 and HD64F38102.

139 Table amended

Product Group Host Bit Rate Oscillation Frequency Range of LSI

(fOSC)

4,800 bps 8 to 10 MHz

2,400 bps 4 to 10 MHz

H8/38004F Group

1,200 bps 2 to 10 MHz

6.7.1 Boot Mode

Table 6.7 Oscillation

Frequencies for which

Automatic Adjustment

of SLI Bit Rate is

Possible (fosc)

H8/38104F Group 19,200 bps 16 MHz

9,600 bps 8to16MHz

4,800 bps 4to16MHz

2,400 bps 2to16MHz

1,200 bps 2to16MHz

6.7.3 Notes on On-

Board Programming 140 Newly added

6.8.1 Program/

Program-Verify

Figure 6.10

Program/Program-

Verify Flowchart

142 Figure amended

Yes

Verify data =

write data?

←

6.8.3 Interrupt

Handling when

Programming/Erasing

Flash Memory

Figure 6.11 Erase/

Erase-Verify Flowchart

145 Figure amended

Yes

Verify data = all 1s ?

ESU bit ← 0

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xviii of l

Item Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)

6.10.1 Socket Adapter 147 Description amended

The socket adapter converts the pin allocation of the HD64F38004,

HD64F38002, HD64F38104, and HD64F38102 to that of the discrete

flash memory HN28F101. The address of the on-chip flash memory is

H'0000 to H'7FFF. Figure 6.12(1) shows a socket-adapter-pin

correspondence diagram of the HD64F38004 and HD64F38002. Figure

6.12(2) shows a socket-adapter-pin correspondence of the

HD64F38104 and HD64F38102.

6.10.2 Programmer

Mode Commands

Figure 6.12(1) Socket

Adapter Pin

Correspondence

Diagram (H8/38004F,

H8/38002F)

Figure 6.12(2) Socket

Adapter Pin

Correspondence

Diagram (H8/38104F,

H8/38102F)

148, 149 Figure 6.12(1) Title amended

Figure 6.12(2) Newly added

Section 7 RAM 161 Table amended

H8/38004 1 kbyte H'FB80 to H'FF7FFlash memory

version H8/38002 1 kbyte H'FB80 to H'FF7F

H8/38104 1kbyte H'FB80 to H'FF7F

H8/38102 1kbyte H'FB80 to H'FF7F

H8/38104 1kbyte H'FB80 to H'FF7FMask ROM

version H8/38103 1kbyte H'FB80 to H'FF7F

H8/38102 1kbyte H'FB80 to H'FF7F

H8/38101 512 bytes H'FD80 to H'FF7F

H8/38100 512 bytes H'FD80 to H'FF7F

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xix of l

Item Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)

164 Table and notes amended

Section 8 I/O Ports

Table 8.1 Port

Functions Port 9 P95toP92

(P95, P92,

P93/Vref)*3

None

(LVD reference voltage

external input pin)*3(LVDSR)*3

•6-bitoutput-

only port

• High-voltage,

large-current

port*2P91, P90/

PWM2,

PWM1

10-bit PWM output PMR9

• High-voltage,

input port*4IRQAEC None

Port B • 4-bit input-

only port PB3/AN3/

IRQ1 A/D converter analog input

External interrupt 1 AMR

PMRB

PB2/AN2 A/D converter analog input AMR

PB1/AN1/

(extU)*5

PB0/AN0/

(extD)*5

A/D converter analog input

(LVD detection voltage

external input pin)*5

AMR

(LVDCR)*5

Notes: 1. Implemented on H8/3802 Group and H8/38104 Group only.

2. Implemented on H8/3802 Group only. Standard high-voltage port on

H8/38104 Group and H8/38004 Group.

3. Implemented on H8/38104 Group only. Pin 94 does not function on

H8/38104 Group.

4. Implemented on H8/3802 Group only. Input port on H8/38004 Group

and H8/38104 Group.

5. Implemented on H8/38104 Group only.

169 Table and note added8.1.5 Port Mode

This bit selects the input clock for the watchdog

timer.

Note that this bit is implemented differently on the

H8/38004 Group and on H8/38104 Group.

H8/38004 Group: 0: φ/8,192

1: φw/32

H8/38104 Group: 0: Clock specified by timer

mode register W (TMW)

1: φw/32

Note: This bit is reserved and only 0 can be

written in the H8/3802 Group.

Note: *See section 9.5, Watchdog Timer, for details.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xx of l

Item Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)

8.7 Port 9

Figure 8.8 Port 9 Pin

Configuration

188 Figure amended

P95

P94*1

P93/Vref*2

P92

P91/PWM2

P90/PWM1

Port 9

Notes: 1. There is no pin 94, and its function is not implemented, on the H8/38104 Group.

2. The Vref pin is implemented on the H8/38104 Group only.

188 Table amended8.7.1 Port Data

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7, 6 All 1 Reserved

The initial value should not be changed.

P95

P94*

P93

P92

P91

P90

R/W

If PDR9 is read, the values stored in

PDR9 are read.

Note: *There is no pin 94, and its function is not implemented, on the H8/38104

Group. However, the register is read/write enabled.

189 Bit 3 amended8.7.2 Port Mode

This bit turns on and off the P92 to P90

step-up circuit.

0: Step-up circuit of large-current port is

turned on

1: Step-up circuit of large-current port is

turned off

Note: This is a readable/writable reserved

bit in the H8/38004 Group and

H8/38104 Group.

8.7.3 Pin Functions 190 P93/Vref added

• P93/Vref

As shown below, switching is performed based on the setting of VCSS

in LVDSR. Note that this function is implemented on the H8/38104

Group only. The Vref pin is the input pin for the LVD’s external reference

voltage.

VCSS1 0 1

Pin Function P93 output pin Vref input pin

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xxi of l

Item Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)

8.9 Port B

Figure 8.10 Port B Pin

Configuration

192 Figure amended, note added

PB3/AN3/IRQ1

PB2/AN2

PB1/AN1/extU*

PB0/AN0/extD*

Port B

Note: * The extU and extD pins are implemented on the H8/38104 Group only.

8.9.3 Pin Functions 194 Bit table amended

• PB1/AN1extU •PB1/AN1/extU pin

Switching is accomplished by combining CH3 to CH0 in AMR and

VINTUSEL in LVDCR as shown below. Note that the extU pin and

VINTUSEL are implemented on the H8/38104 Group only.

VINTUSEL 0 1

CH3 to CH0 Other than B′0101 B'0101 *

Pin Function PB1 input pin AN1 input pin extU input

[Legend] *: Don't care

• PB0/AND/extD •PB0/AN0/extD pin

Switching is accomplished by combining CH3 to CH0 in AMR and

VINTDSEL in LVDCR as shown below. Note that the extD pin and

VINTDSEL are implemented on the H8/38104 Group only.

VINTDSEL 0 1

CH3 to CH0 Other than B′0100 B'0100 *

Pin Function PB0 input pin AN0 input pin extD input

[Legend] *: Don't care

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xxii of l

Item Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)

9.1 Overview 197 Description amended

The H8/3802 Group provides three timers: timer A, timer F, and

asynchronous event counter. The H8/38004 Group and H8/38104

Group provide four timers: timer A, timer F, asynchronous event

counter, and watchdog timer.

198 Table amended, note addedTable 9.1 Timer

Functions Watchdog

timer*φ/8192, φW/32 H8/38004

Group

Generates

a reset signal

by overflow of

8-bit counter φ/64 to φ/8192

φw/32

On-chip

oscillator

H8/38104

Group

Note: *The watchdog timer functions differently on the H8/38004 and

H8/38104 Group. See section 9.5, Watchdog Timer, for details.

225 Table amended

Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description

9.4.3 Register

Descriptions

Event Counter

Control/Status Register

(ECCSR): 6OVL 0 R/W

*Counter Overflow L

This is a status flag indicating

that ECL has overflowed.

[Setting condition]

When ECL overflows from H'FF

to H'00

[Clearing condition]

When this bit is written to 0

after reading OVL = 1

9.4.4 Operation

IRQAEC Operation: 229 Note added

Note: On the H8/38104 Group, control of switching between the

system clock oscillator and the on-chip oscillator during resets

should be performed by setting the IRQAEC input level. Refer to

section 4.4, Subclock Generator, for details.

9.5 Watchdog Timer 234 Description amended

However, as shown in watchdog timer block diagrams figure 9.12 (1)

and figure 9.12 (2), the implementation differs in the H8/38004 Group

and the H8/38104 Group.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xxiii of l

Item Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)

9.5.1 Features 234 Description added

• Selectable from two counter input clocks (H8/38004 Group).

Two clock sources (φ/8192 or φW/32) can be selected as the timer-

counter clock.

•On the H8/38104 Group, 10 internal clocks are available for selection.

Ten internal clocks (φ/64, φ/128, φ/256, φ/512, φ/1024, φ/2048, φ/4096,

φ/8192, φw/32, or on-chip oscillator) can be selected as the timer-

counter clock.

Figure 9.12(1) Block

Diagram of Watchdog

Time (H8/38004 Group)

Figure 9.12(2) Block

Diagram of Watchdog

Time (H8/38104 Group)

234,

235 Figure 9.12(1) Title amended

Figure 9.12(2) Newly added

9.5.2 Register

Descriptions 235 Description added

• Timer mode register W (TMW)*

Note: *This register is implemented on the H8/38104 Group only.

236,

237 Timer Control/Status Register W (TCSRW)

Table and notes added

Timer Control/Status

2WDON0/1*2R/(W)*1Watchdog Timer On

TCW starts counting up when WDON

is set to 1 and halts when WDON is

cleared to 0.

[Setting condition]

When1iswrittentotheWDONbit

while writing 0 to the B2WI bit when the

TCSRWE bit=1

[Clearing condition]

• Reset by RES pin*3

• When0iswrittentotheWDONbit

while writing 0 to the B2WI when the

TCSRWE bit=1

Notes: 2. Initial value 0 on H8/38004 Group and 1 on H8/38104

Group.

3. On reset, cleared to 0 on H8/38004 Group and set to 1 on

H8/38104 Group.

Timer Mode Register W

(TMW) 237 Timer Mode Register W (TMW)

Newly added

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xxiv of l

Item Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)

9.5.3 Operation 238 Description added

The watchdog timer is provided with an 8-bit counter. The input clock is

selected by the WDCKS bit in the port mode register 2 (PMR2)*:On the

H8/38004 Group, φ/8192 is selected when the WDCKS bit is cleared to

0, and φw/32 when set to 1. On the H8/38104 Group, the clock specified

by timer mode register W (TMW) is selected when WDCKS is cleared to

0, and φw/32 is selected when WDCKS is set to 1. If 1 is written to

WDON while writing 0 to B2WI when the TCSRWE bit in TCSRW is set

to 1, TCW begins counting up. (To operate the watchdog timer, two

write accesses to TCSRW are required. However, on the H8/38104

Group, TCW begins counting up even if no write access occurs,

because WDON is set to 1 when the reset is cleared.) When a clock

pulse is input after the TCW count value has reached H'FF, the

watchdog timer overflows and an internal reset signal is generated.

9.5.4 Operating States

of Watchdog Timer 239 Description amended

Tables 9.8(1) and 9.8(2) summarize the operating states of the

watchdog timer for the H8/38004 Group and H8/38104 Group,

respectively.

Table 9.8(1) Operating States of Watchdog Timer (H8/38004 Group)

Table 9.8(2) Operating

States of Watchdog

Timer (H8/38104

Group)

Table added

10.1 Features 241 Note added

Note: On the H8/38104 Group, the system clock generator must be

used when carrying out this function.

10.3.8 Bit Rate

Error (%) = × 100

B (bit rate obtained from n, N, OSC) – R (bit rate in left-hand column in table 10.2)

R (bit rate in left-hand column in table 10.2)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xxv of l

Item Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)

10.3.8 Bit Rate

Table 10.2 Examples

of BRR Settings for

Various Bit Rates

(Asynchronous

Mode)(1)

Table 10.2 Examples

of BRR Settings for

Various Bit Rates

(Asynchronous

Mode)(2)

251, 252 Table amended

OSC

32.8 kHz 38.4 kHz 2 MH z 2.4576 MH z

Bit Rate

(bit/s)nN

Error

(%) n N Error

(%)

110 —— — —— — 217–1.36 2 21 –0.83

150 —— — 0 3 0 2 12 0.16 3 3 0

200 —— — 02 0 29 –2.34 3 2 0

250 0 1 2.5 —— — 31 –2.34 0 153 –0.26

300 —— — 0 1 0 0 103 0.16 3 1 0

600 —— — 0 0 0 0 51 0.16 3 0 0

1200 —— 0 25 0.16 2 1 0

2400 12 0.16 2 0 0

4800 ———

—

07 0

9600 —— 03 0

19200 —— — 01 0

31250 0 0 0 —— —

38400 —— — 00 0

OSC

4 MHz 10 MHz 16 MHz

Bit Rate

(bit/s)

Error

(%) n N

Error

(%) n N

Error

(%)

110 3 8 –1.36 3 21 0.88 3 35 –1.36

150 2 25 0.16 3 15 1.73 3 25 0.16

200 3 4 –2.34 3 11 1.73 3 19 –2.34

250 2 15 –2.34 3 9 –2.34 3 15 –2.34

300 2 12 0.16 3 7 1.73 3 12 0.16

600 0 103 0.16 3 3 1.73 2 25 0.16

1200 0 51 0.16 3 1 1.73 2 12 0.16

2400 0 25 0.16 3 0 1.73 0 103 0.16

4800 0 12 0.16 2 1 1.73 0 51 0.16

9600 — — — 2 0 1.73 0 25 0.16

19200 — — — 0 7 1.73 0 12 0.16

31250 0 1 0 0 4 0 0 7 0

38400 — — — 0 3 1.73 — — —

Legend

No indication: Setting not possible.

— : A setting is available but error occurs

10.6.2 Multiprocessor

Serial Data Reception

Figure 10.17 Sample

Multiprocessor Serial

Reception Flowchart (1)

277 Figure amended

Yes

FER+OER = 1

RDRF = 1

Set MPIE bit in SCR3 to 1 [1]

[2]

Read OER and FER flags in SSR

Read RDRF flag in SSR [3]

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xxvi of l

Item Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)

10.8.10 Oscillator Use

with Serial

Communications

Interface 3 (H8/38104

Group only)

286 Newly added

Section 11 10-Bit

PWM 287 Description amended

This LSI has a two-channel 10-bit PWM. The PWM with a low-path filter

connected can be used as a D/A converter. Figure 11.1(1) shows a

block diagram of the 10-bit PWM of the H8/3802 Group and H8/38004

Group. Figure 11.1(2) shows a block diagram of the 10-bit PWM of the

H8/38104 Group.

11.1 Features

Figure 11.1(1) Block

Diagram of 10-Bit PWM

(H8/3802 Group,

H8/38004 Group)

Figure 11.1(2) Block

Diagram of 10-Bit PWM

(H8/38104 Group)

287, 288 Description added

On the H8/38104 Group it is possible to select between two types of

PWM output: pulse-division PWM and event counter PWM (PWM

incorporating AEC). (The H8/3802 Group and H8/38004 Group can only

produce 10-bit PWM output.) Refer to section 9.4, Asynchronous Event

Counter, for information on event counter PWM.

Figure 11.1(1) Title amended

Figure 11.1(2) Newly added

288 Table amended

Name Abbreviation I/O Function

11.2 Input/Output Pins

Table 11.1 Pin

Configuration 10-bit PWM

square-wave

output 1

PWM1 Output Channel 1: 10-bit PWM

waveform output pin/event

counter PWM output pin*

10-bit PWM

square-wave

output 2

PWM2 Output Channel 2: 10-bit PWM

waveform output pin/event

counter PWM output pin*

Note: *H8/38104 Group only

11.3.1 PWM Control

On the H8/3802 Group and H8/38004 Group, PWCR selects the

conversion period.

Bit descriptions for H8/38104 Group newly added

11.4.1 Operation 291 Description amended

2. Set the PWCR0 and PWCR1 bits in PWCR to select a conversion

period of either. On the H8/38104 Group, the output format is

selected using the PWCR2 bit. Refer to section 9.4, Asynchronous

Event Counter, for information on how to select event counter PWM

(PWM incorporating AEC), one of the two available output formats.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xxvii of l

Item Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)

12.1 Features 293 Description amended

Conversion time: at least 12.4 µs per channel (at 5 MHz operation)/

7.8 µs (at 8 MHz operation)*

Note: *H8/38104 Group only.

13.1 Features 305 Description added

• Removal of split-resistance can be controlled in software. Note that

this capability is implemented in the H8/38104 Group only.

Figure 13.1(1) Block

Diagram of LCD

Controller/Driver

(H8/3802 Group,

H8/38004 Group)

Figure 13.1(2) Block

Diagram of LCD

Controller/Driver

(H8/38104 Group)

306,

307 Figure 13.1(1) : Title amended

Figure 13.1(2) : Newly added

13.3.3 LCD Control

LCR2 controls switching between the A waveform and B waveform and

removal of split-resistance. Note that removal of split-resistance control

is only implemented on the H8/38104 Group.

Bit table amended

3to0

*CDS3

CDS2

CDS1

CDS0

All 0 R/W Removal of Split-Resistance Control

These bits control whether the split-

resistance is removed or connected.

CDS3 = 0, CDS2 = CDS1 = CDS0 =

1: Split-resistance removed

All other settings: Split-resistance

connected

Note: *Applies to H8/38104 Group only. On the H8/3802 Group or

H8/38004 Group, these bits are reserved like bit 4.

Section 14 Power-On

Reset and Low-Voltage

Detection Circuits

(H8/38104 Group Only)

323 to

334 Newly added

Section 15 Power

Supply Circuit

(H8/38104 Group Only)

335,

336 Newly added

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xxviii of l

Item Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)

338 Table and notes added

16.1 Register

Addresses (Address

Order) Low-voltage detection

control register*4LVDCR 8H'FF86 LVD 8 2

Low-voltage detection

status register*4LVDSR 8H'FF87 LVD 8 2

339 Low-voltage detection

counter*4LVDCNT 8H'FFC3 LVD 8 2

340 Oscillator control

Interrupt request

pts 82

Interrupt request

pts 82

Timer mode register

W*4TMW 8H'FFF8 WDT*28 2

Note: 4. H8/38104 Group only

16.2 Register Bits 341 Table and notes added

LVDCR*4LVDE —VINTDSEL VINTUSEL LVDSL LVDRE LVDDE LVDUE

LVDSR*4OVF — — — VREFSEL —LVDDF LVDUF

Low-voltage detect

circuit

342 LCR — PSW ACT DISP CKS3 CKS2 CKS1 CKS0

LCR2 LCDAB — — — CDS3*4CDS2*4CDS1*4CDS0*4

LVDCNT*4CNT7 CNT6 CNT5 CNT4 CNT3 CNT2 CNT1 CNT0 Low-voltage detect

circuit

PWCR2 — — — — — PWCR22*4PWCR21 PWCR20 10-bit PWM

PWDRU2 — — — — — — PWDRU21 PWDRU20

PWDRL2 PWDRL27 PWDRL26 PWDRL25 PWDRL24 PWDRL23 PWDRL22 PWDRL21 PWDRL20

PWCR1 — — — — — PWCR12*

PWCR11 PWCR10

PWDRU1 — — — — — — PWDRU11 PWDRU10

PWDRL1 PWDRL17 PWDRL16 PWDRL15 PWDRL14 PWDRL13 PWDRL12 PWDRL11 PWDRL10

343 OSCCR*4SUBSTP — — — — IRQAECF OSCF —CPG

TMW*4— — — — CKS3 CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 WDT*2

IWPR IWPF7 IWPF6 IWPF5 IWPF4 IWPF3 IWPF2 IWPF1 IWPF0

CKSTPR1 — — S32CKSTP ADCKSTP — TFCKSTP — TACKSTP SYSTEM

CKSTPR2 LVDCKSTP*4— — PW2CKSTP AECKSTP WDCKSTP PW1CKSTP LDCKSTP

Note: 4. H8/38104 Group only

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xxix of l

Item Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)

344 Table and notes added

16.3 Register States in

Each Operation Mode LVDCR*4Initialized — — — — — —

LVDSR*4Initialized — — — — — —

Low-voltage

detect circuit

345 LVDCNT*4Initialized — — — — — — Low-voltage

detect circuit

346 OSCCR*4Initialized — — — — — — CPG

TMW*4Initialized — — — — — — WDT*2

Note: 4. H8/38104 Group only

369 Table amended

VCC =2.2Vto

3.6 V

IOL =10.0mA

17.4.2 DC

Characteristics

Table 17.8 DC

Characteristics

Output low

voltage VOL P90 to

P95

VCC =1.8Vto

3.6 V

IOL =8.0mA

—— 0.5V

370 Active

mode

current

consump-

tion

IOPE1 VCC Active (high-

speed) mode

VCC =1.8V,

fOSC =2MHz

—0.4 — mA *1*3*4

Approx.

max. value =

1.1 ×Typ.

IOPE2 VCC Active

(medium-

speed) mode

VCC =1.8V,

fOSC =2MHz,

φOSC/128

—0.06 — mA *1*3*4

Approx.

max. value =

1.1 ×Typ.

371 Sleep

mode

current

consump-

tion

ISLEEP VCC VCC =1.8V,

fOSC =2MHz —0.16 — mA *1*3*4

Approx.

max. value =

1.1 ×Typ.

373 –IOH VCC =2.2Vto

3.6 V — — 2.0 mA

Allowable

output high

current

(per pin)

All

output

pins Other than

above — — 0.2

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xxx of l

Item Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)

17.5 Absolute

Maximum Ratings of

H8/38104 Group

384 Newly added

17.6 Electrical

Characteristics of

H8/38104 Group

385 to

408 Newly added

A.1 Instruction List

Table A.1 Instruction

Set

423 Notes amended

(4) The number of states required for execution is 4n + 9 (n = value of R4L). In the

H8/38004 Group and H8/38104 Group, the number of states required for execution is 4n + 8.

A.3 Number of

Execution States

Table A.3 Number of

States Required for

Execution

427 Note amended

Note: *Depends on which on-chip peripheral module is accessed.

See section 16.1, Register Addresses (Address Order).

Appendix D Product

Code Lineup

Table D.3 Product

Code Lineup of

H8/38104 Group

449 Newly added

Appendix E Package

Dimensions 451 Description amended

The package dimensions for the H8/38027 Group, H8/38004 Group,

and H8/38104 Group are shown in figure E.1 (FP-64A), figure E.2 (FP-

64E), and figure E.3 (DP-64S).

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xxxi of l

Contents

Section 1 Overview............................................................................................................. 1

1.1 Features............................................................................................................................. 1

1.2 Internal Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 4

1.3 Pin Arrangement...............................................................................................................7

1.4 Pin Functions .................................................................................................................... 19

Section 2 CPU ...................................................................................................................... 23

2.1 Features............................................................................................................................. 23

2.2 Address Space and Memory Map ..................................................................................... 24

2.3 Register Configuration...................................................................................................... 32

2.3.1 General Registers................................................................................................. 33

2.3.2 Program Counter (PC) ......................................................................................... 33

2.3.3 Condition Code Register (CCR) .......................................................................... 34

2.3.4 Initial Register Values.......................................................................................... 35

2.4 Data Formats..................................................................................................................... 35

2.4.1 General Register Data Formats............................................................................ 35

2.4.2 Memory Data Formats......................................................................................... 37

2.5 Instruction Set................................................................................................................... 38

2.5.1 Data Transfer Instructions.................................................................................... 40

2.5.2 Arithmetic Operations Instructions...................................................................... 42

2.5.3 Logic Operations Instructions.............................................................................. 43

2.5.4 Shift Instructions.................................................................................................. 43

2.5.5 Bit Manipulation Instructions .............................................................................. 45

2.5.6 Branch Instructions.............................................................................................. 48

2.5.7 System Control Instructions................................................................................. 50

2.5.8 Block Data Transfer Instructions......................................................................... 51

2.6 Addressing Modes and Effective Address ........................................................................ 52

2.6.1 Addressing Modes ............................................................................................... 52

2.6.2 Effective Address Calculation.............................................................................. 54

2.7 Basic Bus Cycle................................................................................................................58

2.7.1 Access to On-Chip Memory (RAM, ROM)......................................................... 58

2.7.2 On-Chip Peripheral Modules............................................................................... 59

2.8 CPU States........................................................................................................................ 61

2.9 Usage Notes...................................................................................................................... 62

2.9.1 Notes on Data Access to Empty Areas ................................................................ 62

2.9.2 Access to Internal I/O Registers........................................................................... 62

2.9.3 EEPMOV Instruction........................................................................................... 63

2.9.4 Bit Manipulation Instructions .............................................................................. 63

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xxxii of l

Section 3 Exception Handling......................................................................................... 69

3.1 Exception Sources and Vector Address............................................................................ 70

3.2 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 72

3.2.1 Interrupt Edge Select Register (IEGR) ................................................................ 72

3.2.2 Interrupt Enable Register 1 (IENR1)................................................................... 73

3.2.3 Interrupt Enable Register 2 (IENR2)................................................................... 74

3.2.4 Interrupt Request Register 1 (IRR1).................................................................... 75

3.2.5 Interrupt Request Register 2 (IRR2).................................................................... 76

3.2.6 Wakeup Interrupt Request Register (IWPR)........................................................ 77

3.2.7 Wakeup Edge Select Register (WEGR)............................................................... 77

3.3 Reset Exception Handling................................................................................................. 78

3.4 Interrupt Exception Handling............................................................................................ 78

3.4.1 External Interrupts ............................................................................................... 78

3.4.2 Internal Interrupts ................................................................................................ 79

3.4.3 Interrupt Handling Sequence ............................................................................... 80

3.4.4 Interrupt Response Time...................................................................................... 81

3.5 Usage Notes...................................................................................................................... 83

3.5.1 Interrupts after Reset............................................................................................ 83

3.5.2 Notes on Stack Area Use ..................................................................................... 83

3.5.3 Notes on Rewriting Port Mode Registers............................................................. 83

3.5.4 Interrupt Request Flag Clearing Method.............................................................. 85

Section 4 Clock Pulse Generators................................................................................... 87

4.1 Features............................................................................................................................. 87

4.2 Register Description..........................................................................................................89

4.3 System Clock Generator ................................................................................................... 90

4.3.1 Connecting Crystal Resonator ............................................................................. 90

4.3.2 Connecting Ceramic Resonator ........................................................................... 91

4.3.3 External Clock Input Method............................................................................... 92

4.3.4 On-Chip Oscillator Selection Method (H8/38104 Group Only).......................... 92

4.4 Subclock Generator........................................................................................................... 93

4.4.1 Connecting 32.768-kHz/38.4-kHz Crystal Resonator.......................................... 93

4.4.2 Pin Connection when Not Using Subclock.......................................................... 94

4.4.3 External Clock Input............................................................................................ 94

4.5 Prescalers.......................................................................................................................... 95

4.5.1 Prescaler S ........................................................................................................... 95

4.5.2 Prescaler W.......................................................................................................... 95

4.6 Usage Notes...................................................................................................................... 95

4.6.1 Note on Resonators.............................................................................................. 95

4.6.2 Notes on Board Design........................................................................................ 97

4.6.3 Definition of Oscillation Stabilization Standby Time.......................................... 98

4.6.4 Notes on Use of Crystal Resonator (Excluding Ceramic Resonator)................... 99

4.6.5 Notes on H8/38104 Group................................................................................... 100

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xxxiii of l

Section5 Power-DownModes........................................................................................ 101

5.1 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 102

5.1.1 System Control Register 1 (SYSCR1)................................................................. 102

5.1.2 System Control Register 2 (SYSCR2)................................................................. 104

5.1.3 Clock Halt Registers 1 and 2 (CKSTPR1 and CKSTPR2) .................................. 105

5.2 Mode Transitions and States of LSI.................................................................................. 106

5.2.1 Sleep Mode.......................................................................................................... 110

5.2.2 Standby Mode...................................................................................................... 111

5.2.3 Watch Mode......................................................................................................... 111

5.2.4 Subsleep Mode..................................................................................................... 112

5.2.5 Subactive Mode ................................................................................................... 112

5.2.6 Active (Medium-Speed) Mode ............................................................................ 113

5.3 Direct Transition............................................................................................................... 113

5.3.1 Direct Transition from Active (High-Speed) Mode to Active (Medium-Speed)

Mode.................................................................................................................... 114

5.3.2 Direct Transition from Active (Medium-Speed) Mode to Active (High-Speed)

Mode.................................................................................................................... 115

5.3.3 Direct Transition from Subactive Mode to Active (High-Speed) Mode.............. 115

5.3.4 Direct Transition from Subactive Mode to Active (Medium-Speed) Mode ........ 116

5.3.5 Notes on External Input Signal Changes before/after Direct Transition.............. 116

5.4 Module Standby Function................................................................................................. 117

5.5 Usage Notes...................................................................................................................... 117

5.5.1 Standby Mode Transition and Pin States ............................................................. 117

5.5.2 Notes on External Input Signal Changes before/after Standby Mode.................. 117

Section 6 ROM..................................................................................................................... 119

6.1 Block Diagram.................................................................................................................. 119

6.2 H8/3802 PROM Mode...................................................................................................... 120

6.2.1 Setting to PROM Mode ....................................................................................... 120

6.2.2 Socket Adapter Pin Arrangement and Memory Map........................................... 120

6.3 H8/3802 Programming...................................................................................................... 123

6.3.1 Writing and Verifying.......................................................................................... 123

6.3.2 Programming Precautions.................................................................................... 127

6.4 Reliability of Programmed Data ....................................................................................... 128

6.5 Overview of Flash Memory.............................................................................................. 129

6.5.1 Features................................................................................................................ 129

6.5.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 130

6.5.3 Block Configuration............................................................................................. 131

6.6 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 132

6.6.1 Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1)..................................................... 133

6.6.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2)..................................................... 134

6.6.3 Erase Block Register (EBR) ................................................................................ 134

6.6.4 Flash Memory Power Control Register (FLPWCR)............................................ 135

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xxxiv of l

6.6.5 Flash Memory Enable Register (FENR).............................................................. 135

6.7 On-Board Programming Modes........................................................................................ 136

6.7.1 Boot Mode........................................................................................................... 136

6.7.2 Programming/Erasing in User Program Mode..................................................... 139

6.7.3 Notes on On-Board Programming ....................................................................... 140

6.8 Flash Memory Programming/Erasing............................................................................... 141

6.8.1 Program/Program-Verify..................................................................................... 141

6.8.2 Erase/Erase-Verify............................................................................................... 144

6.8.3 Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory.......................... 144

6.9 Program/Erase Protection ................................................................................................. 146

6.9.1 Hardware Protection............................................................................................ 146

6.9.2 Software Protection.............................................................................................. 146

6.9.3 Error Protection.................................................................................................... 146

6.10 Programmer Mode............................................................................................................ 147

6.10.1 Socket Adapter..................................................................................................... 147

6.10.2 Programmer Mode Commands............................................................................ 147

6.10.3 Memory Read Mode............................................................................................ 150

6.10.4 Auto-Program Mode............................................................................................ 152

6.10.5 Auto-Erase Mode................................................................................................. 154

6.10.6 Status Read Mode................................................................................................ 156

6.10.7 Status Polling....................................................................................................... 157

6.10.8 Programmer Mode Transition Time .................................................................... 158

6.10.9 Notes on Memory Programming.......................................................................... 158

6.11 Power-Down States for Flash Memory............................................................................. 159

Section 7 RAM..................................................................................................................... 161

7.1 Block Diagram.................................................................................................................. 162

Section 8 I/O Ports.............................................................................................................. 163

8.1 Port 3................................................................................................................................. 165

8.1.1 Port Data Register 3 (PDR3)................................................................................ 166

8.1.2 Port Control Register 3 (PCR3)........................................................................... 166

8.1.3 Port Pull-Up Control Register 3 (PUCR3)........................................................... 167

8.1.4 Port Mode Register 3 (PMR3)............................................................................. 168

8.1.5 Port Mode Register 2 (PMR2)............................................................................. 169

8.1.6 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 170

8.1.7 Input Pull-Up MOS.............................................................................................. 171

8.2 Port 4................................................................................................................................. 172

8.2.1 Port Data Register 4 (PDR4)................................................................................ 172

8.2.2 Port Control Register 4 (PCR4)........................................................................... 173

8.2.3 Serial Port Control Register (SPCR).................................................................... 173

8.2.4 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 175

8.3 Port 5................................................................................................................................. 176

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xxxv of l

8.3.1 Port Data Register 5 (PDR5)................................................................................ 177

8.3.2 Port Control Register 5 (PCR5)........................................................................... 177

8.3.3 Port Pull-Up Control Register 5 (PUCR5)........................................................... 178

8.3.4 Port Mode Register 5 (PMR5)............................................................................. 178

8.3.5 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 179

8.3.6 Input Pull-Up MOS.............................................................................................. 180

8.4 Port 6................................................................................................................................. 180

8.4.1 Port Data Register 6 (PDR6)................................................................................ 181

8.4.2 Port Control Register 6 (PCR6)........................................................................... 181

8.4.3 Port Pull-Up Control Register 6 (PUCR6)........................................................... 182

8.4.4 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 182

8.4.5 Input Pull-Up MOS.............................................................................................. 183

8.5 Port 7................................................................................................................................. 184

8.5.1 Port Data Register 7 (PDR7)................................................................................ 184

8.5.2 Port Control Register 7 (PCR7)........................................................................... 185

8.5.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 185

8.6 Port 8................................................................................................................................. 186

8.6.1 Port Data Register 8 (PDR8)................................................................................ 187

8.6.2 Port Control Register 8 (PCR8)........................................................................... 187

8.6.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 187

8.7 Port 9................................................................................................................................. 188

8.7.1 Port Data Register 9 (PDR9)................................................................................ 188

8.7.2 Port Mode Register 9 (PMR9)............................................................................. 189

8.7.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 189

8.8 Port A................................................................................................................................ 190

8.8.1 Port Data Register A (PDRA).............................................................................. 190

8.8.2 Port Control Register A (PCRA).......................................................................... 191

8.8.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 191

8.9 Port B................................................................................................................................ 192

8.9.1 Port Data Register B (PDRB) .............................................................................. 193

8.9.2 Port Mode Register B (PMRB)............................................................................ 193

8.9.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 194

8.10 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 195

8.10.1 How to Handle Unused Pin.................................................................................. 195

Section 9 Timers.................................................................................................................. 197

9.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 197

9.2 Timer A............................................................................................................................. 199

9.2.1 Features................................................................................................................ 199

9.2.2 Register Descriptions........................................................................................... 200

9.2.3 Operation ............................................................................................................. 202

9.2.4 Timer A Operating States .................................................................................... 202

9.3 Timer F.............................................................................................................................. 203

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xxxvi of l

9.3.1 Features................................................................................................................ 203

9.3.2 Input/Output Pins................................................................................................. 204

9.3.3 Register Descriptions........................................................................................... 205

9.3.4 CPU Interface ...................................................................................................... 209

9.3.5 Operation ............................................................................................................. 211

9.3.6 Timer F Operating States..................................................................................... 214

9.3.7 Usage Notes......................................................................................................... 214

9.4 Asynchronous Event Counter (AEC)................................................................................ 218

9.4.1 Features................................................................................................................ 218

9.4.2 Input/Output Pins................................................................................................. 220

9.4.3 Register Descriptions........................................................................................... 220

9.4.4 Operation ............................................................................................................. 227

9.4.5 Operating States of Asynchronous Event Counter............................................... 232

9.4.6 Usage Notes......................................................................................................... 232

9.5 Watchdog Timer ............................................................................................................... 234

9.5.1 Features................................................................................................................ 234

9.5.2 Register Descriptions........................................................................................... 235

9.5.3 Operation ............................................................................................................. 238

9.5.4 Operating States of Watchdog Timer................................................................... 239

Section 10 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) .............................................. 241

10.1 Features............................................................................................................................. 241

10.2 Input/Output Pins.............................................................................................................. 243

10.3 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 243

10.3.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR) .............................................................................. 243

10.3.2 Receive Data Register (RDR).............................................................................. 243

10.3.3 Transmit Shift Register (TSR)............................................................................. 244

10.3.4 Transmit Data Register (TDR)............................................................................. 244

10.3.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR) ............................................................................... 244

10.3.6 Serial Control Register 3 (SCR3)......................................................................... 246

10.3.7 Serial Status Register (SSR) ................................................................................ 248

10.3.8 Bit Rate Register (BRR) ...................................................................................... 250

10.3.9 Serial Port Control Register (SPCR).................................................................... 255

10.4 Operation in Asynchronous Mode.................................................................................... 256

10.4.1 Clock.................................................................................................................... 257

10.4.2 SCI3 Initialization................................................................................................ 261

10.4.3 Data Transmission ............................................................................................... 262

10.4.4 Serial Data Reception .......................................................................................... 264

10.5 Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode........................................................................ 268

10.5.1 Clock.................................................................................................................... 268

10.5.2 SCI3 Initialization................................................................................................ 268

10.5.3 Serial Data Transmission..................................................................................... 269

10.5.4 Serial Data Reception (Clocked Synchronous Mode).......................................... 271

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xxxvii of l

10.5.5 Simultaneous Serial Data Transmission and Reception....................................... 273

10.6 Multiprocessor Communication Function......................................................................... 274

10.6.1 Multiprocessor Serial Data Transmission............................................................ 276

10.6.2 Multiprocessor Serial Data Reception ................................................................. 277

10.7 Interrupts........................................................................................................................... 280

10.8 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 282

10.8.1 Break Detection and Processing........................................................................... 282

10.8.2 Mark State and Break Sending............................................................................. 282

10.8.3 Receive Error Flags and Transmit Operations (Clocked Synchronous Mode

Only).................................................................................................................... 283

10.8.4 Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Asynchronous Mode 283

10.8.5 Note on Switching SCK32 Function.................................................................... 284

10.8.6 Relation between Writing to TDR and Bit TDRE ............................................... 285

10.8.7 Relation between RDR Reading and bit RDRF................................................... 285

10.8.8 Transmit and Receive Operations when Making State Transition....................... 286

10.8.9 Setting in Subactive or Subsleep Mode ............................................................... 286

10.8.10 Oscillator Use with Serial Communications Interface 3 (H8/38104 Group only) 286

Section 11 10-Bit PWM..................................................................................................... 287

11.1 Features............................................................................................................................. 287

11.2 Input/Output Pins.............................................................................................................. 288

11.3 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 289

11.3.1 PWM Control Register (PWCR).......................................................................... 289

11.3.2 PWM Data Registers U and L (PWDRU, PWDRL)............................................ 290

11.4 Operation........................................................................................................................... 291

11.4.1 Operation ............................................................................................................. 291

11.4.2 PWM Operating States......................................................................................... 292

Section 12 A/D Converter................................................................................................. 293

12.1 Features............................................................................................................................. 293

12.2 Input/Output Pins.............................................................................................................. 295

12.3 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 295

12.3.1 A/D Result Registers H and L (ADRRH and ADRRL)....................................... 295

12.3.2 A/D Mode Register (AMR) ................................................................................. 296

12.3.3 A/D Start Register (ADSR).................................................................................. 296

12.4 Operation........................................................................................................................... 297

12.4.1 A/D Conversion................................................................................................... 297

12.4.2 Operating States of A/D Converter...................................................................... 297

12.5 Example of Use................................................................................................................. 298

12.6 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions ............................................................................. 301

12.7 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 302

12.7.1 Permissible Signal Source Impedance ................................................................. 302

12.7.2 Influences on Absolute Accuracy ........................................................................ 302

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xxxviii of l

12.7.3 Usage Notes......................................................................................................... 303

Section 13 LCD Controller/Driver................................................................................. 305

13.1 Features............................................................................................................................. 305

13.2 Input/Output Pins.............................................................................................................. 308

13.3 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 309

13.3.1 LCD Port Control Register (LPCR)..................................................................... 309

13.3.2 LCD Control Register (LCR)............................................................................... 311

13.3.3 LCD Control Register 2 (LCR2).......................................................................... 313

13.4 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 314

13.4.1 Settings up to LCD Display................................................................................. 314

13.4.2 Relationship between LCD RAM and Display.................................................... 315

13.4.3 Operation in Power-Down Modes ....................................................................... 320

13.4.4 Boosting LCD Drive Power Supply..................................................................... 321

Section 14 Power-On Reset and Low-Voltage Detection Circuits

(H8/38104 Group Only)............................................................................... 323

14.1 Features............................................................................................................................. 323

14.2 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 325

14.2.1 Low-Voltage Detection Control Register (LVDCR)........................................... 325

14.2.2 Low-Voltage Detection Status Register (LVDSR).............................................. 326

14.2.3 Low-Voltage Detection Counter (LVDCNT)...................................................... 327

14.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 328

14.3.1 Power-On Reset Circuit....................................................................................... 328

14.3.2 Low-Voltage Detection Circuit............................................................................ 329

Section 15 Power Supply Circuit (H8/38104 Group Only) .................................... 335

15.1 When Using Internal Power Supply Step-Down Circuit................................................... 335

15.2 When Not Using Internal Power Supply Step-Down Circuit............................................ 336

Section 16 List of Registers.............................................................................................. 337

16.1 Register Addresses (Address Order)................................................................................. 338

16.2 Register Bits...................................................................................................................... 341

16.3 Register States in Each Operating Mode .......................................................................... 344

Section 17 Electrical Characteristics ............................................................................. 347

17.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings of H8/3802 Group............................................................... 347

17.2 Electrical Characteristics of H8/3802 Group.................................................................... 348

17.2.1 Power Supply Voltage and Operating Ranges..................................................... 348

17.2.2 DC Characteristics............................................................................................... 351

17.2.3 AC Characteristics............................................................................................... 358

17.2.4 A/D Converter Characteristics............................................................................. 360

17.2.5 LCD Characteristics............................................................................................. 362

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xxxix of l

17.3 Absolute Maximum Ratings of H8/38004 Group............................................................. 363

17.4 Electrical Characteristics of H8/38004 Group .................................................................. 364

17.4.1 Power Supply Voltage and Operating Ranges..................................................... 364

17.4.2 DC Characteristics............................................................................................... 368

17.4.3 AC Characteristics............................................................................................... 375

17.4.4 A/D Converter Characteristics............................................................................. 379

17.4.5 LCD Characteristics............................................................................................. 381

17.4.6 Flash Memory Characteristics.............................................................................. 382

17.5 Absolute Maximum Ratings of H8/38104 Group............................................................. 384

17.6 Electrical Characteristics of H8/38104 Group .................................................................. 385

17.6.1 Power Supply Voltage and Operating Ranges..................................................... 385

17.6.2 DC Characteristics............................................................................................... 389

17.6.3 AC Characteristics............................................................................................... 398

17.6.4 A/D Converter Characteristics............................................................................. 400

17.6.5 LCD Characteristics............................................................................................. 401

17.6.6 Flash Memory Characteristics.............................................................................. 402

17.6.7 Power Supply Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics (Preliminary).............. 404

17.6.8 Power-On Reset Circuit Characteristics (Preliminary)........................................ 407

17.6.9 Watchdog Timer Characteristics.......................................................................... 408

17.7 Operation Timing.............................................................................................................. 408

17.8 Output Load Condition ..................................................................................................... 409

17.9 Resonator Equivalent Circuit............................................................................................ 410

17.10 Usage Note........................................................................................................................ 411

Appendix A Instruction Set.............................................................................................. 413

A.1 Instruction List.................................................................................................................. 413

A.2 Operation Code Map......................................................................................................... 424

A.3 Number of Execution States.............................................................................................. 426

Appendix B I/O Port Block Diagrams........................................................................... 433

B.1 Port 3 Block Diagrams...................................................................................................... 433

B.2 Port 4 Block Diagrams...................................................................................................... 435

B.3 Port 5 Block Diagram ....................................................................................................... 439

B.4 Port 6 Block Diagram ....................................................................................................... 440

B.5 Port 7 Block Diagram ....................................................................................................... 441

B.6 Port 8 Block Diagram ....................................................................................................... 442

B.7 Port 9 Block Diagrams...................................................................................................... 442

B.8 Port A Block Diagram....................................................................................................... 443

B.9 Port B Block Diagram....................................................................................................... 444

Appendix C Port States in Each Operating State ....................................................... 445

Appendix D Product Code Lineup ................................................................................. 446

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xl of l

Appendix E Package Dimensions................................................................................... 451

Appendix F Chip Form Specifications.......................................................................... 454

Appendix G Bonding Pad Form...................................................................................... 456

Appendix H Chip Tray Specifications .......................................................................... 457

Index.......................................................................................................................................... 461

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xli of l

Figures

Section 1 Overview

Figure 1.1 Internal Block Diagram of H8/3802 Group ....................................................... 4

Figure 1.2 Internal Block Diagram of H8/38004 Group ..................................................... 5

Figure 1.3 Internal Block Diagram of H8/38104 Group ..................................................... 6

Figure 1.4 Pin Arrangement of H8/3802 and H8/38004 Group (FP-64A, FP-64E)............ 7

Figure 1.5 Pin Arrangement of H8/3802 Group (DP-64S).................................................. 8

Figure 1.6 Pin Arrangement of H8/38104 Group (FP-64A, FP-64E) ................................. 9

Figure 1.7 Pad Arrangement of HCD6433802, HCD6433801, and HCD6433800

(Top View)......................................................................................................... 10

Figure 1.8 Pad Arrangement of HCD64338004, HCD64338003, HCD64338002,

HCD64338001, and HCD64338000 (Top View) .............................................. 13

Figure 1.9 Pad Arrangement of HCD64F38004 and HCD64F38002 (Top View).............. 16

Section 2 CPU

Figure 2.1(1) H8/3802 Memory Map ...................................................................................... 24

Figure 2.1(2) H8/3801 Memory Map ...................................................................................... 25

Figure 2.1(3) H8/3800 Memory Map ...................................................................................... 26

Figure 2.1(4) H8/38004, H8/38104 Memory Map................................................................... 27

Figure 2.1(5) H8/38003, H8/38103 Memory Map................................................................... 28

Figure 2.1(6) H8/38002, H8/38102 Memory Map................................................................... 29

Figure 2.1(7) H8/38001, H8/38101 Memory Map................................................................... 30

Figure 2.1(8) H8/38000, H8/38100 Memory Map................................................................... 31

Figure 2.2 CPU Registers.................................................................................................... 32

Figure 2.3 Stack Pointer...................................................................................................... 33

Figure 2.4 General Register Data Formats.......................................................................... 36

Figure 2.5 Memory Data Formats....................................................................................... 37

Figure 2.6 Instruction Formats of Data Transfer Instructions............................................. 41

Figure 2.7 Instruction Formats of Arithmetic, Logic, and Shift Instructions...................... 44

Figure 2.8 Instruction Formats of Bit Manipulation Instructions........................................ 47

Figure 2.9 Instruction Formats of Branch Instructions........................................................ 49

Figure 2.10 Instruction Formats of System Control Instructions .......................................... 50

Figure 2.11 Instruction Format of Block Data Transfer Instructions.................................... 51

Figure 2.12 On-Chip Memory Access Cycle ........................................................................ 58

Figure 2.13 On-Chip Peripheral Module Access Cycle (2-State Access)............................. 59

Figure 2.14 On-Chip Peripheral Module Access Cycle (3-State Access)............................. 60

Figure 2.15 CPU Operation States ........................................................................................ 61

Figure 2.16 State Transitions................................................................................................. 62

Figure 2.17 Example of Timer Configuration with Two Registers Allocated to Same

Address .............................................................................................................. 63

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xlii of l

Section 3 Exception Handling

Figure 3.1 Reset Sequence.................................................................................................. 79

Figure 3.2 Stack Status after Exception Handling............................................................... 81

Figure 3.3 Interrupt Sequence............................................................................................. 82

Figure 3.4 Port Mode Register Setting and Interrupt Request Flag Clearing Procedure..... 85

Section 4 Clock Pulse Generators

Figure 4.1 Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generators (H8/3802, H8/38004 Group).......... 87

Figure 4.2 Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generators (H8/38104 Group) ......................... 88

Figure 4.3 Block Diagram of System Clock Generator....................................................... 90

Figure 4.4(1) Typical Connection to Crystal Resonator (H8/3802 Group) ............................. 90

Figure 4.4(2) Typical Connection to Crystal Resonator (H8/38004, H8/38104 Group).......... 91

Figure 4.5 Equivalent Circuit of Crystal Resonator............................................................ 91

Figure 4.6(1) Typical Connection to Ceramic Resonator (H8/3802 Group) ........................... 91

Figure 4.6(2) Typical Connection to Ceramic Resonator (H8/38004, H8/38104 Group)........ 92

Figure 4.7 Example of External Clock Input....................................................................... 92

Figure 4.8 Block Diagram of Subclock Generator.............................................................. 93

Figure 4.9 Typical Connection to 32.768-kHz/38.4-kHz Crystal Resonator ...................... 93

Figure 4.10 Equivalent Circuit of 32.768-kHz/38.4-kHz Crystal Resonator ........................ 94

Figure 4.11 Pin Connection when Not Using Subclock........................................................ 94

Figure 4.12 Pin Connection when Inputting External Clock................................................. 94

Figure 4.13 Example of Crystal and Ceramic Resonator Arrangement................................ 96

Figure 4.14 Negative Resistor Measurement and Proposed Changes in Circuit................... 97

Figure 4.15 Example of Incorrect Board Design................................................................... 97

Figure 4.16 Oscillation Stabilization Standby Time ............................................................. 98

Section 5 Power-Down Modes

Figure 5.1 Mode Transition Diagram.................................................................................. 107

Figure 5.2 Standby Mode Transition and Pin States ........................................................... 117

Figure 5.3 External Input Signal Capture when Signal Changes before/after Standby Mode

or Watch Mode .................................................................................................. 118

Section 6 ROM

Figure 6.1 Block Diagram of ROM (H8/3802)................................................................... 119

Figure 6.2 Socket Adapter Pin Correspondence (with HN27C101).................................... 121

Figure 6.3 H8/3802 Memory Map in PROM Mode............................................................ 122

Figure 6.4 High-Speed, High-Reliability Programming Flowchart .................................... 124

Figure 6.5 PROM Write/Verify Timing.............................................................................. 127

Figure 6.6 Recommended Screening Procedure ................................................................. 128

Figure 6.7 Block Diagram of Flash Memory ...................................................................... 130

Figure 6.8(1) Block Configuration of 32-kbyte Flash Memory............................................... 131

Figure 6.8(2) Block Configuration of 16-kbyte Flash Memory............................................... 132

Figure 6.9 Programming/Erasing Flowchart Example in User Program Mode .................. 140

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xliii of l

Figure 6.10 Program/Program-Verify Flowchart.................................................................. 142

Figure 6.11 Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart............................................................................ 145

Figure 6.12(1) Socket Adapter Pin Correspondence Diagram (H8/38004F, H8/38002F)......... 148

Figure 6.12(2) Socket Adapter Pin Correspondence Diagram (H8/38104F, H8/38102F)......... 149

Figure 6.13 Timing Waveforms for Memory Read after Command Write........................... 150

Figure 6.14 Timing Waveforms in Transition from Memory Read Mode to Another Mode 151

Figure 6.15 Timing Waveforms in CE and OE Enable State Read....................................... 152

Figure 6.16 Timing Waveforms in CE and OE Clock System Read..................................... 152

Figure 6.17 Timing Waveforms in Auto-Program Mode...................................................... 154

Figure 6.18 Timing Waveforms in Auto-Erase Mode........................................................... 155

Figure 6.19 Timing Waveforms in Status Read Mode.......................................................... 156

Figure 6.20 Oscillation Stabilization Time, Boot Program Transfer Time, and Power-Down

Sequence............................................................................................................ 158

Section 7 RAM

Figure 7.1 Block Diagram of RAM (H8/3802)................................................................... 162

Section 8 I/O Ports

Figure 8.1 Port 3 Pin Configuration.................................................................................... 165

Figure 8.2 Port 4 Pin Configuration.................................................................................... 172

Figure 8.3 Input/Output Data Inversion Function............................................................... 173

Figure 8.4 Port 5 Pin Configuration.................................................................................... 176

Figure 8.5 Port 6 Pin Configuration.................................................................................... 180

Figure 8.6 Port 7 Pin Configuration.................................................................................... 184

Figure 8.7 Port 8 Pin Configuration.................................................................................... 186

Figure 8.8 Port 9 Pin Configuration.................................................................................... 188

Figure 8.9 Port A Pin Configuration ................................................................................... 190

Figure 8.10 Port B Pin Configuration.................................................................................... 192

Section 9 Timers

Figure 9.1 Block Diagram of Timer A................................................................................ 200

Figure 9.2 Block Diagram of Timer F................................................................................. 204

Figure 9.3 Write Access to TCF (CPU →TCF)................................................................. 210

Figure 9.4 Read Access to TCF (TCF →CPU).................................................................. 211

Figure 9.5 TMOFH/TMOFL Output Timing...................................................................... 213

Figure 9.6 Clear Interrupt Request Flag when Interrupt Source Generation Signal is Valid217

Figure 9.7 Block Diagram of Asynchronous Event Counter............................................... 219

Figure 9.8 Example of Software Processing when Using ECH and ECL as 16-Bit Event

Counter............................................................................................................... 228

Figure 9.9 Example of Software Processing when Using ECH and ECL as 8-Bit Event

Counters............................................................................................................. 229

Figure 9.10 Event Counter Operation Waveform ................................................................. 230

Figure 9.11 Example of Clock Control Operation ................................................................ 231

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xliv of l

Figure 9.12(1) Block Diagram of Watchdog Timer (H8/38004 Group).................................... 234

Figure 9.12(2) Block Diagram of Watchdog Timer (H8/38104 Group).................................... 235

Figure 9.13 Example of Watchdog Timer Operation............................................................ 238

Section 10 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)

Figure 10.1 Block Diagram of SCI3 ..................................................................................... 242

Figure 10.2 Data Format in Asynchronous Communication................................................. 256

Figure 10.3 Relationship between Output Clock and Transfer Data Phase

(Asynchronous Mode) (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, Two Stop Bits)........ 257

Figure 10.4 Sample SCI3 Initialization Flowchart................................................................ 261

Figure 10.5 Example SCI3 Operation in Transmission in Asynchronous Mode

(8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit)...................................................................... 262

Figure 10.6 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart (Asynchronous Mode)......................... 263

Figure 10.7 Example SCI3 Operation in Reception in Asynchronous Mode

(8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit)...................................................................... 265

Figure 10.8 Sample Serial Data Reception Flowchart (Asynchronous Mode) (1)................ 266

Figure 10.8 Sample Serial Data Reception Flowchart (Asynchronous Mode) (2)................ 267

Figure 10.9 Data Format in Clocked Synchronous Communication..................................... 268

Figure 10.10 Example of SCI3 Operation in Transmission in Clocked Synchronous Mode.. 269

Figure 10.11 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart (Clocked Synchronous Mode)............. 270

Figure 10.12 Example of SCI3 Reception Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode ........... 271

Figure 10.13 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart (Clocked Synchronous Mode).................. 272

Figure 10.14 Sample Flowchart of Simultaneous Serial Transmit and Receive Operations

(Clocked Synchronous Mode) ........................................................................... 273

Figure 10.15 Example of Communication Using Multiprocessor Format

(Transmission of Data H’AA to Receiving Station A) ...................................... 275

Figure 10.16 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Transmission Flowchart..................................... 276

Figure 10.17 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (1).................................... 277

Figure 10.17 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (2).................................... 278

Figure 10.18 Example of SCI3 Operation in Reception Using Multiprocessor Format

(Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit).......................... 279

Figure 10.19(a) RDRF Setting and RXI Interrupt....................................................................... 281

Figure 10.19(b) TDRE Setting and TXI Interrupt ....................................................................... 282

Figure 10.19(c) TEND Setting and TEI Interrupt........................................................................ 282

Figure 10.20 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode................................... 284

Figure 10.21 Relation between RDR Read Timing and Data ................................................. 285

Section 11 10-Bit PWM

Figure 11.1(1) Block Diagram of 10-Bit PWM (H8/3802 Group, H8/38004 Group)............... 287

Figure 11.1(2) Block Diagram of 10-Bit PWM (H8/38104 Group).......................................... 288

Figure 11.2 Waveform Output by 10-Bit PWM.................................................................... 291

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xlv of l

Section 12 A/D Converter

Figure 12.1 Block Diagram of A/D Converter...................................................................... 294

Figure 12.2 Example of A/D Conversion Operation............................................................. 299

Figure 12.3 Flowchart of Procedure for Using A/D Converter (Polling by Software).......... 300

Figure 12.4 Flowchart of Procedure for Using A/D Converter (Interrupts Used)................. 300

Figure 12.5 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions (1) ........................................................ 301

Figure 12.6 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions (2) ........................................................ 302

Figure 12.7 Example of Analog Input Circuit....................................................................... 303

Section 13 LCD Controller/Driver

Figure 13.1(1) Block Diagram of LCD Controller/Driver (H8/3802 Group, H8/38004 Group) 306

Figure 13.1(2) Block Diagram of LCD Controller/Driver (H8/38104 Group).......................... 307

Figure 13.2 Handling of LCD Drive Power Supply when Using 1/2 Duty........................... 314

Figure 13.3 LCD RAM Map (1/4 Duty) ............................................................................... 315

Figure 13.4 LCD RAM Map (1/3 Duty) ............................................................................... 316

Figure 13.5 LCD RAM Map (1/2 Duty) ............................................................................... 316

Figure 13.6 LCD RAM Map (Static Mode).......................................................................... 317

Figure 13.7 Output Waveforms for Each Duty Cycle (A Waveform)................................... 318

Figure 13.8 Output Waveforms for Each Duty Cycle (B Waveform)................................... 319

Figure 13.9 Connection of External Split-Resistance............................................................ 321

Section 14 Power-On Reset and Low-Voltage Detection Circuits (H8/38104 Group Only)

Figure 14.1 Block Diagram of Power-On Reset Circuit and Low-Voltage Detection Circuit324

Figure 14.2 Operational Timing of Power-On Reset Circuit ................................................ 328

Figure 14.3 Operational Timing of LVDR Circuit................................................................ 329

Figure 14.4 Operational Timing of LVDI Circuit................................................................. 330

Figure 14.5 Operational Timing of Low-Voltage Detection Interrupt Circuit

(Using Pins Vref, extD, and extU)..................................................................... 331

Figure 14.6 LVD Function Usage Example Employing Pins Vref, extD, and extU ............. 332

Figure 14.7 Timing for Operation/Release of Low-Voltage Detection Circuit..................... 334

Section 15 Power Supply Circuit (H8/38104 Group Only)

Figure 15.1 Power Supply Connection when Internal Step-Down Circuit is Used............... 335

Figure 15.2 Power Supply Connection when Internal Step-Down Circuit is Not Used........ 336

Section 17 Electrical Characteristics

Figure 17.1 Clock Input Timing............................................................................................ 408

Figure 17.2 RES Low Width Timing.................................................................................... 408

Figure 17.3 Input Timing ...................................................................................................... 408

Figure 17.4 SCK3 Input Clock Timing................................................................................. 409

Figure 17.5 SCI3 Input/Output Timing in Clocked Synchronous Mode............................... 409

Figure 17.6 Output Load Circuit........................................................................................... 409

Figure 17.7 Resonator Equivalent Circuit............................................................................. 410

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xlvi of l

Figure 17.8 Resonator Equivalent Circuit............................................................................. 410

Appendices

Figure B.1(a) Port 3 Block Diagram (Pins P37 and P36)......................................................... 433

Figure B.1(b) Port 3 Block Diagram (Pin P35)........................................................................ 434

Figure B.1(c) Port 3 Block Diagram (Pins P34 and P33)......................................................... 434

Figure B.1(d) Port 3 Block Diagram (Pins P32 and P31)......................................................... 435

Figure B.2(a) Port 4 Block Diagram (Pin P43)........................................................................ 435

Figure B.2(b) Port 4 Block Diagram (Pin P42)........................................................................ 436

Figure B.2(c) Port 4 Block Diagram (Pin P41)........................................................................ 437

Figure B.2(d) Port 4 Block Diagram (Pin P40)........................................................................ 438

Figure B.3 Port 5 Block Diagram........................................................................................ 439

Figure B.4 Port 6 Block Diagram........................................................................................ 440

Figure B.5 Port 7 Block Diagram........................................................................................ 441

Figure B.6 Port 8 Block Diagram (Pin P80)........................................................................ 442

Figure B.7(a) Port 9 Block Diagram (Pins P91 and P90)......................................................... 442

Figure B.7(b) Port 9 Block Diagram (Pins P95 to P92) ........................................................... 443

Figure B.8 Port A Block Diagram ....................................................................................... 443

Figure B.9 Port B Block Diagram........................................................................................ 444

Figure E.1 Package Dimensions (FP-64A).......................................................................... 451

Figure E.2 Package Dimensions (FP-64E) .......................................................................... 452

Figure E.3 Package Dimensions (DP-64S).......................................................................... 453

Figure F.1 Cross-Sectional View of Chip (HCD6433802, HCD6433801,

and HCD6433800)............................................................................................. 454

Figure F.2 Cross-Sectional View of Chip (HCD64338004, HCD64338003,

HCD64338002, HCD64338001, and HCD64338000) ...................................... 454

Figure F.3 Cross-Sectional View of Chip (HCD64F38004 and HCD64F38002)............... 455

Figure G.1 Bonding Pad Form (HCD6433802, HCD6433801, HCD6433800,

HCD64338004, HCD64338003, HCD64338002, HCD64338001,

HCD64338000, HCD64F38004, and HCD64F38002)...................................... 456

Figure H.1 Chip Tray Specifications (HCD6433802, HCD6433801, and HCD6433800) .. 457

Figure H.2 Chip Tray Specifications (HCD64338004, HCD64338003, HCD64338002,

HCD64338001, and HCD64338000)................................................................. 458

Figure H.3 Chip Tray Specifications (HCD64F38004 and HCD64F38002)....................... 459

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xlvii of l

Tables

Section 1 Overview

Table 1.1 Pad Coordinate of HCD6433802, HCD6433801, and HCD6433800 .................... 11

Table 1.2 Pad Coordinate of HCD64338004, HCD64338003, HCD64338002,

HCD64338001, and HCD64338000 ...................................................................... 14

Table 1.3 Pad Coordinate of HCD64F38004 and HCD64F38002......................................... 17

Table 1.4 Pin Functions.......................................................................................................... 19

Section 2 CPU

Table 2.1 Instruction Set ........................................................................................................ 38

Table 2.2 Operation Notation................................................................................................. 39

Table 2.3 Data Transfer Instructions...................................................................................... 40

Table 2.4 Arithmetic Operations Instructions ........................................................................ 42

Table 2.5 Logic Operations Instructions ................................................................................ 43

Table 2.6 Shift Instructions .................................................................................................... 43

Table 2.7 Bit Manipulation Instructions (1)........................................................................... 45

Table 2.7 Bit Manipulation Instructions (2)........................................................................... 46

Table 2.8 Branch Instructions................................................................................................. 48

Table 2.9 System Control Instructions................................................................................... 50

Table 2.10 Block Data Transfer Instructions............................................................................ 51

Table 2.11 Addressing Modes.................................................................................................. 52

Table 2.12 Effective Address Calculation................................................................................ 55

Table 2.13 Registers with Shared Addresses............................................................................ 68

Table 2.14 Registers with Write-Only Bits .............................................................................. 68

Section 3 Exception Handling

Table 3.1 Exception Sources and Vector Address.................................................................. 71

Table 3.2 Interrupt Wait States............................................................................................... 81

Table 3.3 Conditions under which Interrupt Request Flag is Set to 1.................................... 83

Section 4 Clock Pulse Generators

Table 4.1 Crystal Resonator Parameters................................................................................. 91

Table 4.2 System Clock Oscillator and On-Chip Oscillator Selection Methods.................... 93

Section 5 Power-Down Modes

Table 5.1(1) Operating Frequency and Waiting Time (H8/3802 Group, H8/38004 Group) ...... 103

Table 5.1(2) Operating Frequency and Waiting Time (H8/38104 Group).................................. 103

Table 5.2 Transition Mode after SLEEP Instruction Execution and Interrupt Handling........ 108

Table 5.3 Internal State in Each Operating Mode .................................................................. 109

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xlviii of l

Section 6 ROM

Table 6.1 Setting to PROM Mode.......................................................................................... 120

Table 6.2 Mode Selection in PROM Mode (H8/3802) .......................................................... 123

Table 6.3 DC Characteristics.................................................................................................. 125

Table 6.4 AC Characteristics.................................................................................................. 126

Table 6.5 Setting Programming Modes.................................................................................. 136

Table 6.6 Boot Mode Operation............................................................................................. 138

Table 6.7 Oscillation Frequencies for which Automatic Adjustment of LSI Bit Rate is

Possible (fOSC) ........................................................................................................ 139

Table 6.8 Reprogram Data Computation Table ..................................................................... 143

Table 6.9 Additional-Program Data Computation Table ....................................................... 143

Table 6.10 Programming Time ................................................................................................ 143

Table 6.11 Command Sequence in Programmer Mode............................................................ 147

Table 6.12 AC Characteristics in Transition to Memory Read Mode...................................... 150

Table 6.13 AC Characteristics in Transition from Memory Read Mode to Another Mode..... 151

Table 6.14 AC Characteristics in Memory Read Mode ........................................................... 151

Table 6.15 AC Characteristics in Auto-Program Mode ........................................................... 153

Table 6.16 AC Characteristics in Auto-Erase Mode................................................................ 155

Table 6.17 AC Characteristics in Status Read Mode ............................................................... 156

Table 6.18 Return Codes in Status Read Mode........................................................................ 157

Table 6.19 Status Polling Output ............................................................................................. 157

Table 6.20 Stipulated Transition Times to Command Wait State............................................ 158

Table 6.21 Flash Memory Operating States............................................................................. 159

Section 8 I/O Ports

Table 8.1 Port Functions ........................................................................................................ 163

Section 9 Timers

Table 9.1 Timer Functions ..................................................................................................... 198

Table 9.2 Timer A Operating States....................................................................................... 202

Table 9.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................... 204

Table 9.4 Timer F Operating States ....................................................................................... 214

Table 9.5 Pin Configuration................................................................................................... 220

Table 9.6 Examples of Event Counter PWM Operation........................................................ 231

Table 9.7 Operating States of Asynchronous Event Counter................................................. 232

Table 9.8(1) Operating States of Watchdog Timer (H8/38004 Group)...................................... 239

Table 9.8(2) Operating States of Watchdog Timer (H8/38104 Group)...................................... 239

Section 10 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)

Table 10.1 Pin Configuration................................................................................................... 243

Table 10.2 Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (1)........ 251

Table 10.2 Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (2)........ 252

Table 10.3 Relation between n and Clock................................................................................ 252

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page xlix of l

Table 10.4 Maximum Bit Rate for Each Frequency (Asynchronous Mode)............................ 253

Table 10.5 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clocked Synchronous Mode) (1)................. 253

Table 10.5 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clocked Synchronous Mode) (2)................. 254

Table 10.6 Relation between n and Clock................................................................................ 255

Table 10.7 Data Transfer Formats (Asynchronous Mode)....................................................... 258

Table 10.8 SMR Settings and Corresponding Data Transfer Formats ..................................... 259

Table 10.9 SMR and SCR3 Settings and Clock Source Selection ........................................... 260

Table 10.10 SSR Status Flags and Receive Data Handling........................................................ 265

Table 10.11 SCI3 Interrupt Requests ......................................................................................... 280

Table 10.12 Transmit/Receive Interrupts................................................................................... 281

Section 11 10-Bit PWM

Table 11.1 Pin Configuration................................................................................................... 288

Table 11.2 PWM Operating States........................................................................................... 292

Section 12 A/D Converter

Table 12.1 Pin Configuration................................................................................................... 295

Table 12.2 Operating States of A/D Converter ........................................................................ 297

Section 13 LCD Controller/Driver

Table 13.1 Pin Configuration................................................................................................... 308

Table 13.2 Duty Cycle and Common Function Selection........................................................ 310

Table 13.3 Segment Driver Selection....................................................................................... 310

Table 13.4 Frame Frequency Selection.................................................................................... 312

Table 13.5 Output Levels......................................................................................................... 320

Table 13.6 Power-Down Modes and Display Operation.......................................................... 321

Section 14 Power-On Reset and Low-Voltage Detection Circuits (H8/38104 Group Only)

Table 14.1 LVDCR Settings and Select Functions .................................................................. 326

Section 17 Electrical Characteristics

Table 17.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings................................................................................... 347

Table 17.2 DC Characteristics (1)............................................................................................ 351

Table 17.2 DC Characteristics (2)............................................................................................ 352

Table 17.2 DC Characteristics (3)............................................................................................ 353

Table 17.2 DC Characteristics (4)............................................................................................ 354

Table 17.2 DC Characteristics (5)............................................................................................ 355

Table 17.2 DC Characteristics (6)............................................................................................ 356

Table 17.3 Control Signal Timing............................................................................................ 358

Table 17.4 Serial Interface (SCI3) Timing............................................................................... 360

Table 17.5 A/D Converter Characteristics ............................................................................... 360

Table 17.6 LCD Characteristics............................................................................................... 362

Table 17.7 Absolute Maximum Ratings................................................................................... 363

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page l of l

Table 17.8 DC Characteristics.................................................................................................. 368

Table 17.9 Control Signal Timing............................................................................................ 375

Table 17.10 Serial Interface (SCI3) Timing............................................................................... 378

Table 17.11 A/D Converter Characteristics ............................................................................... 379

Table 17.12 LCD Characteristics............................................................................................... 381

Table 17.13 Flash Memory Characteristics................................................................................ 382

Table 17.14 Absolute Maximum Ratings................................................................................... 384

Table 17.15 DC Characteristics (1)............................................................................................ 389

Table 17.15 DC Characteristics (2)............................................................................................ 390

Table 17.15 DC Characteristics (3)............................................................................................ 391

Table 17.15 DC Characteristics (4)............................................................................................ 392

Table 17.15 DC Characteristics (5)............................................................................................ 393

Table 17.16 Control Signal Timing............................................................................................ 398

Table 17.17 Serial Interface (SCI3) Timing............................................................................... 399

Table 17.18 A/D Converter Characteristics ............................................................................... 400

Table 17.19 LCD Characteristics............................................................................................... 401

Table 17.20 Flash Memory Characteristics................................................................................ 402

Table 17.21 Power Supply Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics (1)................................. 404

Table 17.22 Power Supply Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics (2)................................. 404

Table 17.23 Power Supply Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics (3)................................. 405

Table 17.24 Power Supply Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics (4)................................. 406

Table 17.25 Power Supply Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics (5)................................. 407

Table 17.26 Power-On Reset Circuit Characteristics................................................................. 407

Table 17.27 Watchdog Timer Characteristics............................................................................ 408

Appendices

Table A.1 Instruction Set ........................................................................................................ 415

Table A.2 Operation Code Map.............................................................................................. 425

Table A.3 Number of States Required for Execution.............................................................. 427

Table A.4 Number of Cycles in Each Instruction ................................................................... 427

Table C.1 Port States .............................................................................................................. 445

Table D.1 Product Code Lineup of H8/3802 Group............................................................... 446

Table D.2 Product Code Lineup of H8/38004 Group............................................................. 447

Table D.3 Product Code Lineup of H8/38104 Group............................................................. 449

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 1 of 462

Section 1 Overview

1.1 Features

•High-speed H8/300L central processing unit

Complete instruction set compatibility with H8/300 CPU

Sixteen 8-bit general registers (Can be used as eight 16-bit general registers)

55 basic instructions

•Various peripheral functions

Timer A (can be used as a time base for a clock)

Timer F (16-bit timer)

Asynchronous event counter (16-bit timer)

Watchdog timer (WDT) (H8/38004 Group and H8/38104 Group only)

SCI3 (Asynchronous or clocked synchronous serial communication interface)

10-bit PWM

10-bit A/D converter

LCD controller/driver

Power-on reset and low-voltage detect circuits (H8/38104 Group only)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 2 of 462

•On-chip memory

Product Classification Model ROM RAM

H8/38004 HD64F38004 32 kbytes 1 kbyte

Flash memory version

(F-ZTATTM version*1)H8/38002 HD64F38002 16 kbytes 1 kbyte

H8/38104 HD64F38104 32 kbytes 1 kbyte

H8/38102 HD64F38102 16 kbytes 1 kbyte

PROM version

(ZTATTM version*2)H8/3802 HD6473802 16 kbytes 1 kbyte

H8/3802 HD6433802 16 kbytes 1 kbyte

H8/3801 HD6433801 12 kbytes 512 bytes

H8/3800 HD6433800 8 kbytes 512 bytes

H8/38004 HD64338004 32 kbytes 1 kbyte

H8/38003 HD64338003 24 kbytes 1 kbyte

H8/38002 HD64338002 16 kbytes 1 kbyte

H8/38001 HD64338001 12 kbytes 512 bytes

Mask ROM version

H8/38000 HD64338000 8 kbytes 512 bytes

H8/38104 HD64338104 32 kbytes 1 kbyte

H8/38103 HD64338103 24 kbytes 1 kbyte

H8/38102 HD64338102 16 kbytes 1 kbyte

H8/38101 HD64338101 12 kbytes 512 bytes

H8/38100 HD64338100 8 kbytes 512 bytes

Notes: 1. F-ZTAT is a trademark of Renesas Technology Corp.

2. ZTAT is a trademark of Renesas Technology Corp.

•General I/O ports

I/O pins: 39 I/O pins

Input-only pins: 5 input pins

Output-only pins: 6 output pins (5 pins on H8/38104 Group)

•Supports various power-down modes

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 3 of 462

•Compact package

Package Code Body Size Pin Pitch

QFP-64 FP-64A 14.0 ×14.0 mm 0.8 mm

LQFP-64 FP-64E 10.0 ×10.0 mm 0.5 mm

DP-64S DP-64S 17.0 ×57.6 mm 1.0 mm

Die 

The DP-64S package is only for the H8/3802 Group.

The chip is not supported by the H8/38104 Group.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 4 of 462

1.2 Internal Block Diagram

Subclock oscillator H8/300L

CPU

RAM

System clock oscillator

LCD

power

supply

Port 3

Port APort 9Port 8Port 7Port B

Port 4Port 5Port 6

ROM

Timer A

Timer F

Asynchronous

event counter

(AEC)

SCI3

10-bit PWM1

10-bit A/D converter

10-bit PWM2

LCD

controller/driver

Large-current (25 mA/pin) high-voltage open-drain pin (7 V)

Large-current (10 mA/pin) high-voltage open-drain pin (7 V)

High-voltage (7 V) input pin

Vss = AVss

Vcc

TEST

PA3/COM4

PA2/COM3

PA1/COM2

PA0/COM1

P80/SEG25

P77/SEG24

P76/SEG23

P75/SEG22

P74/SEG21

P73/SEG20

P72/SEG19

P71/SEG18

P70/SEG17

P60/SEG9

P61/SEG10

P62/SEG11

P63/SEG12

P64/SEG13

P65/SEG14

P66/SEG15

P67/SEG16

P40/SCK32

P41/RXD32

P42/TXD32

P43/

OSC1

OSC2

P31/TMOFL

P32/TMOFH

P33

P34

P35

P36/AEVH

P37/AEVL

P50/ /SEG1

P51/ /SEG2

P52/ /SEG3

P53/ /SEG4

P54/ /SEG5

P55/ /SEG6

P56/ /SEG7

P57/ /SEG8

PB3/AN3/

PB2/AN2

PB1/AN1

PB0/AN0

AVcc

IRQAEC

Vss

P95

P94

P93

P92

P91/PWM2

P90/PWM1

Figure 1.1 Internal Block Diagram of H8/3802 Group

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 5 of 462

H8/300L

CPU

RAM

ROM

SCI3

WDT

Vss = AVss

Vcc

TEST

PA3/COM4

PA2/COM3

PA1/COM2

PA0/COM1

P80/SEG25

P77/SEG24

P76/SEG23

P75/SEG22

P74/SEG21

P73/SEG20

P72/SEG19

P71/SEG18

P70/SEG17

P60/SEG9

P61/SEG10

P62/SEG11

P63/SEG12

P64/SEG13

P65/SEG14

P66/SEG15

P67/SEG16

P40/SCK32

P41/RXD32

P42/TXD32

P43/

OSC1

OSC2

P31/TMOFL

P32/TMOFH

P33

P34

P35

P36/AEVH

P37/AEVL

P50/ /SEG1

P51/ /SEG2

P52/ /SEG3

P53/ /SEG4

P54/ /SEG5

P55/ /SEG6

P56/ /SEG7

P57/ /SEG8

PB3/AN3/

PB2/AN2

PB1/AN1

PB0/AN0

AVcc

Note: When the on-chip emulator is used, pins P95, P33, P34, and P35 are unavailable to the user because

they are used exclusively by the on-chip emulator.

IRQAEC

Vss

P95

P94

P93

P92

P91/PWM2

P90/PWM1

Subclock oscillator

System clock oscillator

Timer A

Timer F

Asynchronous

event counter

(AEC)

10-bit PWM1

10-bit PWM2

LCD

controller/driver

10-bit A/D converter

LCD

power

supply

Port 3

Port APort 9Port 8Port 7Port B

Port 4Port 5Port 6

Figure 1.2 Internal Block Diagram of H8/38004 Group

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 6 of 462

H8/300L

CPU

RAM

ROM SCI3

Power-on reset

and low-voltage

detection circuit

WDT

CVcc

Vss = AVss

Vcc

RES

TEST

PA3/COM4

PA2/COM3

PA1/COM2

PA0/COM1

P80/SEG25

P77/SEG24

P76/SEG23

P75/SEG22

P74/SEG21

P73/SEG20

P72/SEG19

P71/SEG18

P70/SEG17

P60/SEG9

P61/SEG10

P62/SEG11

P63/SEG12

P64/SEG13

P65/SEG14

P66/SEG15

P67/SEG16

P40/SCK32

P41/RXD32

P42/TXD32

P43/IRQ0

OSC1

OSC2

P31/TMOFL

P32/TMOFH

P33

P34

P35

P36/AEVH

P37/AEVL

P50/WKP0/SEG1

P51/WKP1/SEG2

P52/WKP2/SEG3

P53/WKP3/SEG4

P54/WKP4/SEG5

P55/WKP5/SEG6

P56/WKP6/SEG7

P57/WKP7/SEG8

PB3/AN3/IRQ

PB2/AN2

PB1/AN1/extU

PB0/AN0/extD

AVcc

Note: When the on-chip emulator is used, pins P95, P33, P34, and P35 are unavailable to the user because

they are used exclusively by the on-chip emulator.

IRQAEC

Vss

P95

P93/Vref

P92

P91/PWM2

P90/PWM1

Subclock oscillator

System clock oscillator

Timer A

Timer F

Asynchronous

event counter

(AEC)

10-bit PWM1

10-bit PWM2

LCD

controller/driver

10-bit A/D converter

LCD

power

supply

Port 3

Port APort 9Port 8Port 7Port B

Port 4Port 5Port 6

: Large current (15 mA) pin

Figure 1.3 Internal Block Diagram of H8/38104 Group

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 7 of 462

1.3 Pin Arrangement

P90/PWM1

P91/PWM2

P92

P93

P94

P95

Vss

IRQAEC

P40/SCK32

P41/RXD32

P42/TXD32

P43/

AVcc

PB0/AN0

PB1/AN1

PB2/AN2

PB3/ /AN3

Vss=AVss

OSC2

OSC1

TEST

P31/TMOFL

P32/TMOFH

P33

P34

P35

P36/AEVH

P37/AEVL

Vcc

P70/SEG17

P71/SEG18

P72/SEG19

P73/SEG20

P74/SEG21

P75/SEG22

P76/SEG23

P77/SEG24

P80/SEG25

PA0/COM1

PA1/COM2

PA2/COM3

PA3/COM4

P50/ /SEG1

P51/ /SEG2

P52/ /SEG3

P53/ /SEG4

P54/ /SEG5

P55/ /SEG6

P56/ /SEG7

P57/ /SEG8

P60/SEG9

P61/SEG10

P62/SEG11

P63/SEG12

P64/SEG13

P65/SEG14

P66/SEG15

P67/SEG16

FP-64A, FP-64E

(Top view)

Note: When the on-chip emulator is used, pins P95, P33, P34, and P35 are unavailable to the user because

they are used exclusively by the on-chip emulator.

Figure 1.4 Pin Arrangement of H8/3802 and H8/38004 Group (FP-64A, FP-64E)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 8 of 462

P40/SCK32

P41/RXD32

P42/TXD32

P43/AVcc

PB0/AN0

PB1/AN1

PB2/AN2

PB3/ /AN3

VSS=AVSS

OSC2

OSC1

TEST

P31/TMOFL

P32/TMOFH

P33

P34

P35

P36/AEVH

P37/AEVL

Vcc

PA3/COM4

PA2/COM3

PA1/COM2

PA0/COM1

P80/SEG25

IRQAEC

Vss

P95

P94

P93

P92

P91/PWM2

P90/PWM1

P50/ /SEG1

P51/ /SEG2

P52/ /SEG3

P53/ /SEG4

P54/ /SEG5

P55/ /SEG6

P56/ /SEG7

P57/ /SEG8

P60/SEG9

P61/SEG10

P62/SEG11

P63/SEG12

P64/SEG13

P65/SEG14

P66/SEG15

P67/SEG16

P70/SEG17

P71/SEG18

P72/SEG19

P73/SEG20

P74/SEG21

P75/SEG22

P76/SEG23

P77/SEG24

DP-64S

(Top view)

Figure 1.5 Pin Arrangement of H8/3802 Group (DP-64S)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 9 of 462

P90/PWM1

P91/PWM2

P92

P93/Vref

CVcc

P95

Vss

IRQAEC

P40/SCK32

P41/RXD32

P42/TXD32

P43/IRQ0

AVcc

PB0/AN0/extD

PB1/AN1/extU

PB2/AN2

PB3/IRQ1/AN3

Vss=AVss

OSC2

OSC1

TEST

RES

P31/TMOFL

P32/TMOFH

P33

P34

P35

P36/AEVH

P37/AEVL

Vcc

P70/SEG17

P71/SEG18

P72/SEG19

P73/SEG20

P74/SEG21

P75/SEG22

P76/SEG23

P77/SEG24

P80/SEG25

PA0/COM1

PA1/COM2

PA2/COM3

PA3/COM4

P50/WKP0/SEG1

P51/WKP1/SEG2

P52/WKP2/SEG3

P53/WKP3/SEG4

P54/WKP4/SEG5

P55/WKP5/SEG6

P56/WKP6/SEG7

P57/WKP7/SEG8

P60/SEG9

P61/SEG10

P62/SEG11

P63/SEG12

P64/SEG13

P65/SEG14

P66/SEG15

P67/SEG16

FP-64A, FP-64E

(Top view)

Note: When the on-chip emulator is used, pins P95, P33, P34, and P35 are unavailable to the user because

they are used exclusively by the on-chip emulator.

Figure 1.6 Pin Arrangement of H8/38104 Group (FP-64A, FP-64E)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 10 of 462

(0, 0)

Model

name

Chip size: 3.60 mm × 3.73 mm

Voltage level on the back of the chip: GND

Figure 1.7 Pad Arrangement of HCD6433802, HCD6433801, and HCD6433800 (Top View)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 11 of 462

Table 1.1 Pad Coordinate of HCD6433802, HCD6433801, and HCD6433800

Coordinate Coordinate

Pad

No. Pad Name X (µ

µµ

µm) Y (µ

µµ

µm) Pad

No. Pad Name X (µ

µµ

µm) Y (µ

µµ

µm)

1 PB3/IRQ1/AN3 -1677 1495 32 P71/SEG18 1400 -1742

2 X1 -1677 1084 33 P70/SEG17 1578 -1742

3 X2 -1677 943 34 P67/SEG16 1677 -1401

4 AVss -1677 765 35 P66/SEG15 1677 -1190

5 Vss -1677 619 36 P65/SEG14 1677 -950

6 OSC2 -1677 488 37 P64/SEG13 1677 -801

7 OSC1 -1677 356 38 P63/SEG12 1677 -608

8 TEST -1677 225 39 P62/SEG11 1677 -459

9RES -1677 94 40 P61/SEG10 1677 -310

10 P31/TMOFL -1677 -40 41 P60/SEG9 1677 -160

11 P32/TMOFH -1677 -176 42 P57/WKP7/SEG8 1677 -11

12 P33 -1677 -313 43 P56/WKP6/SEG7 1677 121

13 P34 -1677 -450 44 P55/WKP5/SEG6 1677 252

14 P35 -1677 -587 45 P54/WKP4/SEG5 1677 383

15 P36/AEVH -1677 -943 46 P53/WKP3/SEG4 1677 801

16 P37/AEVL -1677 -1083 47 P52/WKP2/SEG3 1677 950

17 Vcc -1677 -1404 48 P51/WKP1/SEG2 1677 1190

18 V1 -1578 -1742 49 P50/WKP0/SEG1 1677 1402

19 V2 -1339 -1742 50 P90/PWM1 1578 1742

20 V3 -1193 -1742 51 P91/PWM2 1411 1742

21 PA3/COM4 -1049 -1742 52 P92 1193 1742

22 PA2/COM3 -850 -1742 53 P93 1051 1742

23 PA1/COM2 -400 -1742 54 P94 850 1742

24 PA0/COM1 -200 -1742 55 P95 650 1742

25 P80/SEG25 0 -1742 56 Vss 400 1742

26 P77/SEG24 320 -1742 57 IRQAEC 200 1742

27 P76/SEG23 451 -1742 58 P40/SCK32 -298 1742

28 P75/SEG22 583 -1742 59 P41/RXD32 -435 1742

29 P74/SEG21 850 -1742 60 P42/TXD32 -572 1742

30 P73/SEG20 1051 -1742 61 P43/IRQ0 -752 1742

31 P72/SEG19 1193 -1742 62 AVcc -1036 1742

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 12 of 462

Coordinate Coordinate

Pad

No. Pad Name X (µ

µµ

µm) Y (µ

µµ

µm) Pad

No. Pad Name X (µ

µµ

µm) Y (µ

µµ

µm)

63 PB0/AN0 -1170 1742 65 PB2/AN2 -1578 1742

64 PB1/AN1 -1400 1742

Note: The power supply (Vss) pads in pad numbers 4, 5, and 56 must not be open but connected.

The TEST pad in pad number 8 must be connected to the Vss voltage level. If not, this LSI

does not operate correctly. The coordinate values indicate center positions of pads and the

accuracy is ±5µm. The home-point position is center of the chip and the center is located at

half the distance between the upper and lower pads and left and right pads.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 13 of 462

X(0, 0)

Model name

Chip size: 2.73 mm × 3.27 mm

Voltage level on the back of the chip: GND

: NC pad

Figure 1.8 Pad Arrangement of HCD64338004, HCD64338003, HCD64338002,

HCD64338001, and HCD64338000 (Top View)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 14 of 462

Table 1.2 Pad Coordinate of HCD64338004, HCD64338003, HCD64338002,

HCD64338001, and HCD64338000

Coordinate Coordinate

Pad

No. Pad Name X (µ

µµ

µm) Y (µ

µµ

µm) Pad

No. Pad Name X (µ

µµ

µm) Y (µ

µµ

µm)

1 PB3/IRQ1/AN3 -1224 1214 32 P70/SEG17 913 -1484

2 X1 -1224 957 33 P67/SEG16 1215 -1194

3 X2 -1224 786 34 P66/SEG15 1215 -1080

4 Vss = AVss -1224 596 35 P65/SEG14 1215 -909

5 OSC2 -1224 406 36 P64/SEG13 1215 -738

6 OSC1 -1224 234 37 P63/SEG12 1215 -566

7 TEST -1224 120 38 P62/SEG11 1215 -395

8RES -1224 6 39 P61/SEG10 1215 -224

9 P31/TMOFL -1224 -108 40 P60/SEG9 1215 -52

10 P32/TMOFH -1224 -222 41 P57/WKP7/SEG8 1215 119

11 P33 -1224 -336 42 P56/WKP6/SEG7 1215 233

12 P34 -1224 -450 43 P55/WKP5/SEG6 1215 404

13 P35 -1224 -564 44 P54/WKP4/SEG5 1215 576

14 P36/AEVH -1224 -678 45 P53/WKP3/SEG4 1215 747

15 P37/AEVL -1224 -849 46 P52/WKP2/SEG3 1215 919

16 Vcc -1224 -1142 47 P51/WKP1/SEG2 1215 1090

17 V1 -922 -1484 48 P50/WKP0/SEG1 1215 1206

18 V2 -799 -1484 49 P90/PWM1 913 1494

19 V3 -676 -1484 50 P91/PWM2 790 1494

20 PA3/COM4 -553 -1484 51 P92 667 1494

21 PA2/COM3 -430 -1484 52 P93 544 1494

22 PA1/COM2 -307 -1484 53 P94 421 1494

23 PA0/COM1 -185 -1484 54 P95 299 1494

24 P80/SEG25 -62 -1484 55 Vss 176 1494

25 P77/SEG24 53 -1484 56 IRQAEC 37 1494

26 P76/SEG23 176 -1484 57 P40/SCK32 -77 1494

27 P75/SEG22 299 -1484 58 P41/RXD32 -200 1494

28 P74/SEG21 421 -1484 59 P42/TXD32 -323 1494

29 P73/SEG20 544 -1484 60 P43/IRQ0 -446 1494

30 P72/SEG19 667 -1484 61 AVcc -569 1494

31 P71/SEG18 790 -1484 62 PB0/AN0 -692 1494

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 15 of 462

Coordinate Coordinate

Pad

No. Pad Name X (µ

µµ

µm) Y (µ

µµ

µm) Pad

No. Pad Name X (µ

µµ

µm) Y (µ

µµ

µm)

63 PB1/AN1 -815 1494 64 PB2/AN2 -937 1494

Note: The power supply (Vss) pads in pad numbers 4 and 55 must not be open but connected.

The TEST pad in pad number 7 must be connected to the Vss voltage level. If not, this LSI

does not operate correctly. The coordinate values indicate center positions of pads and the

accuracy is ±5µm. The home-point position is center of the chip and the center is located at

half the distance between the upper and lower pads and left and right pads.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 16 of 462

Model

name

(0, 0)

HCD64F38004

HCD64F38004C4

HCD64F38002

HCD64F38002C4

HD64F38004

Product Model Name Model Name on Chip

HD64F38004-4

HD64F38004

HD64F38004-4

Chip size: 4.09 mm × 3.82 mm

Voltage level on the back of the chip: GND

: NC pad

Figure 1.9 Pad Arrangement of HCD64F38004 and HCD64F38002 (Top View)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 17 of 462

Table 1.3 Pad Coordinate of HCD64F38004 and HCD64F38002

Coordinate Coordinate

Pad

No. Pad Name X (µ

µµ

µm) Y (µ

µµ

µm) Pad

No. Pad Name X (µ

µµ

µm) Y (µ

µµ

µm)

1 PB3/IRQ1/AN3 -1915 1490 32 P71/SEG18 1411 -1779

2 X1 -1915 1182 33 P70/SEG17 1628 -1779

3 X2 -1915 1022 34 P67/SEG16 1914 -1496

4 Vss -1915 926 35 P66/SEG15 1914 -1297

5 Vss = AVss -1915 786 36 P65/SEG14 1914 -1098

6 OSC2 -1915 648 37 P64/SEG13 1914 -899

7 OSC1 -1915 495 38 P63/SEG12 1914 -700

8 TEST -1915 295 39 P62/SEG11 1914 -500

9RES -1915 96 40 P61/SEG10 1914 -302

10 P31/TMOFL -1915 -103 41 P60/SEG9 1914 -103

11 P32/TMOFH -1915 -302 42 P57/WKP7/SEG8 1914 96

12 P33 -1915 -486 43 P56/WKP6/SEG7 1914 295

13 P34 -1915 -657 44 P55/WKP5/SEG6 1914 495

14 P35 -1915 -750 45 P54/WKP4/SEG5 1914 694

15 P36/AEVH -1915 -989 46 P53/WKP3/SEG4 1914 893

16 P37/AEVL -1915 -1247 47 P52/WKP2/SEG3 1914 1092

17 Vcc -1915 -1438 48 P51/WKP1/SEG2 1914 1291

18 V1 -1623 -1779 49 P50/WKP0/SEG1 1914 1490

19 V2 -1406 -1779 50 P90/PWM1 1628 1779

20 V3 -1189 -1779 51 P91/PWM2 1368 1779

21 PA3/COM4 -973 -1779 52 P92 1113 1779

22 PA2/COM3 -756 -1779 53 P93 976 1779

23 PA1/COM2 -539 -1779 54 P94 759 1779

24 PA0/COM1 -323 -1779 55 P95 542 1779

25 P80/SEG25 -106 -1779 56 Vss 324 1779

26 P77/SEG24 111 -1779 57 IRQAEC 96 1779

27 P76/SEG23 328 -1779 58 P40/SCK32 -109 1779

28 P75/SEG22 544 -1779 59 P41/RXD32 -327 1779

29 P74/SEG21 761 -1779 60 P42/TXD32 -545 1779

30 P73/SEG20 978 -1779 61 P43/IRQ0 -762 1779

31 P72/SEG19 1194 -1779 62 AVcc -980 1779

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 18 of 462

Coordinate Coordinate

Pad

No. Pad Name X (µ

µµ

µm) Y (µ

µµ

µm) Pad

No. Pad Name X (µ

µµ

µm) Y (µ

µµ

µm)

63 PB0/AN0 -1198 1779 65 PB2/AN2 -1613 1779

64 PB1/AN1 -1414 1779

Note: The power supply (Vss) pads in pad numbers 4, 5, and 56 must not be open but connected.

The TEST pad in pad number 8 must be connected to the Vss voltage level. If not, this LSI

does not operate correctly. The coordinate values indicate center positions of pads and the

accuracy is ±5µm. The home-point position is center of the chip and the center is located at

half the distance between the upper and lower pads and left and right pads.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 19 of 462

1.4 Pin Functions

Table 1.4 Pin Functions

Pin No.

Type Symbol FP-64A,

FP-64E DP-64S Pad

No.*1*3Pad

No.*2I/O Functions

VCC 16 24 17 16 Input Power supply pin. Connect this

pin to the system power supply.

Power

source pins

VSS 4(=AV

SS)

55 12 (= AVSS)

63 4

55 Input Ground pin. Connect this pin to

the system power supply (0V).

AVCC 61 5 62 61 Input Analog power supply pin for the

A/D converter. When the A/D

converter is not used, connect

this pin to the system power

supply.

AVSS 4(=V

SS)12(=V

SS)4

54 Input Ground pin for the A/D

converter. Connect this pin to

the system power supply (0 V).

Input Power supply pin for the LCD

controller/driver.

CVCC*453 — — — Input This is the internal step-down

power supply pin. To ensure

stability, a capacitor with a rating

of about 0.1 µF should be

connected between this pin and

the VSS pin.

Clock pins OSC1 6 14 7 6 Input

OSC2 5 13 6 5 Output

These pins connect to a crystal

or ceramic resonator for system

clocks, or can be used to input

an external clock.

See section 4, Clock Pulse

Generators, for a typical

connection.

X1 2 10 2 2 Input

X2 3 11 3 3 Output

These pins connect to a 32.768-

or 38.4-kHz crystal resonator for

subclocks.

See section 4, Clock Pulse

Generators, for a typical

connection.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 20 of 462

Pin No.

Type Symbol FP-64A,

FP-64E DP-64S Pad

No.*1*3Pad

No.*2I/O Functions

RES 8 16 9 8 Input Reset pin. When this driven low,

thechipisreset.

System

control

TEST 7 15 88 7 Input Test pin. Connect this pin to Vss.

Users cannot use this pin.

IRQ0 60 4 61 60Interrupt

pins IRQ1 19 11

Input External interrupt request input

pins. Can select the rising or

falling edge.

IRQAEC 56 64 57 56 Input Asynchronous event counter

interrupt input pin. Enables

asynchronous event input.

On the H8/38104 Group, this

must be fixed at VCC or GND

because the oscillator is

selected by the input level during

resets. Refer to section 4, Clock

Pulse Generators, for

information on the selection

method.

WKP7 to

WKP0

41 to 48 49 to 56 42 to 49 41 to 48 Input Wakeup interrupt request input

pins. Can select the rising or

falling edge.

Timer AEVL

AEVH 15

14 23

22 16

15 15

14 Input This is an event input pin for

input to the asynchronous event

counter.

TMOFL 9 17 10 9 Output This is an output pin for

waveforms generated by the

timer FL output compare

function.

TMOFH 10 18 11 10 Output This is an output pin for

waveforms generated by the

timer FH output compare

function.

PWM1 49 57 50 4910-bit PWM

PWM2 50 58 51 50

Output These are output pins for

waveforms generated by the

channel 1 and 2 10-bit PWMs.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 21 of 462

Pin No.

Type Symbol FP-64A,

FP-64E DP-64S Pad

No.*1*3Pad

No.*2I/O Functions

I/O ports P37 to

P31 15 to 9 23 to 17 16 to 10 15 to 9 I/O 7-bit I/O port. Input or output can

be designated for each bit by

means of the port control

chip emulator is used, pins P33,

P34, and P35 are unavailable to

the user because they are used

exclusively by the on-chip

emulator.

P43 60 4 61 60 Input 1-bit input port.

P42 to

P40 59 to 57 3 to 1 60 to 58 59 to 57 I/O 3-bit I/O port. Input or output can

be designated for each bit by

means of the port control

P57 to

P50 41 to 48 49 to 56 42 to 49 41 to 48 I/O 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can

be designated for each bit by

means of the port control

P67 to

P60 33 to 40 41 to 48 34 to 41 33 to 40 I/O 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can

be designated for each bit by

means of the port control

P77 to

P70 25 to 32 33 to 40 26 to 33 25 to 32 I/O 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can

be designated for each bit by

means of the port control

P80 24 32 25 24 I/O 1-bit I/O port. Input or output can

be designated for each bit by

means of the port control

P95 to

P90 54 to 49 62 to 57 55 to 50 54 to 49 Output 6-bit output port. When the on-

chip emulator is used, pin P95 is

unavailable to the user because

it is used exclusively by the on-

chip emulator. In the F-ZTAT

version, pin P95 should not be

open but pulled up to go high in

user mode.

Note that the H8/38104 Group is

not equipped with a pin 94.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 22 of 462

Pin No.

Type Symbol FP-64A,

FP-64E DP-64S Pad

No.*1*3Pad

No.*2I/O Functions

I/O ports PA3 to

PA0 20 to 23 28 to 31 21 to 24 20 to 23 I/O 4-bit I/O port. Input or output can

be designated for each bit by

means of the port control

PB3 to

PB0 1,

64 to 62 9to6 1,

65 to 63 1,

64 to 62 Input 4-bit input port.

RXD32 58 2 59 58 Input Receive data input pin.

TXD32 59 3 60 59 Output Transmit data output pin.

Serial com-

munication

interface

(SCI) SCK32 57 1 58 57 I/O Clock I/O pin.

A/D

converter AN3 to

AN0 1,

64 to 62 9to6 1,

65 to 63 1,

64 to 62 Input Analog data input pins.

COM4 to

COM1 20 to 23 28 to 31 21 to 24 20 to 23 Output LCD common output pins.LCD

controller/

driver SEG25 to

SEG1 24 to 48 32 to 56 25 to 49 24 to 48 Output LCD segment output pins.

Vref 52 — — — Input Reference voltage input pin.

extD 62 — — — Input Power supply drop detection

voltage input pin.

Low-voltage

detection

circuit

(LVD)*4

extU 63 — — — Input Power supply rise detection

voltage input pin.

Notes: 1. Pad number for HCD6433802, HCD6433801, and HCD6433800

2. Pad number for HCD64338004, HCD64338003, HCD64338002, HCD64338001, and

HCD64338000

3. Pad number for HCD64F38004 and HCD64F38002

4. H8/38104 Group only

CPU30L0A_000020020900 Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 23 of 462

Section 2 CPU

The H8/300L CPU has sixteen 8-bit general registers, which can also be paired as eight 16-bit

registers. Its concise instruction set is designed for high-speed operation.

2.1 Features

•General-register architecture

Sixteen 8-bit general registers, also usable as eight 16-bit registers

•Fifty-five basic instructions

Multiply and divide instructions

Powerful bit-manipulation instructions

•Eight addressing modes

Register direct [Rn]

Register indirect [@Rn]

Register indirect with displacement [@(d:16,Rn)]

Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement [@Rn+ or @–Rn]

Absolute address [@aa:8 or @aa:16]

Immediate [#xx:8 or #xx:16]

Program-counter relative [@(d:8,PC)]

Memory indirect [@@aa:8]

•64-kbyte address space

•High-speed operation

All frequently-used instructions execute in two to four states

8/16-bit register-register add/subtract : 0.25 µs*

8×8-bit multiply : 1.75 µs*

16 ÷ 8-bit divide : 1.75 µs*

Note: * These values are at φ=8MHz.

•Power-down state

Transition to power-down state by SLEEP instruction

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 24 of 462

2.2 Address Space and Memory Map

The address space of this LSI is 64 kbytes, which includes the program area and the data area.

Figures 2.1 show the memory map.

H'0000

H'0029

H'002A

H'3FFF

H'F740

H'F74C

H'FB80

H'FF7F

H'FF80

H'FFFF

Interrupt vector area

(PROM and Mask ROM versions)

On-chip ROM

(16 kbytes)

On-chip RAM

(1 kbyte)

Internal I/O register

(128 bytes)

Not used

LCD RAM

(13 bytes)

Figure 2.1(1) H8/3802 Memory Map

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 25 of 462

H'0000

H'0029

H'002A

H'2FFF

H'F740

H'F74C

H'FD80

H'FF7F

H'FF80

H'FFFF

Interrupt vector area

(Mask ROM version)

On-chip ROM

(12 kbytes)

On-chip RAM

(512 bytes)

Internal I/O register

(128 bytes)

Not used

LCD RAM

(13 bytes)

Figure 2.1(2) H8/3801 Memory Map

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 26 of 462

H'0000

H'0029

H'002A

H'1FFF

H'F740

H'F74C

H'FD80

H'FF7F

H'FF80

H'FFFF

Interrupt vector area

(Mask ROM version)

On-chip ROM

(8 kbytes)

On-chip RAM

(512 bytes)

Internal I/O register

(128 bytes)

Not used

LCD RAM

(13 bytes)

Figure 2.1(3) H8/3800 Memory Map

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 27 of 462

H'0000

H'0029

H'002A

H'7FFF

H'7000

H'F020

H'F02B

H'F740

H'F74C

H'F780

H'FB80

H'FB7F

H'FF7F

H'FF80

H'FFFF

Interrupt vector area

Firmware for on-chip emulator*

(Flash memory version) (Mask ROM version)

On-chip ROM

(32 kbytes)

1. When the on-chip emulator is used, this area is unavailable to the user.

2. When flash memory is programmed, this area is used by the programming control program.

When the on-chip emulator is used, this area is unavailable to the user.

Note:

On-chip RAM

(2 kbytes)

User area

(1 kbyte)

Internal I/O register

(128 bytes)

Internal I/O register

Not used

Work area for

flash memory reprogramming*

(1 kbyte)

LCD RAM

(13 bytes)

H'0000

H'0029

H'002A

H'7FFF

H'F740

H'F74C

H'FB80

H'FF7F

H'FF80

H'FFFF

Interrupt vector area

On-chip ROM

(32 kbytes)

On-chip RAM

(1 kbyte)

Internal I/O register

(128 bytes)

Not used

LCD RAM

(13 bytes)

Figure 2.1(4) H8/38004, H8/38104 Memory Map

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 28 of 462

H'0000

H'0029

H'002A

H'5FFF

H'F740

H'F74C

H'FB80

H'FF7F

H'FF80

H'FFFF

Interrupt vector area

(Mask ROM version)

On-chip ROM

(24 kbytes)

On-chip RAM

(1 kbyte)

Internal I/O register

(128 bytes)

Not used

LCD RAM

(13 bytes)

Figure 2.1(5) H8/38003, H8/38103 Memory Map

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 29 of 462

H'0000 Interrupt vector area

On-chip ROM

(16 kbytes)

Not used

Firmware for on-chip emulator*1

Not used

Interrupt vector area

On-chip ROM

(16 kbytes)

Not used

Internal I/O register

Not used

LCD RAM

(13 bytes)

Not used

Work area for flash memory

reprogramming*2

(1 kbyte)

On-chip RAM

(2 kbytes)

User area

(1 kbyte)

Internal I/O register

(128 bytes)

LCD RAM

(13 bytes)

Not used

Internal I/O register

(128 bytes)

On-chip RAM

(1 kbyte)

(Flash memory version) (Mask ROM version)

H'0029

H'002A

H'7FFF

H'7000

H'3FFF

H'F020

H'F02B

H'F740

H'F74C

H'F780

H'FB80

H'FB7F

H'FF7F

H'FF80

H'FFFF

1. When the on-chip emulator is used, this area is unavailable to the user.

2. When flash memory is programmed, this area is used by the programming control program.

When the on-chip emulator is used, this area is unavailable to the user.

Notes:

H'3FFF

H'0000

H'0029

H'002A

H'F740

H'F74C

H'FB80

H'FF7F

H'FF80

H'FFFF

Figure 2.1(6) H8/38002, H8/38102 Memory Map

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 30 of 462

H'0000

H'0029

H'002A

H'2FFF

H'F740

H'F74C

H'FD80

H'FF7F

H'FF80

H'FFFF

Interrupt vector area

On-chip ROM

(12 kbytes)

Not used

LCD RAM

(13 bytes)

Not used

Internal I/O register

(128 bytes)

On-chip RAM

(512 bytes)

(Mask ROM version)

Figure 2.1(7) H8/38001, H8/38101 Memory Map

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 31 of 462

H'0000

H'0029

H'002A

H'1FFF

H'F740

H'F74C

H'FD80

H'FF7F

H'FF80

H'FFFF

Interrupt vector area

On-chip ROM

(8 kbytes)

Not used

LCD RAM

(13 bytes)

Not used

Internal I/O register

(128 bytes)

On-chip RAM

(512 bytes)

(Mask ROM version)

Figure 2.1(8) H8/38000, H8/38100 Memory Map

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 32 of 462

2.3 Register Configuration

Figure 2.2 shows the internal register configuration of the H8/300L CPU. There are two groups of

registers: the general registers and control registers.

General registers (Rn)

Control register (CR)

[Legend]

: Stack pointer

: Program counter

: Condition code register

: Interrupt mask bit

: User bit

: Half-carry flag

: Negative flag

: Zero flag

: Overflow flag

: Carry flag

CCR

15 0

R0H

R1H

R2H

R3H

R4H

R5H

R6H

R7H

R0L

R1L

R2L

R3L

R4L

R5L

R6L

R7L

(SP)

I UHUNZVC

76543210

Figure 2.2 CPU Registers

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 33 of 462

2.3.1 General Registers

All the general registers can be used as both data registers and address registers.

When used as data registers, they can be accessed as 16-bit registers (R0 to R7), or the upper bytes

(R0H to R7H) and low bytes (R0L to R7L) can be accessed separately as 8-bit registers.

When used as address registers, the general registers are accessed as 16-bit registers (R0 to R7).

R7 also functions as the stack pointer (SP), used implicitly by hardware in exception handling and

subroutine calls. When it functions as the stack pointer, as indicated in figure 2.3, SP (R7) points

to the top of the stack.

SP (R7)

Lower address side [H'0000]

Unused area

Stack area

Upper address side [H'FFFF]

Figure 2.3 Stack Pointer

2.3.2 Program Counter (PC)

This 16-bit counter indicates the address of the next instruction the CPU will execute. All

instructions are fetched 16 bits (1 word) at a time, so the least significant bit of the PC is ignored

(always regarded as 0).

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 34 of 462

2.3.3 Condition Code Register (CCR)

This 8-bit register contains internal CPU status information, including an interrupt mask bit (I),

half-carry (H), negative (N), zero (Z), overflow (V), and carry (C) flags. The I bit is initialized to 1

by reset exception-handling sequence, but other bits are not initialized.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7 I 1 R/W Interrupt Mask Bit

Masks interrupts when set to 1. The I bit is set to 1 at

the start of an exception-handling sequence.

6 U Undefined R/W User Bit

Can be written and read by software using the LDC,

STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions.

5 H Undefined R/W Half-Carry Flag

When the ADD.B, ADDX.B, SUB.B, SUBX.B, CMP.B,

or NEG.B instruction is executed, this flag is set to 1 if

there is a carry or borrow at bit 3, and cleared to 0

otherwise. When the ADD.W, SUB.W, or CMP.W

instruction is executed, the H flag is set to 1 if there is a

carry or borrow at bit 11, and cleared to 0 otherwise.

4 U Undefined R/W User Bit

Can be written and read by software using the LDC,

STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions.

3 N Undefined R/W Negative Flag

Stores the value of the most significant bit of data as a

sign bit.

2 Z Undefined R/W Zero Flag

Set to 1 to indicate zero data, and cleared to 0 to

indicate non-zero data.

1 V Undefined R/W Overflow Flag

Set to 1 when an arithmetic overflow occurs, and

cleared to 0 at other times.

0 C Undefined R/W Carry Flag

Set to 1 when a carry occurs, and cleared to 0

otherwise. Used by:

•Add instructions, to indicate a carry

•Subtract instructions, to indicate a borrow

•Shift and rotate instructions, to indicate a carry

The carry flag is also used as a bit accumulator by bit

manipulation instructions.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 35 of 462

Some instructions leave flag bits unchanged.

For the action of each instruction on the flag bits, refer to H8/300L Series Programming Manual.

2.3.4 Initial Register Values

When the CPU is reset, the program counter (PC) is initialized to the value stored at address

H'0000 in the vector table, and the I bit in the CCR is set to 1. The other CCR bits and the general

registers are not initialized. In particular, the initial value of the stack pointer (R7) is undefined.

The stack pointer should be initialized by software, by the first instruction executed after a reset.

2.4 Data Formats

The H8/300L CPU can process 1-bit data, 4-bit (BCD) data, 8-bit (byte) data, and 16-bit (word)

data. Bit manipulation instructions operate on 1-bit data specified as bit n in a byte operand (n = 0,

1, 2, ..., 7).

All arithmetic and logic instructions except ADDS and SUBS can operate on byte data. The

MOV.W, ADD.W, SUB.W, CMP.W, ADDS, SUBS, MULXU (8 bits ×8bits),andDIVXU(16

bits ÷ 8 bits) instructions operate on word data.

The DAA and DAS decimal-adjust instructions treat byte data as two digits of 4-bit BCD data.

2.4.1 General Register Data Formats

Figure 2.4 shows the data formats in general registers.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 36 of 462

Data Type

1-bit data

Byte data

Word data

4-bit BCD data

RnH

RnL

RnH

RnL

RnH Upper digit Lower digit Don't care

Don't care

Upper digit Lower digitDon't careRnL

76543210

7430

76543210

7430

MSB LSB

LSB

MSB

LSB

lLegend]

RnH

RnL

MSB

LSB

: Upper byte of general register

: Lower byte of general register

: Most significant bit

: Least significant bit

Figure 2.4 General Register Data Formats

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 37 of 462

2.4.2 Memory Data Formats

Figure 2.5 indicates the data formats in memory. The H8/300L CPU can access word data stored

in memory (MOV.W instruction), but the word data must always begin at an even address. If word

data starting at an odd address is accessed, the least significant bit of the address is regarded as 0,

and the word data starting at the preceding address is accessed. The same applies to instruction

codes.

Data Type

Address n

Even address Upper 8 bits

Lower 8 bits

Odd address

Even address

Odd address

Even address

Odd address

1-bit data

Byte data

Word data

Byte data (CCR) on stack

Word data on stack

Address Data Format

76543210

MSB LSB

MSB LSBCCR

CCR*

MSB LSB

MSB

LSB

MSB

LSB

Note: * Ignored on return

[Legend]

CCR: Condition code register

Figure 2.5 Memory Data Formats

When the stack is accessed using R7 as an address register, word access should always be

performed. When the CCR is pushed on the stack, two identical copies of the CCR are pushed to

make a complete word. When they are restored, the lower byte is ignored.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 38 of 462

2.5 Instruction Set

The H8/300L CPU can use a total of 55 instructions, which are grouped by function in table 2.1.

Table 2.1 Instruction Set

Function Instructions Number

Data transfer MOV, PUSH*1,POP

*11

Arithmetic operations ADD, SUB, ADDX, SUBX, INC, DEC, ADDS, SUBS, DAA,

DAS, MULXU, DIVXU, CMP, NEG 14

Logic operations AND, OR, XOR, NOT 4

Shift SHAL, SHAR, SHLL, SHLR, ROTL, ROTR, ROTXL, ROTXR 8

Bit manipulation BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BTST, BAND, BIAND, BOR, BIOR,

BXOR,BIXOR,BLD,BILD,BST,BIST 14

Branch Bcc*2,JMP,BSR,JSR,RTS 5

System control RTE, SLEEP, LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, XORC, NOP 8

Block data transfer EEPMOV 1

Total: 55

Notes: 1. PUSH Rn is equivalent to MOV.W Rn, @–SP.

POP Rn is equivalent to MOV.W @SP+, Rn. The same applies to the machine

language.

2. Bcc is the general name for conditional branch instructions.

Tables 2.3 to 2.10 summarize the instructions in each functional category. The notation used in

tables2.3to2.10isdefinedbelow.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 39 of 462

Table 2.2 Operation Notation

Symbol Description

Rd General register (destination)

Rs General register (source)

Rn General register

(EAd), <Ead>Destination operand

(EAs), <Eas>Source operand

CCR Condition code register

N N (negative) flag in CCR

Z Z (zero) flag in CCR

V V (overflow) flag in CCR

C C (carry) flag in CCR

PC Program counter

SP Stack pointer

#IMM Immediate data

disp Displacement

+ Addition

– Subtraction

×Multiplication

÷ Division

∧Logical AND

∨Logical OR

⊕Logical XOR

→Move

¬ NOT (logical complement)

:3/:8/:16 3-, 8-, or 16-bit length

( ), < > Contents of operand indicated by effective address

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 40 of 462

2.5.1 Data Transfer Instructions

Table 2.3 describes the data transfer instructions.

Table 2.3 Data Transfer Instructions

Instruction Size*Function

MOV B/W (EAs) →Rd, Rs →(EAd)

Moves data between two general registers or between a general register

and memory, or moves immediate data to a general register.

The Rn, @Rn, @(d:16, Rn), @aa:16, #xx:16, @–Rn, and @Rn+

addressing modes are available for word data. The @aa:8 addressing

mode is available for byte data only.

The @–R7 and @R7+ modes require word operands. Do not specify

byte size for these two modes.

POP W @SP+ →Rn

Pops a general register from the stack. Equivalent to MOV.W@SP+, Rn.

PUSH W Rn →@–SP

Pushes a general register onto the stack. Equivalent to MOV.W Rn, @–

SP.

Note: *Refers to the operand size.

B: Byte

W:Word

For details on data access, see section 2.9.1, Notes on Data Access to Empty Areas and section

2.9.2, Access to Internal I/O Registers.

Figure 2.6 shows the instruction formats of data transfer instructions.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 41 of 462

op rm rn Rm Rn

87 0

op rm rn @Rm Rn

87 0

op rm rn @Rm + Rn,

Rn @−Rm

87 0

op rn abs

@aa:16 Rn

@aa:8 Rn

87 0

op 1 11rn

@SP+ Rn,

Rn @-SP

87 0

disp

rm rn @(d: 16, Rm) Rn

87 0

MOV

POP, PUSH

abs

IMM

#xx:8 Rn

87 0

op rn IMM

#xx:16 Rn

87 0

op rn

87 0

[Legend]

rm, rn

disp

abs

IMM

: Operation field

: Register field

: Displacement

: Absolute address

: Immediate data

Figure 2.6 Instruction Formats of Data Transfer Instructions

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 42 of 462

2.5.2 Arithmetic Operations Instructions

Table 2.4 describes the arithmetic operations instructions.

Table 2.4 Arithmetic Operations Instructions

Instruction Size*Function

ADD

SUB B/W Rd ± Rs →Rd, Rd +#IMM →Rd

Performs addition or subtraction on data in two general registers, or

addition on immediate data and data in a general register. Immediate

data cannot be subtracted from data in a general register. Word data can

be added or subtracted only when both words are in general registers.

ADDX

SUBX BRd±Rs±C→Rd, Rd ± #IMM ± C →Rd

Performs addition or subtraction with carry on byte data in two general

registers, or addition or subtraction with carry on immediate data and

data in a general register.

INC

DEC BRd±1→Rd

Increments or decrements a general register by 1.

ADDS

SUBS WRd±1→Rd, Rd ± 2 →Rd

Adds or subtracts 1 or 2 to or from a general register.

DAA

DAS B Rd (decimal adjust) →Rd

Decimal-adjusts an addition or subtraction result in a general register by

referring to the CCR to produce 4-bit BCD data.

MULXU B Rd ×Rs →Rd

Performs 8-bit ×8-bit unsigned multiplication on data in two general

registers, providing a 16-bit result.

DIVXU B Rd ÷ Rs →Rd

Performs 16-bit ÷ 8-bit unsigned division on data in two general

registers, providing an 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder.

CMP B/W Rd–Rs,Rd–#IMM

Compares data in a general register with data in another general register

or with immediate data, and sets CCR bits according to the result. Word

data can be compared only between two general registers.

NEG B 0–Rd→Rd

Obtains the two’s complement (arithmetic complement) of data in a

general register.

Note: *Refers to the operand size.

B: Byte

W:Word

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 43 of 462

2.5.3 Logic Operations Instructions

Table 2.5 describes the logic operations instructions.

Table 2.5 Logic Operations Instructions

Instruction Size*Function

AND B Rd ∧Rs →Rd, Rd ∧#IMM →Rd

Performs a logical AND operation on a general register and another

general register or immediate data.

OR B Rd ∨Rs →Rd, Rd ∨#IMM →Rd

Performs a logical OR operation on a general register and another

general register or immediate data.

XOR B Rd ⊕Rs →Rd, Rd ⊕#IMM →Rd

Performs a logical exclusive OR operation on a general register and

another general register or immediate data.

NOT B ¬ (Rd) →(Rd)

Obtains the one's complement (logical complement) of general register

contents.

Note: *Refers to the operand size.

B: Byte

2.5.4 Shift Instructions

Table 2.6 describes the shift instructions.

Table 2.6 Shift Instructions

Instruction Size*Function

SHAL

SHAR B Rd (shift) →Rd

Performs an arithmetic shift on general register contents.

SHLL

SHLR B Rd (shift) →Rd

Performs a logical shift on general register contents.

ROTL

ROTR B Rd (rotate) →Rd

Rotates general register contents.

ROTXL

ROTXR B Rd (rotate) →Rd

Rotates general register contents through the carry flag.

Note: *Refers to the operand size.

B: Byte

Figure 2.7 shows the instruction formats of arithmetic, logic, and shift instructions.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 44 of 462

op rm rn ADD, SUB, CMP,

ADDX, SUBX (Rm)

87 0

op rn ADDS, SUBS, INC, DEC,

DAA, DAS, NEG, NOT

87 0

op rm rn MULXU, DIVXU

87 0

op rn IMM ADD, ADDX, SUBX,

CMP (#xx:8)

87 0

op rm rn AND, OR, XOR (Rm)

AND, OR, XOR (#xx:8)

87 0

op IMMrn

87 0

op rn SHAL, SHAR, SHLL, SHLR,

ROTL, ROTR, ROTXL, ROTX

87 0

[Legend]

rm, rn

IMM

: Operation field

: Register field

: Immediate data

Figure 2.7 Instruction Formats of Arithmetic, Logic, and Shift Instructions

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 45 of 462

2.5.5 Bit Manipulation Instructions

Table 2.7 describes the bit manipulation instructions.

Table 2.7 Bit Manipulation Instructions (1)

Instruction Size*Function

BSET B 1 →(<bit-No.> of <EAd>)

Sets a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to 1. The bit

number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a

general register.

BCLR B 0 →(<bit-No.> of <EAd>)

Clears a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to 0. The

bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of

a general register.

BNOT B ¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) →(<bit-No.> of <EAd>)

Inverts a specified bit in a general register or memory operand. The bit

number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a

general register.

BTST B ¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) →Z

Tests a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and sets or

clears the Z flag accordingly. The bit number is specified by 3-bit

immediate data or the lower three bits of a general register.

BAND

BIAND

C∧(<bit-No.> of <EAd>) →C

ANDs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory

operand and stores the result in the carry flag.

C∧¬(<bit-No.>of<EAd>)→C

ANDs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general

The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.

BOR

BIOR

C∨(<bit-No.> of <EAd>) →C

ORs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory

operand and stores the result in the carry flag.

C ∨ ¬(<bit-No.>of<EAd>)→C

ORs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general register

or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag.

The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.

Note: *Refers to the operand size.

B: Byte

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 46 of 462

Table 2.7 Bit Manipulation Instructions (2)

Instruction Size*Function

BXOR

BIXOR

C⊕(<bit-No.> of <EAd>) →C

XORs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory

operand and stores the result in the carry flag.

C⊕¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) →C

XORs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general

The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.

BLD

BILD

(<bit-No.> of <EAd>) →C

Transfers a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to the

carry flag.

¬(<bit-No.>of<EAd>)→C

Transfers the inverse of a specified bit in a general register or memory

operand to the carry flag.

The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.

BST

BIST

C→(<bit-No.> of <EAd>)

Transfers the carry flag value to a specified bit in a general register or

memory operand.

¬C→(<bit-No.> of <EAd>)

Transfers the inverse of the carry flag value to a specified bit in a general

The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.

Note: *Refers to the operand size.

B: Byte

For details on the bit manipulation instructions, see section 2.9.4, Bit Manipulation Instructions.

Figure 2.8 shows the instruction formats of bit manipulation instructions.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 47 of 462

op IMM rn Operand

Bit No.

: Register direct (Rn)

: Immediate (#xx:3)

Operand

Bit No.

: Register direct (Rn)

: Register direct (Rm)

Operand

Bit No.

: Register indirect (@Rn)

: Immediate (#xx:3)

Operand

Bit No.

: Register indirect (@Rn)

: Register direct (Rm)

Operand

Bit No.

: Absolute address (@aa:8)

: Immediate (#xx:3)

Operand

Bit No.

: Absolute address (@aa:8)

: Register direct (Rm)

Operand

Bit No.

: Register direct (Rn)

: Immediate (#xx:3)

Operand

Bit No.

: Register indirect (@Rn)

: Immediate (#xx:3)

Operand

Bit No.

: Absolute address (@aa:8)

: Immediate (#xx:3)

Operand

Bit No.

: Register direct (Rn)

: Immediate (#xx:3)

Operand

Bit No.

: Register indirect (@Rn)

: Immediate (#xx:3)

Operand

Bit No.

: Absolute address (@aa:8)

: Immediate (#xx:3)

87 0

BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BTST

BAND, BOR, BXOR, BLD, BST

IMM

0000

87 0

15 8 7 0

IMM

abs

87 0

15 8 7 0

op rnrm

87 0

[Legend]

rm, rn

abs

IMM

: Operation field

: Register field

: Absolute address

: Immediate data

BIAND, BIOR, BIXOR, BILD, BIST

0000

IMM

abs

15 8 7 0

87 0

Figure 2.8 Instruction Formats of Bit Manipulation Instructions

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 48 of 462

2.5.6 Branch Instructions

Table 2.8 describes the branch instructions.

Table 2.8 Branch Instructions

Instruction Size Function

Bcc — Branches to a specified address if a specified condition is true. The

branching conditions are listed below.

Mnemonic Description Condition

BRA (BT) Always (true) Always

BRN (BF) Never (false) Never

BHI High C ∨ Z=0

BLS Low or same C ∨ Z=1

BCC (BHS) Carry clear

(high or same) C=0

BCS (BLO) Carry set (low) C = 1

BNE Not equal Z = 0

BEQ Equal Z = 1

BVC Overflow clear V = 0

BVS Overflow set V = 1

BPL Plus N = 0

BMI Minus N = 1

BGE Greater or equal N ⊕V=0

BLT Less than N ⊕V=1

BGT Greater than Z ∨ (N ⊕ V) = 0

BLE Less or equal Z ∨ (N ⊕V) = 1

JMP — Branches unconditionally to a specified address.

BSR — Branches to a subroutine at a specified address.

JSR — Branches to a subroutine at a specified address.

RTS — Returns from a subroutine.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 49 of 462

Figure 2.9 shows the instruction formats of branch instructions.

op cc disp Bcc

87 0

op rm 0 0 0 0 JMP (@Rm)

87 0

op abs

87 0

op disp

87 0

abs JMP (@aa:16)

JMP (@@aa:8)

BSR

RTS

87 0

op rm 0 0 0 0 JSR (@Rm)

87 0

op abs

87 0

abs JSR (@aa:16)

JSR (@@aa:8)

87 0

[Legend]

disp

abs

: Operation field

: Condition field

: Register field

: Displacement

: Absolute address

Figure 2.9 Instruction Formats of Branch Instructions

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 50 of 462

2.5.7 System Control Instructions

Table 2.9 describes the system control instructions.

Table 2.9 System Control Instructions

Instruction Size*Function

RTE — Returns from an exception-handling routine.

SLEEP — Causes a transition from active mode to power-down mode. See section

5, Power-Down Modes, for details.

LDC B Rs →CCR, #IMM →CCR

Moves immediate data or general register contents to CCR.

STC B CCR →Rd

Copies CCR to a specified general register.

ANDC B CCR ∧#IMM →CCR

Logically ANDs CCR with immediate data.

ORC B CCR ∨ #IMM →CCR

Logically ORs CCR with immediate data.

XORC B CCR ⊕#IMM →CCR

Logically XORs CCR with immediate data.

NOP — PC + 2 →PC

Only increments the program counter.

Note: *Refers to the operand size.

B: Byte

Figure 2.10 shows the instruction formats of system control instructions.

87 0

op rn

87 0

RTE, SLEEP, NOP

LDC, STC (Rn)

op IMM ANDC, ORC,

XORC, LDC (#xx:8)

87 0

[Legend]

IMM

: Operation field

: Register field

: Immediate data

Figure 2.10 Instruction Formats of System Control Instructions

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 51 of 462

2.5.8 Block Data Transfer Instructions

Table 2.10 describes the block data transfer instructions.

Table 2.10 Block Data Transfer Instructions

Instruction Size Function

EEPMOV — If R4L ≠0then

repeat @R5+ →@R6+

R4L–1→R4L

until R4L = 0

else next;

Block data transfer instruction. Transfers the number of data bytes

specified by R4L from locations starting at the address indicated by R5

to locations starting at the address indicated by R6. After the transfer,

the next instruction is executed.

Certain precautions are required in using the EEPMOV instruction. See section 2.9.3, EEPMOV

Instruction, for details.

Figure 2.11 shows the instruction formats of block data transfer instructions.

87 0

[Legend]

op : Operation field

Figure 2.11 Instruction Format of Block Data Transfer Instructions

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 52 of 462

2.6 Addressing Modes and Effective Address

2.6.1 Addressing Modes

The H8/300L CPU supports the eight addressing modes listed in table 2.11. Each instruction uses

a subset of these addressing modes.

Table 2.11 Addressing Modes

No. Addressing Mode Symbol

1 Register direct Rn

2 Register indirect @Rn

3 Register indirect with displacement @(d:16,Rn)

4 Register indirect with post-increment

@–Rn

5 Absolute address @aa:8/@aa:16

6 Immediate #xx:8/#xx:16

7 Program-counter relative @(d:8,PC)

8 Memory indirect @@aa:8

The register field of the instruction specifies an 8- or 16-bit general register containing the

operand.

Only the MOV.W, ADD.W, SUB.W, CMP.W, ADDS, SUBS, MULXU (8 bits ×8 bits), and

DIVXU (16 bits ÷ 8 bits) instructions have 16-bit operands.

The register field of the instruction specifies a 16-bit general register containing the address of the

operand in memory.

The instruction has a second word (bytes 3 and 4) containing a displacement which is added to the

contents of the specified general register (16 bits) to obtain the operand address in memory.

This mode is used only in MOV instructions. For the MOV.W instruction, the resulting address

must be even.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 53 of 462

•Register indirect with post-increment—@Rn+

The @Rn+ mode is used with MOV instructions that load registers from memory.

The register field of the instruction specifies a 16-bit general register containing the address of

the operand. After the operand is accessed, the register is incremented by 1 for MOV.B or 2 for

MOV.W. For MOV.W, the original contents of the 16-bit general register must be even.

•Register indirect with pre-decrement—@–Rn

The @–Rn mode is used with MOV instructions that store register contents to memory.

The register field of the instruction specifies a 16-bit general register which is decremented by

1 or 2 to obtain the address of the operand in memory. The register retains the decremented

value. The size of the decrement is 1 for MOV.B or 2 for MOV.W. For MOV.W, the original

contents of the register must be even.

Absolute Address—@aa:8/@aa:16

The instruction specifies the absolute address of the operand in memory.

The absolute address may be 8 bits long (@aa:8) or 16 bits long (@aa:16). The MOV.B and bit

manipulation instructions can use 8-bit absolute addresses. The MOV.B, MOV.W, JMP, and JSR

instructions can use 16-bit absolute addresses.

For an 8-bit absolute address, the upper 8 bits are assumed to be 1 (H'FF). The address range is

H'FF00 to H'FFFF (65280 to 65535).

Immediate—#xx:8/#xx:16

The instruction contains an 8-bit operand (#xx:8) in its second byte, or a 16-bit operand (#xx:16)

in its third and fourth bytes. Only MOV.W instructions can contain 16-bit immediate values.

The ADDS and SUBS instructions implicitly contain the value 1 or 2 as immediate data. Some bit

manipulation instructions contain 3-bit immediate data in the second or fourth byte of the

instruction, specifying a bit number.

Program-Counter Relative—@(d:8, PC)

This mode is used in the Bcc and BSR instructions. An 8-bit displacement in byte 2 of the

instruction code is sign-extended to 16 bits and added to the program counter contents to generate

a branch destination address. The possible branching range is –126 to +128 bytes (–63 to +64

words) from the current address. The displacement should be an even number.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 54 of 462

Memory Indirect—@@aa:8

This mode can be used by the JMP and JSR instructions. The second byte of the instruction code

specifies an 8-bit absolute address. The word located at this address contains the branch

destination address. The upper 8 bits of the absolute address are assumed to be 0 (H'00), so the

address range is from H'0000 to H'00FF (0 to 255). Note that with the H8/300L Series, the lower

end of the address area is also used as a vector area. See section 3.1, Exception Sources and

Vector Address, for details on the vector area.

If an odd address is specified as a branch destination or as the operand address of a MOV.W

instruction, the least significant bit is regarded as 0, causing word access to be performed at the

address preceding the specified address. See section 2.4.2, Memory Data Formats, for further

information.

2.6.2 Effective Address Calculation

Table 2.12 shows how effective addresses are calculated in each of the addressing modes.

Arithmetic and logic instructions use register direct addressing (1). The ADD.B, ADDX, SUBX,

CMP.B, AND, OR, and XOR instructions can also use immediate addressing (6).

Data transfer instructions can use all addressing modes except program-counter relative (7) and

memory indirect (8).

Bit manipulation instructions can use register direct (1), register indirect (2), or 8-bit absolute

addressing (5) to specify the operand. Register indirect (1) (BSET, BCLR, BNOT, and BTST

instructions) or 3-bit immediate addressing (6) can be used independently to specify a bit position

in the operand.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 55 of 462

Table 2.12 Effective Address Calculation

No. Addressing Mode and Instruction Format Effective Address Calculation Method Effective Address (EA)

15 78430

op rm rn

2 Register indirect @Rn

15 67430

15 0

op rm

15 67430

op rm

15 67430

op rm

3 Register indirect with displacement

@(d:16, Rn)

4 Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement

15 67430

op rm

disp

Contents of register indicated by rm (16 bits)

15 0

Contents of register indicated by rm (16 bits)

disp

15 0

30 30

15 0

Contents of register indicated by rm (16 bits)

rm rn

Operand is contents of registers indicated by rm/rn

1 or 2

Incremented or decremented by 1 if operand is byte

size, and by 2 if word size

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 56 of 462

No. Addressing Mode and Instruction Format Effective Address Calculation Method Effective Address (EA)

Absolute address

6 Immediate

7 Program-counter relative@ (d: 8, PC)

@aa:8

@aa:16

#xx:8

#xx:16

15 780

op abs H'FF

15 780

op IMM

15 780

op disp

15 0

abs

15 0

IMM

15 0 15 0

15 780

PC contents

Sign extension disp

15 0

Operand is 1- or 2-byte immediate data

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 57 of 462

No. Addressing Mode and Instruction Format Effective Address Calculation Method Effective Address (EA)

Memory indirect@@aa:8

15 780

op abs

15 078

H'00 abs

Memory contents (16 bits) 15 0

[Legend]

rm, rn

disp

IMM

abs

: Register field

: Operation field

: Displacement

: Immediate data

: Absolute address

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 58 of 462

2.7 Basic Bus Cycle

CPU operation is synchronized by a system clock (φ)orasubclock(φSUB). For details on these

clock signals see section 4, Clock Pulse Generators. The period from a rising edge of φor φSUB to

the next rising edge is called one state. A bus cycle consists of two states or three states. The cycle

differs depending on whether access is to on-chip memory or to on-chip peripheral modules.

2.7.1 Access to On-Chip Memory (RAM, ROM)

Access to on-chip memory takes place in two states. The data bus width is 16 bits, allowing access

in byte or word size. Figure 2.12 shows the on-chip memory access cycle.

T1 state

Bus cycle

T2 state

Internal address bus

Internal read signal

Internal data bus

(read access)

Internal write signal

Read data

Address

Write data

Internal data bus

(write access)

SUB

φ or φ

Figure 2.12 On-Chip Memory Access Cycle

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 59 of 462

2.7.2 On-Chip Peripheral Modules

On-chip peripheral modules are accessed in two states or three states. The data bus width is 8 bits,

so access is by byte size only. This means that for accessing word data, two instructions must be

used. For details on the data bus width and number of access states of each register, refer to

section 14.1, Register Addresses (Address Order).

Two-State Access to On-Chip Peripheral Modules:

Figure 2.13 shows the operation timing in the case of two-state access to an on-chip peripheral

module.

T1 state

Bus cycle

T2 state

Internal address bus

Internal read signal

Internal data bus

(read access)

Internal write signal

Read data

Address

Write data

Internal data bus

(write access)

SUB

φ or φ

Figure 2.13 On-Chip Peripheral Module Access Cycle (2-State Access)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 60 of 462

Three-State Access to On-Chip Peripheral Modules:

Figure 2.14 shows the operation timing in the case of three-state access to an on-chip peripheral

module.

state

Bus cycle

Internal

address bus

Internal

read signal

Internal

data bus

(read access)

Internal

write signal

Read data

Address

Internal

data bus

(write access)

state T

state

Write data

SUB

φ or φ

Figure 2.14 On-Chip Peripheral Module Access Cycle (3-State Access)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 61 of 462

2.8 CPU States

There are four CPU states: the reset state, program execution state, program halt state, and

exception-handling state. The program execution state includes active (high-speed or medium-

speed) mode and subactive mode. In the program halt state, there are a sleep (high-speed or

medium-speed) mode, standby mode, watch mode, and sub-sleep mode.

These states are shown in figure 2.15. Figure 2.16 shows the state transitions.

CPU state Reset state

Program execution state Active (high-speed) mode

Active (medium-speed) mode

Power-down modes

Subactive mode

Sleep (high-speed) mode

Sleep (medium-speed) mode

Standby mode

Watch mode

Subsleep mode

Program halt state

A state in which the CPU

operation is stopped to

conserve power

A transient state in which the CPU changes

the processing flow due to a reset or an interrupt

Exception-handling state

The CPU is initialized

The CPU executes successive program

instructions at high speed,

synchronized by the system clock

The CPU executes successive

program instructions at

reduced speed, synchronized

by the system clock

The CPU executes successive

program instructions at reduced

speed, synchronized by the subclock

Note: See section 5, Power-Down Modes, for details on the modes and their transitions.

Figure 2.15 CPU Operation States

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 62 of 462

Reset state

Program halt state

Exception-handling state

Program execution state

Reset cleared

SLEEP instruction executed

Reset

occurs Interrupt

source

occurs

Reset

occurs Interrupt

source

occurs

Exception-

handling

complete

Reset occurs

Figure 2.16 State Transitions

2.9 Usage Notes

2.9.1 Notes on Data Access to Empty Areas

The address space of this LSI includes empty areas in addition to the ROM, RAM, and on-chip

I/O registers areas available to the user. When data is transferred from CPU to empty areas, the

transferred data will be lost. This action may also cause the CPU to malfunction. When data is

transferred from an empty area to CPU, the contents of the data cannot be guaranteed.

2.9.2 Access to Internal I/O Registers

Internal data transfer to or from on-chip peripheral modules other than the on-chip ROM and

RAM areas makes use of an 8-bit data width. If word access is attempted to these areas, the

following results will occur.

Word access from CPU to I/O register area:

Upper byte: Will be written to I/O register.

Lower byte: Transferred data will be lost.

Word access from I/O register to CPU:

Upper byte: Will be written to upper part of CPU register.

Lower byte: Data which is written to lower part of CPU register is not guaranteed.

Byte size instructions should therefore be used when transferring data to or from I/O registers

other than the on-chip ROM and RAM areas.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 63 of 462

2.9.3 EEPMOV Instruction

EEPMOV is a block-transfer instruction and transfers the byte size of data indicated by R4L,

which starts from the address indicated by R5, to the address indicated by R6. Set R4L and R6 so

that the end address of the destination address (value of R6 +R4L) does not exceed H'FFFF (the

value of R6 must not change from H'FFFF to H'0000 during execution).

2.9.4 Bit Manipulation Instructions

The BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BST, and BIST instructions read data from the specified address in

byte units, manipulate the data of the target bit, and write data to the same address again in byte

units. Special care is required when using these instructions in cases where two registers are

assigned to the same address or when a bit is directly manipulated for a port, because this may

rewrite data of a bit other than the bit to be manipulated.

Bit Manipulation in Two Registers Assigned to Same Address:

Example 1: Timer load register and timer counter

Figure 2.17 shows an example of a timer in which two timer registers are assigned to the same

address. When a bit manipulation instruction accesses the timer load register and timer counter of

a reloadable timer, since these two registers share the same address, the following operations takes

place.

1. Data is read in byte units.

2. The CPU sets or resets the bit to be manipulated with the bit manipulation instruction.

3. The written data is written again in byte units to the timer load register.

The timer is counting, so the value read is not necessarily the same as the value in the timer load

modified value may be written to the timer load register.

Read

Write

Count clock Timer counter

Timer load register

Reload

Internal data bus

Figure 2.17 Example of Timer Configuration with Two Registers

Allocated to Same Address

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 64 of 462

Example 2: BSET instruction executed designating port 3

P37 and P36 are designated as input pins, with a low-level signal input at P37 and a high-level

signal at P36. The remaining pins, P35 to P31, are output pins and output low-level signals. In this

example, the BSET instruction is used to change pin P31 to high-level output.

Prior to executing BSET

P37 P36 P35 P34 P33 P32 P31 





Input/output Input Input Output Output Output Output Output 

Pin state Low

level High

level Low

level 

PCR3 00111111

PDR3 10000001

BSET instruction executed

BSET #1, @PDR3 The BSET instruction is executed for port 3.

After executing BSET

P37 P36 P35 P34 P33 P32 P31 





Input/output Input Input Output Output Output Output Output 

Pin state Low

level High

level Low

level High

level 

PCR3 00111111

PDR3 0100001 1

Description on operation

When the BSET instruction is executed, first the CPU reads port 3.

Since P37 and P36 are input pins, the CPU reads the pin states (low-level and high-level input).

P35 to P31 are output pins, so the CPU reads the value in PDR3. In this example PDR3 has a

value of H'81, but the value read by the CPU is H'41.

Next, the CPU sets bit 1 of the read data to 1, changing the PDR3 data to H'43.

Finally, the CPU writes H'43 to PDR3, completing execution of BSET.

As a result of the BSET instruction, bit 1 in PDR3 becomes 1, and P31 outputs a high-level signal.

However, bits 7 and 6 of PDR3 end up with different values. To prevent this problem, store a copy

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 65 of 462

of the PDR3 data in a work area in memory. Perform the bit manipulation on the data in the work

area, then write this data to PDR3.

Prior to executing BSET

MOV.B #81, R0L

MOV.B R0L, @RAM0

MOV.B R0L, @PDR3

The PDR3 value (H'81) is written to a work area in

memory (RAM0) as well as to PDR3.

P37 P36 P35 P34 P33 P32 P31 





Input/output Input Input Output Output Output Output Output 

Pin state Low

level High

level Low

level 

PCR3 00111111

PDR3 10000001

RAM0 10000001

BSET instruction executed

BSET #1, @RAM0 The BSET instruction is executed designating the PDR3

work area (RAM0).

After executing BSET

MOV.B @RAM0, R0L

MOV.B R0L, @PDR3 The work area (RAM0) value is written to PDR3.

P37 P36 P35 P34 P33 P32 P31 





Input/output Input Input Output Output Output Output Output 

Pin state Low

level High

level Low

level High

level 

PCR3 00111111

PDR3 1000001 1

RAM0 1000001 1

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 66 of 462

Bit Manipulation in Register Containing Write-Only Bit

Example 3: BCLR instruction executed designating PCR3

P37 and P36 are input pins, with a low-level signal input at P37 and a high-level signal input at

P36. P35 to P31 are output pins that output low-level signals.

An example of setting the P31 pin as an input pin by the BCLR instruction is shown below. It is

assumed that a high-level signal will be input to this input pin.

Prior to executing BCLR

P37 P36 P35 P34 P33 P32 P31 





Input/output Input Input Output Output Output Output Output 

Pin state Low

level High

level Low

level 

PCR3 00111111

PDR3 10000001

BCLR instruction executed

BCLR #1, @PCR3 The BCLR instruction is executed for PCR3.

After executing BCLR

P37 P36 P35 P34 P33 P32 P31 

Input/output Output Output Output Output Output Output Input 





Pin state Low

level High

level Low

level High

level 





PCR3 1111110 1

PDR3 10000001

Description on operation

When the BCLR instruction is executed, first the CPU reads PCR3. Since PCR3 is a write-only

Next, the CPU clears bit 1 in the read data to 0, changing the data to H'FD.

Finally, H'FD is written to PCR3 and BCLR instruction execution ends.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 67 of 462

As a result of this operation, bit 1 in PCR3 becomes 0, making P31 an input port. However, bits 7

and 6 in PCR3 change to 1, so that P37 and P36 change from input pins to output pins. To prevent

thisproblem,storeacopyofthePCR3datainaworkareainmemoryandmanipulatedataofthe

bit in the work area, then write this data to PCR3.

Prior to executing BCLR

MOV.B #3F, R0L

MOV.B R0L, @RAM0

MOV.B R0L, @PCR3

The PCR3 value (H'3F) is written to a work area in

memory (RAM0) as well as to PCR3.

P37 P36 P35 P34 P33 P32 P31 

Input/output Input Input Output Output Output Output Output 





Pin state Low

level High

level Low

level 





PCR3 00111111

PDR3 10000001

RAM0 00111111

BCLR instruction executed

BCLR #1, @RAM0 The BCLR instructions executed for the PCR3 work area

(RAM0).

After executing BCLR

MOV.B @RAM0, R0L

MOV.B R0L, @PCR3 The work area (RAM0) value is written to PCR3.

P37 P36 P35 P34 P33 P32 P31 





Input/output Input Input Output Output Output Output Output 

Pin state Low

level High

level Low

level High

level 

PCR3 0011110 1

PDR3 10000001

RAM0 0011110 1

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 68 of 462

Table 2.13 lists the pairs of registers that share identical addresses. Table 2.14 lists the registers

that contain write-only bits.

Table 2.13 Registers with Shared Addresses

Port data register 3*PDR3 H'FFD6

Port data register 4*PDR4 H'FFD7

Port data register 5*PDR5 H'FFD8

Port data register 6*PDR6 H'FFD9

Port data register 7*PDR7 H'FFDA

Port data register 8*PDR8 H'FFDB

Port data register A*PDRA H'FFDD

Note: *Port data registers have the same addresses as input pins.

Table 2.14 Registers with Write-Only Bits

Port control register 3 PCR3 H'FFE6

Port control register 4 PCR4 H'FFE7

Port control register 5 PCR5 H'FFE8

Port control register 6 PCR6 H'FFE9

Port control register 7 PCR7 H'FFEA

Port control register 8 PCR8 H'FFEB

Port control register A PCRA H'FFED

Timer control register F TCRF H'FFB6

PWM1 control register PWCR1 H'FFD0

PWM1 data register U PWDRU1 H'FFD1

PWM1 data register L PWDRL1 H'FFD2

PWM2 control register PWCR2 H'FFCD

PWM2 data register U PWDRU2 H'FFCE

PWM2 data register L PWDRL2 H'FFCF

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 69 of 462

Section 3 Exception Handling

Exception handling may be caused by a reset or interrupts.

•Reset

A reset has the highest exception priority. Exception handling starts as soon as the reset is

cleared by the RES pin. The chip is also reset when the watchdog timer overflows, and

exception handling starts. Exception handling is the same as exception handling by the RES

pin.

•Interrupts

External interrupts and internal interrupts are masked by the I bit in CCR, and kept masked

while the I bit is set to 1. Exception handling starts when the current instruction or exception

handling ends, if an interrupt request has been issued.

The following notes apply to the HD64F38004.

•Issue

Depending on the circuitry status at power-on, a vector 17 (system reservation) interrupt

request may be generated. If bit I in CCR is cleared to 0, this interrupt will be accepted just

like any other internal interrupt. This can cause processing exceptions to occur, and program

execution will eventually halt since there is no procedure for clearing the interrupt request flag

in question.

•Countermeasure

To prevent the above issue from occurring, it is recommended that the following steps be

added to programs written for the product.

Reset

Initialize stack pointer

Write H'9E to H'FFC3

Read H'FFC3

Write H'F1 to H'FFC3

Write H'BF to H'FFFA

Clear I bit in CCR User

program

Additional

steps

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 70 of 462

The following is an example in assembler.

.ORG H'0000

.DATA.W INIT

.ORG H'0100

INIT:

MOV.W #H'FF80:16,SP

MOV.B #H'9E:8,R0L

MOV.B R0L,@H'FFC3:8

MOV.B @H'FFC3:8,R0L

MOV.B #H'F1:8,R0L

MOV.B R0L,@H'FFC3:8

MOV.B #H'BF:8,R0L

MOV.B R0L,@H'FFFA:8

ANDC.B #H'7F:8,CCR ; user program

The following is an example in C.

void powerON_Reset(void)

{

// -------------------------------------------------------

unsigned char dummy;

*((volatile unsigned char *)0xffc3)= 0x9e;

dummy = *((volatile unsigned char *)0xffc3);

*((volatile unsigned char *)0xffc3)= 0xf1;

*((volatile unsigned char *)0xfffa)= 0xbf;

// -------------------------------------------------------

set_imask_ccr(0); // clear I bit

// user program

}

On the mask ROM version of the product, user programs may be used as is (including the

additional steps described above) or without the additional steps.

3.1 Exception Sources and Vector Address

Table 3.1 shows the vector addresses and priority of each exception handling. When more than

one interrupt is requested, handling is performed from the interrupt with the highest priority.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 71 of 462

Table 3.1 Exception Sources and Vector Address

Relative Module Exception Sources Vector

Number Vector Address Priority

RES pin

Watchdog timer Reset 0 H'0000 to H'0001 High

Reserved for system use 1 to 3 H'0002 to H'0007

IRQ0/Low-voltage detect

interrupt*4 H'0008 to H'0009

IRQ1 5 H'000A to H'000B

External interrupt

pin/Low-voltage

detect circuit

(LVD)*IRQAEC 6 H'000C to H'000D

Reserved for system use 7, 8 H'000E to H'0011

External interrupt

pin WKP0

WKP1

WKP2

WKP3

WKP4

WKP5

WKP6

WKP7

9 H'0012 to H'0013

Reserved for system use 10 H'0014 to H'0015

Timer A Timer A overflow 11 H'0016 to H'0017

Asynchronous

event counter Asynchronous event counter

overflow 12 H'0018 to H'0019

Reserved for system use 13 H'001A to H'001B

Timer FL compare match

Timer FL overflow 14 H'001C to H'001DTimer F

Timer FH compare match

Timer FH overflow 15 H'001E to H'001F

Reserved for system use 16, 17 H’0020 to H’0023

SCI3 Transmit end

Transmit data empty

Transmit data full

Receive error

18 H'0024 to H'0025

A/D converter A/D conversion end 19 H'0026 to H'0027

CPU Direct transition by execution of

SLEEP instruction 20 H'0028 to H'0029 Low

Note: *The low-voltage detection circuit and low-voltage detection interrupt are implemented on

the H8/38104 Group only.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 72 of 462

3.2 Register Descriptions

Interrupts are controlled by the following registers.

•Interrupt edge select register (IEGR)

•Interrupt enable register 1 (IENR1)

•Interrupt enable register 2 (IENR2)

•Interrupt request register 1 (IRR1)

•Interrupt request register 2 (IRR2)

•Wakeup interrupt request register (IWPR)

•Wakeup edge select register (WEGR)

3.2.1 Interrupt Edge Select Register (IEGR)

IEGR selects the direction of an edge that generates interrupt requests of pins and IRQ1 and IRQ0.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7to5 All 1 Reserved

These bits are always read as 1.

4to2 W Reserved

Thewritevalueshouldalwaysbe0.

0IEG1

IEG0 0

0R/W

R/W IRQ1 and IRQ0 Edge Select

0:FallingedgeofIRQn pin input is detected

1: Rising edge of IRQn pin input is detected

(n = 1 or 0)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 73 of 462

3.2.2 Interrupt Enable Register 1 (IENR1)

IENR1 enables timers and external pin interrupts.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7 IENTA 0 R/W Timer A interrupt enable

Enables or disables timer A overflow interrupt requests.

0: Disables timer A interrupt requests

1: Enables timer A interrupt requests

6W Reserved

Thewritevalueshouldalwaysbe0.

5 IENWP 0 R/W Wakeup Interrupt Enable

Enables or disables WKP7 to WKP0 interrupt requests.

0: Disables WKP7 to WKP0 interrupt requests

1: Enables WKP7 to WKP0 interrupt requests

4, 3 W Reserved

Thewritevalueshouldalwaysbe0.

2 IENEC2 0 R/W IRQAEC Interrupt Enable

Enables or disables IRQAEC interrupt requests.

0: Disables IRQAEC interrupt requests

1: Enables IRQAEC interrupt requests

0IEN1

IEN0 0

0R/W

R/W IRQ1 and IRQ0 Interrupt Enable

Enables or disables IRQ1 and IRQ0 interrupt requests.

0: Disables IRQn interrupt requests

1: Enables IRQn interrupt requests

(n = 1, 0)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 74 of 462

3.2.3 Interrupt Enable Register 2 (IENR2)

IENR2 enables direct transition, A/D converter, and timer interrupts.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7 IENDT 0 R/W Direct Transition Interrupt enable

Enables or disables direct transition interrupt requests.

0: Disables direct transition interrupt requests

1: Enables direct transition interrupt requests

6 IENAD 0 R/W A/D Converter Interrupt enable

Enables or disables A/D conversion end interrupt

requests.

0: Disables A/D converter interrupt requests

1: Enables A/D converter interrupt requests

5, 4 W Reserved

Thewritevalueshouldalwaysbe0.

3 IENTFH 0 R/W Timer FH Interrupt Enable

Enables or disables timer FH compare match or overflow

interrupt requests.

0: Disables timer FH interrupt requests

1: Enables timer FH interrupt requests

2 IENTFL 0 R/W Timer FL Interrupt Enable

Enables or disables timer FL compare match or overflow

interrupt requests.

0: Disables timer FL interrupt requests

1: Enables timer FL interrupt requests

1W Reserved

Thewritevalueshouldalwaysbe0.

0 IENEC 0 R/W Asynchronous Event Counter Interrupt Enable

Enables or disables asynchronous event counter interrupt

requests.

0: Disables asynchronous event counter interrupt

requests

1: Enables asynchronous event counter interrupt requests

For details on SCI3 interrupt control, refer to section 10.3.6, Serial Control Register 3 (SCR3).

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 75 of 462

3.2.4 Interrupt Request Register 1 (IRR1)

IRR1 is a status flag register for timer A, IRQAEC, IRQ1, and IRQ0 interrupt requests. The

corresponding flag is set to 1 when an interrupt request occurs. The flags are not cleared

automatically when an interrupt is accepted. It is necessary to write 0 to clear each flag.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7 IRRTA 0 R/W*Timer A Interrupt Request Flag

[Setting condition]

When the timer A counter value overflows from H'FF to

H'00

[Clearing condition]

When IRRTA = 1, it is cleared by writing 0

6, 4, 3 W Reserved

Thewritevalueshouldalwaysbe0.

51Reserved

This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.

2 IRREC2 0 R/W*IRQAEC Interrupt Request Flag

[Setting condition]

When pin IRQAEC is designated for interrupt input and

the designated signal edge is detected

[Clearing condition]

When IRREC2 = 1, it is cleared by writing 0

0IRRl1

IRRl0 0

0R/W*

R/W*IRQ1 and IRQ0 Interrupt Request Flag

[Setting condition]

When pin IRQn is designated for interrupt input and the

designated signal edge is detected

(n = 1, 0)

[Clearing condition]

When IRRI1 and IRRI0 = 1, they are cleared by writing 0

Note: *Only 0 can be written for flag clearing.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 76 of 462

3.2.5 Interrupt Request Register 2 (IRR2)

IRR2 is a status flag register for direct transition, A/D converter, timer FH, timer FL, and

asynchronous event counter interrupt requests. The corresponding flag is set to 1 when an interrupt

request occurs. The flags are not cleared automatically when an interrupt is accepted. It is

necessary to write 0 to clear each flag.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7 IRRDT 0 R/W*Direct Transition Interrupt Request Flag

[Setting condition]

WhenadirecttransitionismadebyexecutingaSLEEP

instruction while the DTON bit = 1

[Clearing condition]

When IRRDT = 1, it is cleared by writing 0

6 IRRAD 0 R/W*A/D Converter Interrupt Request Flag

[Setting condition]

When A/D conversion is completed and the ADSF bit is

cleared to 0

[Clearing condition]

When IRRAD = 1, it is cleared by writing 0

5, 4 W Reserved

Thewritevalueshouldalwaysbe0.

3 IRRTFH 0 R/W*Timer FH Interrupt Request Flag

[Setting condition]

When TCFH and OCRFH match in 8-bit timer mode, or

when TCF (TCFL, TCFH) and OCRF (OCRFL, OCRFH)

match in 16-bit timer mode

[Clearing condition]

When IRRTFH = 1, it is cleared by writing 0

2 IRRTFL 0 R/W*Timer FL Interrupt Request Flag

[Setting condition]

When TCFL and OCRFL match in 8-bit timer mode

[Clearing condition]

When IRRTFL = 1, it is cleared by writing 0

1W Reserved

Thewritevalueshouldalwaysbe0.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 77 of 462

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

0 IRREC 0 R/W*Asynchronous Event Counter Interrupt Request Flag

[Setting condition]

When ECH overflows in 16-bit counter mode, or ECH or

ECL overflows in 8-bit counter mode

[Clearing condition]

When IRREC = 1, it is cleared by writing 0

Note: *Only 0 can be written for flag clearing.

3.2.6 Wakeup Interrupt Request Register (IWPR)

IWPR is a status flag register for WKP7 to WKP0 interrupt requests. The flags are not cleared

automatically when an interrupt is accepted. It is necessary to write 0 to clear each flag.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

IWPF7

IWPF6

IWPF5

IWPF4

IWPF3

IWPF2

IWPF1

IWPF0

R/W*

Wakeup Interrupt Request Flag 7 to 0

[Setting condition]

When pin WKPn is designated for wakeup input and the

designated edge is detected

(n = 7 to 0)

[Clearing condition]

When IWPFn= 1, it is cleared by writing 0

Note: *Only 0 can be written for flag clearing.

3.2.7 Wakeup Edge Select Register (WEGR)

WEGR specifies rising or falling edge sensing for pins WKPn.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

WKEGS7

WKEGS6

WKEGS5

WKEGS4

WKEGS3

WKEGS2

WKEGS1

WKEGS0

R/W

WKPn Edge Select 7 to 0

Selects WKPn pin input sensing.

0: WKPn pin falling edge is detected

1: WKPn pin rising edge is detected

(n = 7 to 0)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 78 of 462

3.3 Reset Exception Handling

When the RES pin goes low, all processing halts and this LSI enters the reset. The internal state of

the CPU and the registers of the on-chip peripheral modules are initialized by the reset. To ensure

that this LSI is reset at power-on, hold the RES pin low until the clock pulse generator output

stabilizes. To reset the chip during operation, hold the RES pin low for at least 10 system clock

cycles. When the RES pin goes high after being held low for the necessary time, this LSI starts

reset exception handling. The reset exception handling sequence is shown in figure 3.1. The reset

exception handling sequence is as follows. However, refer to section 14.3.1, Power-On Reset

Circuit, for information on the reset sequence for the H8/38104 Group, which has a built-in

power-on reset function.

1. Set the I bit in the condition code register (CCR) to 1.

2. The CPU generates a reset exception handling vector address (from H'0000 to H'0001), the

data in that address is sent to the program counter (PC) as the start address, and program

execution starts from that address.

3.4 Interrupt Exception Handling

3.4.1 External Interrupts

There are external interrupts, WKP7 to WKP0, IRQ1, IRQ0, and IRQAEC.

WKP7 to WKP0 Interrupts

WKP7 to WKP0 interrupts are requested by input signals to pins WKP7 to WKP0.These

interrupts have the same vector addresses, and are detected individually by either rising edge

sensing or falling edge sensing, depending on the settings of bits WKEGS7 to WKEGS0 in

WEGR.

When pins WKP7 to WKP0 are designated for interrupt input in PMR5 and the designated signal

edge is input, the corresponding bit in IWPR is set to 1, requesting the CPU of an interrupt. These

interrupts can be masked by setting bit IENWP in IENR1.

IRQ1 and IRQ0 Interrupts

IRQ1 and IRQ0 interrupts are requested by input signals to pins IRQ1 and IRQ0. These interrupts

are given different vector addresses, and are detected individually by either rising edge sensing or

falling edge sensing, depending on the settings of bits IEG1 and IEG0 in IEGR.

When pins IRQ1 and IRQ0 are designated for interrupt input by PMRB and PMR2 and the

designated signal edge is input, the corresponding bit in IRR1 is set to 1, requesting the CPU of an

interrupt. These interrupts can be masked by setting bits IEN1 and IEN0 in IENR1.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 79 of 462

IRQAEC Interrupt

The IRQAEC interrupt is requested by an input signal to pin IRQAEC. This interrupt is detected

by either rising edge sensing or falling edge sensing, depending on the settings of bits AIEGS1

andAIEGS0inAEGSR.

When bit IENEC2 in IENR1 is designated for interrupt input and the designated signal edge is

input, the corresponding bit in IRR1 is set to 1, requesting the CPU of an interrupt.

Vector fetch

Internal

address bus

Internal read

signal

Internal write

signal

Internal data

bus (16 bits)

Internal

processing

Initial program

instruction prefetch

(1) Reset exception handling vector address (H'0000)

(2) Program start address

(3) Initial program instruction

(2) (3)

(2)

(1)

Reset cleared

Figure 3.1 Reset Sequence

3.4.2 Internal Interrupts

Each on-chip peripheral module has a flag to show the interrupt request status and the enable bit to

enable or disable the interrupt. For direct transition interrupt requests generated by execution of a

SLEEP instruction, this function is included in IRR1 and IRR2.

When an on-chip peripheral module requests an interrupt, the corresponding interrupt request

status flag is set to 1, requesting the CPU of an interrupt. When this interrupt is accepted, the I bit

is set to 1 in CCR. These interrupts can be masked by writing 0 to clear the corresponding enable

bit.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 80 of 462

3.4.3 Interrupt Handling Sequence

Interrupts are controlled by an interrupt controller.

Interrupt operation is described as follows.

1. If an interrupt occurs while the interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an interrupt request signal is sent

to the interrupt controller.

2. When multiple interrupt requests are generated, the interrupt controller requests to the CPU for

the interrupt handling with the highest priority at that time according to table 3.1. Other

interrupt requests are held pending.

3. Interrupt requests are accepted, if the I bit is cleared to 0 in CCR; if the I bit is set to 1, the

interrupt request is held pending.

4. If the CPU accepts the interrupt after processing of the current instruction is completed,

interrupt exception handling will begin. First, both PC and CCR are pushed onto the stack. The

state of the stack at this time is shown in figure 3.2. The PC value pushed onto the stack is the

address of the first instruction to be executed upon return from interrupt handling.

5. Then, the I bit in CCR is set to 1, masking further interrupts. Upon return from interrupt

handling, the values of I bit and other bits in CCR will be restored and returned to the values

prior to the start of interrupt exception handling.

6. Next, the CPU generates the vector address corresponding to the accepted interrupt, and

transfers the address to PC as a start address of the interrupt handling-routine. Then a program

starts executing from the address indicated in PC.

Figure 3.3 shows a typical interrupt sequence where the program area is in the on-chip ROM and

the stack area is in the on-chip RAM.

Notes: 1. When disabling interrupts by clearing bits in the interrupt enable register, or when

clearing bits in the interrupt request register, always do so while interrupts are masked

(I = 1).

2. If the above clear operations are performed while I = 0, and as a result a conflict arises

between the clear instruction and an interrupt request, exception processing for the

interrupt will be executed after the clear instruction has been executed.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 81 of 462

PC and CCR

saved to stack

SP (R7)

SP – 1

SP – 2

SP – 3

SP – 4

Stack area SP + 4

SP + 3

SP + 2

SP + 1

SP (R7)

Even address

Prior to start of interrupt

exception handling After completion of interrupt

exception handling

[Legend]

PCH:

PCL:

CCR:

SP:

Upper 8 bits of program counter (PC)

Lower 8 bits of program counter (PC)

Condition code register

Stack pointer

Notes:

CCR

PCH

PCL

PC shows the address of the first instruction to be executed upon return from the interrupt

handling routine.

an even-numbered address.

3. Ignored when returning from the interrupt handling routine.

Figure 3.2 Stack Status after Exception Handling

3.4.4 Interrupt Response Time

Table 3.2 shows the number of wait states after an interrupt request flag is set until the first

instruction of the interrupt handling-routine is executed.

Table 3.2 Interrupt Wait States

Item States Total

Waiting time for completion of executing instruction*1to13 15to27

Saving of PC and CCR to stack 4

Vector fetch 2

Instruction fetch 4

Internal processing 4

Note: *Not including EEPMOV instruction.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 82 of 462

Vector fetch

Internal

address bus

Internal read

signal

Internal write

signal

(2)

Internal data bus

(16 bits)

Interrupt

request signal

(9)

(1)

Internal

processing

Prefetch instruction of

interrupt-handling routine

(1) Instruction prefetch address (Instruction is not executed. Address is saved as PC contents, becoming return address.)

(2)(4) Instruction code (not executed)

(3) Instruction prefetch address (Instruction is not executed.)

(5) SP – 2

(6) SP – 4

(7) CCR

(8) Vector address

(9) Starting address of interrupt-handling routine (contents of vector)

(10) First instruction of interrupt-handling routine

(3) (9)(8)(6)(5)

(4) (1) (7) (10)

Stack access

Internal

processing

Instruction

prefetch

Interrupt level

decision and wait for

end of instruction

Interrupt is

accepted

Figure 3.3 Interrupt Sequence

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 83 of 462

3.5 Usage Notes

3.5.1 Interrupts after Reset

If an interrupt is accepted after a reset and before the stack pointer (SP) is initialized, the PC and

CCR will not be saved correctly, leading to a program crash. To prevent this, all interrupt requests

are disabled immediately after a reset. Since the first instruction of a program is always executed

immediately after the reset state ends, make sure that this instruction initializes the stack pointer

(example: MOV.W #xx: 16, SP).

3.5.2 Notes on Stack Area Use

When word data is accessed, the least significant bit of the address is regarded as 0. Access to the

stack always takes place in word size, so the stack pointer (SP: R7) should never indicate an odd

address. Use PUSH Rn (MOV.W Rn, @–SP) or POP Rn (MOV.W @SP+, Rn) to save or restore

3.5.3 Notes on Rewriting Port Mode Registers

When a port mode register is rewritten to switch the functions of external interrupt pins, IRQAEC,

IRQ1,IRQ0,andWKP7 to WKP0, the interrupt request flag may be set to 1.

When switching a pin function, mask the interrupt before setting the bit in the port mode register.

After accessing the port mode register, execute at least one instruction (e.g., NOP), then clear the

interrupt request flag from 1 to 0.

Table 3.3 lists the interrupt request flags which are set to 1 and the conditions.

Table 3.3 Conditions under which Interrupt Request Flag is Set to 1

Interrupt Request Flags

Set to 1 Conditions

IRREC2 When the edge designated by AIEGS1 and AIEGS0 in AEGSR is input

while IENEC2 in IENRI is set to 1.

IRRI1 When IRQ1 bit in PMRB is changed from 0 to 1 while pin IRQ1 is low

and IEG1 bit in IEGR = 0.

When IRQ1 bit in PMRB is changed from 1 to 0 while pin IRQ1 is low

and IEG1 bit in IEGR = 1.

IRR1

IRRI0 When IRQ0 bit in PMR2 is changed from 0 to 1 while pin IRQ0 is low

and IEG0 bit in IEGR = 0.

When IRQ0 bit in PMR2 is changed from 1 to 0 while pin IRQ0 is low

and IEG0 bit in IEGR = 1.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 84 of 462

Interrupt Request Flags

Set to 1 Conditions

IWPF7 When PMR5 bit WKP7 is changed from 0 to 1 while pin WKP7 is low

and WEGR bit WKEGS7 = 0.

When PMR5 bit WKP7 is changed from 1 to 0 while pin WKP7 is low

and WEGR bit WKEGS7 = 1.

IWPF6 When PMR5 bit WKP6 is changed from 0 to 1 while pin WKP6 is low

and WEGR bit WKEGS6 = 0.

When PMR5 bit WKP6 is changed from 1 to 0 while pin WKP6 is low

and WEGR bit WKEGS6 = 1.

IWPF5 When PMR5 bit WKP5 is changed from 0 to 1 while pin WKP5 is low

and WEGR bit WKEGS5 = 0.

When PMR5 bit WKP5 is changed from 1 to 0 while pin WKP5 is low

and WEGR bit WKEGS5 = 1.

IWPF4 When PMR5 bit WKP4 is changed from 0 to 1 while pin WKP4 is low

and WEGR bit WKEGS4 = 0.

When PMR5 bit WKP4 is changed from 1 to 0 while pin WKP4 is low

and WEGR bit WKEGS4 = 1.

IWPF3 When PMR5 bit WKP3 is changed from 0 to 1 while pin WKP3 is low

and WEGR bit WKEGS3 = 0.

When PMR5 bit WKP3 is changed from 1 to 0 while pin WKP3 is low

and WEGR bit WKEGS3 = 1.

IWPF2 When PMR5 bit WKP2 is changed from 0 to 1 while pin WKP2 is low

and WEGR bit WKEGS2 = 0.

When PMR5 bit WKP2 is changed from 1 to 0 while pin WKP2 is low

and WEGR bit WKEGS2 = 1.

IWPF1 When PMR5 bit WKP1 is changed from 0 to 1 while pin WKP1 is low

and WEGR bit WKEGS1 = 0.

When PMR5 bit WKP1 is changed from 1 to 0 while pin WKP1 is low

and WEGR bit WKEGS1 = 1.

IWPR

IWPF0 When PMR5 bit WKP0 is changed from 0 to 1 while pin WKP0 is low

and WEGR bit WKEGS0 = 0.

When PMR5 bit WKP0 is changed from 1 to 0 while pin WKP0 is low

and WEGR bit WKEGS0 = 1.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 85 of 462

3.5.4 Interrupt Request Flag Clearing Method

Use the following recommended method for flag clearing in the interrupt request registers (IRR1,

IRR2, and IWPR).

Recommended Method: Perform flag clearing with only one instruction. Either a bit

manipulation instruction or a data transfer instruction in bytes can be used. Two examples of

coding for clearing IRRI1 (bit 1 in IRR1) are shown below:

•BCR #1,@IRR1:8

•MOV.B R1L,@IRR1:8 (Set B′11111101 to R1L in advance)

Malfunction Example: When flag clearing is performed with several instructions, a flag, other

than the intended one, which was set while executing one of those instructions may be accidentally

cleared, and thus cause incorrect operations to occur.

An example of coding for clearing IRRI1 (bit 1 in IRR1), in which IRRI0 is also cleared and the

interrupt becomes invalid is shown below.

MOV.B @IRR1:8,R1L At this point, IRRI0 is 0.

AND.B #B′11111101,R1L IRRI0 becomes 1 here.

MOV.B R1L,@IRR1:8 IRRI0 is cleared to 0.

In the above example, an IRQ0 interrupt occurs while the AND.B instruction is executed. Since

not only the original target IRRI1, but also IRRI0 is cleared to 0, the IRQ0 interrupt becomes

invalid.

Figure 3.4 shows a port mode register setting and interrupt request flag clearing procedure.

CCR I bit 1

Set port mode register bit

Execute NOP instruction

Interrupts masked. (Another possibility

is to disable the relevant interrupt in

interrupt enable register 1.)

After setting the port mode register bit,

first execute at least one instruction

(e.g., NOP), then clear the interrupt

request flag to 0

Interrupt mask cleared

Clear interrupt request flag to 0

←

CCR I bit 0

←

Figure 3.4 Port Mode Register Setting and Interrupt Request Flag Clearing Procedure

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 86 of 462

CPG0201A_000020020900 Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 87 of 462

Section 4 Clock Pulse Generators

4.1 Features

Clock oscillator circuitry (CPG: clock pulse generator) is provided on-chip, including both a

system clock pulse generator and a subclock pulse generator. In the H8/38104 Group, the system

clock pulse generator includes an on-chip oscillator. The system clock pulse generator consists of

a system clock oscillator and system clock dividers. The subclock pulse generator consists of a

subclock oscillator and a subclock divider.

Figure 4.1 shows a block diagram of the clock pulse generators of the H8/3802 and H8/38004

Group. Figure 4.2 shows a block diagram of the clock pulse generators of the H8/38104 Group.

System

clock

oscillator

Subclock

oscillator Subclock

divider

(1/2, 1/4, 1/8)

System

clock

divider (1/2) System

clock

divider

Prescaler S

(13 bits)

Prescaler W

(5 bits)

OSC1

OSC2

System clock pulse generator

Subclock pulse generator

OSC

OSC)

)

/4 φ

SUB

φ/2

/128

φ/8192

OSC

/16

OSC

/32

OSC

/64

OSC

/128

Figure 4.1 Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generators (H8/3802, H8/38004 Group)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 88 of 462

System

clock

oscillator

Subclock

oscillator Subclock

divider

(1/2, 1/4, 1/8)

System

clock

divider

(1/2) System

clock

divider Prescaler S

(13 bits)

Prescaler W

(5 bits)

OSC1

Latch

On-chip

oscillator

Internal reset signal

IRQAEC

OSC2

System clock pulse generator

Subclock pulse generator

OSC

)

OSC

)

/4 φ

SUB

φ/2

φ/8192

/128

OSC

/16

OSC

/32

OSC

/64

OSC

/128

Figure 4.2 Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generators (H8/38104 Group)

The basic clock signals that drive the CPU and on-chip peripheral modules are φand φSUB.The

system clock is divided by prescaler S to become a clock signal from φ/8192 to φ/2, and the

subclock is divided by prescaler W to become a clock signal from φw/128 to φw/8. Both the

system clock and subclock signals are provided to the on-chip peripheral modules.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 89 of 462

4.2 Register Description

Oscillator Control Register (OSCCR) (H8/38104 Group Only)

OSCCR contains a flag indicating the selection status of the system clock oscillator and on-chip

oscillator, indicates the input level of the IRQAEC pin during resets, and controls whether the

subclock oscillator operates or not.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7 SUBSTP 0 R/W Subclock oscillator stop control

0: Subclock oscillator operates

1: Subclock oscillator stopped

Note: Bit 7 can be set to 1 only in the active mode (high-

speed/medium-speed). Setting bit 7 to 1 in the

subactive mode will cause the LSI to stop

operating.

60RReserved

This bit is always read as 0

5to3 All 0 R/W Reserved

These bits are read/write enabled reserved bits.

2 IRQAECF R IRQAEC flag

This bit indicates the IRQAEC pin input level set during

resets.

0: IRQAEC pin set to GND during resets

1: IRQAEC pin set to VCC during resets

1OSCFROSCflag

This bit indicates the oscillator operating with the system

clock pulse generator.

0: System clock oscillator operating (on-chip oscillator

stopped)

1: Ring oscillator operating (system clock oscillator

stopped)

00R/WReserved

Neverwrite1tothisbit,asitcancausetheLSIto

malfunction.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 90 of 462

4.3 System Clock Generator

Clock pulses can be supplied to the system clock divider either by connecting a crystal or ceramic

resonator, or by providing external clock input. Figure 4.3 shows a block diagram of the system

clock generator.

As shown in figure 4.2, the H8/38104 Group supports selection between a system clock oscillator

and an on-chip oscillator. See section 4.3.4, on-chip oscillator selection method, for information

on selecting the on-chip oscillator.

LPM

Power-down mode (standby mode, subactive mode,

subsleep mode, watch mode)

OSC2

OSC1

Note: LPM:

Figure 4.3 Block Diagram of System Clock Generator

4.3.1 Connecting Crystal Resonator

Figure 4.4(1) shows a typical method of connecting a crystal oscillator to the H8/3802 Group, and

figure 4.4(2) shows a typical method of connecting a crystal oscillator to the H8/38004 and

H8/38104 Group. Figure 4.5 shows the equivalent circuit of a crystal resonator. A resonator

having the characteristics given in table 4.1 should be used.

OSC1

OSC2

Frequency Manufacturer C1, C2 Recommendation Value

4.19 MHz NIHON DEMPA KOGYO CO., LTD.

Note: Consult with the crystal resonator manufacturer

to determine the circuit constants.

12 pF ±20%

C = C = 12 pF ±20%

Rf = 1 MΩ ±20%

Figure 4.4(1) Typical Connection to Crystal Resonator (H8/3802 Group)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 91 of 462

OSC1

OSC2

Frequency Manufacturer C1, C2

Recommendation

Value

Prodoct

Name

4.0 MHz NIHON DEMPA KOGYO CO.,

LTD. NR-18

Note: Consult with the crystal resonator manufacturer

to determine the circuit constants.

12 pF ±20%

Rf = 1 MΩ ±20%

Figure 4.4(2) Typical Connection to Crystal Resonator (H8/38004, H8/38104 Group)

OSC1 OSC2

Figure 4.5 Equivalent Circuit of Crystal Resonator

Table 4.1 Crystal Resonator Parameters

Frequency (MHz) 4.10 4.193

RS(max) 100 Ω

C0(max) 16 pF

4.3.2 Connecting Ceramic Resonator

Figure 4.6(1) shows a typical method of connecting a ceramic oscillator to the H8/3802 Group,

and figure 4.6(2) shows a typical method of connecting a crystal oscillator to the H8/38004 and

H8/38104 Group.

OSC1

OSC2

C = C = 30 pF ±10%

Rf = 1 MΩ ±20%

Rf Frequency Manufacturer C1, C2 Recommendation Value

4.0 MHz Murata Manufacturing Co., Ltd.

Note: Consult with the ceramic resonator manufacturer

to determine the circuit constants.

30 pF ±10%

Figure 4.6(1) Typical Connection to Ceramic Resonator (H8/3802 Group)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 92 of 462

OSC1

OSC2

Murata Manufacturing Co.,

Ltd.

Frequency

Ceramic

resonator

Manufacturer C1, C2

Recommendation

Value

Prodoct Name

2.0 MHz

10.0 MHz

16.0 MHz*

CSTCC2M00G53-B0

CSTCC2M00G56-B0

CSTLS10M0G53-B0

CSTLS10M0G56-B0

CSTLS16M0X53-B0

Note: Consult with the crystal resonator manufacturer

to determine the circuit constants.

This does not apply to the H8/38004 Group.

15 pF ±20%

47 pF ±20%

15 pF ±20%

47 pF ±20%

15 pF ±20%

Rf = 1 MΩ ±20%

Figure 4.6(2) Typical Connection to Ceramic Resonator (H8/38004, H8/38104 Group)

4.3.3 External Clock Input Method

Connect an external clock signal to pin OSC1, and leave pin OSC2 open. Figure 4.6 shows a

typical connection. The duty cycle of the external clock signal must be 45 to 55%.

OSC1 External clock input

OSC2 Open

Figure 4.7 Example of External Clock Input

4.3.4 On-Chip Oscillator Selection Method (H8/38104 Group Only)

The on-chip oscillator is selected by setting the IRQAEC pin input level during resets. The

IRQAEC pin input level set during resets must be fixed at VCC or GND, based on the oscillator to

be selected. It is not necessary to connect an oscillator to pins OSC1 and OSC2 if the on-chip

oscillator is selected. In this case, pin OSC1 should be fixed at VCC or GND.

Note: The system clock oscillator must be selected in order to program or erase flash memory as

part of operations such as on-board programming. Also, when using the on-chip emulator,

an oscillator should be connected, or an external clock input, even if the on-chip oscillator

is selected.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 93 of 462

Table 4.2 System Clock Oscillator and On-Chip Oscillator Selection Methods

IRQAEC pin input level (during resets) 01

System clock oscillator Enabled Disabled

On-chip oscillator Disabled Enabled

4.4 Subclock Generator

Figure 4.8 shows a block diagram of the subclock generator. Note that on the H8/38104 Group the

subclock oscillator can be disabled by programs by setting the SUBSTP bit in the OSCCR

When restoring operation of the subclock oscillator after it has been disabled using the OSCCR

using the subclock.

Note : Resistance is a reference value.

10 M

Figure 4.8 Block Diagram of Subclock Generator

4.4.1 Connecting 32.768-kHz/38.4-kHz Crystal Resonator

Clock pulses can be supplied to the subclock divider by connecting a 32.768-kHz or 38.4-kHz

crystal resonator, as shown in figure 4.9. Figure 4.10 shows the equivalent circuit of the 32.768-

kHz or 38.4-kHz crystal resonator. Note that only operation at 32.768 kHz is guaranteed on the

H8/38104 Group.

C = C = 15 pF (typ.)

Frequency Manufacturer Product Name

38.4 kHz Seiko Instruments Inc.

Note: Consult with the crystal resonator manufacturer

to determine the circuit constants.

VTC-200

32.768 kHz NIHON DEMPA KOGYO CO., LTD. MX73P

Figure 4.9 Typical Connection to 32.768-kHz/38.4-kHz Crystal Resonator

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 94 of 462

X1 X2

= 1.5 pF (typ.)

= 14 kΩ (typ.)

= 32.768 kHz/38.4 kHz

Note: Constants are reference values.

Figure 4.10 Equivalent Circuit of 32.768-kHz/38.4-kHz Crystal Resonator

4.4.2 Pin Connection when Not Using Subclock

When the subclock is not used, connect pin X1 to GND and leave pin X2 open, as shown in figure

4.11.

X1 GND

X2 Open

Figure 4.11 Pin Connection when Not Using Subclock

4.4.3 External Clock Input

Connect the external clock to pin X1 and leave pin X2 open, as shown in figure 4.12.

Note that input of an external clock is not supported on the H8/38104 Group.

External clock input

Open

Figure 4.12 Pin Connection when Inputting External Clock

Frequency Subclock (φ

φφ

φw)

Duty 45%to 55%

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 95 of 462

4.5 Prescalers

4.5.1 Prescaler S

Prescaler S is a 13-bit counter using the system clock (φ) as its input clock. It is incremented once

per clock period. Prescaler S is initialized to H'0000 by a reset, and starts counting on exit from

the reset state. In standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, and subsleep mode, the system

clock pulse generator stops. Prescaler S also stops and is initialized to H'0000. The CPU cannot

read or write prescaler S. The output from prescaler S is shared by the on-chip peripheral modules.

The division ratio can be set separately for each on-chip peripheral function. In active (medium-

speed) mode and sleep mode, the clock input to prescaler S is determined by the division ratio

designated by the MA1 and MA0 bits in SYSCR2.

4.5.2 Prescaler W

Prescaler W is a 5-bit counter using a 32.768 kHz or 38.4 kHz signal divided by 4 (φW/4) as its

input clock. The divided output is used for clock time base operation of timer A. Prescaler W is

initialized to H'00 by a reset, and starts counting on exit from the reset state. Even in standby

mode, watch mode, subactive mode, or subsleep mode, prescaler W continues functioning.

Prescaler W can be reset by setting 1s in bits TMA3 and TMA2 in TMA.

4.6 Usage Notes

4.6.1 Note on Resonators

Resonator characteristics are closely related to board design and should be carefully evaluated by

the user, referring to the examples shown in this section. Resonator circuit constants will differ

depending on the resonator element, stray capacitance in its interconnecting circuit, and other

factors. Suitable constants should be determined in consultation with the resonator manufacturer.

Design the circuit so that the resonator never receives voltages exceeding its maximum rating.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 96 of 462

(Vss)

PB3

Vss

OSC2

OSC1

TEST

Figure 4.13 Example of Crystal and Ceramic Resonator Arrangement

Figure 4.14 (1) shows an example of the measurement circuit for the negative resistor which is

recommended by the resonator manufacturer. Note that if the negative resistor in this circuit does

not reach the level which is recommended by the resonator manufacturer, the main oscillator may

be hard to start oscillation.

If the negative resistor does not reach the level which is recommended by the resonator

manufacturer and oscillation is not started, changes as shown in figure 4.14 (2) to (4) should be

made. The proposed change and capacitor size to be applied should be determined according to the

evaluation result of the negative resistor and frequency deviation, etc.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 97 of 462

Change

OSC1

Negative resistor -R added

(1) Negative resistor measurement circuit (2) Proposed Change in Oscillator Circuit 1

(3) Proposed Change in Oscillator Circuit 2 (4) Proposed Change in Oscillator Circuit 3

Change

OSC2

OSC1

OSC2

OSC1

OSC2

OSC1

OSC2

Figure 4.14 Negative Resistor Measurement and Proposed Changes in Circuit

4.6.2 Notes on Board Design

When using a crystal resonator (ceramic resonator), place the resonator and its load capacitors as

close as possible to the OSC1 and OSC2 pins. Other signal lines should be routed away from the

resonator circuit to prevent induction from interfering with correct oscillation (see figure 4.15).

OSC1

OSC2

Signal A Signal BAvoid

Figure 4.15 Example of Incorrect Board Design

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 98 of 462

4.6.3 Definition of Oscillation Stabilization Standby Time

Figure 4.16 shows the oscillation waveform (OSC2), system clock (φ), and microcomputer

operating mode when a transition is made from standby mode, watch mode, or subactive mode, to

active (high-speed/medium-speed) mode, with a resonator connected to the system clock

oscillator.

As shown in figure 4.16, as the system clock oscillator is halted in standby mode, watch mode,

and subactive mode, when a transition is made to active (high-speed/medium-speed) mode, the

sum of the following two times (oscillation stabilization time and standby time) is required.

1. Oscillation stabilization time (trc)

The time from the point at which the oscillation waveform of the system clock oscillator starts to

change when an interrupt is generated, until the amplitude of the oscillation waveform increases

and the oscillation frequency stabilizes.

2. Standby time

The time required for the CPU and peripheral functions to begin operating after the oscillation

waveform frequency and system clock have stabilized.

The standby time setting is selected with standby timer select bits 2 to 0 (STS2 to STS0) (bits 6 to

4 in the system control register 1 (SYSCR1)).

Oscillation waveform

(OSC2)

System clock

(φ)

Oscillation stabilization standby time

Standby mode,

watch mode,

or subactive mode

Oscillation stabilization time

Active (high-speed) mode

active (medium-speed) mode

Standby time

Interrupt accepted

Operating mode

Figure 4.16 Oscillation Stabilization Standby Time

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 99 of 462

When standby mode, watch mode, or subactive mode is cleared by an interrupt or reset, and a

transition is made to active (high-speed/medium-speed) mode, the oscillation waveform begins to

change at the point at which the interrupt is accepted. Therefore, when a resonator is connected in

standby mode, watch mode, or subactive mode, since the system clock oscillator is halted, the time

from the point at which this oscillation waveform starts to change until the amplitude of the

oscillation waveform increases and the oscillation frequency stabilizes—that is, the oscillation

stabilization time—is required.

The oscillation stabilization time in the case of these state transitions is the same as the oscillation

stabilization time at power-on (the time from the point at which the power supply voltage reaches

the prescribed level until the oscillation stabilizes), specified by "oscillation stabilization time trc "

in the AC characteristics.

Meanwhile, once the system clock has halted, a standby time of at least 8 states is necessary in

order for the CPU and peripheral functions to operate normally.

Thus, the time required from interrupt generation until operation of the CPU and peripheral

functions is the sum of the above described oscillation stabilization time and standby time. This

total time is called the oscillation stabilization standby time, and is expressed by equation (1)

below.

Oscillation stabilization standby time = oscillation stabilization time + standby time

rc + (8 to 16,384 states) ................. (1)

Therefore, when a transition is made from standby mode, watch mode, or subactive mode, to

active (high-speed/medium-speed) mode, with a resonator connected to the system clock

oscillator, careful evaluation must be carried out on the installation circuit before deciding on the

oscillation stabilization standby time. In particular, since the oscillation settling time is affected by

installation circuit constants, stray capacitance, and so forth, suitable constants should be

determined in consultation with the resonator manufacturer.

4.6.4 Notes on Use of Crystal Resonator (Excluding Ceramic Resonator)

When a microcomputer operates, the internal power supply potential fluctuates slightly in

synchronization with the system clock. Depending on the individual crystal resonator

characteristics, the oscillation waveform amplitude may not be sufficiently large immediately after

the oscillation stabilization standby time, making the oscillation waveform susceptible to influence

by fluctuations in the power supply potential. In this state, the oscillation waveform may be

disrupted, leading to an unstable system clock and erroneous operation of the microcomputer.

If erroneous operation occurs, change the setting of standby timer select bits 2 to 0 (STS2 to

STS0) (bits 6 to 4 in system control register 1 (SYSCR1)) to give a longer standby time.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 100 of 462

For example, if erroneous operation occurs with a standby time setting of 16 states, check the

operation with a standby time setting of 1,024* states or more.

If the same kind of erroneous operation occurs after a reset as after a state transition, hold the RES

pin low for a longer period.

Note: * This figure applies to the H8/3802 and H8/38004 Groups. The number of states on the

H8/38104 Group is 8,192 or more.

4.6.5 Notes on H8/38104 Group

When using the on-chip emulator, system clock precision is necessary for programming or erasing

the flash memory. However, the on-chip oscillator frequency can vary due to changes in

conditions such as voltage or temperature. Consequently, when using the on-chip emulator, pins

OSC1 and OSC2 should be connected to an oscillator, or an external clock should be supplied, if

the on-chip oscillator is selected. In this case, the LSI uses the on-chip oscillator when user

programs are being executed and the system clock oscillator when programming or erasing flash

memory. The process is controlled by the on-chip emulator.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 101 of 462

Section 5 Power-Down Modes

This LSI has eight modes of operation after a reset. These include a normal active (high-speed)

mode and seven power-down modes, in which power consumption is significantly reduced. The

module standby function reduces power consumption by selectively halting on-chip module func-

tions.

•Active (medium-speed) mode

The CPU and all on-chip peripheral modules are operable on the system clock. The system

clock frequency can be selected from φosc/16, φosc/32, φosc/64, and φosc/128.

•Subactive mode

The CPU and all on-chip peripheral modules are operable on the subclock. The subclock fre-

quency can be selected from φw/2, φw/4, and φw/8.

•Sleep (high-speed) mode

The CPU halts. On-chip peripheral modules are operable on the system clock.

•Sleep (medium-speed) mode

The CPU halts. On-chip peripheral modules are operable on the system clock. The system

clock frequency can be selected from φosc/16, φosc/32, φosc/64, and φosc/128.

•Subsleep mode

The CPU halts. The timer A, timer F, SCI3, AEC, and LCD controller/driver are operable on

the subclock. The subclock frequency can be selected from φw/2, φw/4, and φw/8.

•Watch mode

The CPU halts. Timer A's timekeeping function, timer F, AEC, and LCD controller/driver are

operable on the subclock.

•Standby mode

The CPU and all on-chip peripheral modules halt.

•Module standby function

Independent of the above modes, power consumption can be reduced by halting on-chip pe-

ripheral modules that are not used in module units.

Note: In this manual, active (high-speed) mode and active (medium-speed) mode are collectively

called active mode.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 102 of 462

5.1 Register Descriptions

The registers related to power-down modes are as follows.

•System control register 1 (SYSCR1)

•System control register 2 (SYSCR2)

•Clockhaltregisters1and2(CKSTPR1andCKSTPR2)

5.1.1 System Control Register 1 (SYSCR1)

SYSCR1 controls the power-down modes, as well as SYSCR2.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7 SSBY 0 R/W Software Standby

Selects the mode to transit after the execution of the

SLEEP instruction.

0: A transition is made to sleep mode or subsleep mode.

1: A transition is made to standby mode or watch mode.

For details, see table 5.2.

STS2

STS1

STS0

R/W

Standby Timer Select 2 to 0

Designate the time the CPU and peripheral modules wait

for stable clock operation after exiting from standby

mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, or watch mode

to active mode or sleep mode due to an interrupt. The

designation should be made according to the operating

frequency so that the waiting time is at least equal to the

oscillation stabilization time. The relationship between the

specified value and the number of wait states is shown in

tables 5.1(1) and 5.1(2).

When an external clock is to be used, the minimum value

(STS2 = 1, STS1 = 0, STS0 = 1) is recommended. 8,192

states (STS2 = STS1 = STS0 = 0) is recommended if the

on-chip oscillator is used on the H8/38104 Group. If the

setting other than the recommended value is made, op-

eration may start before the end of the waiting time.

3 LSON 0 R/W Selects the system clock (φ)orsubclock(φSUB)asthe

CPU operating clock when watch mode is cleared.

0: The CPU operates on the system clock (φ)

1: The CPU operates on the subclock (φSUB)

21Reserved

This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 103 of 462

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

0MA1

MA0 1

1R/W

R/W Active Mode Clock Select 1 and 0

Select φOSC/16, φOSC/32, φOSC/64, or φOSC/128 as the op-

erating clock in active (medium-speed) mode and sleep

(medium-speed) mode. The MA1 and MA0 bits should be

written to in active (high-speed) mode or subactive mode.

00: φOSC/16

01: φOSC/32

10: φOSC/64

11: φOSC/128

Table 5.1(1) Operating Frequency and Waiting Time (H8/3802 Group, H8/38004 Group)

Bit Operating Frequency

STS2 STS1 STS0 Waiting Time 5 MHz 2 MHz

0 0 0 8,192 states 1.638 4.1

1 16,384 states 3.277 8.2

1 0 1,024 states 0.205 0.512

1 2,048 states 0.410 1.024

1 0 0 4,096 states 0.819 2.048

1 2 states (external clock input) 0.0004 0.001

1 0 8 states 0.002 0.004

1 16 states 0.003 0.008

Table 5.1(2) Operating Frequency and Waiting Time (H8/38104 Group)

Bit Operating Frequency

STS2 STS1 STS0 Waiting Time 5 MHz 2 MHz

0 0 0 8,192 states 1.638 4.1

1 16,384 states 3.277 8.2

1 0 32,768 states 6.554 16.4

1 65,536 states 13.108 32.8

1 0 0 131,072 states 26.216 65.5

1 2 states (external clock input) 0.0004 0.001

1 0 8 states 0.002 0.004

1 16 states 0.003 0.008

Note: The time unit is ms.

If external clock input is used, STS2 to STS0 should be set to the external clock input mode

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 104 of 462

before the mode transition is executed. In addition, STS2 to STS0 should not be set to the

external clock input mode if external clock input is not used. When the on-chip clock oscil-

lator is used on the H8/38104 Group, a setting of 8,192 states (STS2 = STS1 = STS0 = 0)

is recommended.

5.1.2 System Control Register 2 (SYSCR2)

SYSCR2 controls the power-down modes, as well as SYSCR1.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7to5 All 1 Reserved

These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modi-

fied.

4 NESEL 1 R/W Noise Elimination Sampling Frequency Select

Selects the frequency at which the watch clock signal

(φW) generated by the subclock pulse generator is sam-

pled, in relation to the oscillator clock (φOSC) generated

by the system clock pulse generator. When φOSC =2to

16 MHz, clear this bit to 0.

0: Sampling rate is φOSC/16.

1: Sampling rate is φOSC/4.

3DTON0R/WDirectTransferonFlag

Selects the mode to which the transition is made after

the SLEEP instruction is executed with bits SSBY and

LSON in SYSCR1, bit MSON in SYSCR2, and bit TMA3

in TMA.

For details, see table 5.2.

2 MSON 0 R/W Medium Speed on Flag

After standby, watch, or sleep mode is cleared, this bit

selects active (high-speed) or active (medium-speed)

mode.

0: Operation in active (high-speed) mode

1: Operation in active (medium-speed) mode

0SA1

SA0 0

0R/W

R/W Subactive Mode Clock Select 1 and 0

Select the operating clock frequency in subactive and

subsleep modes. The operating clock frequency

changes to the set frequency after the SLEEP instruc-

tion is executed.

00: φW/8

01: φW/4

1X: φW/2

[Legend] X: Don't care.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 105 of 462

5.1.3 Clock Halt Registers 1 and 2 (CKSTPR1 and CKSTPR2)

CKSTPR1 and CKSTPR2 allow the on-chip peripheral modules to enter a standby state in module

units.

•CKSTPR1

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7, 6 All 1 Reserved

5 S32CKSTP 1 R/W SCI Module Standby

SCI3 enters standby mode when this bit is cleared to

0.*2

4 ADCKSTP 1 R/W A/D Converter Module Standby

A/D converter enters standby mode when this bit is

cleared to 0.

31Reserved

2 TFCKSTP 1 R/W Timer F Module Standby

Timer F enters standby mode when this bit is cleared to

11Reserved

0 TACKSTP 1 R/W Timer A Module Standby*3

Timer A enters standby mode when this bit is cleared to

•CKSTPR2

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7 LVDCKSTP 1 R/W LVD module standby

The LVD module enters standby status when this bit is

cleared to 0.

Note: On products other than the H8/38104 Group,

this bit is reserved like bits 6 and 5.

6, 5 All 1 Reserved

4 PW2CKSTP 1 R/W*1PWM2 Module Standby

PWM2 enters standby mode when this bit is cleared to

3 AECKSTP 1 R/W Asynchronous Event Counter Module Standby

Asynchronous event counter enters standby mode

when this bit is cleared to 0

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 106 of 462

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

2 WDCKSTP 1 R/W*4Watchdog Timer Module Standby

Watchdog timer enters standby mode when this bit is

cleared to 0

1 PW1CKSTP 1 R/W PWM1 Module Standby

PWM1 enters standby mode when this bit is cleared to

0 LDCKSTP 1 R/W LCD Module Standby

LCD controller/driver enters standby mode when this bit

is cleared to 0

Notes: 1. This bit cannot be read or written in the H8/3802 Group.

2. When the SCI module standby is set, all registers in the SCI3 enter the reset state.

3. When the timer A module standby is set, the TMA3 bit in TMA cannot be rewritten.

When the TMA3 bit is rewritten, the TACKSTP bit in CKSTPR1 should be set to 1 in

advance.

4. This bit cannot be read or written in the H8/3802 Group. This bit is valid when the

WDON bit in TCSRW is 0. If this bit is cleared to 0 while the WDON bit is set to 1 (while

the watchdog timer is operating), this bit is cleared to 0. However, the watchdog timer

does not enter module standby mode and continues operating. When the watchdog

timer stops operating and the WDON bit is cleared to 0 by software, this bit is valid and

the watchdog timer enters module standby mode.

5.2 Mode Transitions and States of LSI

Figure 5.1 shows the possible transitions among these operating modes. A transition is made from

the program execution state to the program halt state of the program by executing a SLEEP in-

struction. Interrupts allow for returning from the program halt state to the program execution state

of the program. A direct transition between active mode and subactive mode, which are both pro-

gram execution states, can be made without halting the program. The operating frequency can also

be changed in the same modes by making a transition directly from active mode to active mode,

and from subactive mode to subactive mode. RES input enables transitions from a mode to the

reset state. Table 5.2 shows the transition conditions of each mode after the SLEEP instruction is

executed and a mode to return by an interrupt. Table 5.3 shows the internal states of the LSI in

each mode.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 107 of 462

Reset state

Standby

mode

Watch

mode

Active

(high-speed

mode)

Sleep

(high-speed)

mode

Active

(medium-speed)

mode

Sleep

(medium-speed)

mode

Subactive

mode Subsleep

mode

Power-down modes: Transition is made after exception handling

is executed.

Program

halt state

Program

execution state Program

halt state

Note: A transition between different modes cannot be made to occur simply because an interrupt

request is generated. Make sure that interrupt handling is performed after the interrupt is

accepted.

SLEEP

instruction

SLEEP

instruction

SLEEP

instruction

SLEEP

instruction

SLEEP

instruction

SLEEP

instruction

SLEEP

instruction

SLEEP

instruction

SLEEP

instruction

SLEEP

instruction

fga

LSON MSON SSBY TMA3 DTON

a 0 0 0 * 0

b 0 1 0 * 0

c 1 * 0 1 0

d 0 * 1 0 0

e * * 1 1 0

f 0 0 0 * 1

g 0 1 0 * 1

h 0 1 1 1 1

i 1 * 1 1 1

j 0 0 1 1 1

Interrupt Sources

Timer A, Timer F interrupt, IRQ0 interrupt,

WKP7 to WKP0 interrupts

Timer A, Timer F, SCI3 interrupt, IRQ1 and

IRQ0 interrupts, IRQAEC, WKP7 o WKP0

interrupts, AEC

All interrupts

IRQ1 or IRQ0 interrupt, WKP7 to WKP0

interrupts

* Don't care

Mode Transition Conditions (1) Mode Transition Conditions (2)

SLEEP

instruction

SLEEP

instruction

SLEEP

instruction

SLEEP

instruction

SLEEP

instruction

SLEEP

instruction

Figure 5.1 Mode Transition Diagram

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 108 of 462

Table 5.2 Transition Mode after SLEEP Instruction Execution and Interrupt Handling

LSON MSON SSBY TMA3 DTON

Transition Mode after

SLEEP Instruction

Execution Transition Mode due to

Interrupt

0 0 0 X 0 Sleep (high-speed) mode Active (high-speed) mode

0 1 0 X 0 Sleep (medium-speed)

mode Active (medium-speed)

mode

1X010Subsleepmode Subactive mode

0X100Standby mode Active mode

XX110Watchmode Activemode, subactive

mode

0 0 0 X 1 Active (high-speed) mode 

0 1 0 X 1 Active (medium-speed)

mode 

01111Active(medium-speed)

mode 

1X111Subactive mode (direct

transition) 

00111Active(high-speed)mode

(direct transition) 

[Legend] X: Don’t care.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 109 of 462

Table 5.3 Internal State in Each Operating Mode

Active Mode Sleep Mode

Function High-

speed Medium-

speed High-

speed Medium-

speed Watch

Mode

Subac-

tive

Mode Subsleep

Mode Stand-by

Mode

System clock oscil-

lator Func-

tioning Func-

tioning Halted Halted Halted Halted

Subclock oscillator Func-

tioning Func-

tioning

Instruc-

tions Func-

tioning Func-

tioning Halted Halted Halted Func-

tioning Halted Halted

RAM

Registers

Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained

CPU

I/O Re-

tained*1

IRQ0 Func-

tioning Func-

tioning

IRQ1

Func-

tioning

IRQAEC

Re-

tained*5Re-

tained*5

External

interrupts

WKP7 to

WKP0 Func-

tioning Func-

tioning

Timer A Func-

tioning Func-

tioning*4Func-

tioning*4Retained

Asyn-

chronous

counter

Func-

tioning*6Func-

tioning Func-

tioning*6

Timer F Function-

ing/reta-

ined*7

Function-

ing/reta-

ined*7

Function-

ing/reta-

ined*7

Retained

WDT Function-

ing/reta-

ined*9

Function-

ing/reta-

ined*8

Function-

ing/reta-

ined*9

Function-

ing/reta-

ined*10

SCI3 Func-

tioning Func-

tioning Reset Function-

ing/reta-

ined*2

Function-

ing/reta-

ined*2

Reset

Periph-

eral

modules

PWM Func-

tioning Func-

tioning Retained Retained Retained Retained

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 110 of 462

Active Mode Sleep Mode

Function High-

speed Medium-

speed High-

speed Medium-

speed Watch

Mode

Subac-

tive

Mode Subsleep

Mode Stand-by

Mode

A/D con-

verter Func-

tioning Func-

tioning Retained Retained Retained RetainedPeriph-

eral

modules LCD Func-

tioning Func-

tioning Function-

ing/reta-

ined*3

Function-

ing/reta-

ined*3

Function-

ing/reta-

ined*3

Retained

LVD Func-

tioning Func-

tioning

Notes: 1. Register contents are retained. Output is the high-impedance state.

2. Functioning if φW/2 is selected as an internal clock, or halted and retained otherwise.

3. Functioning if φw, φw/2, or φw/4 is selected as a clock to be used. Halted and retained

otherwise.

4. Functioning if the timekeeping time-base function is selected.

5. An external interrupt request is ignored. Contents of the interrupt request register are

not affected.

6. The counter can be incremented. An interrupt cannot occur.

7. Functioning if φw/4 is selected as an internal clock. Halted and retained otherwise.

8. On the H8/38104 Group, operates when φw/32 is selected as the internal clock or the

on-chip oscillator is selected; otherwise stops and stands by. On the H8/38004 Group,

operates when φw/32 is selected as the internal clock; otherwise stops and stands by.

9. On the H8/38104 Group, operates when φw/32 is selected as the internal clock or the

on-chip oscillator is selected; otherwise stops and stands by. On the H8/38004 Group,

stops and stands by.

10.On the H8/38104 Group, operates only when the on-chip oscillator is selected; other-

wise stops and stands by. On the H8/38004 Group, stops and stands by.

5.2.1 Sleep Mode

In sleep mode, CPU operation is halted but the system clock oscillator, subclock oscillator, and

on-chip peripheral modules function. In sleep (medium-speed) mode, the on-chip peripheral mod-

ules function at the clock frequency set by the MA1 and MA0 bits in SYSCR1. CPU register con-

tents are retained.

Sleep mode is cleared by an interrupt. When an interrupt is requested, sleep mode is cleared and

interrupt exception handling starts. Sleep mode is not cleared if the I bit in CCR is set to 1 or the

requested interrupt is disabled by the interrupt enable bit. After sleep mode is cleared, a transition

is made from sleep (high-speed) mode to active (high-speed) mode or from sleep (medium-speed)

mode to active (medium-speed) mode.

When the RES pin goes low, the CPU goes into the reset state and sleep mode is cleared. Since an

interrupt request signal is synchronous with the system clock, the maximum time of 2/φ(s) may be

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 111 of 462

delayed from the point at which an interrupt request signal occurs until the interrupt exception

handling is started.

Furthermore, it sometimes operates with half state early timing at the time of transition to sleep

(medium-speed) mode.

5.2.2 Standby Mode

In standby mode, the clock pulse generator stops, so the CPU and on-chip peripheral modules stop

functioning. However, as long as the rated voltage is supplied, the contents of CPU registers, on-

chip RAM, and some on-chip peripheral module registers are retained. On-chip RAM contents

will be retained as long as the voltage set by the RAM data retention voltage is provided. The I/O

ports go to the high-impedance state.

Standby mode is cleared by an interrupt. When an interrupt is requested, the system clock pulse

generator starts. After the time set in bits STS2 to STS0 in SYSCR1 has elapsed, standby mode is

cleared and interrupt exception handling starts. After standby mode is cleared, a transition is made

to active (high-speed) or active (medium-speed) mode according to the MSON bit in SYSCR2.

Standby mode is not cleared if the I bit in CCR is set to 1 or the requested interrupt is disabled by

the interrupt enable bit.

When the RES pin goes low, the system clock pulse generator starts. Since system clock signals

are supplied to the entire chip as soon as the system clock pulse generator starts functioning, the

RES pin must be kept low until the pulse generator output stabilizes. After the pulse generator

output has stabilized, the CPU starts reset exception handling if the RES pin is driven high.

5.2.3 Watch Mode

In watch mode, the system clock oscillator and CPU operation stop and on-chip peripheral mod-

ules stop functioning except for the timer A, timer F, asynchronous event counter, and LCD con-

troller/driver. However, as long as the rated voltage is supplied, the contents of CPU registers,

some on-chip peripheral module registers, and on-chip RAM are retained. The I/O ports retain

their state before the transition.

Watch mode is cleared by an interrupt. When an interrupt is requested, watch mode is cleared and

interrupt exception handling starts. When watch mode is cleared by an interrupt, a transition is

made to active (high-speed) mode, active (medium-speed) mode, or subactive mode depending on

the settings of the LSON bit in SYSCR1 and the MSON bit in SYSCR2. When the transition is

made to active mode, after the time set in bits STS2 to STS0 in SYSCR1 has elapsed, interrupt

exception handling starts. Watch mode is not cleared if the I bit in CCR is set to 1 or the requested

interrupt is disabled by the interrupt enable bit.

When the RES pin goes low, the system clock pulse generator starts. Since system clock signals

are supplied to the entire chip as soon as the system clock pulse generator starts functioning, the

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 112 of 462

RES pin must be kept low until the pulse generator output stabilizes. After the pulse generator

output has stabilized, the CPU starts reset exception handling if the RES pin is driven high.

5.2.4 Subsleep Mode

In subsleep mode, the CPU operation stops but on-chip peripheral modules other than the A/D

converter and PWM function. As long as a required voltage is applied, the contents of CPU regis-

ters, the on-chip RAM, and some registers of the on-chip peripheral modules are retained. I/O

ports keep the same states as before the transition.

Subsleep mode is cleared by an interrupt. When an interrupt is requested, subsleep mode is cleared

and interrupt exception handling starts. After subsleep mode is cleared, a transition is made to

subactive mode. Subsleep mode is not cleared if the I bit in CCR is set to 1 or the requested inter-

rupt is disabled in the interrupt enable register.

When the RES pin goes low, the system clock pulse generator starts. Since system clock signals

are supplied to the entire chip as soon as the system clock pulse generator starts functioning, the

RES pin must be kept low until the pulse generator output stabilizes. After the pulse generator

output has stabilized, the CPU starts reset exception handling if the RES pin is driven high.

5.2.5 Subactive Mode

In subactive mode, the system clock oscillator stops but on-chip peripheral modules other than the

A/D converter and PWM function. As long as a required voltage is applied, the contents of some

registers of the on-chip peripheral modules are retained.

Subactive mode is cleared by the SLEEP instruction. When subacitve mode is cleared, a transition

to subsleep mode, active mode, or watch mode is made, depending on the combination of bits

SSBY and LSON in SYSCR1, bits MSON and DTON in SYSCR2, and bit TMA3 in TMA.

Subactive mode is not cleared if the I bit in CCR is set to 1 or the requested interrupt is disabled in

the interrupt enable register.

When the RES pin goes low, the system clock pulse generator starts. Since system clock signals

are supplied to the entire chip as soon as the system clock pulse generator starts functioning, the

RES pin must be kept low until the pulse generator output stabilizes. After the pulse generator

output has stabilized, the CPU starts reset exception handling if the RES pin is driven high.

The operating frequency of subactive mode is selected from φW/2, φW/4, and φW/8 by the SA1 and

SA0 bits in SYSCR2. After the SLEEP instruction is executed, the operating frequency changes to

the frequency which is set before the execution.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 113 of 462

5.2.6 Active (Medium-Speed) Mode

In active (medium-speed) mode, the system clock oscillator, subclock oscillator, CPU, and on-chip

peripheral modules function.

Active (medium-speed) mode is cleared by the SLEEP instruction. When active (medium-speed)

mode is cleared, a transition to standby mode is made depending on the combination of bits SSBY

and LSON in SYSCR1 and bit TMA3 in TMA, a transition to watch mode is made depending on

the combination of bit SSBY in SYSCR1 and bit TMA3 in TMA, or a transition to sleep mode is

made depending on the combination of bits SSBY and LSON in SYSCR1. Moreover, a transition

to active (high-speed) mode or subactive mode is made by a direct transition. Active (medium-

sleep) mode is not entered if the I bit in CCR is set to 1 or the requested interrupt is disabled in the

interrupt enable register. When the RES pin goes low, the CPU goes into the reset state and active

(medium-sleep) mode is cleared.

Furthermore, it sometimes operates with half state early timing at the time of transition to active

(medium-speed) mode.

In active (medium-speed) mode, the on-chip peripheral modules function at the clock frequency

set by the MA1 and MA0 bits in SYSCR1.

5.3 Direct Transition

The CPU can execute programs in two modes: active and subactive mode. A direct transition is a

transition between these two modes without stopping program execution. A direct transition can

be made by executing a SLEEP instruction while the DTON bit in SYSCR2 is set to 1. The direct

transition also enables operating frequency modification in active or subactive mode. After the

mode transition, direct transition interrupt exception handling starts.

If the direct transition interrupt is disabled in interrupt permission register 2, a transition is made

instead to sleep or watch mode. Note that if a direct transition is attempted while the I bit in CCR

is set to 1, sleep or watch mode will be entered, and the resulting mode cannot be cleared by

means of an interrupt.

•Direct transfer from active (high-speed) mode to active (medium-speed) mode

When a SLEEP instruction is executed in active (high-speed) mode while the SSBY and

LSON bits in SYSCR1 are cleared to 0, the MSON bit in SYSCR2 is set to 1, and the DTON

bit in SYSCR2 is set to 1, a transition is made to active (medium-speed) mode via sleep mode.

•Direct transfer from active (medium-speed) mode to active (high-speed) mode

When a SLEEP instruction is executed in active (medium-speed) mode while the SSBY and

LSON bits in SYSCR1 are cleared to 0, the MSON bit in SYSCR2 is cleared to 0, and the

DTON bit in SYSCR2 is set to 1, a transition is made to active (high-speed) mode via sleep

mode.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 114 of 462

•Direct transfer from active (high-speed) mode to subactive mode

When a SLEEP instruction is executed in active (high-speed) mode while the SSBY and

LSON bits in SYSCR1 are set to 1, the DTON bit in SYSCR2 is set to 1, and the TMA3 bit in

TMA is set to 1, a transition is made to subactive mode via watch mode.

•Direct transfer from subactive mode to active (high-speed) mode

When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode while the SSBY bit in SYSCR1 is

set to 1, the LSON bit in SYSCR1 is cleared to 0, the MSON bit in SYSCR2 is cleared to 0,

the DTON bit in SYSCR2 is set to 1, and the TMA3 bit in TMA is set to 1, a transition is made

directly to active (high-speed) mode via watch mode after the waiting time set in bits STS2 to

STS0 in SYSCR1 has elapsed.

•Direct transfer from active (medium-speed) mode to subactive mode

When a SLEEP instruction is executed in active (medium-speed) while the SSBY and LSON

bits in SYSCR1 are set to 1, the DTON bit in SYSCR2 is set to 1, and the TMA3 bit in TMA

is set to 1, a transition is made to subactive mode via watch mode.

•Direct transfer from subactive mode to active (medium-speed) mode

When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode while the SSBY bit in SYSCR1 is

set to 1, the LSON bit in SYSCR1 is cleared to 0, the MSON bit in SYSCR2 is set to 1, the

DTON bit in SYSCR2 is set to 1, and the TMA3 bit in TMA is set to 1, a transition is made di-

rectly to active (medium-speed) mode via watch mode after the waiting time set in bits STS2

to STS0 in SYSCR1 has elapsed.

5.3.1 Direct Transition from Active (High-Speed) Mode to Active (Medium-Speed) Mode

The time from the start of SLEEP instruction execution to the end of interrupt exception handling

(the direct transition time) is calculated by equation (1).

Direct transition time = {(Number of SLEEP instruction execution states) + (Number of internal

processing states)} ×(tcyc before transition) + (Number of interrupt ex-

ception handling execution states) ×(tcyc after transition)

…………………(1)

Example: Direct transition time = (2 + 1) ×2tosc + 14 ×16tosc = 230tosc (when φ/8 is

selected as the CPU operating clock)

[Legend]

tosc: OSC clock cycle time

tcyc: System clock (φ) cycle time

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 115 of 462

5.3.2 Direct Transition from Active (Medium-Speed) Mode to Active (High-Speed) Mode

The time from the start of SLEEP instruction execution to the end of interrupt exception handling

(the direct transition time) is calculated by equation (2).

Direct transition time = {(Number of SLEEP instruction execution states) + (Number of internal

processing states)} ×(tcyc before transition) + (Number of interrupt ex-

ception handling execution states) ×(tcyc after transition)

………………..(2)

Example: Direct transition time = (2 + 1) ×16tosc + 14 ×2tosc = 76tosc (when φ/8 is se-

lected as the CPU operating clock)

[Legend]

tosc: OSC clock cycle time

tcyc: System clock (φ) cycle time

5.3.3 Direct Transition from Subactive Mode to Active (High-Speed) Mode

The time from the start of SLEEP instruction execution to the end of interrupt exception handling

(the direct transition time) is calculated by equation (3).

Direct transition time = {(Number of SLEEP instruction execution states) + (Number of internal

processing states)} ×(tsubcyc before transition) + {(Wait time set in bits

STS2 to STS0) + (Number of interrupt exception handling execution

states)} ×(tcyc after transition) ………………..(3)

Example: Direct transition time = (2 + 1) ×8tw + (8192 + 14) ×2tosc = 24tw + 16412tosc

(when φw/8 is selected as the CPU operating clock and wait time = 8192 states)

[Legend]

tosc: OSC clock cycle time

tw: Watch clock cycle time

tcyc: System clock (φ) cycle time

tsubcyc: Subclock (φSUB) cycle time

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 116 of 462

5.3.4 Direct Transition from Subactive Mode to Active (Medium-Speed) Mode

The time from the start of SLEEP instruction execution to the end of interrupt exception handling

(the direct transition time) is calculated by equation (4).

Direct transition time = {(Number of SLEEP instruction execution states) + (Number of internal

processing states)} ×(tsubcyc before transition) + {(Wait time set in bits

STS2 to STS0) + (Number of interrupt exception handling execution

states)} ×(tcyc after transition) ………………..(4)

Example: Direct transition time = (2 + 1) ×8tw + (8192 + 14) ×16tosc = 24tw +

131296tosc (when φw/8 or φ/8 is selected as the CPU operating clock and wait

time = 8192 states)

[Legend]

tosc: OSC clock cycle time

tw: Watch clock cycle time

tcyc: System clock (φ) cycle time

tsubcyc: Subclock (φSUB) cycle time

5.3.5 Notes on External Input Signal Changes before/after Direct Transition

•Direct transition from active (high-speed) mode to subactive mode

Since the mode transition is performed via watch mode, see section 5.5.2, Notes on External

Input Signal Changes before/after Standby Mode.

•Direct transition from active (medium-speed) mode to subactive mode

Since the mode transition is performed via watch mode, see section 5.5.2, Notes on External

Input Signal Changes before/after Standby Mode.

•Direct transition from subactive mode to active (high-speed) mode

Since the mode transition is performed via watch mode, see section 5.5.2, Notes on External

Input Signal Changes before/after Standby Mode.

•Direct transition from subactive mode to active (medium-speed) mode

Since the mode transition is performed via watch mode, see section 5.5.2, Notes on External

Input Signal Changes before/after Standby Mode.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 117 of 462

5.4 Module Standby Function

The module-standby function can be set to any peripheral module. In module standby mode, the

clock supply to modules stops to enter the power-down mode. Module standby mode enables each

on-chip peripheral module to enter the standby state by clearing a bit that corresponds to each

moduleinCKSTPR1andCKSTPR2to0andcancelsthemodebysettingthebitto1.(Seesection

5.1.3, Clock Halt Registers 1 and 2 (CKSTPR1 and CKSTPR2).)

5.5 Usage Notes

5.5.1 Standby Mode Transition and Pin States

When a SLEEP instruction is executed in active (high-speed) mode or active (medium-speed)

mode while bit SSBY is set to 1 and bit LSON is cleared to 0 in SYSCR1, and bit TMA3 is

cleared to 0 in TMA, a transition is made to standby mode. At the same time, pins go to the high-

impedance state (except pins for which the pull-up MOS is designated as on). Figure 5.2 shows the

timing in this case.

SLEEP instruction fetchInternal data bus Next instruction fetch

Port outputPins High-impedance

Active (high-speed) mode or active (medium-speed) mode Standby mode

SLEEP instruction execution Internal processing

Figure 5.2 Standby Mode Transition and Pin States

5.5.2 Notes on External Input Signal Changes before/after Standby Mode

1. When external input signal changes before/after standby mode or watch mode

When an external input signal such as IRQ,WKP, or IRQAEC is input, both the high- and

low-level widths of the signal must be at least two cycles of system clock φor subclock φSUB

(referred to together in this section as the internal clock). As the internal clock stops in standby

mode and watch mode, the width of external input signals requires careful attention when a

transition is made via these operating modes. Ensure that external input signals conform to the

conditions stated in 3, Recommended timing of external input signals, below.

2. When external input signals cannot be captured because internal clock stops

The case of falling edge capture is shown in figure 5.3.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 118 of 462

As shown in the case marked "Capture not possible," when an external input signal falls im-

mediately after a transition to active (high-speed or medium-speed) mode or subactive mode,

after oscillation is started by an interrupt via a different signal, the external input signal cannot

be captured if the high-level width at that point is less than 2 tcyc or 2 tsubcyc.

3. Recommended timing of external input signals

To ensure dependable capture of an external input signal, high- and low-level signal widths of

at least 2 tcyc or 2 tsubcyc are necessary before a transition is made to standby mode or watch

mode, as shown in "Capture possible: case 1."

External input signal capture is also possible with the timing shown in "Capture possible: case

2" and "Capture possible: case 3," in which a 2 tcyc or 2 tsubcyc level width is secured.

tcyc

tsubcyc tcyc

tsubcyc

tcyc

tsubcyc

Capture possible: case 1

Capture possible: case 2

Capture possible: case 3

Capture not possible

φ or φSUB

Operating mode

Active (high-speed, medium-speed)

mode or subactive mode

Standby mode or

watch mode

Wait for osc-

illation

stabilization

Active (high-speed, medium-speed)

mode or subactive mode

External input signal

Interrupt by different signal

Figure 5.3 External Input Signal Capture when Signal Changes before/after Standby Mode

or Watch Mode

4. Input pins to which these notes apply:

IRQ1,IRQ0,WKP7 to WKP0,andIRQAEC

ROM3322A_000020020900 Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 119 of 462

Section 6 ROM

The H8/3802 has 16 kbytes of the on-chip mask ROM, the H8/3801 has 12 kbytes, and the

H8/3800 has 8 kbytes. The H8/38004 and H8/38104 have 32 kbytes of the on-chip mask ROM,

the H8/38003 and H8/38103 have 24 kbytes, the H8/38002 and H8/38102 have 16 kbytes, the

H8/38001 and H8/38101 have 12 kbytes, and the H8/38000 and H8/38100 have 8 kbytes. The

ROM is connected to the CPU by a 16-bit data bus, allowing high-speed two-state access for both

byte data and word data. The H8/3802 has a ZTAT version with 16-kbyte PROM. The H8/38004,

H8/38002, H8/38104, and H8/38102 have F-ZTAT™ versions with 32-kbyte flash memory and

16-kbyte flash memory, respectively.

6.1 Block Diagram

Figure 6.1 shows a block diagram of the on-chip ROM.

Internal data bus (upper 8 bits)

Internal data bus (lower 8 bits)

H'0000

H'0002

H'3FFE

H'0000

H'0002

H'3FFE

H'0001

H'0003

H'3FFF

On-chip ROM

Even address Odd address

Figure 6.1 Block Diagram of ROM (H8/3802)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 120 of 462

6.2 H8/3802 PROM Mode

6.2.1 Setting to PROM Mode

If the on-chip ROM is PROM, setting the chip to PROM mode stops operation as a

microcomputer and allows the PROM to be programmed in the same way as the standard

HN27C101 EPROM. However, page programming is not supported.

Table 6.1 shows how to set the chip to PROM mode.

Table 6.1 Setting to PROM Mode

Pin Name Setting

TEST High level

PB0/AN0

PB1/AN1

Low level

PB2/AN2 High level

6.2.2 Socket Adapter Pin Arrangement and Memory Map

A standard PROM programmer can be used to program the PROM. A socket adapter is required

forconversionto32pins.

Figure 6.2 shows the pin-to-pin wiring of the socket adapter. Figure 6.3 shows a memory map.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 121 of 462

FP-64A, FP-64E

DP-64S Pin

HN27C101 (32 pins)

P60

P61

P62

P63

P64

P65

P66

P67

P40

P41

P32

P33

P34

P35

P36

P37

P70

P43

P72

P73

P74

P75

P76

P93

P94

P77

P71

P92

VCC

AVCC

TEST

PB2

P90

P91

P95

VSS

AVSS

PB0

PB1

VPP

EO0

EO1

EO2

EO3

EO4

EO5

EO6

EO7

EA0

EA1

EA2

EA3

EA4

EA5

EA6

EA7

EA8

EA9

EA10

EA11

EA12

EA13

EA14

EA15

EA16

VCC

VSS

Note: Pins not shown in the figure should be open.

H8/3802 EPROM socket

Figure 6.2 Socket Adapter Pin Correspondence (with HN27C101)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 122 of 462

Address in

MCU mode Address in

PROM mode

H'0000 H'0000

H'1FFFF

H'3FFF H'3FFF

On-chip PROM

Uninstalled area*

Note: *The output data is not guaranteed if this address area is read in PROM mode. Therefore,

when programming with a PROM programmer, be sure to specify addresses from H'0000

to H'3FFF. If programming is inadvertently performed from H'4000 onward, it may not be

possible to continue PROM programming and verification.

When programming, H'FF should be set as the data in this address area (H'4000 to H'1FFFF).

Figure 6.3 H8/3802 Memory Map in PROM Mode

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 123 of 462

6.3 H8/3802 Programming

The write, verify, and other modes are selected as shown in table 6.2 in H8/3802 PROM mode.

Table 6.2 Mode Selection in PROM Mode (H8/3802)

Pins

Mode CE

CECE

CE OE

OEOE

OE PGM

PGMPGM

PGM Vpp Vcc EO7 to EO0 EA16 to EA0

Write L H L Vpp Vcc Data input Address input

Verify L L H Vpp Vcc Data output Address input

LLL

LHH

HLL

Programming

disabled

HHH

Vpp Vcc High impedance Address input

[Legend]

L: Low level

H: High level

Vpp: Vpp level

Vcc: Vcc level

The specifications for writing and reading are identical to those for the standard HN27C101

EPROM. However, page programming is not supported, and so page programming mode must not

be set. A PROM programmer that only supports page programming mode cannot be used. When

selecting a PROM programmer, ensure that it supports high-speed, high-reliability byte-by-byte

programming. Also, be sure to specify addresses from H'0000 to H'3FFF.

6.3.1 Writing and Verifying

An efficient, high-speed, high-reliability method is available for writing and verifying the PROM

data. This method achieves high speed without voltage stress on the device and without lowering

the reliability of written data.

The basic flow of this high-speed, high-reliability programming method is shown in figure 6.4.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 124 of 462

Set write/verify mode

= 6.0 V±0.25 V, V

= 12.5 V±0.3 V

Start

Address = 0

n = 0

n + 1 → n

Write time tpw = 0.2 ms±5%

Verify

Write time topw = 0.2n ms

Last address?

Set read mode

= 5.0 V±0.25 V, V

= V

Read all addresses?Error

End

Address + 1 → address

n < 25

Yes

Figure 6.4 High-Speed, High-Reliability Programming Flowchart

Table 6.3 and table 6.4 give the electrical characteristics in programming mode.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 125 of 462

Table 6.3 DC Characteristics

(Conditions: Vcc = 6.0 V ±0.25 V, Vpp = 12.5 V ±0.3 V, Vss= 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C)

Item Symbol Min Typ Max Unit Test Condition

Input high-

level voltage EO7 to EO0,

EA16 to EA0,

OE,CE,PGM

VIH 2.4 — Vcc + 0.3 V

Input low-level

voltage EO7 to EO0,

EA16 to EA0,

OE,CE,PGM

VIL –0.3 — 0.8 V

Output high-

level voltage EO7 to EO0 VOH 2.4 — — V IOH = –200 µA

Output low-

level voltage EO7 to EO0 VOL — — 0.45 V IOL =0.8mA

Input leakage

current EO7 to EO0,

EA16 to EA0,

OE,CE,PGM

LI |— —2 µAV

in = 5.25 V/0.5

Vcc current ICC ——40 mA

Vpp current IPP ——40 mA

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 126 of 462

Table 6.4 AC Characteristics

(Conditions: Vcc = 6.0 V ±0.25 V, Vpp = 12.5 V ±0.3 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C)

Item Symbol Min Typ Max Unit Test Condition

Address setup time tAS 2——µs

OE setup time tOES 2——µs

Data setup time tDS 2——µs

Address hold time tAH 0——µs

Data hold time tDH 2——µs

Data output disable time tDF*2— — 130 µs

Vpp setup time tVPS 2——µs

Programming pulse width tPW 0.19 0.20 0.21 ms

PGM pulse width for

overwrite programming tOPW*30.19 — 5.25 ms

CE setup time tCES 2——µs

Vcc setup time tVCS 2——µs

Data output delay time tOE 0 — 200 ns

Figure 6.5*1

Notes: 1. Input pulse level: 0.45 V to 2.4 V

Input rise time/fall time ≤20 ns

Timing reference levels Input: 0.8 V, 2.0 V

Output: 0.8 V, 2.0 V

2. tDF is defined at the point at which the output is floating and the output level cannot be

read.

3. tOPW is defined by the value given in figure 6.4, High-Speed, High-Reliability

Programming Flow Chart.

Figure 6.5 shows a PROM write/verify timing.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 127 of 462

Write

Input data Output data

Verify

Address

Data

VPP VPP

tAS tAH

tDS tDH tDF

tOEtOEStPW

tOPW*

tVPS

tVCS

tCES

VCC

VCC VCC+1

VCC

Note: * t

OPW

is defined by the value shown in figure 6.4, High-Speed, High-Reliability Programming Flowchart.

Figure 6.5 PROM Write/Verify Timing

6.3.2 Programming Precautions

•Use the specified programming voltage and timing.

The programming voltage in PROM mode (Vpp) is 12.5 V. Use of a higher voltage can

permanently damage the chip. Be especially careful with respect to PROM programmer

overshoot.

Setting the PROM programmer to Renesas (former Hitachi) specifications for the HN27C101

will result in correct Vpp of 12.5 V.

•Make sure the index marks on the PROM programmer socket, socket adapter, and chip are

properly aligned. If they are not, the chip may be destroyed by excessive current flow. Before

programming, be sure that the chip is properly mounted in the PROM programmer.

•Avoid touching the socket adapter or chip while programming, since this may cause contact

faults and write errors.

•Take care when setting the programming mode, as page programming is not supported.

•When programming with a PROM programmer, be sure to specify addresses from H'0000 to

H'3FFF. If programming is inadvertently performed from H'4000 onward, it may not be

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 128 of 462

possible to continue PROM programming and verification. When programming, H'FF should

be set as the data in address area H'4000 to H'1FFFF.

6.4 Reliability of Programmed Data

A highly effective way to improve data retention characteristics is to bake the programmed chips

at 150°C, then screen them for data errors. This procedure quickly eliminates chips with PROM

memory cells prone to early failure.

Figure 6.6 shows the recommended screening procedure.

Program chip and verify

programmed data

Bake chip for 24 to 48 hours at

125˚C to 150˚C with power off

Read and check program

Install

Figure 6.6 Recommended Screening Procedure

If a Group of programming errors occurs while the same PROM programmer is in use, stop

programming and check the PROM programmer and socket adapter for defects.

Please inform Renesas of any abnormal conditions noted during or after programming or in

screening of program data after high-temperature baking.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 129 of 462

6.5 Overview of Flash Memory

6.5.1 Features

The features of the 32-kbyte or 16-kbyte flash memory built into the flash memory version are

summarized below.

•Programming/erase methods

The flash memory is programmed 128 bytes at a time. Erase is performed in single-block

units. The flash memory of the HD64F38004 and HD64F38104 are configured as follows:

1kbyte×4 blocks and 28 kbytes ×1 block. The flash memory of the HD64F38002 and

HD64F38102 are configured as follows: 1 kbyte ×4 blocks and 12 kbytes ×1block.To

erase the entire flash memory, each block must be erased in turn.

•On-board programming

On-board programming/erasing can be done in boot mode, in which the boot program built

into the chip is started to erase or program of the entire flash memory. In normal user

program mode, individual blocks can be erased or programmed.

•Programmer mode

Flash memory can be programmed/erased in programmer mode using a PROM

programmer, as well as in on-board programming mode.

•Automatic bit rate adjustment

For data transfer in boot mode, this LSI's bit rate can be automatically adjusted to match

the transfer bit rate of the host.

•Programming/erasing protection

Sets software protection against flash memory programming/erasing.

•Power-down mode

Operation of the power supply circuit can be partly halted in subactive mode. As a result,

flash memory can be read with low power consumption.

Note: The system clock oscillator must be used when programming or erasing the flash memory

of the HD64F38104 and HD64F38102.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 130 of 462

6.5.2 Block Diagram

Internal address bus

Internal data bus (16 bits)

FLMCR1

Bus interface/controller Operating

mode

TEST pin

P95 pin

P34 pin

[Legend]

FLMCR1: Flash memory control register 1

FLMCR2: Flash memory control register 2

EBR: Erase block register

FLPWCR: Flash memory power control register

FENR: Flash memory enable register

FLMCR2

EBR

FLPWCR

FENR

Module bus

Flash memory

Figure 6.7 Block Diagram of Flash Memory

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 131 of 462

6.5.3 Block Configuration

Figure 6.8 shows the block configuration of 32-kbyte flash memory. The thick lines indicate

erasing units, the narrow lines indicate programming units, and the values are addresses. The 32-

kbyte flash memory is divided into 1 kbyte ×4 blocks and 28 kbytes ×1block.Erasingis

performed in these units. The 16-kbyte flash memory is divided into 1 kbyte ×4blocksand12

kbytes ×1 block. Programming is performed in 128-byte units starting from an address with lower

eight bits H'00 or H'80.

H'007F

H'0000 H'0001 H'0002

H'00FF

H'0080 H'0081 H'0082

H'03FF

H'0380 H'0381 H'0382

H'047F

H'0400 H'0401 H'0402

H'04FF

H'0480 H'0481 H'0482

H'07FF

H'0780 H'0781 H'0782

H'087F

H'0800 H'0801 H'0802

H'08FF

H'0880 H'0881 H'0882

H'0BFF

H'0B80 H'0B81 H'0B82

H'0C7F

H'0C00 H'0C01 H'0C02

H'0CFF

H'0C80 H'0C81 H'0C82

H'0FFF

H'0F80 H'0F81 H'0F82

H'107F

H'1000 H'1001 H'1002

H'10FF

H'1080 H'1081 H'1082

H'7FFF

H'7F80 H'7F81 H'7F82

Programming unit: 128 bytes

1 kbyte

Erase unit

1 kbyte

Erase unit

1 kbyte

Erase unit

1 kbyte

Erase unit

28 kbytes

Erase unit

Figure 6.8(1) Block Configuration of 32-kbyte Flash Memory

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 132 of 462

H'007F

H'0000 H'0001 H'0002

H'00FF

H'0080 H'0081 H'0082

H'03FF

H'0380 H'0381 H'0382

H'047F

H'0400 H'0401 H'0402

H'04FF

H'0480 H'0481 H'0482

H'07FF

H'0780 H'0781 H'0782

H'087F

H'0800 H'0801 H'0802

H'08FF

H'0880 H'0881 H'0882

H'0BFF

H'0B80 H'0B81 H'0B82

H'0C7F

H'0C00 H'0C01 H'0C02

H'0CFF

H'0C80 H'0C81 H'0C82

H'0FFF

H'0F80 H'0F81 H'0F82

H'107F

H'1000 H'1001 H'1002

H'10FF

H'1080 H'1081 H'1082

H'3FFF

H'3F80 H'3F81 H'3F82

Programming unit: 128 bytes

1 kbyte

Erase unit

1 kbyte

Erase unit

1 kbyte

Erase unit

1 kbyte

Erase unit

12 kbytes

Erase unit

Figure 6.8(2) Block Configuration of 16-kbyte Flash Memory

6.6 Register Descriptions

The flash memory has the following registers.

•Flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1)

•Flash memory control register 2 (FLMCR2)

•Erase block register (EBR)

•Flash memory power control register (FLPWCR)

•Flash memory enable register (FENR)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 133 of 462

6.6.1 Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1)

FLMCR1 is a register that makes the flash memory change to program mode, program-verify

mode, erase mode, or erase-verify mode. For details on register setting, refer to section 6.8, Flash

Memory Programming/Erasing.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7— 0 —Reserved

This bit is always read as 0.

6 SWE 0 R/W Software Write Enable

When this bit is set to 1, flash memory

programming/erasing is enabled. When this bit is cleared

to 0, flash memory programming/erasing is invalid. Other

FLMCR1 bits and all EBR bits cannot be set.

5 ESU 0 R/W Erase Setup

When this bit is set to 1, the flash memory changes to the

erase setup state. When it is cleared to 0, the erase setup

state is cancelled. Set this bit to 1 before setting the E bit

to1inFLMCR1.

4 PSU 0 R/W Program Setup

When this bit is set to 1, the flash memory changes to the

program setup state. When it is cleared to 0, the program

setup state is cancelled. Set this bit to 1 before setting the

P bit in FLMCR1.

3 EV 0 R/W Erase-Verify

When this bit is set to 1, the flash memory changes to

erase-verify mode. When it is cleared to 0, erase-verify

mode is cancelled.

2 PV 0 R/W Program-Verify

When this bit is set to 1, the flash memory changes to

program-verify mode. When it is cleared to 0, program-

verify mode is cancelled.

1E 0 R/WErase

When this bit is set to 1, and while the SWE = 1 and ESU

= 1 bits are 1, the flash memory changes to erase mode.

When it is cleared to 0, erase mode is cancelled.

0 P 0 R/W Program

When this bit is set to 1, and while the SWE = 1 and PSU

= 1 bits are 1, the flash memory changes to program

mode. When it is cleared to 0, program mode is

cancelled.

Note: Bits SWE, PSU, EV, PV, E, and P should not be set at the same time.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 134 of 462

6.6.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2)

FLMCR2 is a register that displays the state of flash memory programming/erasing. FLMCR2 is a

read-only register, and should not be written to.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7 FLER 0 R Flash Memory Error

Indicates that an error has occurred during an operation

on flash memory (programming or erasing). When flash

memory goes to the error-protection state, this bit is set to

See section 6.9.3, Error Protection, for details.

6to0 — All0 — Reserved

These bits are always read as 0.

6.6.3 Erase Block Register (EBR)

EBR specifies the flash memory erase area block. EBR is initialized to H'00 when the SWE bit in

FLMCR1 is 0. Do not set more than one bit at a time, as this will cause all the bits in EBR to be

automatically cleared to 0.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7to5 — All0 — Reserved

These bits are always read as 0.

4 EB4 0 R/W When this bit is set to 1, 28 kbytes of H'1000 to H'7FFF

will be erased in the HD64F38004 and HD64F38104.

When this bit is set to 1, 12 kbytes of H'1000 to H'3FFF

will be erased in the HD64F38002 and HD64F38102.

3 EB3 0 R/W When this bit is set to 1, 1 kbyte of H'0C00 to H'0FFF will

be erased.

2 EB2 0 R/W When this bit is set to 1, 1 kbyte of H'0800 to H'0BFF will

be erased.

1 EB1 0 R/W When this bit is set to 1, 1 kbyte of H'0400 to H'07FF will

be erased.

0 EB0 0 R/W When this bit is set to 1, 1 kbyte of H'0000 to H'03FF will

be erased.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 135 of 462

6.6.4 Flash Memory Power Control Register (FLPWCR)

FLPWCR enables or disables a transition to the flash memory power-down mode when the LSI

switches to subactive mode. There are two modes: mode in which operation of the power supply

circuit of flash memory is partly halted in power-down mode and flash memory can be read, and

mode in which even if a transition is made to subactive mode, operation of the power supply

circuit of flash memory is retained and flash memory can be read.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7 PDWND 0 R/W Power-Down Disable

When this bit is 0 and a transition is made to subactive

mode, the flash memory enters the power-down mode.

When this bit is 1, the flash memory remains in the

normal mode even after a transition is made to subactive

mode.

6to0 — All0 — Reserved

These bits are always read as 0.

6.6.5 Flash Memory Enable Register (FENR)

Bit 7 (FLSHE) in FENR enables or disables the CPU access to the flash memory control registers,

FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR, and FLPWCR.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7 FLSHE 0 R/W Flash Memory Control Register Enable

Flash memory control registers can be accessed when

this bit is set to 1. Flash memory control registers cannot

be accessed when this bit is set to 0.

6to0 — All0 — Reserved

These bits are always read as 0.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 136 of 462

6.7 On-Board Programming Modes

There are two modes for programming/erasing of the flash memory; boot mode, which enables on-

board programming/erasing, and programmer mode, in which programming/erasing is performed

with a PROM programmer. On-board programming/erasing can also be performed in user

program mode. At reset-start in reset mode, this LSI changes to a mode depending on the TEST

pin settings, P95 pin settings, and input level of each port, as shown in table 6.5. The input level of

each pin must be defined four states before the reset ends.

When changing to boot mode, the boot program built into this LSI is initiated. The boot program

transfers the programming control program from the externally-connected host to on-chip RAM

via SCI3. After erasing the entire flash memory, the programming control program is executed.

This can be used for programming initial values in the on-board state or for a forcible return when

programming/erasing can no longer be done in user program mode. In user program mode,

individual blocks can be erased and programmed by branching to the user program/erase control

program prepared by the user.

Table 6.5 Setting Programming Modes

TEST P95 P34 PB0 PB1 PB2 LSI State after Reset End

01XXXXUserMode

0 0 1 X X X Boot Mode

1 X X 0 0 0 Programmer Mode

[Legend] X: Don’t care.

6.7.1 Boot Mode

Table 6.6 shows the boot mode operations between reset end and branching to the programming

control program.

1. When boot mode is used, the flash memory programming control program must be prepared in

the host beforehand. Prepare a programming control program in accordance with the

description in section 6.8, Flash Memory Programming/Erasing.

2. The SCI3 should be set to asynchronous mode, and the transfer format as follows: 8-bit data, 1

stop bit, and no parity. Since the inversion function of SPCR is configured not to inverse data

of the TXD pin and RXD pin, do not place an inversion circuit between the host and this LSI.

3. When the boot program is initiated, the chip measures the low-level period of asynchronous

SCI communication data (H'00) transmitted continuously from the host. The chip then

calculates the bit rate of transmission from the host, and adjusts the SCI3 bit rate to match that

of the host. The reset should end with the RXD pin high. The RXD and TXD pins should be

pulled up on the board if necessary. After the reset is complete, it takes approximately 100

states before the chip is ready to measure the low-level period.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 137 of 462

4. After matching the bit rates, the chip transmits one H'00 byte to the host to indicate the

completion of bit rate adjustment. The host should confirm that this adjustment end indication

(H'00) has been received normally, and transmit one H'55 byte to the chip. If reception could

not be performed normally, initiate boot mode again by a reset. Depending on the host's

transfer bit rate and system clock frequency of this LSI, there will be a discrepancy between

the bit rates of the host and the chip. To operate the SCI properly, set the host's transfer bit

rate and system clock frequency of this LSI within the ranges listed in table 6.7.

5. In boot mode, a part of the on-chip RAM area is used by the boot program. The area H'F780 to

H'FEEF is the area to which the programming control program is transferred from the host.

The boot program area cannot be used until the execution state in boot mode switches to the

programming control program.

6. Before branching to the programming control program, the chip terminates transfer operations

by SCI3 (by clearing the RE and TE bits in SCR to 0), however the adjusted bit rate value

remains set in BRR. Therefore, the programming control program can still use it for transfer

of write data or verify data with the host. The TXD pin is high (PCR42 = 1, P42 = 1). The

contents of the CPU general registers are undefined immediately after branching to the

programming control program. These registers must be initialized at the beginning of the

programming control program, as the stack pointer (SP), in particular, is used implicitly in

subroutine calls, etc.

7. Boot mode can be cleared by a reset. End the reset after driving the reset pin low, waiting at

least 20 states, and then setting the TEST pin and P95 pin. Boot mode is also cleared when a

WDT overflow occurs.

8. Do not change the TEST pin and P95 pin input levels in boot mode.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 138 of 462

Table 6.6 Boot Mode Operation

Communication Contents

Processing Contents

Host Operation LSI Operation

Processing Contents

Continuously transmits data H'00

at specified bit rate.

Branches to boot program at reset-start.

Boot program initiation

H'00, H'00 . . . H'00

H'00

H'55

Transmits data H'55 when data H'00

is received error-free.

H'XX

Transmits number of bytes (N) of

programming control program to be

transferred as 2-byte data

(low-order byte following high-order

byte)

Transmits 1-byte of programming

control program (repeated for N times)

H'AA reception

Upper bytes, lower bytes

Echoback

H'AA

Branches to programming control program

transferred to on-chip RAM and starts

execution.

Transmits data H'AA to host.

Checks flash memory data, erases all flash

memory blocks in case of written data

existing, and transmits data H'AA to host.

(If erase could not be done, transmits data

H'FF to host and aborts operation.)

H'FF

Boot program

erase error

Item

Boot mode initiation

• Measures low-level period of receive data

H'00.

• Calculates bit rate and sets BRR in SCI3.

• Transmits data H'00 to host as adjustment

end indication.

Bit rate adjustment

Echobacks the 2-byte data

received to host.

Echobacks received data to host and also

transfers it to RAM.

(repeated for N times)

Transfer of number of bytes of

programming control program Flash memory erase

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 139 of 462

Table 6.7 Oscillation Frequencies for which Automatic Adjustment of LSI Bit Rate is

Possible (fOSC)

Product Group Host Bit Rate Oscillation Frequency Range of LSI (fOSC)

4,800 bps 8 to 10 MHz

H8/38004F Group

2,400 bps 4 to 10 MHz

1,200 bps 2 to 10 MHz

H8/38104F Group 19,200 bps 16 MHz

9,600 bps 8 to 16 MHz

4,800 bps 4 to 16 MHz

2,400 bps 2 to 16 MHz

1,200 bps 2 to 16 MHz

6.7.2 Programming/Erasing in User Program Mode

User program mode means the execution state of the user program. On-board

programming/erasing of an individual flash memory block can also be performed in user program

mode by branching to a user program/erase control program. The user must set branching

conditions and provide on-board means of supplying programming data. The flash memory must

contain the user program/erase control program or a program that provides the user program/erase

control program from external memory. As the flash memory itself cannot be read during

programming/erasing, transfer the user program/erase control program to on-chip RAM, as in boot

mode. Figure 6.9 shows a sample procedure for programming/erasing in user program mode.

Prepare a user program/erase control program in accordance with the description in section 6.8,

Flash Memory Programming/Erasing.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 140 of 462

Yes

Program/erase?

Transfer user program/erase control

program to RAM

Reset-start

Branch to user program/erase control

program in RAM

Execute user program/erase control

program (flash memory rewrite)

Branch to flash memory application

program

Branch to flash memory application

program

Figure 6.9 Programming/Erasing Flowchart Example in User Program Mode

6.7.3 Notes on On-Board Programming

1. You must use the system clock oscillator when programming or erasing flash memory on the

H8/38104F Group. The on-chip oscillator should not be used for programming or erasing flash

memory. See section 4.3.4, On-Chip Oscillator Selection Method, for information on switching

between the system clock oscillator and the on-chip oscillator.

2. On the H8/38104F Group the watchdog timer operates after a reset is canceled. When

executing a program prepared by the user that performs programming and erasing in the user

mode, the watchdog timer’s overflow cycle should be set to an appropriate value. Refer to

section 6.8.1, Program/Program-Verify, for information on the appropriate watchdog timer

overflow cycle for programming, and to 6.8.2, Erase/Erase-Verify, for information on the

appropriate watchdog timer overflow cycle for erasing.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 141 of 462

6.8 Flash Memory Programming/Erasing

A software method using the CPU is employed to program and erase flash memory in the on-

board programming modes. Depending on the FLMCR1 setting, the flash memory operates in one

of the following four modes: Program mode, program-verify mode, erase mode, and erase-verify

mode. The programming control program in boot mode and the user program/erase control

program in user program mode use these operating modes in combination to perform

programming/erasing. Flash memory programming and erasing should be performed in

accordance with the descriptions in section 6.8.1, Program/Program-Verify and section 6.8.2,

Erase/Erase-Verify, respectively.

6.8.1 Program/Program-Verify

When writing data or programs to the flash memory, the program/program-verify flowchart shown

in figure 6.10 should be followed. Performing programming operations according to this

flowchart will enable data or programs to be written to the flash memory without subjecting the

chip to voltage stress or sacrificing program data reliability.

1. Programming must be done to an empty address. Do not reprogram an address to which

programming has already been performed.

2. Programming should be carried out 128 bytes at a time. A 128-byte data transfer must be

performed even if writing fewer than 128 bytes. In this case, H'FF data must be written to the

extra addresses.

3. Prepare the following data storage areas in RAM: A 128-byte programming data area, a 128-

byte reprogramming data area, and a 128-byte additional-programming data area. Perform

reprogramming data computation according to table 6.8, and additional programming data

computation according to table 6.9.

4. Consecutively transfer 128 bytes of data in byte units from the reprogramming data area or

additional-programming data area to the flash memory. The program address and 128-byte

data are latched in the flash memory. The lower 8 bits of the start address in the flash memory

destination area must be H'00 or H'80.

5. The time during which the P bit is set to 1 is the programming time. Table 6.10 shows the

allowable programming times.

6. The watchdog timer (WDT) is set to prevent overprogramming due to program runaway, etc.

An overflow cycle of approximately 6.6 ms is allowed.

7. For a dummy write to a verify address, write 1-byte data H'FF to an address whose lower one

bit is B'0. Verify data can be read in word units from the address to which a dummy write was

performed.

8. The maximum number of repetitions of the program/program-verify sequence of the same bit

is 1,000.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 142 of 462

START

End of programming

Set SWE bit in FLMCR1

Write pulse application subroutine

Wait 1 µs

Apply Write Pulse

End Sub

Set PSU bit in FLMCR1

WDT enable

Disable WDT

Wait 50 µs

Set P bit in FLMCR1

Wait (Wait time=programming time)

Clear P bit in FLMCR1

Wait 5 µs

Clear PSU bit in FLMCR1

Wait 5 µs

←

No Yes

Yes

Wait 4 µs

Wait 2 µs

Apply

Write pulse

Set PV bit in FLMCR1

Set block start address as

verify address

H'FF dummy write to verify address

Read verify data

Verify data =

write data?

Reprogram data computation

Additional-programming data computation

Clear PV bit in FLMCR1

Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1

←

m= 0 ?

Increment address

Programming failure

Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1

Wait 100 µs

Yes

≤

Yes

≤

6 ?

Wait 100 µs

n ≤ 1000 ?

n ← n + 1

Write 128-byte data in RAM reprogram

data area consecutively to flash memory

Store 128-byte program data in program

data area and reprogram data area

Apply Write Pulse

Sub-Routine-Call

128-byte

data verification completed?

Successively write 128-byte data from additional-

programming data area in RAM to flash memory

Figure 6.10 Program/Program-Verify Flowchart

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 143 of 462

Table 6.8 Reprogram Data Computation Table

Program Data Verify Data Reprogram Data Comments

0 0 1 Programming completed

0 1 0 Reprogram bit

101 —

1 1 1 Remains in erased state

Table 6.9 Additional-Program Data Computation Table

Reprogram Data Verify Data Additional-Program

Data Comments

0 0 0 Additional-program bit

0 1 1 No additional programming

1 0 1 No additional programming

1 1 1 No additional programming

Table 6.10 Programming Time

(Number of Writes) Programming

Time In Additional

Programming Comments

1to6 30 10

7 to 1,000 200 —

Note: Time shown in µs.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 144 of 462

6.8.2 Erase/Erase-Verify

When erasing flash memory, the erase/erase-verify flowchart shown in figure 6.11 should be

followed.

1. Prewriting (setting erase block data to all 0s) is not necessary.

2. Erasing is performed in block units. Make only a single-bit specification in the erase block

3. The time during which the E bit is set to 1 is the flash memory erase time.

4. The watchdog timer (WDT) is set to prevent overerasing due to program runaway, etc. An

overflow cycle of approximately 19.8 ms is allowed.

5. For a dummy write to a verify address, write 1-byte data H'FF to an address whose lower 1 bit

is B'0. Verify data can be read in word units from the address to which a dummy write was

performed.

6. If the read data is not erased successfully, set erase mode again, and repeat the erase/erase-

verify sequence as before. The maximum number of repetitions of the erase/erase-verify

sequence is 100.

6.8.3 Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory

All interrupts, including the NMI interrupt, are disabled while flash memory is being programmed

or erased, or while the boot program is executing, for the following three reasons:

1. Interrupt during programming/erasing may cause a violation of the programming or erasing

algorithm, with the result that normal operation cannot be assured.

2. If interrupt exception handling starts before the vector address is written or during

programming/erasing, a correct vector cannot be fetched and the CPU malfunctions.

3. If an interrupt occurs during boot program execution, normal boot mode sequence cannot be

carried out.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 145 of 462

Erase start

Set EBR

Enable WDT

Wait 1 µs

Wait 100 µs

SWE bit ← 1

n ← 1

ESU bit ← 1

E bit ← 1

Wait 10 ms

E bit ← 0

Wait 10 µs

ESU bit ← 0

Wait 10 µs

Disable WDT

Read verify data

Increment address Verify data = all 1s ?

Last address of block ?

All erase block erased ?

Set block start address as verify address

H'FF dummy write to verify address

Wait 20 µs

Wait 2 µs

EV bit ← 1

Wait 100 µs

End of erasing

SWE bit ← 0

Wait 4 µs

EV bit ← 0

n ≤100 ?

Wait 100 µs

Erase failure

SWE bit ← 0

Wait 4µs

EV bit ← 0

n ← n + 1

Yes

Figure 6.11 Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 146 of 462

6.9 Program/Erase Protection

There are three kinds of flash memory program/erase protection; hardware protection, software

protection, and error protection.

6.9.1 Hardware Protection

Hardware protection refers to a state in which programming/erasing of flash memory is forcibly

disabled or aborted because of a transition to reset, subactive mode, subsleep mode, watch mode,

or standby mode. Flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1), flash memory control register 2

(FLMCR2), and erase block register (EBR) are initialized. In a reset via the RES pin, the reset

state is not entered unless the RES pin is held low until oscillation stabilizes after powering on. In

the case of a reset during operation, hold the RES pin low for the RES pulse width specified in the

AC Characteristics section.

6.9.2 Software Protection

Software protection can be implemented against programming/erasing of all flash memory blocks

by clearing the SWE bit in FLMCR1. When software protection is in effect, setting the P or E bit

in FLMCR1 does not cause a transition to program mode or erase mode. By setting the erase

block register (EBR), erase protection can be set for individual blocks. When EBR is set to H'00,

erase protection is set for all blocks.

6.9.3 Error Protection

In error protection, an error is detected when CPU runaway occurs during flash memory

programming/erasing, or operation is not performed in accordance with the program/erase

algorithm, and the program/erase operation is aborted. Aborting the program/erase operation

prevents damage to the flash memory due to overprogramming or overerasing.

When the following errors are detected during programming/erasing of flash memory, the FLER

bit in FLMCR2 is set to 1, and the error protection state is entered.

•When the flash memory of the relevant address area is read during programming/erasing

(including vector read and instruction fetch)

•Immediately after exception handling excluding a reset during programming/erasing

•When a SLEEP instruction is executed during programming/erasing

The FLMCR1, FLMCR2, and EBR settings are retained, however program mode or erase mode is

aborted at the point at which the error occurred. Program mode or erase mode cannot be re-entered

by re-setting the P or E bit. However, PV and EV bit setting is enabled, and a transition can be

made to verify mode. Error protection can be cleared only by a power-on reset.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 147 of 462

6.10 Programmer Mode

In programmer mode, a PROM programmer can be used to perform programming/erasing via a

socket adapter, just as a discrete flash memory. Use a PROM programmer that supports the MCU

device type with the on-chip Renesas Technology (former Hitachi Ltd.) 64-kbyte flash memory

(FZTAT64V3). A 10-MHz input clock is required. For the conditions for transition to programmer

mode, see table 6.5.

6.10.1 Socket Adapter

The socket adapter converts the pin allocation of the HD64F38004, HD64F38002, HD64F38104,

and HD64F38102 to that of the discrete flash memory HN28F101. The address of the on-chip

flash memory is H'0000 to H'7FFF. Figure 6.12(1) shows a socket-adapter-pin correspondence

diagram of the HD64F38004 and HD64F38002. Figure 6.12(2) shows a socket-adapter-pin

correspondence of the HD64F38104 and HD64F38102.

6.10.2 Programmer Mode Commands

The following commands are supported in programmer mode.

•Memory Read Mode

•Auto-Program Mode

•Auto-Erase Mode

•Status Read Mode

Status polling is used for auto-programming, auto-erasing, and status read modes. In status read

mode, detailed internal information is output after the execution of auto-programming or auto-

erasing. Table 6.11 shows the sequence of each command. In auto-programming mode, 129 cycles

are required since 128 bytes are written at the same time. In memory read mode, the number of

cycles depends on the number of address write cycles (n).

Table 6.11 Command Sequence in Programmer Mode

1st Cycle 2nd Cycle

Command

Name Number of

Cycles Mode Address Data Mode Address Data

Memory

read 1 + n Write X H'00 Read RA Dout

Auto-

program 129 Write X H'40 Write WA Din

Auto-erase 2 Write X H'20 Write X H'20

Status read 2 Write X H'71 Write X H'71

[Legend] n: Number of address write cycles

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 148 of 462

H8/38004F, H8/38002F

FP-64A

FP-64E

Socket Adapter

(Conversion to

32-Pin

Arrangement)

Pin No. Pin Name

P71

P77

P90

P60

P61

P62

P63

P64

P65

P66

P67

P40

P41

P32

P33

P34

P35

P36

P37

P70

P42

P72

P73

P74

P75

P76

P43

Vcc

AVcc

TEST

P91

P95

Vss

PB0

PB1

PB2

OSC1,OSC2

RES

(OPEN)

HN28F101 (32 Pins)

Pin No.

Pin Name

FWE

A16

A15

I/O0

I/O1

I/O2

I/O3

I/O4

I/O5

I/O6

I/O7

A10

A11

A12

A13

A14

Vcc

Vss

6, 5

8Power-on

reset circuit

Oscillator circuit

[Legend]

FWE: Flash-write enable

I/O7 to I/O0: Data input/output

A16 to A0: Address input

CE: Chip enable

OE: Output enable

WE: Write enable

Note: The oscillation frequency of

the oscillator circuit should

be 10 MHz.

Other than above

Figure 6.12(1) Socket Adapter Pin Correspondence Diagram (H8/38004F, H8/38002F)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 149 of 462

H8/38104F, H8/38102F

FP-64A

FP-64E

Socket Adapter

(Conversion to

32-Pin

Arrangement)

Pin No. Pin Name

P71

P77

P90

P60

P61

P62

P63

P64

P65

P66

P67

P40

P41

P32

P33

P34

P35

P36

P37

P70

P42

P72

P73

P74

P75

P76

P43

Vcc

AVcc

TEST

P91

CVcc, P95

Vss

PB0

PB1

PB2

OSC1,OSC2

RES

(OPEN)

HN28F101 (32 Pins)

Pin No.

Pin Name

FWE

A16

A15

I/O0

I/O1

I/O2

I/O3

I/O4

I/O5

I/O6

I/O7

A10

A11

A12

A13

A14

Vcc

Vss

53, 54

6, 5

8Power-on

reset circuit

Oscillator circuit

[Legend]

FWE: Flash-write enable

I/O7 to I/O0: Data input/output

A16 to A0: Address input

CE: Chip enable

OE: Output enable

WE: Write enable

Note: The oscillation frequency of

the oscillator circuit should

be 10 MHz.

Other than above

Figure 6.12(2) Socket Adapter Pin Correspondence Diagram (H8/38104F, H8/38102F)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 150 of 462

6.10.3 Memory Read Mode

1. After completion of auto-program/auto-erase/status read operations, a transition is made to the

command wait state. When reading memory contents, a transition to memory read mode must

first be made with a command write, after which the memory contents are read. Once memory

read mode has been entered, consecutive reads can be performed.

2. In memory read mode, command writes can be performed in the same way as in the command

wait state.

3. After powering on, memory read mode is entered.

4. Tables 6.12 to 6.14 show the AC characteristics.

Table 6.12 AC Characteristics in Transition to Memory Read Mode

(Conditions: VCC =3.3V±0.3V,V

SS =0V,Ta=25°C±5°C)

Item Symbol Min Max Unit Test Condition

Command write cycle tnxtc 20 — µs

CE hold time tceh 0—ns

CE setup time tces 0—ns

Data hold time tdh 50 — ns

Data setup time tds 50 — ns

Write pulse width twep 70 — ns

WE rise time tr—30ns

WE fall time tf—30ns

Figure 6.13

A15 to A0

I/O7 to I/O0

Command write Memory read mode

ceh

nxtc

Note: Data is latched on the rising edge of .

ces

wep

Address stable

Figure 6.13 Timing Waveforms for Memory Read after Command Write

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 151 of 462

Table 6.13 AC Characteristics in Transition from Memory Read Mode to Another Mode

(Conditions: VCC =3.3V±0.3V,V

SS =0V,Ta=25°C±5°C)

Item Symbol Min Max Unit Test Condition

Command write cycle tnxtc 20 — µs

CE hold time tceh 0—ns

CE setup time tces 0—ns

Data hold time tdh 50 — ns

Data setup time tds 50 — ns

Write pulse width twep 70 — ns

WE rise time tr—30ns

WE fall time tf—30ns

Figure 6.14

A15 to A0

I/O7 to I/O0

Other mode command write

tceh

tds tdh

tftr

tnxtc

Note: Do not enable and at the same time.

tces

twep

Memory read mode

Address stable

Figure 6.14 Timing Waveforms in Transition from Memory Read Mode to Another Mode

Table 6.14 AC Characteristics in Memory Read Mode

(Conditions: VCC =3.3V±0.3V,V

SS =0V,Ta=25°C±5°C)

Item Symbol Min Max Unit Test Condition

Access time tacc —20µs

CE output delay time tce — 150 ns

OE output delay time toe — 150 ns

Output disable delay time tdf — 100 ns

Data output hold time toh 5—ns

Figures 6.15 and 6.16

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 152 of 462

A15 to A0

I/O7 to I/O0

tacc toh

toh

tacc

Address stable Address stable

Figure 6.15 Timing Waveforms in CE

CECE

CE and OE

OEOE

OE Enable State Read

A15 to A0

I/O7 to I/O0

acc

Address stable Address stable

Figure 6.16 Timing Waveforms in CE

CECE

CE and OE

OEOE

OE Clock System Read

6.10.4 Auto-Program Mode

1. When reprogramming previously programmed addresses, perform auto-erasing before auto-

programming.

2. Perform auto-programming once only on the same address block. It is not possible to program

an address block that has already been programmed.

3. In auto-program mode, 128 bytes are programmed simultaneously. This should be carried out

by executing 128 consecutive byte transfers. A 128-byte data transfer is necessary even when

programming fewer than 128 bytes. In this case, H'FF data must be written to the extra

addresses.

4. The lower 7 bits of the transfer address must be low. If a value other than an effective address

is input, processing will switch to a memory write operation but a write error will be flagged.

5. Memory address transfer is performed in the second cycle (figure 6.17). Do not perform

transfer after the third cycle.

6. Do not perform a command write during a programming operation.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 153 of 462

7. Perform one auto-program operation for a 128-byte block for each address. Two or more

additional programming operations cannot be performed on a previously programmed address

block.

8. Confirm normal end of auto-programming by checking I/O6. Alternatively, status read mode

can also be used for this purpose (I/O7 status polling uses the auto-program operation end

decision pin).

9. Status polling I/O6 and I/O7 pin information is retained until the next command write. As long

as the next command write has not been performed, reading is possible by enabling CE and

OE.

10.Table 6.15 shows the AC characteristics.

Table 6.15 AC Characteristics in Auto-Program Mode

(Conditions: VCC =3.3V±0.3V,V

SS =0V,Ta=25°C±5°C)

Item Symbol Min Max Unit Test Condition

Command write cycle tnxtc 20 — µs

CE hold time tceh 0—ns

CE setup time tces 0—ns

Data hold time tdh 50 — ns

Data setup time tds 50 — ns

Write pulse width twep 70 — ns

Status polling start time twsts 1—ms

Status polling access time tspa — 150 ns

Address setup time tas 0—ns

Address hold time tah 60 — ns

Memory write time twrite 1 3000 ms

WE rise time tr—30ns

WE fall time tf—30ns

Figure 6.17

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 154 of 462

Address stable

A15 to A0

I/O5 to I/O0

I/O6

I/O7

tas tah

tdh

tds

tf tr

twep twsts

twrite

tspa

tnxtc tnxtc

tceh

tces

Write operation end

decision signal

Data transfer

1 to 128 bytes

Write normal end

decision signal

H'40 H'00

Figure 6.17 Timing Waveforms in Auto-Program Mode

6.10.5 Auto-Erase Mode

1. Auto-erase mode supports only entire memory erasing.

2. Do not perform a command write during auto-erasing.

3. Confirm normal end of auto-erasing by checking I/O6. Alternatively, status read mode can also

be used for this purpose (I/O7 status polling uses the auto-erase operation end decision pin).

4. Status polling I/O6 and I/O7 pin information is retained until the next command write. As long

as the next command write has not been performed, reading is possible by enabling CE and

OE.

5. Table 6.16 shows the AC characteristics.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 155 of 462

Table 6.16 AC Characteristics in Auto-Erase Mode

(Conditions: VCC =3.3V±0.3V,V

SS =0V,Ta=25°C±5°C)

Item Symbol Min Max Unit Test Condition

Command write cycle tnxtc 20 — µs

CE hold time tceh 0—ns

CE setup time tces 0—ns

Data hold time tdh 50 — ns

Data setup time tds 50 — ns

Write pulse width twep 70 — ns

Status polling start time tests 1—ms

Status polling access time tspa — 150 ns

Memory erase time terase 100 40000 ms

WE rise time tr—30ns

WE fall time tf—30ns

Figure 6.18

A15 to A0

I/O5 to I/O0

I/O6

I/O7

tests

terase

tspa

tdh

tds

tf tr

twep

tnxtc tnxtc

tceh

tces

Erase end decision

signal

Erase normal end

decision signal

H'20 H'20 H'00

Figure 6.18 Timing Waveforms in Auto-Erase Mode

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 156 of 462

6.10.6 Status Read Mode

1. Status read mode is provided to identify the kind of abnormal end. Use this mode when an

abnormal end occurs in auto-program mode or auto-erase mode.

2. The return code is retained until a command write other than command write in status read

mode is executed.

3. Table 6.17 shows the AC characteristics and table 6.18 shows the return codes.

Table 6.17 AC Characteristics in Status Read Mode

(Conditions: VCC =3.3V±0.3V,V

SS =0V,Ta=25°C±5°C)

Item Symbol Min Max Unit Test Condition

Read time after command

write tnxtc 20 — µs

CE hold time tceh 0—ns

CE setup time tces 0—ns

Data hold time tdh 50 — ns

Data setup time tds 50 — ns

Write pulse width twep 70 — ns

OE output delay time toe — 150 ns

Disable delay time tdf — 100 ns

CE output delay time tce — 150 ns

WE rise time tr—30ns

WE fall time tf—30ns

Figure 6.19

A15 to A0

I/O7 to I/O0

tdh tdf

tds

tf tr

twep

tnxtc tnxtc

tf tr

twep

tds tdh

tnxtc

tceh tceh

toe

tces tces

tce

H'71 H'71

Note: I/O2 and I/O3 are undefined.

Figure 6.19 Timing Waveforms in Status Read Mode

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 157 of 462

Table 6.18 Return Codes in Status Read Mode

Pin Name Initial Value Description

I/O7 0 1: Abnormal end

0: Normal end

I/O6 0 1: Command error

0: Otherwise

I/O5 0 1: Programming error

0: Otherwise

I/O4 0 1: Erasing error

0: Otherwise

I/O3 0 Undefined

I/O2 0 Undefined

I/O1 0 1: Over counting of writing or erasing

0: Otherwise

I/O0 0 1: Effective address error

0: Otherwise

6.10.7 Status Polling

1. The I/O7 status polling flag indicates the operating status in auto-program/auto-erase mode.

2. The I/O6 status polling flag indicates a normal or abnormal end in auto-program/auto-erase

mode.

Table 6.19 Status Polling Output

I/O7 I/O6 I/O0 to I/O5 Status

0 0 0 During internal operation

1 0 0 Abnormal end

1 1 0 Normal end

01 0 —

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 158 of 462

6.10.8 Programmer Mode Transition Time

Commands cannot be accepted during the oscillation stabilization period or the programmer mode

setup period. After the programmer mode setup time, a transition is made to memory read mode.

Table 6.20 Stipulated Transition Times to Command Wait State

Item Symbol Min Max Unit Test Condition

Oscillation stabilization time

(crystal resonator) 10 — ms

Oscillation stabilization time

(ceramic resonator)

tosc1

5—ms

Programmer mode setup

time tbmv 10 — ms

VCC hold time tdwn 0—ms

Figure 6.20

VCC

Auto-program mode

Auto-erase mode

tosc1 tbmv tdwn

Figure 6.20 Oscillation Stabilization Time, Boot Program Transfer Time,

and Power-Down Sequence

6.10.9 Notes on Memory Programming

1. When performing programming using programmer mode on a chip that has been

programmed/erased in on-board programming mode, auto-erasing is recommended before

carrying out auto-programming.

2. The flash memory is initially in the erased state when the device is shipped by Renesas. For

other chips for which the erasure history is unknown, it is recommended that auto-erasing be

executed to check and supplement the initialization (erase) level.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 159 of 462

6.11 Power-Down States for Flash Memory

In user mode, the flash memory will operate in either of the following states:

•Normal operating mode

The flash memory can be read and written to at high speed.

•Power-down operating mode

The power supply circuit of flash memory can be partly halted. As a result, flash memory can

be read with low power consumption.

•Standby mode

All flash memory circuits are halted.

Table 6.21 shows the correspondence between the operating modes of this LSI and the flash

memory. In subactive mode, the flash memory can be set to operate in power-down mode with the

PDWND bit in FLPWCR. When the flash memory returns to its normal operating state from

power-down mode or standby mode, a period to stabilize operation of the power supply circuits

that were stopped is needed. When the flash memory returns to its normal operating state, bits

STS2 to STS0 in SYSCR1 must be set to provide a wait time of at least 20 µs, even when the

external clock is being used.

Table 6.21 Flash Memory Operating States

Flash Memory Operating State

LSI Operating State PDWND = 0 (Initial value) PDWND = 1

Active mode Normal operating mode Normal operating mode

Subactive mode Power-down mode Normal operating mode

Sleep mode Normal operating mode Normal operating mode

Subsleep mode Standby mode Standby mode

Standby mode Standby mode Standby mode

Watch mode Standby mode Standby mode

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 160 of 462

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 161 of 462

Section 7 RAM

This LSI has an on-chip high-speed static RAM. The RAM is connected to the CPU by a 16-bit

data bus, enabling two-state access by the CPU to both byte data and word data.

Product Classification RAM Size RAM Address

H8/38004 1 kbyte H'FB80 to H'FF7F

Flash memory version

H8/38002 1 kbyte H'FB80 to H'FF7F

H8/38104 1 kbyte H'FB80 to H'FF7F

H8/38102 1 kbyte H'FB80 to H'FF7F

PROM version H8/3802 1 kbyte H'FB80 to H'FF7F

H8/3802 1 kbyte H'FB80 to H'FF7F

H8/3801 512 bytes H'FD80 to H'FF7F

H8/3800 512 bytes H'FD80 to H'FF7F

H8/38004 1 kbyte H'FB80 to H'FF7F

H8/38003 1 kbyte H'FB80 to H'FF7F

H8/38002 1 kbyte H'FB80 to H'FF7F

H8/38001 512 bytes H'FD80 to H'FF7F

Mask ROM version

H8/38000 512 bytes H'FD80 to H'FF7F

H8/38104 1 kbyte H'FB80 to H'FF7F

H8/38103 1 kbyte H'FB80 to H'FF7F

H8/38102 1 kbyte H'FB80 to H'FF7F

H8/38101 512 bytes H'FD80 to H'FF7F

H8/38100 512 bytes H'FD80 to H'FF7F

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 162 of 462

7.1 Block Diagram

Figure 7.1 shows a block diagram of the on-chip RAM.

Internal data bus (upper 8 bits)

Internal data bus (lower 8 bits)

H'FB80

H'FB82

H'FF7E

H'FB80

H'FB82

H'FF7E

H'FB81

H'FB83

H'FF7F

On-chip RAM

Even address Odd address

Figure 7.1 Block Diagram of RAM (H8/3802)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 163 of 462

Section 8 I/O Ports

This LSI is provided with three 8-bit I/O ports, one 7-bit I/O port, one 4-bit I/O port, one 3-bit I/O

port, one 1-bit I/O port, one 4-bit input-only port, one 1-bit input-only port, and one 6-bit output-

only port.

Each port is configured by the port control register (PCR) that controls input and output, and the

port data register (PDR) that stores output data. Input or output can be assigned to individual bits.

Ports 5, 6, 7, 8, and A are also used as liquid crystal display segment and common pins, selectable

in 4-bit units.

See section 2.9.4, Bit Manipulation Instructions, for information on executing bit-manipulation

instructions to write data in PCR or PDR. Block diagrams of each port are given in Appendix B,

I/O Port Block Diagrams. Table 8.1 lists the functions of each port.

Table 8.1 Port Functions

Port Description Pins Other Functions

Function

Switching

Registers

P37/AEVL

P36/AEVH

P35

P34

P33

Asynchronous event

counter event inputs AEVL,

AEVH

PMR3

Port 3 •7-bit I/O port

•Input pull-up MOS option

•Large-current port*1

P32/TMOFH

P31/TMOFL Timer F output compare

output PMR3

P43/IRQ0 External interrupt 0 PMR2Port 4 •1-bit input-only port

•3-bit I/O port P42/TXD32

P41/RXD32

P40/SCK32

SCI3 data output (TXD32),

data input (RXD32), clock

input/output (SCK32)

SCR3

SMR

Port 5 •8-bit I/O port

•Input pull-up MOS option

P57toP50/

WKP7 to

WKP0/

SEG8 to

SEG1

Wakeup input (WKP7 to

WKP0), segment output

(SEG8 to SEG1)

PMR5

LPCR

Port 6 •8-bit I/O port

•Input pull-up MOS option

P67toP60/

SEG16 to

SEG9

Segment output (SEG16 to

SEG9) LPCR

Port 7 •8-bit I/O port P77toP70/

SEG24 to

SEG17

Segment output (SEG24 to

SEG17) LPCR

Port 8 •1-bit I/O port P80/SEG25 Segment output (SEG25) LPCR

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 164 of 462

Port Description Pins Other Functions

Function

Switching

Registers

P95toP92

(P95, P92,

P93/Vref)*3

None

(LVD reference voltage

external input pin)*3(LVDSR)*3

•6-bit output-only port

•High-voltage, large-current

port*2P91, P90/

PWM2, PWM1 10-bit PWM output PMR9

Port 9

•High-voltage, input port*4IRQAEC None

Port A •4-bit I/O port PA3 to PA0/

COM4 to

COM1

Commonoutput(COM4to

COM1) LPCR

PB3/AN3/

IRQ1 A/D converter analog input

External interrupt 1 AMR

PMRB

Port B •4-bit input-only port

PB2/AN2 A/D converter analog input AMR

PB1/AN1/

(extU)*5

PB0/AN0/

(extD)*5

A/D converter analog input

(LVD detection voltage

external input pin)*5

AMR

(LVDCR)*5

Notes: 1. Implemented on H8/3802 Group and H8/38104 Group only.

2. Implemented on H8/3802 Group only. Standard high-voltage port on H8/38104 Group

and H8/38004 Group.

3. Implemented on H8/38104 Group only. Pin 94 does not function on H8/38104 Group.

4. Implemented on H8/3802 Group only. Input port on H8/38004 Group and H8/38104

Group.

5. Implemented on H8/38104 Group only.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 165 of 462

8.1 Port 3

Port 3 is an I/O port also functioning as an asynchronous event counter input pin and timer F

output pin. Figure 8.1 shows its pin configuration.

P37/AEVL

P36/AEVH

P35

P34

P33

P32/TMOFH

P31/TMOFL

Port 3

Figure 8.1 Port 3 Pin Configuration

Port 3 has the following registers.

•Port data register 3 (PDR3)

•Port control register 3 (PCR3)

•Port pull-up control register 3 (PUCR3)

•Port mode register 3 (PMR3)

•Port mode register 2 (PMR2)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 166 of 462

8.1.1 Port Data Register 3 (PDR3)

PDR3 is a register that stores data of port 3.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

P37

P36

P35

P34

P33

P32

P31

R/W

If port 3 is read while PCR3 bits are set to 1, the values

stored in PDR3 are read, regardless of the actual pin

states. If port 3 is read while PCR3 bits are cleared to 0,

the pin states are read.

0Reserved

8.1.2 Port Control Register 3 (PCR3)

PCR3 controls whether each of the port 3 pins functions as an input pin or output pin.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

PCR37

PCR36

PCR35

PCR34

PCR33

PCR32

PCR31

Setting a PCR3 bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin an

output pin, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an

input pin. The settings in PCR3 and in PDR3 are valid

only when the corresponding pin is designated in PMR3

as a general I/O pin.

PCR3 is a write-only register. Bits 7 to 1 are always read

as 1.

0W Reserved

Thewritevalueshouldalwaysbe0.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 167 of 462

8.1.3 Port Pull-Up Control Register 3 (PUCR3)

PUCR3 controls whether the pull-up MOS of each of the port 3 pins is on or off.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

PUCR37

PUCR36

PUCR35

PUCR34

PUCR33

PUCR32

PUCR31

R/W

When a PCR3 bit is cleared to 0, setting the

corresponding PUCR3 bit to 1 turns on the pull-up MOS

for the corresponding pin, while clearing the bit to 0 turns

off the pull-up MOS.

0W Reserved

Thewritevalueshouldalwaysbe0.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 168 of 462

8.1.4 Port Mode Register 3 (PMR3)

PMR3 controls the selection of pin functions for port 3 pins.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7 AEVL 0 R/W P37/AEVL Pin Function Switch

This bit selects whether pin P37/AEVL is used as P37

or as AEVL.

0: P37 I/O pin

1: AEVL input pin

6 AEVH 0 R/W P36/AEVH Pin Function Switch

This bit selects whether pin P36/AEVH is used as P36

or as AEVH.

0: P36 I/O pin

1: AEVH input pin

5to3 WReserved

Thewritevalueshouldalwaysbe0.

2TMOFH0R/W

P32/TMOFH Pin Function Switch

This bit selects whether pin P32/TMOFH is used as P32

or as TMOFH.

0: P32 I/O pin

1: TMOFH output pin

1TMOFL0R/W

P31/TMOFL Pin Function Switch

This bit selects whether pin P31/TMOFL is used as P31

or as TMOFL.

0: P31 I/O pin

1: TMOFL output pin

0WReserved

Thewritevalueshouldalwaysbe0.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 169 of 462

8.1.5 Port Mode Register 2 (PMR2)

PMR2 controls the PMOS on/off state for the P35 pin, selects a pin function for the P43/IRQ0 pin,

and selects a clock of the watchdog timer.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7, 6 All 1 Reserved

These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be

modified.

5 POF1 0 R/W P35 Pin PMOS Control

This bit controls the on/off state of the PMOS of the P35

pin output buffer.

0: CMOS output

1: NMOS open-drain output

4, 3 All 1 Reserved

These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be

modified.

2WDCKS0R/WWatchdogTimerSourceClockSelect

This bit selects the input clock for the watchdog timer.

Note that this bit is implemented differently on the

H8/38004 Group and on H8/38104 Group.

H8/38004 Group: 0: φ/8,192

1: φw/32

H8/38104 Group: 0: Clock specified by timer mode

1: φw/32

Note: This bit is reserved and only 0 can be written in

the H8/3802 Group.

1W Reserved

Thewritevalueshouldalwaysbe0.

0 IRQ0 0 R/W P43/IRQ0 Pin Function Switch

This bit selects whether pin P43/IRQ0 is used as P43 or

as IRQ0.

0: P43 input pin

1: IRQ0 input pin

Note: *See section 9.5, Watchdog Timer, for details.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 170 of 462

8.1.6 Pin Functions

The port 3 pin functions are shown below.

•P37/AEVL pin

The pin function depends on the combination of bit AEVL in PMR3 and bit PCR37 in PCR3.

AEVL 0 1

PCR37 0 1 *

Pin Function P37 input pin P37 output pin AEVL input pin

[Legend] *: Don't care.

•P36/AEVH pin

The pin function depends on the combination of bit AEVH in PMR3 and bit PCR36 in PCR3.

AEVH 0 1

PCR36 0 1 *

Pin Function P36 input pin P36 output pin AEVH input pin

[Legend] *: Don't care.

•P35toP33pins

The pin function depends on the corresponding bit in PCR3.

(n = 5 to 3)

PCR3n 0 1

Pin Function P3n input pin P3n output pin

•P32/TMOFH pin

The pin function depends on the combination of bit TMOFH in PMR3 and bit PCR32 in PCR3.

TMOFH 0 1

PCR32 0 1 *

Pin Function P32 input pin P32 output pin TMOFH output pin

[Legend] *: Don't care.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 171 of 462

•P31/TMOFL pin

The pin function depends on the combination of bit TMOFL in PMR3 and bit PCR31 in PCR3.

TMOFL 0 1

PCR31 0 1 *

Pin Function P31 input pin P31 output pin TMOFL output pin

[Legend] *: Don't care.

8.1.7 Input Pull-Up MOS

Port 3 has an on-chip input pull-up MOS function that can be controlled by software. When the

PCR3 bit is cleared to 0, setting the corresponding PUCR3 bit to 1 turns on the input pull-up MOS

for that pin. The input pull-up MOS function is in the off state after a reset.

(n = 7 to 1)

PCR3n 0 1

PUCR3n 0 1 *

Input Pull-Up MOS Off On Off

[Legend] *: Don't care.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 172 of 462

8.2 Port 4

Port 4 is an I/O port also functioning as an interrupt input pin and SCI I/O pin. Figure 8.2 shows

its pin configuration.

P43/

P42/TXD32

P41/RXD32

P40/SCK32

Port 4

Figure 8.2 Port 4 Pin Configuration

Port 4 has the following registers.

•Port data register 4 (PDR4)

•Port control register 4 (PCR4)

•Serial port control register (SPCR)

8.2.1 Port Data Register 4 (PDR4)

PDR4 is a register that stores data of port 4.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7to4 1Reserved

These bits are always read as 1.

P43

P42

P41

P40

R/W

If port 4 is read while PCR4 bits are set to 1, the values

stored in PDR4 are read, regardless of the actual pin

states. If port 4 is read while PCR4 bits are cleared to 0,

the pin states are read.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 173 of 462

8.2.2 Port Control Register 4 (PCR4)

PCR4 controls whether each of the port 4 pins functions as an input pin or output pin.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7to3 All 1 Reserved

These bits are always read as 1.

PCR42

PCR41

PCR40

Setting a PCR4 bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin an

output pin, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an

input pin. The settings in PCR4 and in PDR4 are valid

only when the corresponding pin is designated in SCR3

and SCR2 as a general I/O pin.

PCR4 is a write-only register. Bits 2 to 0 are always

read as 1.

8.2.3 Serial Port Control Register (SPCR)

SPCR performs input/output data inversion switching of the RXD32 and TXD32 pins. Figure 8.3

shows the configuration.

SCINV2

P41/RXD32

P42/TXD32

RXD32

TXD32

SCINV3

Figure 8.3 Input/Output Data Inversion Function

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 174 of 462

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7, 6 All 1 Reserved

These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified.

5 SPC32 0 R/W P42/TXD32 Pin Function Switch

This bit selects whether pin P42/TXD32 is used as P42 or

as TXD32.

0: P42 I/O pin

1: TXD32 output pin*

Note: *Set the TE bit in SCR3 after setting this bit to 1.

4W Reserved

Thewritevalueshouldalwaysbe0.

3 SCINV3 0 R/W TXD32 Pin Output Data Inversion Switch

This bit specifies whether or not TXD32 pin output data is

to be inverted.

0: TXD32 output data is not inverted

1: TXD32 output data is inverted

2 SCINV2 0 R/W RXD32 Pin Input Data Inversion Switch

This bit specifies whether or not RXD32 pin input data is

to be inverted.

0: RXD32 input data is not inverted

1: RXD32 input data is inverted

1, 0 W Reserved

Thewritevalueshouldalwaysbe0.

Note: When the serial port control register is modified, the data being input or output up to that

point is inverted immediately after the modification, and an invalid data change is input or

output. When modifying the serial port control register, modification must be made in a state

in which data changes are invalidated.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 175 of 462

8.2.4 Pin Functions

The port 4 pin functions are shown below.

•P43/IRQ0 pin

The pin function depends on the IRQ0 bit in PMR2.

IRQ0 0 1

Pin Function P43 input pin IRQ0 input pin

•P42/TXD32 pin

The pin function depends on the combination of bit TE in SCR3, bit SPC32 in SPCR, and bit

PCR42 in PCR4.

SPC32 0 1

TE 0 1

PCR42 0 1 *

Pin Function P42 input pin P42 output pin TXD32 output pin

[Legend] *: Don't care.

•P41/RXD32 pin

The pin function depends on the combination of bit RE in SCR3 and bit PCR41 in PCR4.

RE 0 1

PCR41 0 1 *

Pin Function P41 input pin P41 output pin RXD32 input pin

[Legend] *: Don't care.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 176 of 462

•P40/SCK32 pin

The pin function depends on the combination of bits CKE1 and CKE0 in SCR3, bit COM in SMR,

and bit PCR40 in PCR4.

CKE1 0 1

CKE0 0 1 *

COM 0 1 **

PCR40 0 1 **

Pin Function P40 input pin P40 output pin SCK32 output pin SCK32 input pin

[Legend] *: Don't care.

8.3 Port 5

Port 5 is an I/O port also functioning as a wakeup interrupt request input pin and LCD segment

output pin. Figure 8.4 shows its pin configuration.

P57/ /SEG8

P56/ /SEG7

P55/ /SEG6

P54/ /SEG5

P53/ /SEG4

P52/ /SEG3

P51/ /SEG2

P50/ /SEG1

Port 5

Figure 8.4 Port 5 Pin Configuration

Port 5 has the following registers.

•Port data register 5 (PDR5)

•Port control register 5 (PCR5)

•Port pull-up control register 5 (PUCR5)

•Port mode register 5 (PMR5)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 177 of 462

8.3.1 Port Data Register 5 (PDR5)

PDR5 is a register that stores data of port 5.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

P57

P56

P55

P54

P53

P52

P51

P50

R/W

If port 5 is read while PCR5 bits are set to 1, the values

stored in PDR5 are read, regardless of the actual pin

states. If port 5 is read while PCR5 bits are cleared to 0,

the pin states are read.

8.3.2 Port Control Register 5 (PCR5)

PCR5 controls whether each of the port 5 pins functions as an input pin or output pin.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

PCR57

PCR56

PCR55

PCR54

PCR53

PCR52

PCR51

PCR50

Setting a PCR5 bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin an

output pin, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an

input pin. The settings in PCR5 and in PDR5 are valid

only when the corresponding pin is designated by PMR5

and the SGS3 to SGS0 bits in LPCR as a general I/O pin.

PCR5 is a write-only register. Bits 7 to 0 are always read

as 1.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 178 of 462

8.3.3 Port Pull-Up Control Register 5 (PUCR5)

PUCR5 controls whether the pull-up MOS of each of the port 5 pins is on or off.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

PUCR57

PUCR56

PUCR55

PUCR54

PUCR53

PUCR52

PUCR51

PUCR50

R/W

When a PCR5 bit is cleared to 0, setting the

corresponding PUCR5 bit to 1 turns on the pull-up MOS

for the corresponding pin, while clearing the bit to 0 turns

off the pull-up MOS.

8.3.4 Port Mode Register 5 (PMR5)

PMR5 controls the selection of pin functions for port 5 pins.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

WKP7

WKP6

WKP5

WKP4

WKP3

WKP2

WKP1

WKP0

R/W

P5n/WKPn/SEGn+1 Pin Function Switch

When pin P5n/WKPn/SEGn+1 is not used as SEGn+1,

these bits select whether the pin is used as P5n or

WKPn.

0: P5n I/O pin

1: WKPn input pin

(n = 7 to 0)

Note: For use as SEGn+1, see section 13.3.1, LCD Port Control Register (LPCR).

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 179 of 462

8.3.5 Pin Functions

The port 5 pin functions are shown below.

•P57/WKP7/SEG8toP54/WKP4/SEG5 pins

The pin function depends on the combination of bit WKPn in PMR5, bit PCR5n in PCR5, and bits

SGS3 to SGS0 in LPCR.

(n = 7 to 4)

SGS3 to

SGS0 Other than B′0010, B′0011, B′0100, B′0101,

B′0110, B′0111, B′1000, B′1001 B′0010, B′0011, B′0100, B′0101,

B′0110, B′0111, B′1000, B′1001

WKPn 0 1 *

PCR5n 0 1 **

Pin Function P5n input pin P5n output pin WKPn input pin SEGn+1 output pin

[Legend] *: Don't care.

•P53/WKP3/SEG4toP50/WKP0/SEG1 pins

The pin function depends on the combination of bit WKPm in PMR5, bit PCR5m in PCR5, and

bits SGS3 to SGS0 in LPCR.

(m = 3 to 0)

SGS3 to

SGS0 Other than B′0001, B′0010, B′0011, B′0100,

B′0101, B′0110, B′0111, B′1000 B′0001, B′0010, B′0011, B′0100,

B′0101, B′0110, B′0111, B′1000

WKPm 0 1 *

PCR5m 0 1 **

Pin Function P5m input pin P5m output pin WKPm input pin SEGm+1 output pin

[Legend] *: Don't care.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 180 of 462

8.3.6 Input Pull-Up MOS

Port 5 has an on-chip input pull-up MOS function that can be controlled by software. When the

PCR5 bit is cleared to 0, setting the corresponding PUCR5 bit to 1 turns on the input pull-up MOS

for that pin. The input pull-up MOS function is in the off state after a reset.

(n = 7 to 0)

PCR5n 0 1

PUCR5n 0 1 *

Input Pull-Up MOS Off On Off

[Legend] *: Don't care.

8.4 Port 6

Port 6 is an I/O port also functioning as an LCD segment output pin. Figure 8.5 shows its pin

configuration.

P67/SEG16

P66/SEG15

P65/SEG14

P64/SEG13

P63/SEG12

P62/SEG11

P61/SEG10

P60/SEG9

Port 6

Figure 8.5 Port 6 Pin Configuration

Port 6 has the following registers.

•Port data register 6 (PDR6)

•Port control register 6 (PCR6)

•Port pull-up control register 6 (PUCR6)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 181 of 462

8.4.1 Port Data Register 6 (PDR6)

PDR6 is a register that stores data of port 6.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

P67

P66

P65

P64

P63

P62

P61

P60

R/W

If port 6 is read while PCR6 bits are set to 1, the values

stored in PDR6 are read, regardless of the actual pin

states. If port 6 is read while PCR6 bits are cleared to 0,

the pin states are read.

8.4.2 Port Control Register 6 (PCR6)

PCR6 controls whether each of the port 6 pins functions as an input pin or output pin.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

PCR67

PCR66

PCR65

PCR64

PCR63

PCR62

PCR61

PCR60

Setting a PCR6 bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin an

output pin, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an

input pin. The settings in PCR6 and in PDR6 are valid

only when the corresponding pin is designated by the

SGS3 to SGS0 bits in LPCR as a general I/O pin.

PCR6 is a write-only register. Bits 7 to 0 are always read

as 1.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 182 of 462

8.4.3 Port Pull-Up Control Register 6 (PUCR6)

PUCR6 controls whether the pull-up MOS of each of the port 6 pins is on or off.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

PUCR67

PUCR66

PUCR65

PUCR64

PUCR63

PUCR62

PUCR61

PUCR60

R/W

When a PCR6 bit is cleared to 0, setting the

corresponding PUCR6 bit to 1 turns on the pull-up MOS

for the corresponding pin, while clearing the bit to 0 turns

off the pull-up MOS.

8.4.4 Pin Functions

The port 6 pin functions are shown below.

•P67/SEG16 to P64/SEG13 pins

The pin function depends on the combination of bit PCR6n in PCR6 and bits SGS3 to SGS0 in

LPCR.

(n = 7 to 4)

SGS3 to

SGS0 Other than B′0100, B′0101, B′0110, B′0111,

B′1000, B′1001, B′1010, B′1011 B′0100, B′0101, B′0110, B′0111,

B′1000, B′1001, B′1010, B′1011

PCR6n 0 1 *

Pin Function P6n input pin P6n output pin SEGn+9 output pin

[Legend] *: Don't care.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 183 of 462

•P63/SEG12 to P60/SEG9 pins

The pin function depends on the combination of bit PCR6m in PCR6 and bits SGS3 to SGS0 in

LPCR.

(m = 3 to 0)

SGS3 to

SGS0 Other than B′0011, B′0100, B′0101, B′0110,

B′0111, B′1000, B′1001, B′1010 B′0011, B′0100, B′0101, B′0110,

B′0111, B′1000, B′1001, B′1010

PCR6m 0 1 *

Pin Function P6m input pin P6m output pin SEGm+9 output pin

[Legend] *: Don't care.

8.4.5 Input Pull-Up MOS

Port 6 has an on-chip input pull-up MOS function that can be controlled by software. When the

PCR6 bit is cleared to 0, setting the corresponding PUCR6 bit to 1 turns on the input pull-up MOS

for that pin. The input pull-up MOS function is in the off state after a reset.

(n = 7 to 0)

PCR6n 0 1

PUCR6n 0 1 *

Input Pull-Up MOS Off On Off

[Legend] *: Don't care.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 184 of 462

8.5 Port 7

Port 7 is an I/O port also functioning as an LCD segment output pin. Figure 8.6 shows its pin

configuration.

P77/SEG24

P76/SEG23

P75/SEG22

P74/SEG21

P73/SEG20

P72/SEG19

P71/SEG18

P70/SEG17

Port 7

Figure 8.6 Port 7 Pin Configuration

Port 7 has the following registers.

•Port data register 7 (PDR7)

•Port control register 7 (PCR7)

8.5.1 Port Data Register 7 (PDR7)

PDR7 is a register that stores data of port 7.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

P77

P76

P75

P74

P73

P72

P71

P70

R/W

If port 7 is read while PCR7 bits are set to 1, the values

stored in PDR7 are read, regardless of the actual pin

states. If port 7 is read while PCR7 bits are cleared to 0,

the pin states are read.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 185 of 462

8.5.2 Port Control Register 7 (PCR7)

PCR7 controls whether each of the port 7 pins functions as an input pin or output pin.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

PCR77

PCR76

PCR75

PCR74

PCR73

PCR72

PCR71

PCR70

Setting a PCR7 bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin an

output pin, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an

input pin. The settings in PCR7 and in PDR7 are valid

only when the corresponding pin is designated by the

SGS3 to SGS0 bits in LPCR as a general I/O pin.

PCR7 is a write-only register. Bits 7 to 0 are always read

as 1.

8.5.3 Pin Functions

The port 7 pin functions are shown below.

•P77/SEG24 to P74/SEG21 pins

The pin function depends on the combination of bit PCR7n in PCR7 and bits SGS3 to SGS0 in

LPCR.

(n = 7 to 4)

SGS3 to

SGS0 Other than B′0110, B′0111, B′1000, B′1001,

B′1010, B′1011, B′1100, B′1101 B′0110, B′0111, B′1000, B′1001,

B′1010, B′1011, B′1100, B′1101

PCR7n 0 1 *

Pin Function P7n input pin P7n output pin SEGn+17 output pin

[Legend] *: Don't care.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 186 of 462

•P73/SEG20 to P70/SEG17 pins

The pin function depends on the combination of bit PCR7m in PCR7 and bits SGS3 to SGS0 in

LPCR.

(m = 3 to 0)

SGS3 to

SGS0 Other than B′0101, B′0110, B′0111, B′1000,

B′1001, B′1010, B′1011, B′1100 B′0101, B′0110, B′0111, B′1000,

B′1001, B′1010, B′1011, B′1100

PCR7m 0 1 *

Pin Function P7m input pin P7m output pin SEGm+17 output pin

[Legend] *: Don't care.

8.6 Port 8

Port 8 is an I/O port also functioning as an LCD segment output pin. Figure 8.7 shows its pin

configuration.

P80/SEG25

Port 8

Figure 8.7 Port 8 Pin Configuration

Port 8 has the following registers.

•Port data register 8 (PDR8)

•Port control register 8 (PCR8)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 187 of 462

8.6.1 Port Data Register 8 (PDR8)

PDR8 is a register that stores data of port 8.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7to1 Reserved

0 P80 0 R/W If port 8 is read while PCR8 bits are set to 1, the values

stored in PDR8 are read, regardless of the actual pin

states. If port 8 is read while PCR8 bits are cleared to 0,

the pin states are read.

8.6.2 Port Control Register 8 (PCR8)

PCR8 controls whether each of the port 8 pins functions as an input pin or output pin.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7to1 W Reserved

Thewritevalueshouldalwaysbe0.

0 PCR80 0 W Setting a PCR8 bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin an

output pin, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an

input pin. The settings in PCR8 and in PDR8 are valid

only when the corresponding pin is designated by the

SGS3 to SGS0 bits in LPCR as a general I/O pin.

PCR8 is a write-only register.

8.6.3 Pin Functions

The port 8 pin functions are shown below.

•P80/SEG25 pin

The pin function depends on the combination of bit PCR80 in PCR8 and bits SGS3 to SGS0 in

LPCR.

SGS3 to

SGS0 Other than B′0111, B′1000, B′1001, B′1010,

B′1011, B′1100, B′1101, B′1110 B′0111, B′1000, B′1001, B′1010,

B′1011, B′1100, B′1101, B′1110

PCR80 0 1 *

Pin Function P80 input pin P80 output pin SEG25 output pin

[Legend] *: Don't care.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 188 of 462

8.7 Port 9

Port 9 is an output-only port also functioning as a PWM output pin. Figure 8.8 shows its pin

configuration.

P95

P94*

P93/Vref*

P92

P91/PWM2

P90/PWM1

Port 9

Notes: 1. There is no pin 94, and its function is not implemented, on the H8/38104 Group.

2. The Vref pin is implemented on the H8/38104 Group only.

Figure 8.8 Port 9 Pin Configuration

Port 9 has the following registers.

•Port data register 9 (PDR9)

•Port mode register 9 (PMR9)

8.7.1 Port Data Register 9 (PDR9)

PDR9 is a register that stores data of port 9.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7, 6 All 1 Reserved

The initial value should not be changed.

P95

P94*

P93

P92

P91

P90

R/W

If PDR9 is read, the values stored in PDR9 are read.

Note: *There is no pin 94, and its function is not implemented, on the H8/38104 Group. However,

the register is read/write enabled.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 189 of 462

8.7.2 Port Mode Register 9 (PMR9)

PMR9 controls the selection of the P90 and P91 pin functions.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7to4 All 1 Reserved

The initial value should not be changed.

3 PIOFF 0 R/W P92toP90Step-UpCircuitControl

This bit turns on and off the P92 to P90 step-up circuit.

0: Step-up circuit of large-current port is turned on

1: Step-up circuit of large-current port is turned off

Note: This is a readable/writable reserved bit in the

H8/38004 Group and H8/38104 Group.

2W Reserved

Thewritevalueshouldalwaysbe0.

0PWM2

PWM1 0

0R/W

R/W P9n/PWMn+1PinFunctionSwitch

These bits select whether pin P9n/PWMn+1isusedas

P9n or as PWMn+1. (n = 1, 0)

0: P9n output pin

1: PWMn+1 output pin

Note: When turning the step-up circuit on or off, the register must be rewritten only when the

buffer NMOS is off (port data is 1).

When turning the step-up circuit on, first clear PIOFF to 0, then wait for the elapse of 30

system clock before turning the buffer NMOS on (clearing port data to 0).

Without the elapse of the 30 system clock interval the step-up circuit will not start up, and it

will not be possible for a large current to flow, making operation unstable.

8.7.3 Pin Functions

The port 9 pin functions are shown below.

•P91/PWMn+1 to P90/PWMn+1 pins (n = 1, 0)

PMR9n 0 1

Pin Function P9n output pin PWMn+1 output pin

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 190 of 462

•P93/Vref

As shown below, switching is performed based on the setting of VCSS in LVDSR. Note that this

function is implemented on the H8/38104 Group only. The Vref pin is the input pin for the LVD’s

external reference voltage.

VCSS1 0 1

Pin Function P93 output pin Vref input pin

8.8 Port A

Port A is an I/O port also functioning as an LCD common output pin. Figure 8.9 shows its pin

configuration.

PA3/COM4

PA2/COM3

PA1/COM2

PA0/COM1

Port A

Figure 8.9 Port A Pin Configuration

Port A has the following registers.

•Port data register A (PDRA)

•Port control register A (PCRA)

8.8.1 Port Data Register A (PDRA)

PDRA is a register that stores data of port A.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7to4 All 1 Reserved

The initial value should not be changed.

PA3

PA2

PA1

PA0

R/W

If port A is read while PCRA bits are set to 1, the values

stored in PDRA are read, regardless of the actual pin

states. If port A is read while PCRA bits are cleared to 0,

the pin states are read.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 191 of 462

8.8.2 Port Control Register A (PCRA)

PCRA controls whether each of the port A pins functions as an input pin or output pin.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7to4 All 1 Reserved

The initial value should not be changed.

PCRA3

PCRA2

PCRA1

PCRA0

Setting a PCRA bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin an

output pin, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an

input pin. The settings in PCRA and in PDRA are valid

only when the corresponding pin is designated in LPCR

as a general I/O pin.

PCRA is a write-only register. Bits 3 to 0 are always read

as 1.

8.8.3 Pin Functions

The port A pin functions are shown below.

•PA3/COM4 pin

The pin function depends on the combination of bit PCRA3 in PCRA and bits SGS3 to SGS0 in

LPCR.

SGS3 to SGS0 B′0000 B′0000 Other than B′0000

PCRA3 0 1 *

Pin Function PA3 input pin PA3 output pin COM4 output pin

[Legend] *: Don't care.

•PA2/COM3 pin

The pin function depends on the combination of bit PCRA2 in PCRA and bits SGS3 to SGS0 in

LPCR.

SGS3 to SGS0 B′0000 B′0000 Other than B′0000

PCRA2 0 1 *

Pin Function PA2 input pin PA2 output pin COM3 output pin

[Legend] *: Don't care.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 192 of 462

•PA1/COM2 pin

The pin function depends on the combination of bit PCRA1 in PCRA and bits SGS3 to SGS0 in

LPCR.

SGS3 to SGS0 B′0000 B′0000 Other than B′0000

PCRA1 0 1 *

Pin Function PA1 input pin PA1 output pin COM2 output pin

[Legend] *: Don't care.

•PA0/COM1 pin

The pin function depends on the combination of bit PCRA0 in PCRA and bits SGS3 to SGS0 in

LPCR.

SGS3 to SGS0 B′0000 B′0000 Other than B′0000

PCRA0 0 1 *

Pin Function PA0 input pin PA0 output pin COM1 output pin

[Legend] *: Don't care.

8.9 Port B

Port B is an input-only port also functioning as an analog input pin and interrupt input pin. Figure

8.10 shows its pin configuration.

PB3/AN3/

IRQ1

PB2/AN2

PB1/AN1/extU*

PB0/AN0/extD*

Port B

Note: * The extU and extD pins are implemented on the H8/38104 Group only.

Figure 8.10 Port B Pin Configuration

Port B has the following registers.

•Port data register B (PDRB)

•Port mode register B (PMRB)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 193 of 462

8.9.1 Port Data Register B (PDRB)

PDRB is a register that stores data of port B.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7to4 Undefined Reserved

PB3

PB2

PB1

PB0

Undefined R

Reading PDRB always gives the pin states. However, if

a port B pin is selected as an analog input channel for

the A/D converter by bits CH3 to CH0 in AMR, that pin

reads 0 regardless of the input voltage.

8.9.2 Port Mode Register B (PMRB)

PMRB controls the selection of the PB3 pin functions.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7to4 All 1 Reserved

These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be

modified.

3 IRQ1 0 R/W PB3/AN3/IRQ1 Pin Function Switch

This bit selects whether pin PB3/AN3/IRQ1 is used as

PB3/AN3 or as IRQ1.

0: PB3/AN3 input pin

1: IRQ1 input pin

2to0 All 1 Reserved

These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be

modified.

Note: Rising or falling edge sensing can be selected for the IRQ1 pin.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 194 of 462

8.9.3 Pin Functions

The port B pin functions are shown below.

•PB3/AN3/IRQ1 pin

The pin function depends on the combination of bits CH3 to CH0 in AMR and bit IRQ1 in PMRB.

IRQ1 0 1

CH3 to CH0 Other than B′0111 B′0111 *

Pin Function PB3 input pin AN3 input pin IRQ1 input pin

[Legend] *: Don't care.

•PB2/AN2 pin

The pin function depends on bits CH3 to CH0 in AMR.

CH3 to CH0 Other than B′0110 B′0110

Pin Function PB2 input pin AN2 input pin

•PB1/AN1/extU pin

Switching is accomplished by combining CH3 to CH0 in AMR and VINTUSEL in LVDCR as

shown below. Note that the extU pin and VINTUSEL are implemented on the H8/38104 Group

only.

VINTUSEL 0 1

CH3 to CH0 Other than B′0101 B'0101 *

Pin Function PB1 input pin AN1 input pin extU input pin

[Legend] *: Don't care

•PB0/AN0/extD pin

Switching is accomplished by combining CH3 to CH0 in AMR and VINTDSEL in LVDCR as

shown below. Note that the extD pin and VINTDSEL are implemented on the H8/38104 Group

only.

VINTDSEL 0 1

CH3 to CH0 Other than B′0100 B'0100 *

Pin Function PB0 input pin AN0 input pin extD input pin

[Legend] *: Don't care

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 195 of 462

8.10 Usage Notes

8.10.1 How to Handle Unused Pin

If an I/O pin not used by the user system is floating, pull it up or down.

•If an unused pin is an input pin, handle it in one of the following ways:

Pull it up to Vcc with an on-chip pull-up MOS.

Pull it up to Vcc with an external resistor of approximately 100 kΩ.

Pull it down to Vss with an external resistor of approximately 100 kΩ.

For a pin also used by the A/D converter, pull it up to AVcc.

•If an unused pin is an output pin, handle it in one of the following ways:

Set the output of the unused pin to high and pull it up to Vcc with an on-chip pull-up MOS.

Set the output of the unused pin to high and pull it up to Vcc with an external resistor of

approximately 100 kΩ.

Set the output of the unused pin to low and pull it down to GND with an external resistor of

approximately 100 kΩ.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 196 of 462

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 197 of 462

Section 9 Timers

9.1 Overview

The H8/3802 Group provides three timers: timer A, timer F, and asynchronous event counter. The

H8/38004 Group and H8/38104 Group provide four timers: timer A, timer F, asynchronous event

counter, and watchdog timer.

The functions of these timers are summarized in table 9.1.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 198 of 462

Table 9.1 Timer Functions

Name Functions Internal Clock Event Input

Pin Waveform

Output Pin Remarks

•8-bit timer φ/8 to φ/8192

•Interval function (8 choices)

Timer A

•Clock time base φW/128 (choice

of 4 overflow

periods)

——

Timer F •16-bit timer

•Also usable as two

independent 8-bit

timers.

•Output compare

output function

φ/4 to φ/32, φW/4

(4 choices) —TMOFL

TMOFH

Asynchro-

nous event

counter

•16-bit counter

•Also usable as two

independent 8-bit

counters

•Counts events

asynchronous to φ

and φW

•Can count

asynchronous events

(rising/falling/both

edges) independ-

ently of the MCU's

internal clock

φ/2 to φ/8

(3 choices) AEVL

AEVH

IRQAEC

—

Watchdog

timer*φ/8192, φW/32 H8/38004

Group

•Generates a reset

signal by overflow of

8-bit counter φ/64 to φ/8192

φw/32

On-chip

oscillator

H8/38104

Group

Note: *The watchdog timer functions differently on the H8/38004 and H8/38104 Group. See

section 9.5, Watchdog Timer, for details.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 199 of 462

9.2 Timer A

The timer A is an 8-bit timer with interval timing and realtime clock time-base functions. The

clock time-base function is available when a 32.768kHz crystal oscillator is connected. Figure 9.1

shows a block diagram of the timer A.

9.2.1 Features

•The timer A can be used as an interval timer or a clock time base.

•An interrupt is requested when the counter overflows.

•Use of module standby mode enables this module to be placed in standby mode independently

when not used. (For details, refer to section 5.4, Module Standby Function.)

Interval Timer

•Choice of eight internal clock sources (φ/8192, φ/4096, φ/2048, φ/512, φ/256, φ/128, φ/32, and

φ8)

Clock Time Base

•Choice of four overflow periods (1 s, 0.5 s, 0.25 s, and 31.25 ms) when timer A is used as a

clock time base (using a 32.768 kHz crystal oscillator).

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 200 of 462

φ/8192, φ/4096,

φ/2048, φ/512,

φ/256, φ/128,

φ/32, φ/8

/128

1/4 PSW

PSS

TMA

TCA

IRRTA

÷8*

÷64*

÷128*

÷256*

[Legend]

TMA: Timer mode register A

TCA: Timer counter A

IRRTA: Timer A overflow interrupt request flag

PSW: Prescaler W

PSS: Prescaler S

Note: * Can be selected only when the prescaler W output (φ

/128) is used as the TCA input clock.

Internal data bus

Figure 9.1 Block Diagram of Timer A

9.2.2 Register Descriptions

The timer A has the following registers.

•Timer mode register A (TMA)

•Timer counter A (TCA)

TimerModeRegisterA(TMA):TMA selects the operating mode, the divided clock output, and

the input clock.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description



Reserved

Thewritevalueshouldalwaysbe0.

41Reserved

This bit is always read as 1.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 201 of 462

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

3 TMA3 0 R/W Internal Clock Select 3

Selects the operating mode of the timer A.

0: Functions as an interval timer to count the outputs of

prescaler S.

1: Functions as a clock-time base to count the outputs of

prescaler W.

TMA2

TMA1

TMA0

R/W

Internal Clock Select 2 to 0

Select the clock input to TCA when TMA3 = 0.

000: φ/8192

001: φ/4096

010: φ/2048

011: φ/512

100: φ/256

101: φ/128

110: φ/32

111: φ/8

These bits select the overflow period when TMA3 = 1

(when a 32.768 kHz crystal oscillator is used as φw).

000: 1 s

001: 0.5 s

010: 0.25 s

011: 0.03125 s

1XX: Both PSW and TCA are reset

[Legend] X: Don't care.

Timer Counter A (TCA): TCA is an 8-bit readable up-counter, which is incremented by internal

clock input. The clock source for input to this counter is selected by bits TMA3 to TMA0 in TMA.

TCA values can be read by the CPU in active mode, but cannot be read in subactive mode. When

TCA overflows, the IRRTA bit in the interrupt request register 1 (IRR1) is set to 1. TCA is cleared

by setting bits TMA3 and TMA2 in TMA to B'11. TCA is initialized to H'00.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 202 of 462

9.2.3 Operation

Interval Timer Operation: When bit TMA3 in TMA is cleared to 0, the timer A functions as an

8-bit interval timer.

Upon reset, TCA is cleared to H'00 and bit TMA3 is cleared to 0, so up-counting of the timer A

resume immediately as an interval timer. The clock input to timer A is selected by bits TMA2 to

TMA0 in TMA; any of eight internal clock signals output by prescaler S can be selected.

After the count value in TCA reaches H'FF, the next clock signal input causes timer A to

overflow, setting bit IRRTA to 1 in interrupt Flag Register 1 (IRR1). If IENTA = 1 in the interrupt

enable register 1 (IENR1), a CPU interrupt is requested. At overflow, TCA returns to H'00 and

starts counting up again. In this mode the timer A functions as an interval timer that generates an

overflow output at intervals of 256 input clock pulses.

Clock Time Base Operation: When bit TMA3 in TMA is set to 1, the timer A functions as a

clock-timer base by counting clock signals output by prescaler W. When a clock signal is input

after the TCA counter value has become H'FF, the timer A overflows and IRRTA in IRR1 is set to

1. At that time, an interrupt request is generated to the CPU if IENTA in the interrupt enable

A choice of four periods is available. In clock time base operation (TMA3 = 1), setting bit TMA2

to 1 clears both TCA and prescaler W to H'00.

9.2.4 Timer A Operating States

Table 9.2 summarizes the timer A operating states.

Table 9.2 Timer A Operating States

Operating Mode Reset Active Sleep Watch Sub-active Sub-sleep Standby Module

Standby

Interval Reset Functions Functions Halted Halted Halted Halted Halted

TCA

Clock

time base Reset Functions*Functions*Functions Functions Functions Halted Halted

TMA Reset Functions Retained Retained Functions Retained Retained Retained

Note: *When the clock time base function is selected as the internal clock of TCA in active

mode or sleep mode, the internal clock is not synchronous with the system clock, so it

is synchronized by a synchronizing circuit. This may result in a maximum error of 1/φ(s)

in the count cycle.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 203 of 462

9.3 Timer F

The timer F has a 16-bit timer having an output compare function. The timer F also provides for

counter resetting, interrupt request generation, toggle output, etc., using compare match signals.

Thus, it can be applied to various systems. The timer F can also be used as two independent 8-bit

timers (timer FH and timer FL). Figure 9.2 shows a block diagram of the timer F.

9.3.1 Features

•Choice of four internal clock sources (φ/32, φ/16, φ/4, and φW/4)

•Toggle output function

ToggleoutputisperformedtotheTMOFHpin(TMOFLpin)usingasinglecomparematch

signal.

The initial value of toggle output can be set.

•Counter resetting by a compare match signal

•Two interrupt sources: One compare match, one overflow

•Choice of 16-bit or 8-bit mode by settings of bits CKSH2 to CKSH0 in TCRF

•Can operate in watch mode, subactive mode, and subsleep mode

When φW/4 is selected as an internal clock, the timer F can operate in watch mode, subactive

mode, and subsleep mode.

•Use of module standby mode enables this module to be placed in standby mode independently

when not used. (For details, refer to section 5.4, Module Standby Function.)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 204 of 462

PSS

Toggle

circuit

Toggle

circuit

TMOFL

TMOFH

TCRF

TCFL

OCRFL

TCFH

OCRFH

TCSRF

Comparator

Comparator Match

Internal data bus

IRRTFH

IRRTFL

[Legend]

TCRF

TCSRF

TCFH

TCFL

OCRFH

OCRFL

IRRTFH

IRRTFL

PSS

: Timer control register F

: Timer control status register F

: 8-bit timer counter FH

: 8-bit timer counter FL

: Output compare register FH

: Output compare register FL

: Timer FH interrupt request flag

: Timer FL interrupt request flag

: Prescaler S

Figure 9.2 Block Diagram of Timer F

9.3.2 Input/Output Pins

Table 9.3 shows the pin configuration of the timer F.

Table 9.3 Pin Configuration

Name Abbreviation I/O Function

Timer FH output TMOFH Output Timer FH toggle output pin

Timer FL output TMOFL Output Timer FL toggle output pin

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 205 of 462

9.3.3 Register Descriptions

The timer F has the following registers.

•Timer counters FH and FL (TCFH,TCFL)

•Output compare registers FH and FL (OCRFH, OCRFL)

•Timer control register F (TCRF)

•Timer control status register F (TCSRF)

Timer Counters FH and FL (TCFH, TCFL): TCF is a 16-bit read/write up-counter configured

by cascaded connection of 8-bit timer counters TCFH and TCFL. In addition to the use of TCF as

a 16-bit counter with TCFH as the upper 8 bits and TCFL as the lower 8 bits, TCFH and TCFL

can also be used as independent 8-bit counters.

TCFH and TCFL can be read and written by the CPU, but when they are used in 16-bit mode, data

transfer to and from the CPU is performed via a temporary register (TEMP). For details of TEMP,

see section 9.3.4, CPU Interface. TCFH and TCFL are initialized to H'00 upon reset.

•16-bit mode (TCF)

When CKSH2 is cleared to 0 in TCRF, TCF operates as a 16-bit counter. The TCF input clock

is selected by bits CKSL2 to CKSL0 in TCRF.

TCF can be cleared in the event of a compare match by means of CCLRH in TCSRF.

When TCF overflows from H'FFFF to H'0000, OVFH is set to 1 in TCSRF. If OVIEH in

TCSRF is 1 at this time, IRRTFH is set to 1 in IRR2, and if IENTFH in IENR2 is 1, an

interrupt request is sent to the CPU.

•8-bit mode (TCFL/TCFH)

When CKSH2 is set to 1 in TCRF, TCFH and TCFL operate as two independent 8-bit

counters. The TCFH (TCFL) input clock is selected by bits CKSH2 to CKSH0 (CKSL2 to

CKSL0) in TCRF.

TCFH (TCFL) can be cleared in the event of a compare match by means of CCLRH (CCLRL)

in TCSRF.

When TCFH (TCFL) overflows from H'FF to H'00, OVFH (OVFL) is set to 1 in TCSRF. If

OVIEH (OVIEL) in TCSRF is 1 at this time, IRRTFH (IRRTFL) is set to 1 in IRR2, and if

IENTFH (IENTFL) in IENR2 is 1, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU.

Output Compare Registers FH and FL (OCRFH, OCRFL): OCRF is a 16-bit read/write

16-bit register with OCRFH as the upper 8 bits and OCRFL as the lower 8 bits, OCRFH and

OCRFL can also be used as independent 8-bit registers.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 206 of 462

OCRFH and OCRFL can be read and written by the CPU, but when they are used in 16-bit mode,

data transfer to and from the CPU is performed via a temporary register (TEMP). For details of

TEMP, see section 9.3.4, CPU Interface. OCRFH and OCRFL are initialized to H'FF upon reset.

•16-bit mode (OCRF)

When CKSH2 is cleared to 0 in TCRF, OCRF operates as a 16-bit register. OCRF contents are

constantly compared with TCF, and when both values match, CMFH is set to 1 in TCSRF. At

the same time, IRRTFH is set to 1 in IRR2. If IENTFH in IENR2 is 1 at this time, an interrupt

requestissenttotheCPU.

Toggle output can be provided from the TMOFH pin by means of compare matches, and the

output level can be set (high or low) by means of TOLH in TCRF.

•8-bit mode (OCRFH/OCRFL)

WhenCKSH2issetto1inTCRF,OCRFHandOCRFLoperateastwoindependent8-bit

registers. OCRFH contents are compared with TCFH, and OCRFL contents are with TCFL.

When the OCRFH (OCRFL) and TCFH (TCFL) values match, CMFH (CMFL) is set to 1 in

TCSRF. At the same time, IRRTFH (IRRTFL) is set to 1 in IRR2. If IENTFH (IENTFL) in

IENR2 is 1 at this time, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU.

Toggle output can be provided from the TMOFH pin (TMOFL pin) by means of compare

matches, and the output level can be set (high or low) by means of TOLH (TOLL) in TCRF.

Timer Control Register F (TCRF): TCRF switches between 16-bit mode and 8-bit mode, selects

the input clock from among four internal clock sources, and sets the output level of the TMOFH

and TMOFL pins.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7 TOLH 0 W Toggle Output Level H

Sets the TMOFH pin output level.

0: Low level

1: High level

CKSH2

CKSH1

CKSH0

Clock Select H

Select the clock input to TCFH from among four internal

clock sources or TCFL overflow.

000: 16-bit mode, counting on TCFL overflow signal

001: 16-bit mode, counting on TCFL overflow signal

010: 16-bit mode, counting on TCFL overflow signal

011: Using prohibited

100: Internal clock: counting on φ/32

101: Internal clock: counting on φ/16

110: Internal clock: counting on φ/4

111: Internal clock: counting on φW/4

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 207 of 462

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

3 TOLL 0 W Toggle Output Level L

Sets the TMOFL pin output level.

0: Low level

1: High level

CKSL2

CKSL1

CKSL0

Clock Select L

Select the clock input to TCFL from among four internal

clock sources or external event input.

000: Non-operational

001: Using prohibited

010: Using prohibited

011: Using prohibited

100: Internal clock: counting on φ/32

101: Internal clock: counting on φ/16

110: Internal clock: counting on φ/4

111: Internal clock: counting on φW/4

Timer Control Status Register F (TCSRF): TCSRF performs counter clear selection, overflow

flag setting, and compare match flag setting, and controls enabling of overflow interrupt requests.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7OVFH0 R/W

*Timer Overflow Flag H

[Setting condition]

When TCFH overflows from H’FF to H’00

[Clearing condition]

When this bit is written to 0 after reading OVFH = 1

6CMFH0 R/W

*Compare Match Flag H

This is a status flag indicating that TCFH has matched

OCRFH.

[Setting condition]

When the TCFH value matches the OCRFH value

[Clearing condition]

When this bit is written to 0 after reading CMFH = 1

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 208 of 462

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

5 OVIEH 0 R/W Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable H

Selects enabling or disabling of interrupt generation when

TCFH overflows.

0: TCFH overflow interrupt request is disabled

1: TCFH overflow interrupt request is enabled

4 CCLRH 0 R/W Counter Clear H

In 16-bit mode, this bit selects whether TCF is cleared

when TCF and OCRF match. In 8-bit mode, this bit

selects whether TCFH is cleared when TCFH and

OCRFH match.

In 16-bit mode:

0: TCF clearing by compare match is disabled

1: TCF clearing by compare match is enabled

In 8-bit mode:

0: TCFH clearing by compare match is disabled

1: TCFH clearing by compare match is enabled

3OVFL0 R/W

*Timer Overflow Flag L

This is a status flag indicating that TCFL has overflowed.

[Setting condition]

When TCFL overflows from H’FF to H’00

[Clearing condition]

When this bit is written to 0 after reading OVFL = 1

2CMFL0 R/W

*Compare Match Flag L

This is a status flag indicating that TCFL has matched

OCRFL.

[Setting condition]

When the TCFL value matches the OCRFL value

[Clearing condition]

When this bit is written to 0 after reading CMFL = 1

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 209 of 462

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

1 OVIEL 0 R/W Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable L

Selects enabling or disabling of interrupt generation when

TCFL overflows.

0: TCFL overflow interrupt request is disabled

1: TCFL overflow interrupt request is enabled

0 CCLRL 0 R/W Counter Clear L

Selects whether TCFL is cleared when TCFL and OCRFL

match.

0: TCFL clearing by compare match is disabled

1: TCFL clearing by compare match is enabled

Note: *Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.

9.3.4 CPU Interface

TCF and OCRF are 16-bit readable/writable registers, but the CPU is connected to the on-chip

peripheral modules by an 8-bit data bus. When the CPU accesses these registers, it therefore uses

an 8-bit temporary register (TEMP).

In 16-bit mode, TCF read/write access and OCRF write access must be performed 16 bits at a time

(using two consecutive byte-size MOV instructions), and the upper byte must be accessed before

the lower byte. Data will not be transferred correctly if only the upper byte or only the lower byte

is accessed.

In 8-bit mode, there are no restrictions on the order of access.

Write Access: Write access to the upper byte results in transfer of the upper-byte write data to

TEMP. Next, write access to the lower byte results in transfer of the data in TEMP to the upper

Figure 9.3 shows an example in which H'AA55 is written to TCF.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 210 of 462

Write to upper byte

CPU

[H'AA]

TEMP

[H'AA]

TCFH

[ ] TCFL

[ ]

Bus interface

Module data bus

Write to lower byte

CPU

[H'55]

TEMP

[H'AA]

TCFH

[H'AA] TCFL

[H'55]

Figure 9.3 Write Access to TCF (CPU →

→→

→TCF)

Read Access: In access to TCF, when the upper byte is read the upper-byte data is transferred

directly to the CPU and the lower-byte data is transferred to TEMP. Next, when the lower byte is

read, the lower-byte data in TEMP is transferred to the CPU.

In access to OCRF, when the upper byte is read the upper-byte data is transferred directly to the

CPU. When the lower byte is read, the lower-byte data is transferred directly to the CPU.

Figure 9.4 shows an example in which TCF is read when it contains H'AAFF.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 211 of 462

Read upper byte

CPU

[H'AA]

TEMP

[H'FF]

TCFH

[H'AA] TCFL

[H'FF]

Bus interface Module data bus

Bus interface

Module data bus

Read lower byte

CPU

[H'FF]

TEMP

[H'FF]

TCFH

[AB] TCFL

[00]

Note: ∗ H'AB00 if counter has been updated once.

Figure 9.4 Read Access to TCF (TCF →

→→

→CPU)

9.3.5 Operation

The timer F is a 16-bit counter that increments on each input clock pulse. The timer F value is

constantly compared with the value set in the output compare register F, and the counter can be

cleared, an interrupt requested, or port output toggled, when the two values match. The timer F can

also function as two independent 8-bit timers.

Timer F Operation: The timer F has two operating modes, 16-bit timer mode and 8-bit timer

mode. The operation in each of these modes is described below.

•Operation in 16-bit timer mode

When CKSH2 is cleared to 0 in timer control register F (TCRF), timer F operates as a 16-bit

timer.

Following a reset, timer counter F (TCF) is initialized to H'0000, output compare register F

(OCRF) to H'FFFF, and timer control register F (TCRF) and timer control/status register F

(TCSRF) to H'00.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 212 of 462

The timer F operating clock can be selected from three internal clocks output by prescaler S by

means of bits CKSL2 to CKSL0 in TCRF.

OCRF contents are constantly compared with TCF, and when both values match, CMFH is set

to 1 in TCSRF. If IENTFH in IENR2 is 1 at this time, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU,

and at the same time, TMOFH pin output is toggled. If CCLRH in TCSRF is 1, TCF is cleared.

TMOFH pin output can also be set by TOLH in TCRF.

When TCF overflows from H'FFFF to H'0000, OVFH is set to 1 in TCSRF. If OVIEH in

TCSRF and IENTFH in IENR2 are both 1, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU.

•Operation in 8-bit timer mode

When CKSH2 is set to 1 in TCRF, TCF operates as two independent 8-bit timers, TCFH and

TCFL. The TCFH/TCFL input clock is selected by CKSH2 to CKSH0/CKSL2 to CKSL0 in

TCRF.

When the OCRFH/OCRFL and TCFH/TCFL values match, CMFH/CMFL is set to 1 in

TCSRF. If IENTFH/IENTFL in IENR2 is 1, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU, and at the

same time, TMOFH pin/TMOFL pin output is toggled. If CCLRH/CCLRL in TCSRF is 1,

TCFH/TCFL is cleared. TMOFH pin/TMOFL pin output can also be set by TOLH/TOLL in

TCRF.

When TCFH/TCFL overflows from H'FF to H'00, OVFH/OVFL is set to 1 in TCSRF. If

OVIEH/OVIEL in TCSRF and IENTFH/IENTFL in IENR2 are both 1, an interrupt request is

sent to the CPU.

TCF Increment Timing: TCF is incremented by clock input (internal clock input). Bits CKSH2

to CKSH0 or CKSL2 to CKSL0 in TCRF select one of four internal clock sources (φ/32, φ/16,

φ/4, or φW/4) created by dividing the system clock (φor φW).

TMOFH/TMOFL Output Timing: In TMOFH/TMOFL output, the value set in TOLH/TOLL in

TCRF is output. The output is toggled by the occurrence of a compare match.

Figure 9.5 shows the output timing.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 213 of 462

Count input clock

TCF

OCRF

TMOFH, TMOFL

Compare match signal

N+1 N+1

Figure 9.5 TMOFH/TMOFL Output Timing

TCF Clear Timing: TCF can be cleared by a compare match with OCRF.

Timer Overflow Flag (OVF) Set Timing: OVF is set to 1 when TCF overflows from H'FFFF to

H'0000.

Compare Match Flag Set Timing: The compare match flag (CMFH or CMFL) is set to 1 when

the TCF and OCRF values match. The compare match signal is generated in the last state during

which the values match (when TCF is updated from the matching value to a new value). When

TCF matches OCRF, the compare match signal is not generated until the next counter clock.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 214 of 462

9.3.6 Timer F Operating States

The timer F operating states are shown in table 9.4.

Table 9.4 Timer F Operating States

Operating

Mode Reset Active Sleep Watch Sub-active Sub-sleep Standby Module

Standby

TCF Reset Functions*Functions*Functions/

Halted*Functions/

Halted*Halted Halted

OCRF Reset Functions Retained Retained Functions Retained Retained Retained

TCRF Reset Functions Retained Retained Functions Retained Retained Retained

TCSRF Reset Functions Retained Retained Functions Retained Retained Retained

Note: *When φW/4 is selected as the TCF internal clock in active mode or sleep mode, since

the system clock and internal clock are mutually asynchronous, synchronization is

maintained by a synchronization circuit. This results in a maximum count cycle error of

1/φ(s). When the counter is operated in subactive mode, watch mode, or subsleep

mode, φW/4 must be selected as the internal clock. The counter will not operate if any

other internal clock is selected.

9.3.7 Usage Notes

The following types of contention and operation can occur when the timer F is used.

16-Bit Timer Mode: In toggle output, TMOFH pin output is toggled when all 16 bits match and a

compare match signal is generated. If a TCRF write by a MOV instruction and generation of the

compare match signal occur simultaneously, TOLH data is output to the TMOFH pin as a result of

the TCRF write. TMOFL pin output is unstable in 16-bit mode, and should not be used; the

TMOFL pin should be used as a port pin.

If an OCRFL write and compare match signal generation occur simultaneously, the compare

match signal is invalid. However, if the written data and the counter value match, a compare

match signal will be generated at that point. As the compare match signal is output in

synchronization with the TCFL clock, a compare match will not result in compare match signal

generation if the clock is stopped.

Compare match flag CMFH is set when all 16 bits match and a compare match signal is generated.

Compare match flag CMFL is set if the setting conditions for the lower 8 bits are satisfied.

When TCF overflows, OVFH is set. OVFL is set if the setting conditions are satisfied when the

lower 8 bits overflow. If a TCFL write and overflow signal output occur simultaneously, the

overflow signal is not output.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 215 of 462

8-Bit Timer Mode:

•TCFH, OCRFH

In toggle output, TMOFH pin output is toggled when a compare match occurs. If a TCRF write

by a MOV instruction and generation of the compare match signal occur simultaneously,

TOLH data is output to the TMOFH pin as a result of the TCRF write.

If an OCRFH write and compare match signal generation occur simultaneously, the compare

match signal is invalid. However, if the written data and the counter value match, a compare

match signal will be generated at that point. The compare match signal is output in

synchronization with the TCFH clock.

If a TCFH write and overflow signal output occur simultaneously, the overflow signal is not

output.

•TCFL, OCRFL

In toggle output, TMOFL pin output is toggled when a compare match occurs. If a TCRF write

by a MOV instruction and generation of the compare match signal occur simultaneously,

TOLL data is output to the TMOFL pin as a result of the TCRF write.

If an OCRFL write and compare match signal generation occur simultaneously, the compare

match signal is invalid. However, if the written data and the counter value match, a compare

match signal will be generated at that point. As the compare match signal is output in

synchronization with the TCFL clock, a compare match will not result in compare match

signal generation if the clock is stopped.

If a TCFL write and overflow signal output occur simultaneously, the overflow signal is not

output.

Clear Timer FH, Timer FL Interrupt Request Flags (IRRTFH, IRRTFL), Timer Overflow

Flags H, L (OVFH, OVFL), and Compare Match Flags H, L (CMFH, CMFL): When φW/4 is

selected as the internal clock, “Interrupt source generation signal” will be operated with φWand

the signal will be outputted with φWwidth. And, “Overflow signal” and “Compare match signal”

are controlled with 2 cycles of φWsignals. Those signals are outputted with 2 cycles width of φW

(figure 9.6)

In active (high-speed, medium-speed) mode, even if you cleared interrupt request flag during the

term of validity of “Interrupt source generation signal”, same interrupt request flag is set. (1 in

figure 9.6) And, the timer overflow flag and compare match flag cannot be cleared during the term

of validity of “Overflow signal” and “Compare match signal”.

For interrupt request flag is set right after interrupt request is cleared, interrupt process to one time

timer FH, timer FL interrupt might be repeated. (2 in figure 9.6) Therefore, to definitely clear

interrupt request flag in active (high-speed, medium-speed) mode, clear should be processed after

the time that calculated with below (1) formula. And, to definitely clear timer overflow flag and

compare match flag, clear should be processed after read timer control status register F (TCSRF)

after the time that calculated with below (1) formula.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 216 of 462

For ST of (1) formula, please substitute the longest number of execution states in used instruction.

(10 states of RTE instruction when MULXU, DIVXU instruction is not used, 14 states when

MULXU, DIVXU instruction is used)

In subactive mode, there are not limitation for interrupt request flag, timer overflow flag, and

compare match flag clear.

The term of validity of “Interrupt source generation signal”

= 1 cycle of φW+ waiting time for completion of executing instruction

+ interrupt time synchronized with φ

=1/φW+ST×(1/φ)+(2/φ) (second).....(1)

ST: Executing number of execution states

Method 1 is recommended to operate for time efficiency.

Method 1

1. Prohibit interrupt in interrupt handling routine (set IENFH, IENFL to 0).

2. After program process returned normal handling, clear interrupt request flags (IRRTFH,

IRRTFL) after more than that calculated with (1) formula.

3. After reading the timer control status register F (TCSRF), clear the timer overflow flags

(OVFH, OVFL) and compare match flags (CMFH, CMFL).

4. Enable interrupts (set IENFH, IENFL to 1).

Method 2

1. Set interrupt handling routine time to more than time that calculated with (1) formula.

2. Clear interrupt request flags (IRRTFH, IRRTFL) at the end of interrupt handling routine.

3. After read timer control status register F (TCSRF), clear timer overflow flags (OVFH,

OVFL) and compare match flags (CMFH, CMFL).

All above attentions are also applied in 16-bit mode and 8-bit mode.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 217 of 462

φw

Program processing

Interrupt source generation

signal (internal signal,

nega-active)

Overflow signal, compare

match signal (internal signal,

nega-active)

Interrupt request flag

(IRRTFH, IRRTFL)

Interrupt Normal

Interrupt request

flag clear 2

Interrupt

Interrupt request

flag clear

Figure 9.6 Clear Interrupt Request Flag when Interrupt Source Generation Signal is Valid

Timer Counter (TCF) Read/Write: When φW/4 is selected as the internal clock in active (high-

speed, medium-speed) mode, write on TCF is impossible. And when reading TCF, as the system

clock and internal clock are mutually asynchronous, TCF synchronizes with synchronization

circuit. This results in a maximum TCF read value error of ±1.

When reading or writing TCF in active (high-speed, medium-speed) mode is needed, please select

the internal clock except for φW/4 before read/write is performed.

In subactive mode, even if φW/4 is selected as the internal clock, TCF can be read from or written

to normally.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 218 of 462

9.4 Asynchronous Event Counter (AEC)

The asynchronous event counter is incremented by external event clock or internal clock input.

Figure 9.7 shows a block diagram of the asynchronous event counter.

9.4.1 Features

•Can count asynchronous events

Can count external events input asynchronously without regard to the operation of system

clocks φand φSUB

•Can be used as two-channel independent 8-bit event counter or single-channel independent 16-

bit event counter.

•Event/clock input is enabled only when IRQAEC is high or event counter PWM output

(IECPWM) is high.

•Both edge sensing can be used for IRQAEC or event counter PWM output (IECPWM)

interrupts. When the asynchronous counter is not used, they can be used as independent

interrupts.

•When an event counter PWM is used, event clock input enabling/disabling can be controlled

automatically in a fixed cycle.

•External event input or a prescaler output clock can be selected by software for the ECH and

ECL clock sources. φ/2, φ/4, or φ/8 can be selected as the prescaler output clock.

•Both edge counting is possible for AEVL and AEVH.

•Counter resetting and halting of the count-up function can be controlled by software

•Automatic interrupt generation on detection of an event counter overflow

•Use of module standby mode enables this module to be placed in standby mode independently

when not used. (For details, refer to section 5.4, Module Standby Function.)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 219 of 462

AEVH

AEVL

IRQAEC

IECPWM

ECCR

PSS

ECCSR

Internal data bus

OVH

OVL

ECPWCRH

ECPWDRH

AEGSR

ECPWCRL

ECPWDRL

ECH

(8 bits) CK

ECL

(8 bits) CK

IRREC

To CPU interrupt

(IRREC2)

Edge sensing circuit

PWM waveform generator

φ/2

φ/4, φ/8

φ/2, φ/4,

φ/8, φ/16,

φ/32, φ/64

[Legend]

ECPWCRH

ECPWDRH

AEGSR

ECCSR

ECL

: Event counter PWM compare register H

: Event counter PWM data register H

: Input pin edge select register

: Event counter control/status register

: Event counter L

ECPWCRL

ECPWDRL

ECCR

ECH

: Event counter PWM compare register L

: Event counter PWM data register L

: Event counter control register

: Event counter H

Figure 9.7 Block Diagram of Asynchronous Event Counter

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 220 of 462

9.4.2 Input/Output Pins

Table 9.5 shows the pin configuration of the asynchronous event counter.

Table 9.5 Pin Configuration

Name Abbreviation I/O Function

Asynchronous event input H AEVH Input Event input pin for input to event counter H

Asynchronous event input L AEVL Input Event input pin for input to event counter L

Event input enable interrupt

input IRQAEC Input Input pin for interrupt enabling event input

9.4.3 Register Descriptions

The asynchronous event counter has the following registers.

•Event counter PWM compare register H (ECPWCRH)

•Event counter PWM compare register L (ECPWCRL)

•Event counter PWM data register H (ECPWDRH)

•Event counter PWM data register L (ECPWDRL)

•Input pin edge select register (AEGSR)

•Event counter control register (ECCR)

•Event counter control/status register (ECCSR)

•Event counter H (ECH)

•Event counter L (ECL)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 221 of 462

Event Counter PWM Compare Register H (ECPWCRH): ECPWCRH sets the one conversion

period of the event counter PWM waveform.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7 ECPWCRH7 1 R/W

6 ECPWCRH6 1 R/W

5 ECPWCRH5 1 R/W

4 ECPWCRH4 1 R/W

3 ECPWCRH3 1 R/W

2 ECPWCRH2 1 R/W

1 ECPWCRH1 1 R/W

0 ECPWCRH0 1 R/W

One conversion period of event counter PWM

waveform

Note: When ECPWME in AEGSR is 1, the event counter PWM is operating and therefore

ECPWCRH should not be modified.

When changing the conversion period, the event counter PWM must be halted by clearing

ECPWME to 0 in AEGSR before modifying ECPWCRH.

Event Counter PWM Compare Register L (ECPWCRL): ECPWCRL sets the one conversion

period of the event counter PWM waveform.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7 ECPWCRL7 1 R/W

6 ECPWCRL6 1 R/W

5 ECPWCRL5 1 R/W

4 ECPWCRL4 1 R/W

3 ECPWCRL3 1 R/W

2 ECPWCRL2 1 R/W

1 ECPWCRL1 1 R/W

0 ECPWCRL0 1 R/W

One conversion period of event counter PWM

waveform

Note: When ECPWME in AEGSR is 1, the event counter PWM is operating and therefore

ECPWCRL should not be modified.

When changing the conversion period, the event counter PWM must be halted by clearing

ECPWME to 0 in AEGSR before modifying ECPWCRL.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 222 of 462

Event Counter PWM Data Register H (ECPWDRH): ECPWDRH controls data of the event

counter PWM waveform generator.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7 ECPWDRH7 0 W

6 ECPWDRH6 0 W

5 ECPWDRH5 0 W

4 ECPWDRH4 0 W

3 ECPWDRH3 0 W

2 ECPWDRH2 0 W

1 ECPWDRH1 0 W

0 ECPWDRH0 0 W

Data control of event counter PWM waveform

generator

Note: When ECPWME in AEGSR is 1, the event counter PWM is operating and therefore

ECPWDRH should not be modified.

When changing the data, the event counter PWM must be halted by clearing ECPWME to 0

in AEGSR before modifying ECPWDRH.

Event Counter PWM Data Register L (ECPWDRL): ECPWDRL controls data of the event

counter PWM waveform generator.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7 ECPWDRL7 0 W

6 ECPWDRL6 0 W

5 ECPWDRL5 0 W

4 ECPWDRL4 0 W

3 ECPWDRL3 0 W

2 ECPWDRL2 0 W

1 ECPWDRL1 0 W

0 ECPWDRL0 0 W

Data control of event counter PWM waveform

generator

Note: When ECPWME in AEGSR is 1, the event counter PWM is operating and therefore

ECPWDRL should not be modified.

When changing the data, the event counter PWM must be halted by clearing ECPWME to 0

in AEGSR before modifying ECPWDRL.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 223 of 462

Input Pin Edge Select Register (AEGSR): AEGSR selects rising, falling, or both edge sensing

for the AEVH, AEVL, and IRQAEC pins.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

6AHEGS1

AHEGS0 0

0R/W

R/W AEC Edge Select H

Select rising, falling, or both edge sensing for the AEVH

pin.

00: Falling edge on AEVH pin is sensed

01: Rising edge on AEVH pin is sensed

10: Both edges on AEVH pin are sensed

11: Setting prohibited

4ALEGS1

ALEGS0 0

0R/W

R/W AEC Edge Select L

Select rising, falling, or both edge sensing for the AEVL

pin.

00: Falling edge on AEVL pin is sensed

01: Rising edge on AEVL pin is sensed

10: Both edges on AEVL pin are sensed

11: Setting prohibited

2AIEGS1

AIEGS0 0

0R/W

R/W IRQAEC Edge Select

Select rising, falling, or both edge sensing for the

IRQAEC pin.

00: Falling edge on IRQAEC pin is sensed

01: Rising edge on IRQAEC pin is sensed

10: Both edges on IRQAEC pin are sensed

11: Setting prohibited

1 ECPWME 0 R/W Event Counter PWM Enable

Controls operation of event counter PWM and selection

of IRQAEC.

0: AEC PWM halted, IRQAEC selected

1: AEC PWM enabled, IRQAEC not selected

00R/WReserved

This bit can be read from or written to. However, this bit

should not be set to 1.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 224 of 462

Event Counter Control Register (ECCR): ECCR controls the counter input clock and

IRQAEC/IECPWM.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

6ACKH1

ACKH0 0

0R/W

R/W AEC Clock Select H

Select the clock used by ECH.

00: AEVH pin input

01: φ/2

10: φ/4

11: φ/8

4ACKL1

ACKL0 0

0R/W

R/W AEC Clock Select L

Select the clock used by ECL.

00: AEVL pin input

01: φ/2

10: φ/4

11: φ/8

PWCK2

PWCK1

PWCK0

R/W

Event Counter PWM Clock Select

Select the event counter PWM clock.

000: φ/2

001: φ/4

010: φ/8

011: φ/16

1X0: φ/32

1X1 φ/64

00R/WReserved

This bit can be read from or written to. However, this bit

should not be set to 1.

[Legend] X: Don't care.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 225 of 462

Event Counter Control/Status Register (ECCSR): ECCSR controls counter overflow detection,

counter clear resetting, and the count-up function.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7OVH0 R/W

*Counter Overflow H

This is a status flag indicating that ECH has overflowed.

[Setting condition]

When ECH overflows from H’FF to H’00

[Clearing condition]

When this bit is written to 0 after reading OVH = 1

6OVL0 R/W

*Counter Overflow L

This is a status flag indicating that ECL has overflowed.

[Setting condition]

When ECL overflows from H'FF to H'00

[Clearing condition]

When this bit is written to 0 after reading OVL = 1

50R/WReserved

This bit can be read from or written to. However, the initial

value should not be changed.

4 CH2 0 R/W Channel Select

Selects how ECH and ECL event counters are used

0: ECH and ECL are used together as a single-channel

16-bit event counter

1: ECH and ECL are used as two-channel 8-bit event

counter

3 CUEH 0 R/W Count-Up Enable H

Enables event clock input to ECH.

0: ECH event clock input is disabled (ECH value is

retained)

1: ECH event clock input is enabled

2 CUEL 0 R/W Count-Up Enable L

Enables event clock input to ECL.

0: ECL event clock input is disabled (ECL value is

retained)

1: ECL event clock input is enabled

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 226 of 462

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

1 CRCH 0 R/W Counter Reset Control H

Controls resetting of ECH.

0: ECH is reset

1: ECH reset is cleared and count-up function is enabled

0 CRCL 0 R/W Counter Reset Control L

Controls resetting of ECL.

0: ECL is reset

1: ECL reset is cleared and count-up function is enabled

Note: *Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.

Event Counter H (ECH): ECH is an 8-bit read-only up-counter that operates as an independent

8-bit event counter. ECH also operates as the upper 8-bit up-counter of a 16-bit event counter

configured in combination with ECL.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7 ECH7 0 R

6 ECH6 0 R

5 ECH5 0 R

4 ECH4 0 R

3 ECH3 0 R

2 ECH2 0 R

1 ECH1 0 R

0 ECH0 0 R

Either the external asynchronous event AEVH pin, φ/2,

φ/4, or φ/8, or the overflow signal from lower 8-bit counter

ECL can be selected as the input clock source. ECH can

be cleared to H'00 by software.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 227 of 462

Event Counter L (ECL): ECL is an 8-bit read-only up-counter that operates as an independent 8-

bit event counter. ECL also operates as the upper 8-bit up-counter of a 16-bit event counter

configured in combination with ECH.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7ECL70 R

6ECL60 R

5ECL50 R

4ECL40 R

3ECL30 R

2ECL20 R

1ECL10 R

0ECL00 R

Either the external asynchronous event AEVL pin, φ/2,

φ/4, or φ/8 can be selected as the input clock source. ECL

can be cleared to H'00 by software.

9.4.4 Operation

16-Bit Counter Operation: When bit CH2 is cleared to 0 in ECCSR, ECH and ECL operate as a

16-bit event counter.

Any of four input clock sources—φ/2, φ/4, φ/8, or AEVL pin input—can be selected by means of

bits ACKL1 and ACKL0 in ECCR.

When AEVL pin input is selected, input sensing is selected with bits ALEGS1 and ALEGS0.

The input clock is enabled only when IRQAEC is high or IECPWM is high. When IRQAEC is

low or IECPWM is low, the input clock is not input to the counter, which therefore does not

operate. Figure 9.8 shows an example of the software processing when ECH and ECL are used as

a 16-bit event counter.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 228 of 462

Clear CH2 to 0

Set ACKL1, ACKL0, ALEGS1, and ALEGS0

Clear CUEH, CUEL, CRCH, and CRCL to 0

Clear OVH and OVL to 0

Set CUEH, CUEL, CRCH, and CRCL to 1

Start

End

Figure 9.8 Example of Software Processing when Using ECH and ECL as

16-Bit Event Counter

As CH2 is cleared to 0 by a reset, ECH and ECL operate as a 16-bit event counter after a reset,

and as ACKL1 and ACKL0 are cleared to B′00, the operating clock is asynchronous event input

from the AEVL pin (using falling edge sensing).

When the next clock is input after the count value reaches H'FF in both ECH and ECL, ECH and

ECL overflow from H'FFFF to H'0000, the OVH flag is set to 1 in ECCSR, the ECH and ECL

count values each return to H'00, and counting up is restarted. When overflow occurs, the IRREC

bit is set to 1 in IRR2. If the IENEC bit in IENR2 is 1 at this time, an interrupt request is sent to

the CPU.

8-Bit Counter Operation: WhenbitCH2issetto1inECCSR,ECHandECLoperateas

independent 8-bit event counters.

φ/2, φ/4, φ/8, or AEVH pin input can be selected as the input clock source for ECH by means of

bits ACKH1 and ACKH0 in ECCR, and φ/2, φ/4, φ/8, or AEVL pin input can be selected as the

input clock source for ECL by means of bits ACKL1 and ACKL0 in ECCR.

Input sensing is selected with bits AHEGS1 and AHEGS0 when AEVH pin input is selected, and

with bits ALEGS1 and ALEGS0 when AEVL pin input is selected.

The input clock is enabled only when IRQAEC is high or IECPWM is high. When IRQAEC is

low or IECPWM is low, the input clock is not input to the counter, which therefore does not

operate. Figure 9.9 shows an example of the software processing when ECH and ECL are used as

8-bit event counters.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 229 of 462

Set CH2 to 1

Set ACKH1, ACKH0, ACKL1, ACKL0,

AHEGS1, AHEGS0, ALEGS1, and ALEGS0

Clear CUEH, CUEL, CRCH, and CRCL to 0

Clear OVH and OVL to 0

Set CUEH, CUEL, CRCH, and CRCL to 1

Start

End

Figure 9.9 Example of Software Processing when Using ECH and ECL as

8-Bit Event Counters

ECH and ECL can be used as 8-bit event counters by carrying out the software processing shown

in the example in figure 9.9. When the next clock is input after the ECH count value reaches H'FF,

ECH overflows, the OVH flag is set to 1 in ECCSR, the ECH count value returns to H'00, and

counting up is restarted. Similarly, when the next clock is input after the ECL count value reaches

H'FF, ECL overflows, the OVL flag is set to 1 in ECCSR, the ECL count value returns to H'00,

and counting up is restarted. When an overflow occurs, the IRREC bit is set to 1 in IRR2. If the

IENEC bit in IENR2 is 1 at this time, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU.

IRQAEC Operation: When ECPWME in AEGSR is 0, the ECH and ECL input clocks are

enabled only when IRQAEC is high. When IRQAEC is low, the input clocks are not input to the

counters, and so ECH and ECL do not count. ECH and ECL count operations can therefore be

controlled from outside by controlling IRQAEC. In this case, ECH and ECL cannot be controlled

individually.

IRQAEC can also operate as an interrupt source. In this case the vector number is 6 and the vector

addresses are H'000C and H'000D.

Interrupt enabling is controlled by IENEC2 in IENR1. When an IRQAEC interrupt is generated,

IRR1 interrupt request flag IRREC2 is set to 1. If IENEC2 in IENR1 is set to 1 at this time, an

interrupt request is sent to the CPU.

Rising, falling, or both edge sensing can be selected for the IRQAEC input pin with bits AIAGS1

andAIAGS0inAEGSR.

Note: On the H8/38104 Group, control of switching between the system clock oscillator and the

on-chip oscillator during resets should be performed by setting the IRQAEC input level.

Refer to section 4.4, Subclock Generator, for details.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 230 of 462

Event Counter PWM Operation: When ECPWME in AEGSR is 1, the ECH and ECL input

clocks are enabled only when event counter PWM output (IECPWM) is high. When IECPWM is

low, the input clocks are not input to the counters, and so ECH and ECL do not count. ECH and

ECL count operations can therefore be controlled cyclically from outside by controlling event

counter PWM. In this case, ECH and ECL cannot be controlled individually.

IECPWM can also operate as an interrupt source. In this case the vector number is 6 and the

vector addresses are H'000C and H'000D.

Interrupt enabling is controlled by IENEC2 in IENR1. When an IECPWM interrupt is generated,

IRR1 interrupt request flag IRREC2 is set to 1. If IENEC2 in IENR1 is set to 1 at this time, an

interrupt request is sent to the CPU.

Rising, falling, or both edge detection can be selected for IECPWM interrupt sensing with bits

AIAGS1 and AIAGS0 in AEGSR.

Figure 9.10 and table 9.6 show examples of event counter PWM operation.

off

= T × (N

+1)

= T × (N

+1)

off

: Clock input enable time

: Clock input disable time

: One conversion period

: ECPWM input clock cycle

: Value of ECPWDRH and ECPWDRL

Fixed high when Ndr = H'FFFF

: Value of ECPWCRH and ECPWCRL

Figure 9.10 Event Counter Operation Waveform

Note: Ndr and Ncm above must be set so that Ndr < Ncm. If the settings do not satisfy this

condition, do not set ECPWME to 1 in AEGSR.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 231 of 462

Table 9.6 Examples of Event Counter PWM Operation

Conditions: fosc = 4 MHz, fφ= 2 MHz, high-speed active mode, ECPWCR value (Ncm) =

H'7A11, ECPWDR value (Ndr) = H'16E3

Clock

Source

Selection

Clock

Source

Cycle (T)

ECPWMCR

Value (Ncm) ECPWMDR

Value (Ndr) toff = T ×

××

(Ndr + 1) tcm = T ×

××

(Ncm + 1) ton = tcm –

toff

φ/2 1 µs 5.86 ms 31.25 ms 25.39 ms

φ/4 2 µs 11.72 ms 62.5 ms 50.78 ms

φ/8 4 µs 23.44 ms 125.0 ms 101.56 ms

φ/16 8 µs 46.88 ms 250.0 ms 203.12 ms

φ/32 16 µs 93.76 ms 500.0 ms 406.24 ms

φ/64 32 µs

H'7A11

D'31249 H'16E3

D'5859

187.52 ms 1000.0 ms 812.48 ms

Note: *toff minimum width

Clock Input Enable/Disable Function Operation: The clock input to the event counter can be

controlled by the IRQAEC pin when ECPWME in AEGSR is 0, and by the event counter PWM

output, IECPWM when ECPWME in AEGSR is 1. As this function forcibly terminates the clock

input by each signal, a maximum error of one count will occur depending on the IRQAEC or

IECPWM timing.

Figure 9.11 shows an example of the operation of this function.

Clock stopped

N+2 N+3 N+4 N+5 N+6N N+1

Edge generated by clock return

Input event

IRQAEC or IECPWM

Actually counted clock source

Counter value

Figure 9.11 Example of Clock Control Operation

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 232 of 462

9.4.5 Operating States of Asynchronous Event Counter

The operating states of the asynchronous event counter are shown in table 9.7.

Table 9.7 Operating States of Asynchronous Event Counter

Operating

Mode Reset Active Sleep Watch Sub-active Sub-sleep Standby Module

Standby

AEGSR Reset Functions Functions Retained*1Functions Functions Retained*1Retained

ECCR Reset Functions Functions Retained*1Functions Functions Retained*1Retained

ECCSR Reset Functions Functions Retained*1Functions Functions Retained*1Retained

ECH Reset Functions Functions Functions*1*

2Functions*2Functions*2Functions*1*

2Halted

ECL Reset Functions Functions Functions*1*

2Functions*2Functions*2Functions*1*

2Halted

IRQAEC Reset Functions Functions Retained*3Functions Functions Retained*3Retained*4

Event counter

PWM Reset Functions Functions Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained

Notes: 1. When an asynchronous external event is input, the counter increments but the counter

overflow H/L flags are not affected.

2. Functions when asynchronous external events are selected; halted and retained

otherwise.

3. Clock control by IRQAEC operates, but interrupts do not.

4. As the clock is stopped in module standby mode, IRQAEC has no effect.

9.4.6 Usage Notes

1. When reading the values in ECH and ECL, first clear bits CUEH and CUEL to 0 in ECCSR in

8-bit mode and clear bit CUEL to 0 in 16-bit mode to prevent asynchronous event input to the

counter. The correct value will not be returned if the event counter increments while being

read.

2. Use a clock with a frequency of up to 16 MHz*1for input to the AEVH and AEVL pins, and

ensure that the high and low widths of the clock are at least 30 ns*2.Thedutycycleis

immaterial.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 233 of 462

Mode Maximum Clock Frequency

Input to AEVH/AEVL Pin

Active (high-speed), sleep (high-speed) 16 MHz*1

Active (medium-speed), sleep (medium-speed) (φ/16)

(φ/32)

(φ/64)

fOSC = 1 MHz to 4 MHz (φ/128)

2·f

OSC

fOSC

1/2 · fOSC

1/4 · fOSC

Watch, subactive, subsleep, standby (φW/2)

(φW/4)

φW= 32.768 kHz or 38.4 kHz (φW/8)

1000 kHz

500 kHz

250 kHz

Notes: 1. Up to 10 MHz in the H8/38004 Group.

2. At least 50 ns in the H8/38004 Group.

3. When AEC uses with 16-bit mode, set CUEH in ECCSR to 1 first, set CRCH in ECCSR to 1

second, or set both CUEH and CRCH to 1 at same time before clock input. While AEC is

operating on 16-bit mode, do not change CUEH. Otherwise, ECH will be miscounted up.

4. When ECPWME in AEGSR is 1, the event counter PWM is operating and therefore

ECPWCRH, ECPWCRL, ECPWDRH, and ECPWDRL should not be modified.

When changing the data, the event counter PWM must be halted by clearing ECPWME to 0 in

AEGSR before modifying these registers.

5. The event counter PWM data register and event counter PWM compare register must be set so

that event counter PWM data register < event counter PWM compare register. If the settings

do not satisfy this condition, do not set ECPWME to 1 in AEGSR.

6. As synchronization is established internally when an IRQAEC interrupt is generated, a

maximum error of 1 tcyc will occur between clock halting and interrupt acceptance.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 234 of 462

9.5 Watchdog Timer

The watchdog timer is an 8-bit timer that can generate an internal reset signal for this LSI if a

system crash prevents the CPU from writing to the timer counter, thus allowing it to overflow.

However, as shown in watchdog timer block diagrams figure 9.12 (1) and figure 9.12 (2), the

implementation differs in the H8/38004 Group and the H8/38104 Group.

9.5.1 Features

•Selectable from two counter input clocks (H8/38004 Group).

Two clock sources (φ/8192 or φW/32) can be selected as the timer-counter clock.

•On the H8/38104 Group, 10 internal clocks are available for selection. Ten internal clocks

(φ/64, φ/128, φ/256, φ/512, φ/1024, φ/2048, φ/4096, φ/8192, φw/32, or on-chip oscillator) can

be selected as the timer-counter clock.

•Reset signal generated on counter overflow

An overflow period of 1 to 256 times the selected clock can be set.

•Use of module standby mode enables this module to be placed in standby mode independently

when not used. (For details, refer to section 5.4, Module Standby Function.)

Internal reset

signal

PSS TCW

TCSRW

φw/32

φ/8192

Internal data bus

[Legend]

TCSRW: Timer control/status register W

TCW: Timer counter W

PSS: Prescaler S

Figure 9.12(1) Block Diagram of Watchdog Timer (H8/38004 Group)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 235 of 462

TCSRW

TMW

TCW

Internal data bus

PSS

On-chip

oscillator

/32

Internal reset signal or

interrupt request signal

Interrupt/reset

controller

[Legend]

TCSRW:

TCW:

TMW:

PSS:

Timer control/status register W

Timer counter W

Timer mode register W

Prescaler S

Figure 9.12(2) Block Diagram of Watchdog Timer (H8/38104 Group)

9.5.2 Register Descriptions

The watchdog timer has the following registers.

•Timer control/status register W (TCSRW)

•Timer counter W (TCW)

•Timer mode register W (TMW)*

Note: * This register is implemented on the H8/38104 Group only.

Timer Control/Status Register W (TCSRW): TCSRW performs the TCSRW and TCW write

control. TCSRW also controls the watchdog timer operation and indicates the operating state.

TCSRW must be rewritten by using the MOV instruction. The bit manipulation instruction cannot

be used to change the setting value.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 236 of 462

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7 B6WI 1 R Bit 6 Write Inhibit

The TCWE bit can be written only when the write value of

the B6WI bit is 0.

This bit is always read as 1.

6TCWE0 R/(W)

*1Timer Counter W Write Enable

TCW can be written when the TCWE bit is set to 1.

When writing data to this bit, the value for bit 7 must be 0.

5 B4WI 1 R Bit 4 Write Inhibit

The TCSRWE bit can be written only when the write

value of the B4WI bit is 0. This bit is always read as 1.

4 TCSRWE 0 R/(W)*1Timer Control/Status Register W Write Enable

The WDON and WRST bits can be written when the

TCSRWE bit is set to 1.

When writing data to this bit, the value for bit 5 must be 0.

3 B2WI 1 R Bit 2 Write Inhibit

This bit can be written to the WDON bit only when the

write value of the B2WI bit is 0.

This bit is always read as 1.

2WDON0/1

*2R/(W)*1Watchdog Timer On

TCW starts counting up when WDON is set to 1 and halts

when WDON is cleared to 0.

[Setting condition]

When1iswrittentotheWDONbitwhilewriting0tothe

B2WI bit when the TCSRWE bit=1

[Clearing condition]

•Reset by RES pin*3

•When 0 is written to the WDON bit while writing 0 to

the B2WI when the TCSRWE bit=1

1 B0WI 1 R Bit 0 Write Inhibit

This bit can be written to the WRST bit only when the

write value of the B0WI bit is 0. This bit is always read as

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 237 of 462

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

0WRST0 R/(W)

*1Watchdog Timer Reset

[Setting condition]

When TCW overflows and an internal reset signal is

generated

[Clearing condition]

•Reset by RES pin

•When 0 is written to the WRST bit while writing 0 to

the B0WI bit when the TCSRWE bit = 1

Notes: 1. These bits can be written only when the writing conditions are satisfied.

2. Initial value 0 on H8/38004 Group and 1 on H8/38104 Group.

3. On reset, cleared to 0 on H8/38004 Group and set to 1 on H8/38104 Group.

Timer Counter W (TCW): TCW is an 8-bit readable/writable up-counter. When TCW overflows

from H'FF to H'00, the internal reset signal is generated and the WRST bit in TCSRW is set to 1.

TCW is initialized to H'00.

TimerModeRegisterW(TMW):TMW selects the input clock. Clock source selection using

this register is enabled when WDCKS in port mode register 2 (PMR2) is cleared to 0. If WDCKS

is set to 1, φw/32 is selected as the clock source, regardless of the setting of TMW.

Note: TMW is implemented on H8/38104 Group only.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7to4 —All 1 —This bit is reserved. It is always read as 1.

CKS3

CKS2

CKS1

CKS0

R/W

Clock Select 3 to 0

Selects the clock input to TCWD.

1000: Internal clock: counting on φ/64

1001: Internal clock: counting on φ/128

1010: Internal clock: counting on φ/256

1011: Internal clock: counting on φ/512

1100: Internal clock: counting on φ/1,024

1101: Internal clock: counting on φ/2,048

1110: Internal clock: counting on φ/4,096

1111: Internal clock: counting on φ/8,192

0XXX: On-chip oscillator

See section 17, Electrical Characteristics, for information

on the overflow period of the on-chip oscillator.

Note: X: Don't care

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 238 of 462

9.5.3 Operation

The watchdog timer is provided with an 8-bit counter. The input clock is selected by the WDCKS

bit in the port mode register 2 (PMR2)*: On the H8/38004 Group, φ/8192 is selected when the

WDCKS bit is cleared to 0, and φw/32 when set to 1. On the H8/38104 Group, the clock specified

by timer mode register W (TMW) is selected when WDCKS is cleared to 0, and φw/32 is selected

when WDCKS is set to 1. If 1 is written to WDON while writing 0 to B2WI when the TCSRWE

bit in TCSRW is set to 1, TCW begins counting up. (To operate the watchdog timer, two write

accesses to TCSRW are required. However, on the H8/38104 Group, TCW begins counting up

even if no write access occurs, because WDON is set to 1 when the reset is cleared.) When a clock

pulse is input after the TCW count value has reached H'FF, the watchdog timer overflows and an

internal reset signal is generated. The internal reset signal is output for a period of 512 φosc clock

cycles. TCW is a writable counter, and when a value is set in TCW, the count-up starts from that

value. An overflow period in the range of 1 to 256 input clock cycles can therefore be set,

according to the TCW set value.

Note: * For details, refer to section 8.1.5, Port Mode Register 2 (PMR2).

Figure 9.13 shows an example of watchdog timer operation.

Example: With 30-ms overflow period when φ = 4 MHz

4 × 10

× 30 × 10

–3

= 14.6

8192

TCW overflow

H'FF

H'00

Internal reset

signal

H'F1

TCW

count value

H'F1 written

to TCW H'F1 written to TCW Reset generated

Start

512 φ

osc

clock cycles

Therefore, 256 – 15 = 241 (H'F1) is set in TCW.

Figure 9.13 Example of Watchdog Timer Operation

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 239 of 462

9.5.4 Operating States of Watchdog Timer

Tables 9.8(1) and 9.8(2) summarize the operating states of the watchdog timer for the H8/38004

Group and H8/38104 Group, respectively.

Table 9.8(1) Operating States of Watchdog Timer (H8/38004 Group)

Operating

Mode Reset Active Sleep Watch Sub-active Sub-sleep Standby Module

Standby

TCW Reset Functions Functions Halted Functions/

Halted*Halted Halted Halted

TCSRW Reset Functions Functions Retained Functions/

Halted*Retained Retained Retained

Note: *Functions when φW/32 is selected as the input clock.

Table 9.8(2) Operating States of Watchdog Timer (H8/38104 Group)

Operating

Mode Reset Active Sleep Watch Sub-active Sub-sleep Standby Module

Standby

TCW Reset Functions Functions Functions/

Halted*1Functions/

Halted*2Halted

TCSRW Reset Functions Functions Functions/

Retained*1Functions/

Halted*1Functions/

Retained*1Functions/

Retained*2Retained

TMW Reset Functions Functions Functions/

Retained*1Functions/

Halted*1Functions/

Retained*1Functions/

Retained*2Retained

Notes: 1. Functions when φw/32 or the on-chip clock oscillator is selected as the internal clock.

2. Functions only when the on-chip clock oscillator is selected.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 240 of 462

SCI0012A_000020020900 Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 241 of 462

Section 10 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3)

Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) can handle both asynchronous and clocked synchronous

serial communication. In the asynchronous method, serial data communication can be carried out

using standard asynchronous communication chips such as a Universal Asynchronous

Receiver/Transmitter (UART) or an Asynchronous Communication Interface Adapter (ACIA). A

function is also provided for serial communication between processors (multiprocessor

communication function).

Figure 10.1 shows a block diagram of the SCI3.

10.1 Features

•Choice of asynchronous or clocked synchronous serial communication mode

•Full-duplex communication capability

The transmitter and receiver are mutually independent, enabling transmission and reception to

be executed simultaneously.

Double-buffering is used in both the transmitter and the receiver, enabling continuous

transmission and continuous reception of serial data.

•On-chip baud rate generator allows any bit rate to be selected

•External clock or on-chip baud rate generator can be selected as a transfer clock source.

•Six interrupt sources

Transmit-end, transmit-data-empty, receive-data-full, overrun error, framing error, and parity

error.

Note: On the H8/38104 Group, the system clock generator must be used when carrying out this

function.

Asynchronous mode

•Data length: 7, 8, or 5 bits

•Stop bit length: 1 or 2 bits

•Parity: Even, odd, or none

•Receive error detection: Parity, overrun, and framing errors

•Break detection: Break can be detected by reading the RXD32 pin level directly in the case of

a framing error

Clocked synchronous mode

•Data length: 8 bits

•Receive error detection: Overrun errors detected

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 242 of 462

Clock

TXD32

RXD32

SCK32

BRR

SMR

SCR3

SSR

TDR

RDR

TSR

RSR

SPCR

Transmit/receive

control circuit

Internal data bus

[Legend]

RSR:

RDR:

TSR:

TDR:

SMR:

SCR3:

SSR:

BRR:

BRC:

SPCR:

Receive shift register

Receive data register

Transmit shift register

Transmit data register

Serial mode register

Serial control register 3

Serial status register

Bit rate register

Bit rate counter

Serial port control register

Interrupt request

(TEI, TXI, RXI, ERI)

Internal clock (φ/64, φ/16, φw/2, φ)

External clock

BRC

Baud rate generator

Figure 10.1 Block Diagram of SCI3

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 243 of 462

10.2 Input/Output Pins

Table 10.1 shows the SCI3 pin configuration.

Table 10.1 Pin Configuration

Pin Name Abbreviation I/O Function

SCI3 clock SCK32 I/O SCI3 clock input/output

SCI3 receive data input RXD32 Input SCI3 receive data input

SCI3 transmit data output TXD32 Output SCI3 transmit data output

10.3 Register Descriptions

The SCI3 has the following registers.

•Receive shift register (RSR)

•Receive data register (RDR)

•Transmit shift register (TSR)

•Transmit data register (TDR)

•Serial mode register (SMR)

•Serial control register 3 (SCR3)

•Serial status register (SSR)

•Bit rate register (BRR)

•Serial port control register (SPCR)

10.3.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR)

RSR is a shift register that is used to receive serial data input from the RXD32 pin and convert it

into parallel data. When one byte of data has been received, it is transferred to RDR automatically.

RSR cannot be directly accessed by the CPU.

10.3.2 Receive Data Register (RDR)

RDR is an 8-bit register that stores received data. When the SCI3 has received one byte of serial

data, it transfers the received serial data from RSR to RDR, where it is stored. After this, RSR is

receive-enabled. As RSR and RDR function as a double buffer in this way, continuous receive

operations are possible. After confirming that the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, read RDR only

once. RDR cannot be written to by the CPU. RDR is initialized to H'00 at a reset and in standby,

watch, or module standby mode.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 244 of 462

10.3.3 Transmit Shift Register (TSR)

TSR is a shift register that transmits serial data. To perform serial data transmission, the SCI3 first

transfers transmit data from TDR to TSR automatically, then sends the data that starts from the

LSBtotheTXD32pin

.Data transfer from TDR to TSR is not performed if no data has been

written to TDR (if the TDRE bit in SSR is set to 1). TSR cannot be directly accessed by the CPU.

10.3.4 Transmit Data Register (TDR)

TDR is an 8-bit register that stores data for transmission. When the SCI3 detects that TSR is

empty, it transfers the transmit data written in TDR to TSR and starts transmission. The double-

buffered structure of TDR and TSR enables continuous serial transmission. If the next transmit

data has already been written to TDR during transmission of one-frame data, the SCI3 transfers

the written data to TSR to continue transmission. To achieve reliable serial transmission, write

transmit data to TDR only once after confirming that the TDRE bit in SSR is set to 1. TDR is

initialized to H'FF at a reset and in standby, watch, or module standby mode.

10.3.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR)

SMR is used to set the SCI3’s serial transfer format and select the on-chip baud rate generator

clock source. SMR is initialized to H'00 at a reset and in standby, watch, or module standby mode.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7 COM 0 R/W Communication Mode

0: Asynchronous mode

1: Clocked synchronous mode

6 CHR 0 R/W Character Length (enabled only in asynchronous mode)

0: Selects 8 or 5 bits as the data length.

1: Selects 7 or 5 bits as the data length.

When 7-bit data is selected, the MSB (bit 7) in TDR is not

transmitted. To select 5 bits as the data length, set 1 to

both the PE and MP bits. The three most significant bits

(bits 7, 6, and 5) in TDR are not transmitted. In clocked

synchronous mode, the data length is fixed to 8 bits

regardless of the CHR bit setting.

5 PE 0 R/W Parity Enable (enabled only in asynchronous mode)

When this bit is set to 1, the parity bit is added to transmit

data before transmission, and the parity bit is checked in

reception. In clocked synchronous mode, parity bit

addition and checking is not performed regardless of the

PE bit setting.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 245 of 462

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

4 PM 0 R/W Parity Mode (enabled only when the PE bit is 1 in

asynchronous mode)

0: Selects even parity.

1: Selects odd parity.

When even parity is selected, a parity bit is added in

transmission so that the total number of 1 bits in the

transmit data plus the parity bit is an even number; in

reception, a check is carried out to confirm that the

number of 1 bits in the receive data plus the parity bit is

an even number.

When odd parity is selected, a parity bit is added in

transmission so that the total number of 1 bits in the

transmit data plus the parity bit is an odd number; in

reception, a check is carried out to confirm that the

number of 1 bits in the receive data plus the parity bit is

an odd number.

If parity bit addition and checking is disabled in clocked

synchronous mode and asynchronous mode, the PM bit

setting is invalid.

3 STOP 0 R/W Stop Bit Length (enabled only in asynchronous mode)

Selects the stop bit length in transmission.

0:1stopbit

1:2stopbits

For reception, only the first stop bit is checked, regardless

of the value in the bit. If the second stop bit is 0, it is

treated as the start bit of the next transmit character.

2 MP 0 R/W Multiprocessor Mode

When this bit is set to 1, the multiprocessor

communication function is enabled. The PE bit and PM

bit settings are invalid. In clocked synchronous mode, this

bit should be cleared to 0.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 246 of 462

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

0CKS1

CKS0 0

0R/W

R/W Clock Select 0 and 1

These bits select the clock source for the on-chip baud

rate generator.

00: φclock (n = 0)

01: φw/2 or φwclock(n=1)

10: φ/16 clock (n = 2)

11: φ/64 clock (n = 3)

When the setting value is 01 in active mode and sleep

mode, φw/2 clock is set. In subactive mode and subsleep

mode, φw clock is set. The SCI3 is enabled only when φw

/2 is selected for the CPU operating clock.

For the relationship between the bit rate register setting

and the baud rate, see section 10.3.8, Bit Rate Register

(BRR). n is the decimal representation of the value of n in

BRR (see section 10.3.8, Bit Rate Register (BRR)).

10.3.6 Serial Control Register 3 (SCR3)

SCR3 is a register that enables or disables SCI3 transfer operations and interrupt requests, and is

also used to select the transfer clock source. SCR3 is initialized to H'00 at a reset and in standby,

watch, or module standby mode. For details on interrupt requests, refer to section 10.7, Interrupts.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7 TIE 0 R/W Transmit Interrupt Enable

When this bit is set to 1, the TXI interrupt request is

enabled. TXI can be released by clearing the TDRE bit or

TIE bit to 0.

6 RIE 0 R/W Receive Interrupt Enable

When this bit is set to 1, RXI and ERI interrupt requests

are enabled. RXI and ERI can be released by clearing bit

RDRF or the FER, PER, or OER error flag to 0, or by

clearing bit RIE to 0.

5 TE 0 R/W Transmit Enable

When this bit is set to 1, transmission is enabled. When

thisbitis0,theTDREbitinSSRisfixedat1.When

transmit data is written to TDR while this bit is 1, bit

TDRE in SSR is cleared to 0 and serial data transmission

is started. Be sure to carry out SMR settings, and setting

of bit SPC32 in SPCR, to decide the transmission format

before setting bit TE to 1.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 247 of 462

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

4 RE 0 R/W Receive Enable

When this bit is set to 1, reception is enabled. In this

state, serial data reception is started when a start bit is

detected in asynchronous mode or serial clock input is

detected in clocked synchronous mode. Be sure to carry

out the SMR settings to decide the reception format

before setting bit RE to 1.

Note that the RDRF, FER, PER, and OER flags in SSR

are not affected when bit RE is cleared to 0, and retain

their previous state.

3 MPIE 0 R/W Multiprocessor Interrupt Enable (enabled only when the

MP bit in SMR is 1 in asynchronous mode)

When this bit is set to 1, receive data in which the

multiprocessor bit is 0 is skipped, and setting of the

RDRF, FER, and OER status flags in SSR is prohibited.

On receiving data in which the multiprocessor bit is 1, this

bit is automatically cleared and normal reception is

resumed. For details, refer to section 10.6, Multiprocessor

Communication Function.

2 TEIE 0 R/W Transmit End Interrupt Enable

When this bit is set to 1, the TEI interrupt request is

enabled. TEI can be released by clearing bit TDRE to 0

and clearing bit TEND to 0 in SSR, or by clearing bit TEIE

to 0.

0CKE1

CKE0 0

0R/W

R/W Clock Enable 0 and 1

Selects the clock source.

Asynchronous mode:

00: Internal baud rate generator

01: Internal baud rate generator

Outputs a clock of the same frequency as the bit rate

from the SCK32 pin.

10: External clock

Inputs a clock with a frequency 16 times the bit rate

from the SCK32 pin.

11:Reserved

Clocked synchronous mode:

00: Internal clock (SCK32 pin functions as clock output)

01:Reserved

10: External clock (SCK32 pin functions as clock input)

11:Reserved

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 248 of 462

10.3.7 Serial Status Register (SSR)

SSR is a register containing status flags of the SCI3 and multiprocessor bits for transfer. 1 cannot

be written to flags TDRE, RDRF, OER, PER, and FER; they can only be cleared. SSR is

initialized to H'84 at a reset and in standby, watch, or module standby mode.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7 TDRE 1 R/(W)*Transmit Data Register Empty

Indicates that transmit data is stored in TDR.

[Setting conditions]

•When the TE bit in SCR3 is 0

•When data is transferred from TDR to TSR

[Clearing conditions]

•When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE = 1

•When the transmit data is written to TDR

6 RDRF 0 R/(W)*ReceiveDataRegisterFull

Indicates that the received data is stored in RDR.

[Setting condition]

•When serial reception ends normally and receive data

is transferred from RSR to RDR

[Clearing conditions]

•When 0 is written to RDRF after reading RDRF = 1

•When data is read from RDR

If an error is detected in reception, or if the RE bit in

SCR3 has been cleared to 0, RDR and bit RDRF are not

affected and retain their previous state.

Note that if data reception is completed while bit RDRF is

still set to 1, an overrun error (OER) will occur and the

receive data will be lost.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 249 of 462

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

5OER0 R/(W)

*Overrun Error

[Setting condition]

•When an overrun error occurs in reception

[Clearing condition]

•When 0 is written to OER after reading OER = 1

When bit RE in SCR3 is cleared to 0, bit OER is not

affected and retains its previous state.

When an overrun error occurs, RDR retains the receive

data it held before the overrun error occurred, and data

received after the error is lost. Reception cannot be

continued with bit OER set to 1, and in clocked

synchronous mode, transmission cannot be continued

either.

4FER0 R/(W)

*Framing Error

[Setting condition]

•When a framing error occurs in reception

[Clearing condition]

•When 0 is written to FER after reading FER = 1

When bit RE in SCR3 is cleared to 0, bit FER is not

affected and retains its previous state.

Note that, in 2-stop-bit mode, only the first stop bit is

checked for a value of 1, and the second stop bit is not

checked. When a framing error occurs, the receive data

is transferred to RDR but bit RDRF is not set. Reception

cannot be continued with bit FER set to 1. In clocked

synchronous mode, neither transmission nor reception is

possible when bit FER is set to 1.

3 PER 0 R/(W)*Parity Error

[Setting condition]

•When a parity error is generated during reception

[Clearing condition]

•When 0 is written to PER after reading PER = 1

When bit RE in SCR3 is cleared to 0, bit PER is not

affected and retains its previous state.

Receive data in which a parity error has occurred is still

transferred to RDR, but bit RDRF is not set. Reception

cannot be continued with bit PER set to 1. In clocked

synchronous mode, neither transmission nor reception is

possible when bit PER is set to 1.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 250 of 462

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

2 TEND 1 R Transmit End

[Setting conditions]

•When the TE bit in SCR3 is 0

•When TDRE = 1 at transmission of the last bit of a 1-

byte serial transmit character

[Clearing conditions]

•When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE = 1

•When the transmit data is written to TDR

1 MPBR 0 R Multiprocessor Bit Receive

MPBR stores the multiprocessor bit in the receive

character data. When the RE bit in SCR3 is cleared to 0,

its previous state is retained.

0 MPBT 0 R/W Multiprocessor Bit Transfer

MPBT stores the multiprocessor bit to be added to the

transmit character data.

Note: *Only 0 can be written for clearing a flag.

10.3.8 Bit Rate Register (BRR)

BRR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that adjusts the bit rate. BRR is initialized to H'FF at a

reset and in standby, watch, or module standby mode. Table 10.2 shows the relationship between

the N setting in BRR and the n setting in bits CKS1 and CKS0 of SMR in asynchronous mode.

Table 10.4 shows the maximum bit rate for each frequency in asynchronous mode. The values

shown in both tables 10.2 and 10.4 are values in active (high-speed) mode. Table 10.5 shows the

relationship between the N setting in BRR and the n setting in bits CKS1 and CKS0 in SMR in

clocked synchronous mode. The values shown in table 10.5 are values in active (high-speed)

mode. The N setting in BRR and error for other operating frequencies and bit rates can be obtained

by the following formulas:

[Asynchronous Mode]

N = OSC

64 × 2

× B – 1

Error (%) = × 100

B (bit rate obtained from n, N, OSC) – R (bit rate in left-hand column in table 10.2)

R (bit rate in left-hand column in table 10.2)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 251 of 462

[Legend] B: Bit rate (bit/s)

N: BRR setting for baud rate generator (0 ≤N≤255)

OSC: Value of φOSC (Hz)

n: Baud rate generator input clock number (n = 0, 2, or 3)

(The relation between n and the clock is shown in table 10.3.)

Table 10.2 Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (1)

OSC

32.8 kHz 38.4 kHz 2 MHz 2.4576 MHz

Bit Rate

(bit/s) n N Error

(%) n N Error

(%)

110 — — — — — — 2 17 –1.36 2 21 –0.83

150 — — — 0 3 0 2 12 0.16 3 3 0

200 — — — 0 2 0 2 9 –2.34 3 2 0

250 0 1 2.5 — — — 3 1 –2.34 0 153 –0.26

300 — — — 0 1 0 0 103 0.16 3 1 0

600 — — — 0 0 0 0 51 0.16 3 0 0

1200 — — — 0 25 0.16 2 1 0

2400 0 12 0.16 2 0 0

4800 — — — 0 7 0

9600 — — — 0 3 0

19200 — — — 0 1 0

31250 0 0 0 — — —

38400 — — — 0 0 0

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 252 of 462

Table 10.2 Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (2)

OSC

4MHz 10MHz 16MHz

Bit Rate

(bit/s) n N Error

(%) n N Error

(%)

110 3 8 –1.36 3 21 0.88 3 35 –1.36

150 2 25 0.16 3 15 1.73 3 25 0.16

200 3 4 –2.34 3 11 1.73 3 19 –2.34

250 2 15 –2.34 3 9 –2.34 3 15 –2.34

300 2 12 0.16 3 7 1.73 3 12 0.16

600 0 103 0.16 3 3 1.73 2 25 0.16

1200 0 51 0.16 3 1 1.73 2 12 0.16

2400 0 25 0.16 3 0 1.73 0 103 0.16

4800 0 12 0.16 2 1 1.73 0 51 0.16

9600 — — — 2 0 1.73 0 25 0.16

19200 — — — 0 7 1.73 0 12 0.16

31250 0 1 0 0 4 0 0 7 0

38400 — — — 0 3 1.73 — — —

[Legend]

No indication: Setting not possible.

: A setting is available but error occurs

Table 10.3 Relation between n and Clock

SMR Setting

n Clock CKS1 CKS0

0φ00

0φW/2*1/φW*201

2φ/16 1 0

3φ/64 1 1

Notes: 1. φW/2 clock in active (medium-speed/high-speed) mode and sleep (medium-speed/high-

speed) mode

2. φWclock in subactive mode and subsleep mode

In subactive or subsleep mode, the SCI3 can be operated when CPU clock is φW/2 only.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 253 of 462

Table 10.4 Maximum Bit Rate for Each Frequency (Asynchronous Mode)

Setting

OSC (MHz) Maximum Bit Rate (bit/s) n N

0.0384*600 0 0

2 31250 0 0

2.4576 38400 0 0

4 62500 0 0

10 156250 0 0

16 250000 0 0

Note: *When CKS1 = 0 and CKS0 = 1 in SMR

Table 10.5 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clocked Synchronous Mode) (1)

OSC

38.4kHz 2MHz 4MHz

Bit Rate

(bit/s) n N Error

(%) n N Error

(%)

200 0 230 ——— ———

250 — — — — — — 2 124 0

300 2 0 0 ——— ———

500 ——— ———

1k 0 249 0 — — —

2.5k 0 99 0 0 199 0

5k 0490 0990

10k 0240 0490

25k 090 0190

50k 040 090

100k — — — 0 4 0

250k 0 0 0 0 1 0

500k 0 0 0

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 254 of 462

Table 10.5 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clocked Synchronous Mode) (2)

OSC

10 MHz 16 MHz

Bit Rate

(bit/s) n N Error (%) n N Error (%)

200 — — — — — —

250 — — — 3 124 0

300 — — — — — —

500 — — — 2 249 0

1k — — — 2 124 0

2.5k — — — 2 49 0

5k 0 249 0 2 24 0

10k 0 124 0 0 199 0

25k 0 49 0 0 79 0

50k 0 24 0 0 39 0

100k — — — 0 19 0

250k 0 4 0 0 7 0

500k — — — 0 3 0

1M——— 0 1 0

[Legend]

Blank : No setting is available.

— : A setting is available but error occurs.

Note: The value set in BRR is given by the following formula:

N = OSC

8 × 2

× B – 1

B: Bit rate (bit/s)

N: BRR setting for baud rate generator (0 ≤N≤255)

OSC: Value of φOSC (Hz)

n: Baud rate generator input clock number (n = 0, 2, or 3)

(The relation between n and the clock is shown in table 10.6.)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 255 of 462

Table 10.6 Relation between n and Clock

SMR Setting

n Clock CKS1 CKS0

0φ00

0φW/2*1/φW*201

2φ/16 1 0

3φ/64 1 1

Notes: 1. φW/2 clock in active (medium-speed/high-speed) mode and sleep (medium-speed/high-

speed) mode

2. φWclock in subactive mode and subsleep mode

In subactive or subsleep mode, the SCI3 can be operated when CPU clock is φW/2 only.

10.3.9 Serial Port Control Register (SPCR)

SPCR selects whether input/output data of the RXD32 and TXD32 pins is inverted or not.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

6

1

1

Reserved

These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified.

5 SPC32 0 R/W P42/TXD32 Pin Function Switch

Selects whether pin P42/TXD32 is used as P42 or as

TXD32.

0: P42 I/O pin

1: TXD32 output pin

41Reserved

This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.

3 SCINV3 0 R/W TXD32 Pin Output Data Inversion Switch

Selects whether output data of the TXD32 pin is inverted

or not.

0: Output data of TXD32 pin is not inverted.

1: Output data of TXD32 pin is inverted.

2 SCINV2 0 R/W RXD32 Pin Input Data Inversion Switch

Selects whether input data of the RXD32 pin is inverted

or not.

0: Input data of RXD32 pin is not inverted.

1: Input data of RXD32 pin is inverted.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 256 of 462

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

0

1

1

Reserved

These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be

modified.

10.4 Operation in Asynchronous Mode

Figure 10.2 shows the general format for asynchronous serial communication. One frame consists

of a start bit (low level), followed by data (in LSB-first order), a parity bit (high or low level), and

finally stop bits (high level). In asynchronous mode, synchronization is performed at the falling

edge of the start bit during reception. The data is sampled on the 8th pulse of a clock with a

frequency 16 times the bit period, so that the transfer data is latched at the center of each bit.

Inside the SCI3, the transmitter and receiver are independent units, enabling full duplex. Both the

transmitter and the receiver also have a double-buffered structure, so data can be read or written

during transmission or reception, enabling continuous data transfer. Table 10.7 shows the 16 data

transfer formats that can be set in asynchronous mode. The format is selected by the settings in

SMR as shown in table 10.8.

LSB

Start

bit

MSB

Mark state

Stop bitTransmit/receive data

Serial

data Parity

bit

1 bit 1 or

2 bits

5, 7, or 8 bits 1 bit,

or none

One unit of transfer data (character or frame)

Figure 10.2 Data Format in Asynchronous Communication

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 257 of 462

10.4.1 Clock

Either an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external clock input at

the SCK32 pin can be selected as the SCI3’s serial clock source, according to the setting of the

COM bit in SMR and the CKE0 and CKE1 bits in SCR3. For details on selection of the clock

source, see table 10.9. When an external clock is input at the SCK32 pin, the clock frequency

should be 16 times the bit rate used. When the SCI3 is operated on an internal clock, the clock can

be output from the SCK32 pin. The frequency of the clock output in this case is equal to the bit

rate, and the phase is such that the rising edge of the clock is in the middle of the transmit data, as

shown in figure 10.3.

1 character (frame)

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 0/1 11

Clock

Serial data

Figure 10.3 Relationship between Output Clock and Transfer Data Phase

(Asynchronous Mode) (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, Two Stop Bits)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 258 of 462

Table 10.7 Data Transfer Formats (Asynchronous Mode)

START

2345

8-bit data

5-bit data

7-bit data

6789

STOP

MPB

STOP

MPB

STOP

MPB

STOP

MPB

STOP

SMR

CHR PE MP STOP

0000

0001

0010

0011

0100

0101

0110

0111

1000

1001

1010

START

8-bit data

STOP

STOP STOP

START

5-bit data

STOPP

P STOPSTOP

Serial Data Transfer Format and Frame Length

* : Don't care

[Legend]

START

STOP

MPB

: Start bit

: Stop bit

: Parity bit

: Multiprocessor bit

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 259 of 462

Table 10.8 SMR Settings and Corresponding Data Transfer Formats

SMR Data Transfer Format

Bit 7

COM Bit 6

CHR Bit 2

MP Bit 5

PE Bit 3

STOP Mode Data

Length Multiprocessor

Bit Parity

Bit Stop Bit

Length

01bit0

2bits

01bit

8-bit data

Yes

2bits

01bit0

2bits

01bit

7-bit data

Yes

2bits

01bit0

8-bit data Yes

2bits

01bit

5-bit data No

2bits

01bit0

7-bit data Yes

2bits

01bit

Asynchronous

mode

5-bit data No Yes

2bits

1*0**Clocked

synchronous

mode

8-bit data No No No

*: Don’t care

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 260 of 462

Table 10.9 SMR and SCR3 Settings and Clock Source Selection

SMR SCR3

Bit 7 Bit 1 Bit 0 Transmit/Receive Clock

COM CKE1 CKE0 Mode Clock Source SCK32 Pin Function

0 I/O port (SCK32 pin not used)0

Internal

Outputs clock with same

frequency as bit rate

Asynchronous

mode

External Inputs clock with frequency 16

times bit rate

0 0 Internal Outputs serial clock1

Clocked

synchronous mode External Inputs serial clock

011

101

111

Reserved (Do not specify these combinations)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 261 of 462

10.4.2 SCI3 Initialization

Follow the flowchart as shown in figure 10.4 to initialize the SCI3. When the TE bit is cleared to

0, the TDRE flag is set to 1. Note that clearing the RE bit to 0 does not initialize the contents of

the RDRF, PER, FER, and OER flags, or the contents of RDR. When the external clock is used in

asynchronous mode, the clock must be supplied even during initialization. When the external

clock is used in clocked synchronous mode, the clock must not be supplied during initialization.

Wait

Start initialization

Set data transfer format in SMR

[1]

Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR3

Yes

Set value in BRR

Clear TE and RE bits in SCR3 to 0

[2]

[3]

Set TE and RE bits in

SCR3 to 1, and set RIE, TIE, TEIE,

and MPIE bits.

Set SPC32 bit in SPCR to 1

[4]

1-bit interval elapsed?

[1] Set the clock selection in SCR3.

Be sure to clear bits RIE, TIE, TEIE, and

MPIE, and bits TE and RE, to 0.

When the clock output is selected in

asynchronous mode, clock is output

immediately after CKE1 and CKE0

settings are made. When the clock

output is selected at reception in clocked

synchronous mode, clock is output

immediately after CKE1, CKE0, and RE

are set to 1.

[2] Set the data transfer format in SMR.

[3] Write a value corresponding to the bit

rate to BRR. Not necessary if an

external clock is used.

[4] Wait at least one bit interval, then set the

TE bit or RE bit in SCR3 to 1. Setting

bits TE and RE enables the TXD32 and

RXD32 pins to be used. Also set the

RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits,

depending on whether interrupts are

required. In asynchronous mode, the bits

are marked at transmission and idled at

reception to wait for the start bit.

Figure 10.4 Sample SCI3 Initialization Flowchart

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 262 of 462

10.4.3 Data Transmission

Figure 10.5 shows an example of operation for transmission in asynchronous mode. In

transmission, the SCI3 operates as described below.

1. The SCI3 monitors the TDRE flag in SSR. If the flag is cleared to 0, the SCI3 recognizes that

data has been written to TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR.

2. After transferring data from TDR to TSR, the SCI3 sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts

transmission. If the TIE bit is set to 1 at this time, a TXI interrupt request is generated.

Continuous transmission is possible because the TXI interrupt routine writes next transmit

data to TDR before transmission of the current transmit data has been completed.

3. The SCI3 checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the stop bit.

4. If the TDRE flag is 0, the data is transferred from TDR to TSR, the stop bit is sent, and then

serial transmission of the next frame is started.

5. If the TDRE flag is 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, the stop bit is sent, and then the

“mark state” is entered, in which 1 is output. If the TEIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at this time, a

TEI interrupt request is generated.

6. Figure 10.6 shows a sample flowchart for transmission in asynchronous mode.

1 frame

Start

bit Start

bit

Transmit

data Transmit

data

Parity

bit Stop

bit Parity

bit Stop

bit Mark

state

1 frame

01 D0 D1 D7 0/1 1 1 10 D0 D1 D7 0/1

Serial

data

TDRE

TEND

LSI

operation TXI interrupt

request

generated

TDRE flag

cleared to 0

User

processing Data written

to TDR

TXI interrupt request generated TEI interrupt request

generated

Figure 10.5 Example SCI3 Operation in Transmission in Asynchronous Mode

(8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 263 of 462

<End>

Yes

Start transmission

Read TDRE flag in SSR

Set SPC32 bit in SPCR to 1

[1]

Write transmit data to TDR

Yes

Read TEND flag in SSR

[2]

Yes

[3]

Clear PDR to 0 and

set PCR to 1

Clear TE bit in SCR3 to 0

TDRE = 1

All data transmitted?

TEND = 1

Break output?

[1] Read SSR and check that the

TDRE flag is set to 1, then write

transmit data to TDR. When data is

written to TDR, the TDRE flag is

automaticaly cleared to 0.

(After the TE bit is set to 1, one

frame of 1 is output, then

transmission is possible.)

[2] To continue serial transmission,

read 1 from the TDRE flag to

confirm that writing is possible,

then write data to TDR. When data

is written to TDR, the TDRE flag is

automaticaly cleared to 0.

[3] To output a break in serial

transmission, after setting PCR to 1

and PDR to 0, clear the TE bit in

SCR3 to 0.

Figure 10.6 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart (Asynchronous Mode)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 264 of 462

10.4.4 Serial Data Reception

Figure 10.7 shows an example of operation for reception in asynchronous mode. In serial

reception, the SCI operates as described below.

1. The SCI3 monitors the communication line. If a start bit is detected, the SCI3 performs

internal synchronization, receives data in RSR, and checks the parity bit and stop bit.

•Parity check

The SCI3 checks that the number of 1 bits in the receive data conforms to the parity (odd or

even) set in bit PM in the serial mode register (SMR).

•Stop bit check

The SCI3 checks that the stop bit is 1. If two stop bits are used, only the first is checked.

•Status check

The SCI3 checks that bit RDRF is set to 0, indicating that the receive data can be transferred

from RSR to RDR.

2. If an overrun error occurs (when reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag

is still set to 1), the OER bit in SSR is set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at this time,

an ERI interrupt request is generated. Receive data is not transferred to RDR.

3. If a parity error is detected, the PER bit in SSR is set to 1 and receive data is transferred to

RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at this time, an ERI interrupt request is generated.

4. If a framing error is detected (when the stop bit is 0), the FER bit in SSR is set to 1 and

receive data is transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at this time, an ERI

interrupt request is generated.

5. If reception is completed successfully, the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, and receive data is

transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at this time, an RXI interrupt request is

generated. Continuous reception is possible because the RXI interrupt routine reads the

receive data transferred to RDR before reception of the next receive data has been completed.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 265 of 462

1 frame

Start

bit Start

bit

Receive

data Receive

data

Parity

bit Stop

bit Parity

bit Stop

bit Mark state

(idle state)

1 frame

01 D0 D1 D7 0/1 1 0 10 D0 D1 D7 0/1

Serial

data

RDRF

FER

LSI

operation

User

processing

RDRF

cleared to 0

RDR data read Framing error

processing

RXI request 0 stop bit

detected ERI request in

response to

framing error

Figure 10.7 Example SCI3 Operation in Reception in Asynchronous Mode

(8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit)

Table 10.10 shows the states of the SSR status flags and receive data handling when a receive

error is detected. If a receive error is detected, the RDRF flag retains its state before receiving

data. Reception cannot be resumed while a receive error flag is set to 1. Accordingly, clear the

OER, FER, PER, and RDRF bits to 0 before resuming reception. Figure 10.8 shows a sample

flowchart for serial data reception.

Table 10.10 SSR Status Flags and Receive Data Handling

SSR Status Flag

RDRF*OER FER PER Receive Data Receive Error Type

1 1 0 0 Lost Overrun error

0 0 1 0 Transferred to RDR Framing error

0 0 0 1 Transferred to RDR Parity error

1 1 1 0 Lost Overrun error + framing error

1 1 0 1 Lost Overrun error + parity error

0 0 1 1 Transferred to RDR Framing error + parity error

1 1 1 1 Lost Overrun error + framing error +

parity error

Note: *The RDRF flag retains the state it had before data reception. However, note that if RDR

is read after an overrun error has occurred in a frame because reading of the receive

data in the previous frame was delayed, the RDRF flag will be cleared to 0.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 266 of 462

Yes

<End>

Start reception

[1]

Yes

Read RDRF flag in SSR [2]

[3]

Clear RE bit in SCR3 to 0

Read OER, PER, and

FER flags in SSR

Error processing

(Continued on next page)

[4]

Read receive data in RDR

Yes

OER+PER+FER = 1

RDRF = 1

All data received?

[1] Read the OER, PER, and FER flags in

SSR to identify the error. If a receive

error occurs, performs the appropriate

error processing.

[2] Read SSR and check that RDRF = 1,

then read the receive data in RDR.

The RDRF flag is cleared automatically.

[3] To continue serial reception, before the

stop bit for the current frame is

received, read the RDRF flag and read

RDR.

The RDRF flag is cleared automatically.

[4] If a receive error occurs, read the OER,

PER, and FER flags in SSR to identify

the error. After performing the

appropriate error processing, ensure

that the OER, PER, and FER flags are

all cleared to 0. Reception cannot be

resumed if any of these flags are set to

1. In the case of a framing error, a

break can be detected by reading the

value of the input port corresponding to

the RXD32 pin.

(A)

Figure 10.8 Sample Serial Data Reception Flowchart (Asynchronous Mode) (1)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 267 of 462

<End>

(A)

Error processing

Parity error processing

Yes

Clear OER, PER, and

FER flags in SSR to 0

Yes

Framing error processing

Yes

Overrun error processing

OER = 1

FER = 1

Break?

PER = 1

[4]

Figure 10.8 Sample Serial Data Reception Flowchart (Asynchronous Mode) (2)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 268 of 462

10.5 Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode

Figure 10.9 shows the general format for clocked synchronous communication. In clocked

synchronous mode, data is transmitted or received synchronous with clock pulses. A single

character in the transmit data consists of the 8-bit data starting from the LSB. In clocked

synchronous serial communication, data on the transmission line is output from one falling edge of

the serial clock to the next. In clocked synchronous mode, the SCI3 receives data in synchronous

with the rising edge of the serial clock. After 8-bit data is output, the transmission line holds the

MSB state. In clocked synchronous mode, no parity or multiprocessor bit is added. Inside the

SCI3, the transmitter and receiver are independent units, enabling full-duplex communication

through the use of a common clock. Both the transmitter and the receiver also have a double-

buffered structure, so data can be read or written during transmission or reception, enabling

continuous data transfer.

Don’t

care

Don’t

care

One unit of transfer data (character or frame)

8-bit

Bit 0

Serial data

Synchronization

clock

Bit 1 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5

LSB MSB

Bit 2 Bit 6 Bit 7

Note: * High except in continuous transfer

Figure 10.9 Data Format in Clocked Synchronous Communication

10.5.1 Clock

Either an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external

synchronization clock input at the SCK32 pin can be selected, according to the setting of the COM

bit in SMR and CKE0 and CKE1 bits in SCR3. When the SCI3 is operated on an internal clock,

the serial clock is output from the SCK32 pin. Eight serial clock pulses are output in the transfer of

one character, and when no transfer is performed the clock is fixed high.

10.5.2 SCI3 Initialization

Before transmitting and receiving data, the SCI3 should be initialized as described in a sample

flowchart in figure 10.4.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 269 of 462

10.5.3 Serial Data Transmission

Figure 10.10 shows an example of SCI3 operation for transmission in clocked synchronous mode.

In serial transmission, the SCI3 operates as described below.

1. The SCI3 monitors the TDRE flag in SSR, and if the flag is 0, the SCI recognizes that data

has been written to TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR.

2. The SCI3 sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts transmission. If the TIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at

this time, a transmit data empty interrupt (TXI) is generated.

3. 8-bit data is sent from the TXD32 pin synchronized with the output clock when output clock

mode has been specified, and synchronized with the input clock when use of an external clock

has been specified. Serial data is transmitted sequentially from the LSB (bit 0), from the

TXD32 pin.

4. The SCI checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the MSB (bit 7).

5. If the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, data is transferred from TDR to TSR, and serial transmission

of the next frame is started.

6. If the TDRE flag is set to 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, and the TDRE flag maintains

the output state of the last bit. If the TEIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at this time, a TEI interrupt

request is generated.

7. The SCK32 pin is fixed high.

Figure 10.11 shows a sample flowchart for serial data transmission. Even if the TDRE flag is

cleared to 0, transmission will not start while a receive error flag (OER, FER, or PER) is set to 1.

Make sure that the receive error flags are cleared to 0 before starting transmission.

Serial

clock

Serial

data Bit 1Bit 0 Bit 7 Bit 0

1 frame 1 frame

Bit 1 Bit 6 Bit 7

TDRE

TEND

LSI

operation

User

processing

TXI interrupt request generated

Data written

to TDR

TDRE flag

cleared

to 0

TXI interrupt

request

generated

TEI interrupt request

generated

Figure 10.10 Example of SCI3 Operation in Transmission in Clocked Synchronous Mode

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 270 of 462

<End>

Yes

Start transmission

Read TDRE flag in SSR

Set SPC32 bit in SPCR to 1

[1]

Write transmit data to TDR

Yes

Read TEND flag in SSR

[2]

Clear TE bit in SCR3 to 0

TDRE = 1

All data transmitted?

TEND = 1

[1] Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is

set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR.

When data is written to TDR, the TDRE flag

is automatically cleared to 0. When clock

output is selected and data is written to

TDR, clocks are output to start the data

transmission.

[2] To continue serial transmission, be sure to

read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that

writing is possible, then write data to TDR.

When data is written to TDR, the TDRE flag

is automatically cleared to 0.

Figure 10.11 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart (Clocked Synchronous Mode)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 271 of 462

10.5.4 Serial Data Reception (Clocked Synchronous Mode)

Figure 10.12 shows an example of SCI3 operation for reception in clocked synchronous mode. In

serial reception, the SCI3 operates as described below.

1. The SCI3 performs internal initialization synchronous with a synchronous clock input or

output, starts receiving data.

2. The SCI3 stores the received data in RSR.

3. If an overrun error occurs (when reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag

in SSR is still set to 1), the OER bit in SSR is set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at this

time, an ERI interrupt request is generated, receive data is not transferred to RDR, and the

RDRF flag remains to be set to 1.

4. If reception is completed successfully, the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, and receive data is

transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at this time, an RXI interrupt request is

generated.

Serial

clock

Serial

data

1 frame 1 frame

Bit 0Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 6 Bit 7

RDRF

OER

LSI

operation

User

processing

RXI interrupt request generated

RDR data read

RDRF flag

cleared

to 0

RXI interrupt

request

generated

ERI interrupt request

generated by

overrun error

Overrun error

processing

RDR data has

not been read

(RDRF = 1)

Figure 10.12 Example of SCI3 Reception Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode

Reception cannot be resumed while a receive error flag is set to 1. Accordingly, clear the OER,

FER, PER, and RDRF bits to 0 before resuming reception. Figure 10.13 shows a sample flowchart

for serial data reception.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 272 of 462

Yes

<End>

Start reception

[1]

[4]

Yes

Read RDRF flag in SSR [2]

[3]

Clear RE bit in SCR3 to 0

Error processing

(Continued below)

Read receive data in RDR

Yes

OER = 1

RDRF = 1

All data received?

Read OER flag in SSR

<End>

Error processing

Overrun error processing

Clear OER flag in SSR to 0

[4]

[1] Read the OER flag in SSR to determine if

there is an error. If an overrun error has

occurred, execute overrun error processing.

[2] Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is

set to 1, then read the receive data in RDR.

When data is read from RDR, the RDRF

flag is automatically cleared to 0.

[3] To continue serial reception, before the

MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is received,

reading the RDRF flag and reading RDR

should be finished. When data is read from

RDR, the RDRF flag is automatically

cleared to 0.

[4] If an overrun error occurs, read the OER

flag in SSR, and after performing the

appropriate error processing, clear the OER

flag to 0. Reception cannot be resumed if

the OER flag is set to 1.

Figure 10.13 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart (Clocked Synchronous Mode)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 273 of 462

10.5.5 Simultaneous Serial Data Transmission and Reception

Figure 10.14 shows a sample flowchart for simultaneous serial transmit and receive operations.

The following procedure should be used for simultaneous serial data transmit and receive

operations. To switch from transmit mode to simultaneous transmit and receive mode, after

checking that the SCI3 has finished transmission and the TDRE and TEND flags are set to 1, clear

TE to 0. Then simultaneously set TE and RE to 1 with a single instruction. To switch from receive

mode to simultaneous transmit and receive mode, after checking that the SCI3 has finished

reception, clear RE to 0. Then after checking that the RDRF and receive error flags (OER, FER,

and PER) are cleared to 0, simultaneously set TE and RE to 1 with a single instruction.

Yes

<End>

Start transmission/reception

[3]

Error processing

[4]

Read receive data in RDR

Yes

OER = 1

All data received?

[1]

Read TDRE flag in SSR

Set SPC32 bit in SPCR to 1

Yes

TDRE = 1

Write transmit data to TDR

Yes

RDRF = 1

Read OER flag in SSR

[2]

Read RDRF flag in SSR

Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0

[1] Read SSR and check that the TDRE

flag is set to 1, then write transmit

data to TDR.

When data is written to TDR, the

TDRE flag is automatically cleared to

[2] Read SSR and check that the RDRF

flag is set to 1, then read the receive

data in RDR.

When data is read from RDR, the

RDRF flag is automatically cleared to

[3] To continue serial transmission/

reception, before the MSB (bit 7) of

the current frame is received, finish

reading the RDRF flag, reading RDR.

Also, before the MSB (bit 7) of the

current frame is transmitted, read 1

from the TDRE flag to confirm that

writing is possible. Then write data to

TDR.

When data is written to TDR, the

TDRE flag is automatically cleared to

0. When data is read from RDR, the

RDRF flag is automatically cleared to

[4] If an overrun error occurs, read the

OER flag in SSR, and after

performing the appropriate error

processing, clear the OER flag to 0.

Transmission/reception cannot be

resumed if the OER flag is set to 1.

For overrun error processing, see

figure 10.13.

Figure 10.14 Sample Flowchart of Simultaneous Serial Transmit and Receive Operations

(Clocked Synchronous Mode)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 274 of 462

10.6 Multiprocessor Communication Function

Use of the multiprocessor communication function enables data transfer between a number of

processors sharing communication lines by asynchronous serial communication using the

multiprocessor format, in which a multiprocessor bit is added to the transfer data. When

multiprocessor communication is performed, each receiving station is addressed by a unique ID

code. The serial communication cycle consists of two component cycles; an ID transmission cycle

that specifies the receiving station, and a data transmission cycle. The multiprocessor bit is used to

differentiate between the ID transmission cycle and the data transmission cycle. If the

multiprocessor bit is 1, the cycle is an ID transmission cycle; if the multiprocessor bit is 0, the

cycle is a data transmission cycle. Figure 10.15 shows an example of inter-processor

communication using the multiprocessor format. The transmitting station first sends the ID code of

the receiving station with which it wants to perform serial communication as data with a 1

multiprocessor bit added. It then sends transmit data as data with a 0 multiprocessor bit added.

When data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received, the receiving station compares that data with its

own ID. The station whose ID matches then receives the data sent next. Stations whose IDs do not

match continue to skip data until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is again received.

The SCI3 uses the MPIE bit in SCR3 to implement this function. When the MPIE bit is set to 1,

transfer of receive data from RSR to RDR, error flag detection, and setting the SSR status flags,

RDRF, FER, and OER to 1, are inhibited until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received. On

reception of a receive character with a 1 multiprocessor bit, the MPBR bit in SSR is set to 1 and

the MPIE bit is automatically cleared, thus normal reception is resumed. If the RIE bit in SCR3 is

set to 1 at this time, an RXI interrupt is generated.

When the multiprocessor format is selected, the parity bit setting is rendered invalid. All other bit

settings are the same as those in normal asynchronous mode. The clock used for multiprocessor

communication is the same as that in normal asynchronous mode.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 275 of 462

Transmitting

station

Receiving

station A Receiving

station B Receiving

station C Receiving

station D

(ID = 01) (ID = 02) (ID = 03) (ID = 04)

Serial transmission line

Serial

data

ID transmission cycle =

receiving station

specification

Data transmission cycle =

Data transmission to

receiving station specified by ID

(MPB = 1) (MPB = 0)

H'01 H'AA

[Legend]

MPB: Multiprocessor bit

Figure 10.15 Example of Communication Using Multiprocessor Format

(Transmission of Data H’AA to Receiving Station A)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 276 of 462

10.6.1 Multiprocessor Serial Data Transmission

Figure 10.16 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial data transmission. For an ID

transmission cycle, set the MPBT bit in SSR to 1 before transmission. For a data transmission

cycle, clear the MPBT bit in SSR to 0 before transmission. All other SCI3 operations are the same

as those in asynchronous mode.

<End>

Yes

Start transmission

Read TDRE flag in SSR

Set SPC32 bit in SPCR to 1

[1]

Set MPBT bit in SSR

Yes

Read TEND flag in SSR

[2]

Yes

[3]

Clear PDR to 0 and set PCR to 1

Clear TE bit in SCR3 to 0

TDRE = 1

All data transmitted?

TEND = 1

Break output?

Write transmit data to TDR

[1] Read SSR and check that the TDRE

flag is set to 1, set the MPBT bit in

SSR to 0 or 1, then write transmit

data to TDR. When data is written to

TDR, the TDRE flag is automatically

cleared to 0.

[2] To continue serial transmission, be

sure to read 1 from the TDRE flag to

confirm that writing is possible, then

write data to TDR. When data is

written to TDR, the TDRE flag is

automatically cleared to 0.

[3] To output a break in serial

transmission, set the port PCR to 1,

clear PDR to 0, then clear the TE bit

in SCR3 to 0.

Figure 10.16 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Transmission Flowchart

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 277 of 462

10.6.2 Multiprocessor Serial Data Reception

Figure 10.17 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial data reception. If the MPIE bit in

SCR3 is set to 1, data is skipped until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received. On receiving

data with a 1 multiprocessor bit, the receive data is transferred to RDR. An RXI interrupt request

is generated at this time. All other SCI3 operations are the same as in asynchronous mode. Figure

10.18 shows an example of SCI3 operation for multiprocessor format reception.

Yes

<End>

Start reception

Yes

[4]

Clear RE bit in SCR3 to 0

Error processing

(Continued on

next page)

[5]

Yes

FER+OER = 1

RDRF = 1

All data received?

Set MPIE bit in SCR3 to 1 [1]

[2]

Read OER and FER flags in SSR

Read RDRF flag in SSR [3]

Read receive data in RDR

Yes

[A]

This station’s ID?

Read OER and FER flags in SSR

Yes

Read RDRF flag in SSR

Yes

FER+OER = 1

Read receive data in RDR

RDRF = 1

[1] Set the MPIE bit in SCR3 to 1.

[2] Read OER and FER in SSR to check for

errors. Receive error processing is performed

in cases where a receive error occurs.

[3] Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is

set to 1, then read the receive data in RDR

and compare it with this station’s ID.

If the data is not this station’s ID, set the MPIE

bit to 1 again.

When data is read from RDR, the RDRF flag

is automatically cleared to 0.

[4] Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is

set to 1, then read the data in RDR.

[5] If a receive error occurs, read the OER and

FER flags in SSR to identify the error. After

performing the appropriate error processing,

ensure that the OER and FER flags are all

cleared to 0.

Reception cannot be resumed if either of

these flags is set to 1.

In the case of a framing error, a break can be

detected by reading the RXD32 pin value.

Figure 10.17 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (1)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 278 of 462

<End>

Error processing

Yes

Clear OER, and

FER flags in SSR to 0

Yes

Framing error processing

Overrun error processing

OER = 1

FER = 1

Break?

[5]

[A]

Figure 10.17 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (2)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 279 of 462

1 frame

Start

bit Start

bit

Receive

data (ID1) Receive data

(Data1)

MPB MPB

Stop

bit Stop

bit Mark state

(idle state)

1 frame

01D0D1D711 110D0D1 D7

ID1

Serial

data

MPIE

RDRF

RDR

value

RDR

value

LSI

operation RXI interrupt

request

MPIE cleared

to 0

User

processing

RDRF flag

cleared

to 0

RXI interrupt request

is not generated, and

RDR retains its state

RDR data read When data is not

this station's ID,

MPIE is set to 1

again

1 frame

Start

bit Start

bit

Receive

data (ID2) Receive data

(Data2)

MPB MPB

Stop

bit Stop

bit Mark state

(idle state)

1 frame

01D0D1D711 110

(a) When data does not match this receiver's ID

(b) When data matches this receiver's ID

D0 D1 D7

ID2 Data2ID1

Serial

data

MPIE

RDRF

LSI

operation RXI interrupt

request

MPIE cleared

to 0

User

processing

RDRF flag

cleared

to 0

RXI interrupt

request RDRF flag

cleared

to 0

RDR data read When data is

this station's

ID, reception

is continued

RDR data read

MPIE set to 1

again

Figure 10.18 Example of SCI3 Operation in Reception Using Multiprocessor Format

(Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 280 of 462

10.7 Interrupts

The SCI3 creates the following six interrupt requests: transmission end, transmit data empty,

receive data full, and receive errors (overrun error, framing error, and parity error). Table 10.11

shows the interrupt sources.

Table 10.11 SCI3 Interrupt Requests

Interrupt Requests Abbreviation Interrupt Sources

Receive Data Full RXI Setting RDRF in SSR

Transmit Data Empty TXI Setting TDRE in SSR

Transmission End TEI Setting TEND in SSR

Receive Error ERI Setting OER, FER, and PER in SSR

Each interrupt request can be enabled or disabled by means of bits TIE and RIE in SCR3.

When bit TDRE is set to 1 in SSR, a TXI interrupt is requested. When bit TEND is set to 1 in

SSR, a TEI interrupt is requested. These two interrupts are generated during transmission.

The initial value of the TDRE flag in SSR is 1. Thus, when the TIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 before

transferring the transmit data to TDR, a TXI interrupt request is generated even if the transmit data

is not ready. The initial value of the TEND flag in SSR is 1. Thus, when the TEIE bit in SCR3 is

set to 1 before transferring the transmit data to TDR, a TEI interrupt request is generated even if

the transmit data has not been sent. It is possible to make use of the most of these interrupt

requests efficiently by transferring the transmit data to TDR in the interrupt routine. To prevent the

generation of these interrupt requests (TXI and TEI), set the enable bits (TIE and TEIE) that

correspond to these interrupt requests to 1, after transferring the transmit data to TDR.

When bit RDRF is set to 1 in SSR, an RXI interrupt is requested, and if any of bits OER, PER, and

FER is set to 1, an ERI interrupt is requested. These two interrupt requests are generated during

reception.

For further details, see section 3, Exception Handling.

The SCI3 can carry out continuous reception using RXI and continuous transmission using TXI.

These interrupts are shown in table 10.12.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 281 of 462

Table 10.12 Transmit/Receive Interrupts

Interrupt Flags Interrupt Request Conditions Notes

RXI RDRF

RIE When serial reception is performed

normally and receive data is

transferred from RSR to RDR, bit

RDRF is set to 1, and if bit RIE is set

to 1 at this time, RXI is enabled and an

interrupt is requested. (See figure

10.19(a).)

The RXI interrupt routine reads the

receive data transferred to RDR

and clears bit RDRF to 0.

Continuous reception can be

performed by repeating the above

operations until reception of the

next RSR data is completed.

TXI TDRE

TIE WhenTSRisfoundtobeempty(on

completion of the previous

transmission) and the transmit data

placed in TDR is transferred to TSR,

bitTDREissetto1.IfbitTIEissetto

1 at this time, TXI is enabled and an

interrupt is requested. (See figure

10.19(b).)

The TXI interrupt routine writes the

next transmit data to TDR and

clears bit TDRE to 0. Continuous

transmission can be performed by

repeating the above operations

until the data transferred to TSR

has been transmitted.

TEI TEND

TEIE When the last bit of the character in

TSR is transmitted, if bit TDRE is set

to 1, bit TEND is set to 1. If bit TEIE is

set to 1 at this time, TEI is enabled

and an interrupt is requested. (See

figure 10.19(c).)

TEI indicates that the next transmit

data has not been written to TDR

when the last bit of the transmit

character in TSR is transmitted.

RDR

→

RSR (reception in progress)

RDRF = 0

RXD32 pin

RDR

RSR↑ (reception completed, transfer)

RDRF 1

(RXI request when RIE = 1)

RXD32 pin

Figure 10.19(a) RDRF Setting and RXI Interrupt

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 282 of 462

TDR (next transmit data)

TSR (transmission in progress)

TDRE = 0

TXD32 pin

TDR

TSR (transmission completed, transfer)

TDRE 1

(

TXI re

uest when TIE = 1

)

TXD32 pin

→

↓

Figure 10.19(b) TDRE Setting and TXI Interrupt

TDR

TSR (transmission in progress)

TEND = 0

TXD32 pin

TDR

TSR (transmission completed)

TEND 1

(TEI request when TEIE = 1)

TXD32 pin

→

Figure 10.19(c) TEND Setting and TEI Interrupt

10.8 Usage Notes

10.8.1 Break Detection and Processing

When framing error detection is performed, a break can be detected by reading the RXD32 pin

value directly. In a break, the input from the RXD32 pin becomes all 0, setting the FER flag, and

possibly the PER flag. Note that as the SCI3 continues the receive operation after receiving a

break, even if the FER flag is cleared to 0, it will be set to 1 again.

10.8.2 Mark State and Break Sending

When TE is 0, the TXD32 pin is used as an I/O port whose direction (input or output) and level

are determined by PCR and PDR. This can be used to set the TXD32 pin to mark state (high level)

or send a break during serial data transmission. To maintain the communication line at mark state

until TE is set to 1, set both PCR and PDR to 1. As TE is cleared to 0 at this point, the TXD32 pin

becomes an I/O port, and 1 is output from the TXD32 pin. To send a break during serial

transmission, first set PCR to 1 and PDR to 0, and then clear TE to 0. When TE is cleared to 0, the

transmitter is initialized regardless of the current transmission state, the TXD32 pin becomes an

I/O port, and 0 is output from the TXD32 pin.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 283 of 462

10.8.3 Receive Error Flags and Transmit Operations (Clocked Synchronous Mode Only)

Transmission cannot be started when a receive error flag (OER, PER, or FER) is set to 1, even if

the TDRE flag is cleared to 0. Be sure to clear the receive error flags to 0 before starting

transmission. Note also that receive error flags cannot be cleared to 0 even if the RE bit is cleared

to 0.

10.8.4 Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Asynchronous Mode

In asynchronous mode, the SCI3 operates on a basic clock with a frequency of 16 times the

transfer rate. In reception, the SCI3 samples the falling edge of the start bit using the basic clock,

and performs internal synchronization. Receive data is latched internally at the rising edge of the

8th pulse of the basic clock as shown in figure 10.20.

Thus, the reception margin in asynchronous mode is given by formula (1) below.

M = (0.5 – ) – – (L – 0.5) F × 100(%)













2N D – 0.5

... Formula (1)

Where N : Ratio of bit rate to clock (N = 16)

D :Clockduty(D=0.5to1.0)

L : Frame length (L = 9 to 12)

F : Absolute value of clock rate deviation

Assuming values of F (absolute value of clock rate deviation) = 0 and D (clock duty) = 0.5 in

formula (1), the reception margin can be given by the formula.

M={0.5–1/(2×16)} ×100 [%] = 46.875%

However, this is only the computed value, and a margin of 20% to 30% should be allowed for in

system design.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 284 of 462

Internal basic

clock

16 clocks

8 clocks

Receive data

(RXD32)

Synchronization

sampling timing

Start bit D0 D1

Data sampling

timing

15 0 7 15 007

Figure 10.20 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode

10.8.5 Note on Switching SCK32 Function

If pin SCK32 is used as a clock output pin by the SCI3 in clocked synchronous mode and is then

switched to a general input/output pin (a pin with a different function), the pin outputs a low level

signal for half a system clock (φ) cycle immediately after it is switched.

This can be prevented by either of the following methods according to the situation.

a. When an SCK32 function is switched from clock output to non clock-output

When stopping data transfer, issue one instruction to clear bits TE and RE to 0 and to set bits

CKE1andCKE0inSCR3to1and0,respectively.

In this case, bit COM in SMR should be left 1. The above prevents SCK32 from being used as

a general input/output pin. To avoid an intermediate level of voltage from being applied to

SCK32, the line connected to SCK32 should be pulled up to the VCC level via a resistor, or

supplied with output from an external device.

b. When an SCK32 function is switched from clock output to general input/output

When stopping data transfer,

(i) Issue one instruction to clear bits TE and RE to 0 and to set bits CKE1 and CKE0 in

SCR3 to 1 and 0, respectively.

(ii) Clear bit COM in SMR to 0

(iii) Clear bits CKE1 and CKE0 in SCR3 to 0

Note that special care is also needed here to avoid an intermediate level of voltage from being

applied to SCK32.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 285 of 462

10.8.6 Relation between Writing to TDR and Bit TDRE

Bit TDRE in the serial status register (SSR) is a status flag that indicates that data for serial

transmission has not been prepared in TDR. When data is written to TDR, bit TDRE is cleared to

0 automatically. When the SCI3 transfers data from TDR to TSR, bit TDRE is set to 1.

Data can be written to TDR irrespective of the state of bit TDRE, but if new data is written to

TDR while bit TDRE is cleared to 0, the data previously stored in TDR will be lost if it has not yet

been transferred to TSR. Accordingly, to ensure that serial transmission is performed dependably,

you should first check that bit TDRE is set to 1, then write the transmit data to TDR only once (not

two or more times).

10.8.7 Relation between RDR Reading and bit RDRF

In a receive operation, the SCI3 continually checks the RDRF flag. If bit RDRF is cleared to 0

when reception of one frame ends, normal data reception is completed. If bit RDRF is set to 1, this

indicates that an overrun error has occurred.

When the contents of RDR are read, bit RDRF is cleared to 0 automatically. Therefore, if RDR is

read more than once, the second and subsequent read operations will be performed while bit

RDRF is cleared to 0. Note that, when an RDR read is performed while bit RDRF is cleared to 0,

if the read operation coincides with completion of reception of a frame, the next frame of data may

be read. This is shown in figure 10.21.

Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3

Data 1Communication line

RDRF

RDR

Data 2 Data 3

Data 1 Data 2

RDR read RDR read

(A)

Data 1 is read at point (A)

Data 2 is read at point (B)

(B)

Figure 10.21 Relation between RDR Read Timing and Data

In this case, only a single RDR read operation (not two or more) should be performed after first

checking that bit RDRF is set to 1. If two or more reads are performed, the data read the first time

should be transferred to RAM, etc., and the RAM contents used. Also, ensure that there is

sufficient margin in an RDR read operation before reception of the next frame is completed. To be

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 286 of 462

precise in terms of timing, the RDR read should be completed before bit 7 is transferred in clocked

synchronous mode, or before the STOP bit is transferred in asynchronous mode.

10.8.8 Transmit and Receive Operations when Making State Transition

Make sure that transmit and receive operations have completely finished before carrying out state

transition processing.

10.8.9 Setting in Subactive or Subsleep Mode

In subactive or subsleep mode, the SCI3 can operate only when the CPU clock is φW/2. The SA1

bit in SYSCR2 should be set to 1.

10.8.10 Oscillator Use with Serial Communications Interface 3 (H8/38104 Group only)

When implementing serial communications interface 3 on the H8/38104 Group, the system clock

oscillator must be used. The on-chip oscillator should not be used in this case. See section 4.3.4,

On-Chip Oscillator Selection Method, for information on switching between the system clock

oscillator and the on-chip oscillator.

PWM1000A_000020020900 Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 287 of 462

Section 11 10-Bit PWM

This LSI has a two-channel 10-bit PWM. The PWM with a low-path filter connected can be used

as a D/A converter. Figure 11.1(1) shows a block diagram of the 10-bit PWM of the H8/3802

Group and H8/38004 Group. Figure 11.1(2) shows a block diagram of the 10-bit PWM of the

H8/38104 Group.

11.1 Features

•Choice of four conversion periods

A conversion period of 4096/φwith a minimum modulation width of 4/φ, a conversion period

of 2048/φwith a minimum modulation width of 2/φ, a conversion period of 1024/φwith a

minimum modulation width of 1/φ, or a conversion period of 512/φwith a minimum

modulation width of 1/2φcan be selected.

•Pulse division method for less ripple

•Use of module standby mode enables this module to be placed in standby mode independently

when not used. (For details, refer to section 5.4, Module Standby Function.)

•On the H8/38104 Group it is possible to select between two types of PWM output: pulse-

division 10-bit PWM and event counter PWM (PWM incorporating AEC). (The H8/3802

Group and H8/38004 Group can only produce 10-bit PWM output.) Refer to section 9.4,

Asynchronous Event Counter, for information on event counter PWM.

[Legend]

PWCR: PWM control register

PWDRL: PWM data register L

PWDRU: PWM data register U

PWM: PWM output pin

Internal data bus

PWCR

PWDRL

PWDRU

PWM

PWM waveform

generator

φ/4

φ/2

φ/8

Figure 11.1(1) Block Diagram of 10-Bit PWM (H8/3802 Group, H8/38004 Group)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 288 of 462

[Legend]

PWCR: PWM control register

PWDRL: PWM data register L

PWDRU: PWM data register U

PWM: PWM output pin

IECPWM: Event counter PWM (PWM incorporating AEC)

Internal data bus

PWCR

PWDRL

PWDRU

PWM

(IECPWM)

PWM waveform

generator

IECPWM

φ/4

φ/2

φ/8

Figure 11.1(2) Block Diagram of 10-Bit PWM (H8/38104 Group)

11.2 Input/Output Pins

Table 11.1 shows the 10-bit PWM pin configuration.

Table 11.1 Pin Configuration

Name Abbreviation I/O Function

10-bit PWM square-wave

output 1 PWM1 Output Channel 1: 10-bit PWM waveform

output pin/event counter PWM output

pin*

10-bit PWM square-wave

output 2 PWM2 Output Channel 2: 10-bit PWM waveform

output pin/event counter PWM output

pin*

Note: *H8/38104 Group only

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 289 of 462

11.3 Register Descriptions

The 10-bit PWM has the following registers.

•PWM control register (PWCR)

•PWM data register U (PWDRU)

•PWM data register L (PWDRL)

11.3.1 PWM Control Register (PWCR)

On the H8/3802 Group and H8/38004 Group, PWCR selects the conversion period.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description



Reserved

These bits are always read as 1, and cannot be

modified.

0PWCR1

PWCR0 0

WClock Select 1, 0

00: The input clock is φ(tφ=1/φ)

The conversion period is 512/φ, with a minimum

modulation width of 1/2φ

01: The input clock is φ/2 (tφ=2/φ)

The conversion period is 1024/φ,witha

minimum modulation width of 1/φ

10: The input clock is φ/4 (tφ=4/φ)

The conversion period is 2048/φ,witha

minimum modulation width of 2/φ

11: The input clock is φ/8 (tφ=8/φ)

The conversion period is 4096/φ,witha

minimum modulation width of 4/φ

[Legend] tφ: Period of PWM clock input

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 290 of 462

Selects the PWCR output format and the conversion period on the H8/38104 Group.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description



Reserved

This bit is reserved. It is always read as 1 and cannot

be written to.

2 PWCR2 0 W Output Format Select

0: 10-bit PWM

1: Event counter PWM (PWM incorporating AEC)

0PWCR1

PWCR0 0

WClock Select 1, 0

00:The input clock is φ(tφ=1/φ)

— The conversion period is 512/φ, with a minimum

modulation width of 1/2φ

01:The input clock is φ/2 (tφ=2/φ)

— The conversion period is 1,024/φ,witha

minimum modulation width of 1/φ

10:The input clock is φ/4 (tφ=4/φ)

— The conversion period is 2,048/φ,witha

minimum modulation width of 2/φ

11:The input clock is φ/8 (tφ=8/φ)

— The conversion period is 4,096/φ,witha

minimum modulation width of 4/φ

[Legend] tφ: Period of PWM clock input

11.3.2 PWM Data Registers U and L (PWDRU, PWDRL)

PWDRU and PWDRL indicate high level width in one PWM waveform cycle. PWDRU and

PWDRL are 10-bit write-only registers, with the upper 2 bits assigned to PWDRU and the lower 8

bits to PWDRL. When read, all bits are always read as 1.

Both PWDRU and PWDRL are accessible only in bytes. Note that the operation is not guaranteed

if word access is performed. When 10-bit data is written in PWDRU and PWDRL, the contents

are latched in the PWM waveform generator and the PWM waveform generation data is updated.

When writing the 10-bit data, the order is as follows: PWDRL to PWDRU.

PWDRU and PWDRL are initialized to H'FC00.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 291 of 462

11.4 Operation

11.4.1 Operation

When using the 10-bit PWM, set the registers in this sequence:

1. Set the PWM2 and PWM1 bits in the port mode register 9 (PMR9) to set the P91/PWM2 pin

and P90/PWM1 pin to function as a PWM output pin.

2. Set the PWCR0 and PWCR1 bits in PWCR to select a conversion period of either. On the

H8/38104 Group, the output format is selected using the PWCR2 bit. Refer to section 9.4,

Asynchronous Event Counter, for information on how to select event counter PWM (PWM

incorporating AEC), one of the two available output formats.

3. Set the output waveform data in PWDRU and PWDRL. Be sure to write byte data first to

PWDRL and then to PWDRU. When the data is written in PWDRU, the contents of these

registers are latched in the PWM waveform generator, and the PWM waveform generation

data is updated in synchronization with internal signals.

One conversion period consists of four pulses, as shown in figure 11.2. The total high-level width

during this period (TH) corresponds to the data in PWDRU and PWDRL. This relation can be

expressed as follows:

TH= (data value in PWDRU and PWDRL + 4) ×tφ/2

where tφis the period of PWM clock input: 1/φ(PWCR1=0,PWCR0=0),2/φ(PWCR1 = 0,

PWCR0 = 1), 4/φ(PWCR1 = 1, PWCR0 = 0), or 8/φ(PWCR1 = 1, PWCR0 = 1).

If the data value in PWDRU and PWDRL is from H'FFFC to H'FFFF, the PWM output stays high.

When the data value is H'FC3C, THis calculated as follows:

TH=64×tφ/2 = 32 · tφ

One conversion period

= t

+ t

= t

Figure 11.2 Waveform Output by 10-Bit PWM

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 292 of 462

11.4.2 PWM Operating States

Table 11.2 shows the PWM operating states.

Table 11.2 PWM Operating States

Operating

Mode Reset Active Sleep Watch Sub-active Sub-sleep Standby Module

Standby

PWCR Reset Functions Functions Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained

PWDRU Reset Functions Functions Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained

PWDRL Reset Functions Functions Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained

ADCMS3AA_000020020900 Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 293 of 462

Section 12 A/D Converter

This LSI includes a successive approximation type 10-bit A/D converter that allows up to four

analog input channels to be selected. The block diagram of the A/D converter is shown in figure

12.1.

12.1 Features

•10-bit resolution

•Four input channels

•Conversion time: at least 12.4 µs per channel (at 5 MHz operation)/7.8 µs(at8MHz

operation)*

•Sample and hold function

•Conversion start method

Software

•Interrupt request

An A/D conversion end interrupt request (ADI) can be generated

•Use of module standby mode enables this module to be placed in standby mode independently

when not used. (For details, refer to section 5.4, Module Standby Function.)

Note: * H8/38104 Group only.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 294 of 462

Multiplexer

Internal data bus

Reference

voltage

Comparator

Control logic

ADSR

AMR

ADRRH

ADRRL

IRRAD

AN0

AN1

AN2

AN3

[Legend]

AMR

ADSR

ADRRH, L

IRRAD

: A/D mode register

: A/D start register

: A/D result registers H and L

: A/D conversion end interrupt request flag

Figure 12.1 Block Diagram of A/D Converter

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 295 of 462

12.2 Input/Output Pins

Table 12.1 shows the input pins used by the A/D converter.

Table 12.1 Pin Configuration

Pin Name Abbreviation I/O Function

Analog power supply pin AVcc Input Power supply and reference voltage of

analog part

Analog ground pin AVss Input Ground and reference voltage of analog

part

Analog input pin 0 AN0 Input

Analog input pin 1 AN1 Input

Analog input pin 2 AN2 Input

Analog input pin 3 AN3 Input

Analog input pins

12.3 Register Descriptions

The A/D converter has the following registers.

•A/D result registers H and L (ADRRH and ADRRL)

•A/D mode register (AMR)

•A/D start register (ADSR)

12.3.1 A/D Result Registers H and L (ADRRH and ADRRL)

ADRRH and ADRRL are 16-bit read-only registers that store the results of A/D conversion.

The upper 8 bits of the data are stored in ADRRH, and the lower 2 bits in ADRRL.

ADRRH and ADRRL can be read by the CPU at any time, but the ADRRH and ADRRL values

during A/D conversion are undefined. After A/D conversion is completed, the conversion result is

stored as 10-bit data, and this data is retained until the next conversion operation starts.

The initial values of ADRRH and ADRRL are undefined.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 296 of 462

12.3.2 A/D Mode Register (AMR)

AMR sets the A/D conversion time and analog input pins.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7 CKS 0 R/W Clock Select

Sets the A/D conversion time.

0: Conversion time = 62 states

1: Conversion time = 31 states

60R/WReserved

Only 0 can be written to this bit.

4

1

1

Reserved

These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified.

CH3

CH2

CH1

CH0

R/W

Channel Select 3 to 0

Selects the analog input channel.

00XX: No channel selected

0100: AN0

0101: AN1

0110: AN2

1XXX: Using prohibited

The channel selection should be made while the ADSF bit

is cleared to 0.

[Legend] X: Don't care.

12.3.3 A/D Start Register (ADSR)

ADSR starts and stops the A/D conversion.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7 ADSF 0 R/W When this bit is set to 1, A/D conversion is started. When

conversion is completed, the converted data is set in

ADRRH and ADRRL and at the same time this bit is

cleared to 0. If this bit is written to 0, A/D conversion can

be forcibly terminated.

6to0 All 1 Reserved

These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 297 of 462

12.4 Operation

The A/D converter operates by successive approximation with 10-bit resolution. When changing

the conversion time or analog input channel, in order to prevent incorrect operation, first clear the

bitADSFto0inADSR.

12.4.1 A/D Conversion

1. A/D conversion is started from the selected channel when the ADSF bit in ADSR is set to 1,

according to software.

2. When A/D conversion is completed, the result is transferred to the A/D result register.

3. On completion of conversion, the IRRAD flag in IRR2 is set to 1. If the IENAD bit in IENR2

is set to 1 at this time, an A/D conversion end interrupt request is generated.

4. The ADSF bit remains set to 1 during A/D conversion. When A/D conversion ends, the ADSF

bit is automatically cleared to 0 and the A/D converter enters the wait state.

12.4.2 Operating States of A/D Converter

Table 12.2 shows the operating states of the A/D converter.

Table 12.2 Operating States of A/D Converter

Operating

Mode Reset Active Sleep Watch Sub-active Sub-sleep Standby Module

Standby

AMR Reset Functions Functions Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained

ADSR Reset Functions Functions Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset

ADRRH Retained*Functions Functions Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained

ADRRL Retained*Functions Functions Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained

Note: *Undefined in a power-on reset.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 298 of 462

12.5 Example of Use

An example of how the A/D converter can be used is given below, using channel 1 (pin AN1) as

the analog input channel. Figure 12.2 shows the operation timing.

1. Bits CH3 to CH0 in the A/D mode register (AMR) are set to 0101, making pin AN1 the

analog input channel. A/D interrupts are enabled by setting bit IENAD to 1, and A/D

conversion is started by setting bit ADSF to 1.

2. When A/D conversion is completed, bit IRRAD is set to 1, and the A/D conversion result is

stored in ADRRH and ADRRL. At the same time bit ADSF is cleared to 0, and the A/D

converter goes to the idle state.

3. Bit IENAD = 1, so an A/D conversion end interrupt is requested.

4. The A/D interrupt handling routine starts.

5. The A/D conversion result is read and processed.

6. The A/D interrupt handling routine ends.

If bit ADSF is set to 1 again afterward, A/D conversion starts and steps 2 through 6 take place.

Figures 12.3 and 12.4 show flowcharts of procedures for using the A/D converter.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 299 of 462

Interrupt (IRRAD)

IENAD

ADSF

ADRRH

ADRRL

Channel 1 (AN1)

operating state

Note: * indicates instruction execution by software.

Set*

A/D conversion starts

Idle Idle Idle

A/D conversion (1) A/D conversion (2)

Set*

A/D conversion result (1) Read conversion result

A/D conversion result (2)

↓

Read conversion result

↓

Figure 12.2 Example of A/D Conversion Operation

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 300 of 462

Start

Set A/D conversion speed and input channel

Disable A/D conversion end interrupt

Start A/D conversion

Perform A/D conversion?

End

Read ADSR

ADSF = 0?

Read ADRRH/ADRRL data

Yes

Figure 12.3 Flowchart of Procedure for Using A/D Converter (Polling by Software)

Set A/D conversion speed and input channel

Start

Enable A/D conversion end interrupt

Start A/D conversion

Clear IRRAD bit in IRR2 to 0

Read ADRRH/ADRRL data

A/D conversion end

interrupt generated?

Perform A/D conversion?

End

Yes

Figure 12.4 Flowchart of Procedure for Using A/D Converter (Interrupts Used)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 301 of 462

12.6 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions

This LSI's A/D conversion accuracy definitions are given below.

•Resolution

The number of A/D converter digital output codes

•Quantization error

The deviation inherent in the A/D converter, given by 1/2 LSB (see figure 12.5).

•Offset error

The deviation of the analog input voltage value from the ideal A/D conversion characteristic

when the digital output changes from the minimum voltage value 0000000000 to 0000000001

(see figure 12.6).

•Full-scale error

The deviation of the analog input voltage value from the ideal A/D conversion characteristic

when the digital output changes from 1111111110 to 1111111111 (see figure 12.6).

•Nonlinearity error

The error with respect to the ideal A/D conversion characteristics between zero voltage and

full-scale voltage. Does not include offset error, full-scale error, or quantization error.

•Absolute accuracy

The deviation between the digital value and the analog input value. Includes offset error, full-

scale error, quantization error, and nonlinearity error.

111

110

101

100

011

010

001

000 1

8FS

Quantization error

Digital output

Ideal A/D conversion

characteristic

Analog

input voltage

Figure 12.5 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions (1)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 302 of 462

Digital output

Ideal A/D conversion

characteristic

Nonlinearity

error

Analog

input voltage

Offset error

Actual A/D conversion

characteristic

Full-scale error

Figure 12.6 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions (2)

12.7 Usage Notes

12.7.1 Permissible Signal Source Impedance

This LSI's analog input is designed such that conversion accuracy is guaranteed for an input signal

for which the signal source impedance is 10 kΩor less. This specification is provided to enable

the A/D converter's sample-and-hold circuit input capacitance to be charged within the sampling

time; if the sensor output impedance exceeds 10 kΩ, charging may be insufficient and it may not

be possible to guarantee A/D conversion accuracy. However, with a large capacitance provided

externally, the input load will essentially comprise only the internal input resistance of 10 kΩ,and

the signal source impedance is ignored. However, as a low-pass filter effect is obtained in this

case, it may not be possible to follow an analog signal with a large differential coefficient (e.g., 5

mV/µs or greater) (see figure 12.7). When converting a high-speed analog signal, a low-

impedance buffer should be inserted.

12.7.2 Influences on Absolute Accuracy

Adding capacitance results in coupling with GND, and therefore noise in GND may adversely

affect absolute accuracy. Be sure to make the connection to an electrically stable GND.

Care is also required to ensure that filter circuits do not interfere with digital signals or act as

antennas on the mounting board.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 303 of 462

20 pF

10 kΩ

15 pF

Sensor output

impedance

to 10 kΩ

This LSI

Low-pass

filter

C to 0.1 µF

Sensor input

A/D converter

equivalent circuit

Figure 12.7 Example of Analog Input Circuit

12.7.3 Usage Notes

1. ADRRH and ADRRL should be read only when the ADSF bit in ADSR is cleared to 0.

2. Changing the digital input signal at an adjacent pin during A/D conversion may adversely

affect conversion accuracy.

3. When A/D conversion is started after clearing module standby mode, wait for 10φclock

cycles before starting A/D conversion.

4. In active mode and sleep mode, the analog power supply current flows in the ladder resistance

even when the A/D converter is on standby. Therefore, if the A/D converter is not used, it is

recommended that AVcc be connected to the system power supply and the ADCKSTP bit be

cleared to 0 in CKSTPR1.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 304 of 462

LCDSG02A_000020020900 Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 305 of 462

Section 13 LCD Controller/Driver

This LSI has an on-chip segment-type LCD control circuit, LCD driver, and power supply circuit,

enabling it to directly drive an LCD panel.

13.1 Features

•Display capacity

Duty Cycle Internal Driver

Static 25 SEG

1/2 25 SEG

1/3 25 SEG

1/4 25 SEG

•LCD RAM capacity

8 bits ×13 bytes (104 bits)

•Word access to LCD RAM

The segment output pins can be used as ports.

SEG24 to SEG1 pins can be used as ports in groups of four.

•Common output pins not used because of the duty cycle can be used for common double-

buffering (parallel connection).

With1/2duty,parallelconnectionofCOM1toCOM2,andofCOM3toCOM4,canbeused

In static mode, parallel connection of COM1 to COM2, COM3, and COM4 can be used

•Choice of 11 frame frequencies

•A or B waveform selectable by software

•Removal of split-resistance can be controlled in software. Note that this capability is

implemented in the H8/38104 Group only.

•On-chip power supply split-resistance

•Display possible in operating modes other than standby mode

•Use of module standby mode enables this module to be placed in standby mode independently

when not used. (For details, refer to section 5.4, Module Standby Function.)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 306 of 462

Figures 13.1(1) and 13.1(2) show a block diagram of the LCD controller/driver.

φ/2 to φ/256

φw

SEGn

LPCR

LCR

LCR2

Display timing generator

LCD RAM

13 bytes

Internal data bus

25-bit

shift

LCD drive

power supply

Segment

driver

Common

data latch Common

driver

Vss

COM1

COM4

SEG25

SEG24

SEG23

SEG22

SEG21

SEG1

[Legend]

LPCR: LCD port control register

LCR: LCD control register

LCR2: LCD control register 2

Vcc

Figure 13.1(1) Block Diagram of LCD Controller/Driver

(H8/3802 Group, H8/38004 Group)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 307 of 462

φ/2 to φ/256

φw

SEGn

LPCR

LCR

LCR2

Display timing generator

LCD RAM

13 bytes

Internal data bus

25-bit

shift

LCD drive

power supply

Segment

driver

Common

data latch Common

driver

Vss

COM1

COM4

SEG25

SEG24

SEG23

SEG22

SEG21

SEG1

[Legend]

LPCR: LCD port control register

LCR: LCD control register

LCR2: LCD control register 2

Vcc

Figure 13.1(2) Block Diagram of LCD Controller/Driver

(H8/38104 Group)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 308 of 462

13.2 Input/Output Pins

Table 13.1 shows the LCD controller/driver pin configuration.

Table 13.1 Pin Configuration

Name Abbreviation I/O Function

Segment output

pins SEG25 to SEG1 Output LCD segment drive pins

All pins are multiplexed as port pins (setting

programmable)

Common output

pins COM4 to COM1 Output LCD common drive pins

Pinscanbeusedinparallelwithstaticor

1/2 duty

LCD power supply

pins V1, V2, V3 — Used when a bypass capacitor is connected

externally, and when an external power supply

circuit is used

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 309 of 462

13.3 Register Descriptions

The LCD controller/driver has the following registers.

•LCD port control register (LPCR)

•LCD control register (LCR)

•LCD control register 2 (LCR2)

•LCD RAM

13.3.1 LCD Port Control Register (LPCR)

LPCR selects the duty cycle, LCD driver, and pin functions.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

DTS1

DTS0

CMX

R/W

Duty Cycle Select 1 and 0

CommonFunctionSelect

The combination of DTS1 and DTS0 selects static, 1/2,

1/3, or 1/4 duty.

CMX specifies whether or not the same waveform is to be

output from multiple pins to increase the common drive

power when not all common pins are used because of the

duty setting.

For details, see table 13.2.

4— — WReserved

Only 0 can be written to this bit.

SGS3

SGS2

SGS1

SGS0

R/W

Segment Driver Select 3 to 0

Select the segment drivers to be used.

For details, see table 13.3.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 310 of 462

Table 13.2 Duty Cycle and Common Function Selection

Bit 7:

DTS1 Bit 6:

DTS0 Bit 5:

CMX Duty Cycle Common Drivers Notes

0 0 0 Static COM1 Do not use COM4, COM3, and COM2

1 COM4 to COM1 COM4, COM3, and COM2 output the

same waveform as COM1

1 0 1/2 duty COM2 to COM1 Do not use COM4 and COM3

1 COM4 to COM1 COM4 outputs the same waveform as

COM3, and COM2 outputs the same

waveform as COM1

1 0 0 1/3 duty COM3 to COM1 Do not use COM4

1 COM4toCOM1 DonotuseCOM4

1 X 1/4duty COM4toCOM1 —

[Legend]

X: Don’t care

Table 13.3 Segment Driver Selection

Function of Pins SEG25 to SEG1

Bit 3:

SGS3 Bit 2:

SGS2 Bit 1:

SGS1 Bit 0:

SGS0 SEG25 SEG24to

SEG21 SEG20to

SEG17 SEG16to

SEG13 SEG12to

SEG9 SEG8to

SEG5 SEG4to

SEG1

0 0 0 0 Port Port Port Port Port Port Port

1 Port Port Port Port Port Port SEG

1 0 Port Port Port Port Port SEG SEG

1 Port Port Port Port SEG SEG SEG

1 0 0 Port Port Port SEG SEG SEG SEG

1 Port Port SEG SEG SEG SEG SEG

1 0 Port SEG SEG SEG SEG SEG SEG

1 SEG SEG SEG SEG SEG SEG SEG

1 0 0 0 SEG SEG SEG SEG SEG SEG SEG

1 SEG SEG SEG SEG SEG SEG Port

1 0 SEG SEG SEG SEG SEG Port Port

1 SEG SEG SEG SEG Port Port Port

1 0 0 SEG SEG SEG Port Port Port Port

1 SEG SEG Port Port Port Port Port

1 0 SEG Port Port Port Port Port Port

1 Port Port Port Port Port Port Port

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 311 of 462

13.3.2 LCD Control Register (LCR)

LCR controls LCD drive power supply and display data, and selects the frame frequency.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7— 1 —Reserved

This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.

6 PSW 0 R/W LCD Drive Power Supply Control

Can be used to disconnect the LCD drive power supply

from Vcc when LCD display is not required in power-

down mode, or when an external power supply is used.

When the ACT bit is cleared to 0, and also in standby

mode, the LCD drive power supply is disconnected from

Vcc regardless of the setting of this bit.

0: LCD drive power supply is disconnected from Vcc

1: LCD drive power supply is connected to Vcc

5 ACT 0 R/W Display Function Activate

Specifies whether or not the LCD controller/driver is used.

Clearing this bit to 0 halts operation of the LCD

controller/driver. The LCD drive power supply is also

turned off, regardless of the setting of the PSW bit.

However, register contents are retained.

0: LCD controller/driver operation halted

1: LCD controller/driver operation enabled

4 DISP 0 R/W Display Data Control

Specifies whether the LCD RAM contents are displayed

or blank data is displayed regardless of the LCD RAM

contents.

0: Blank data is displayed

1: LCD RAM data is displayed

CKS3

CKS2

CKS1

CKS0

R/W

Frame Frequency Select 3 to 0

Select the operating clock and the frame frequency. In

subactive mode, watch mode, and subsleep mode, the

system clock (φ) is halted, and therefore display

operations are not performed if one of the clocks from φ/2

to φ/256 is selected. If LCD display is required in these

modes, φW,φW/2, or φW/4 must be selected as the

operating clock.

For details, see table 13.4.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 312 of 462

Table 13.4 Frame Frequency Selection

Bit 3: Bit 2: Bit 1: Bit 0: Frame Frequency*1

CKS3 CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 Operating Clock φ

φ φ

φ =2MHz φ

φ φ

φ = 250 kHz*3

0X00φW128 Hz*2128 Hz*2

1φW/2 64 Hz*264 Hz*2

1XφW/4 32 Hz*232 Hz*2

1000φ/2 — 244 Hz

1φ/4 977 Hz 122 Hz

10φ/8 488 Hz 61 Hz

1φ/16 244 Hz 30.5 Hz

100φ/32 122 Hz —

1φ/64 61 Hz —

10φ/128 30.5 Hz —

1φ/256 — —

[Legend]

X: Don’t care

Notes: 1. When 1/3 duty is selected, the frame frequency is 4/3 times the value shown.

2. This is the frame frequency when φW= 32.768 kHz.

3. This is the frame frequency in active (medium-speed, φOSC/16) mode when φ=2MHz.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 313 of 462

13.3.3 LCD Control Register 2 (LCR2)

LCR2 controls switching between the A waveform and B waveform and removal of split-

resistance. Note that removal of split-resistance control is only implemented on the H8/38104

Group.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7 LCDAB 0 R/W A Waveform/B Waveform Switching Control

Bit 7 specifies whether the A waveform or B waveform is

used as the LCD drive waveform.

0: Drive using A waveform

1: Drive using B waveform

6, 5 — All 1 — Reserved

These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified.

4— — WReserved

This bit is always read as 0.

3to0

*CDS3

CDS2

CDS1

CDS0

All 0 R/W Removal of Split-Resistance Control

These bits control whether the split-resistance is removed

or connected.

CDS3 = 0, CDS2 = CDS1 = CDS0 = 1: Split-resistance

removed

All other settings: Split-resistance connected

Note: *Applies to H8/38104 Group only. On the H8/3802 Group or H8/38004 Group, these bits

arereservedlikebit4.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 314 of 462

13.4 Operation

13.4.1 Settings up to LCD Display

To perform LCD display, the hardware and software related items described below must first be

determined.

1. Hardware Settings

A. Using 1/2 duty

When 1/2 duty is used, interconnect pins V2 and V3 as shown in figure 13.2.

VCC

VSS

Figure 13.2 Handling of LCD Drive Power Supply when Using 1/2 Duty

B. Large-panel display

As the impedance of the on-chip power supply split-resistance is large, it may not be

suitable for driving a large panel. If the display lacks sharpness when using a large panel,

refer to section 13.4.4, Boosting LCD Drive Power Supply. When static or 1/2 duty is

selected, the common output drive capability can be increased. Set CMX to 1 when

selecting the duty cycle. In this mode, with a static duty cycle pins COM4 to COM1 output

the same waveform, and with 1/2 duty the COM1 waveform is output from pins COM2 and

COM1, and the COM2 waveform is output from pins COM4 and COM3.

C. LCD drive power supply setting

With this LSI, there are two ways of providing LCD power: by using the on-chip power

supply circuit, or by using an external power supply circuit.

When an external power supply circuit is used for the LCD drive power supply, connect the

external power supply to the V1 pin.

2. Software Settings

A. Duty selection

Any of four duty cycles—static, 1/2 duty, 1/3 duty, or 1/4 duty—can be selected with bits

DTS1 and DTS0.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 315 of 462

B. Segment selection

The segment drivers to be used can be selected with bits SGS3 to SGS0.

C. Frame frequency selection

The frame frequency can be selected by setting bits CKS3 to CKS0. The frame frequency

should be selected in accordance with the LCD panel specification. For the clock selection

method in watch mode, subactive mode, and subsleep mode, see section 13.4.3, Operation

in Power-Down Modes.

D. A or B waveform selection

Either the A or B waveform can be selected as the LCD waveform to be used by means of

LCDAB.

E. LCD drive power supply selection

When an external power supply circuit is used, turn the LCD drive power supply off with

the PSW bit.

13.4.2 Relationship between LCD RAM and Display

The relationship between the LCD RAM and the display segments differs according to the duty

cycle. LCD RAM maps for the different duty cycles are shown in figures 13.3 to 13.6.

After setting the registers required for display, data is written to the part corresponding to the duty

using the same kind of instruction as for ordinary RAM, and display is started automatically when

turned on. Word- or byte-access instructions can be used for RAM setting.

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

H'F74C

H'F740

SEG25 SEG25 SEG25 SEG25

SEG2 SEG2 SEG2 SEG2 SEG1 SEG1 SEG1 SEG1

COM4 COM3 COM2 COM1 COM4 COM3 COM2 COM1

Figure 13.3 LCD RAM Map (1/4 Duty)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 316 of 462

H'F74C

H'F740

SEG25 SEG25 SEG25

SEG2 SEG2 SEG2 SEG1 SEG1 SEG1

COM3

Space not used for display

COM2 COM1 COM3 COM2 COM1

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Figure 13.4 LCD RAM Map (1/3 Duty)

H'F74C

H'F740

H'F746 SEG25 SEG25

SEG4 SEG4 SEG3 SEG3 SEG2 SEG2 SEG1 SEG1

Display space

Space not used

for display

COM2 COM1 COM2 COM1 COM2 COM1 COM2 COM1

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Figure 13.5 LCD RAM Map (1/2 Duty)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 317 of 462

H'F74C

H'F740

H'F743 SEG25

Display space

Space not used

for display

SEG8 SEG7 SEG6 SEG5 SEG4 SEG3 SEG2 SEG1

COM1 COM1 COM1 COM1 COM1 COM1 COM1 COM1

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Figure 13.6 LCD RAM Map (Static Mode)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 318 of 462

Data

(a) Waveform with 1/4 duty

(d) Waveform with static output

M: LCD alternation signal

(b) Waveform with 1/3 duty

COM1

COM2

COM3

COM4

SEGn

Data

COM1

COM2

SEGn

Data

COM1

SEGn

Data

1 frame 1 frame

COM1

VSS

V2,V3

VSS

V2,V3

VSS

V2,V3

VSS

COM2

COM3

SEGn

Figure 13.7 Output Waveforms for Each Duty Cycle (A Waveform)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 319 of 462

M: LCD alternation signal

Data

(a) Waveform with 1/4 duty

(d) Waveform with static output

(b) Waveform with 1/3 duty

COM1

COM2

COM3

COM4

SEGn

Data

COM1

COM2

SEGn

Data

COM1

SEGn

Data

1 frame 1 frame 1 frame 1 frame 1 frame 1 frame 1 frame 1 frame

COM1

VSS

V2,V3

VSS

V2,V3

VSS

V2,V3

VSS

COM2

COM3

SEGn

Figure 13.8 Output Waveforms for Each Duty Cycle (B Waveform)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 320 of 462

Table 13.5 Output Levels

Data 0011

M 0101

Static Common output V1 VSS V1 VSS

Segment output V1 VSS VSS V1

1/2 duty Common output V2, V3 V2, V3 V1 VSS

Segment output V1 VSS VSS V1

1/3 duty Common output V3 V2 V1 VSS

Segment output V2 V3 VSS V1

1/4 duty Common output V3 V2 V1 VSS

Segment output V2 V3 VSS V1

M: LCD alternation signal

13.4.3 Operation in Power-Down Modes

In this LSI, the LCD controller/driver can be operated even in the power-down modes. The

operating state of the LCD controller/driver in the power-down modes is summarized in table

13.6.

In subactive mode, watch mode, and subsleep mode, the system clock oscillator stops, and

therefore, unless φW,φW/2, or φW/4 has been selected by bits CKS3 to CKS0, the clock will not be

supplied and display will halt. Since there is a possibility that a direct current will be applied to the

LCD panel in this case, it is essential to ensure that φW,φW/2, or φW/4 is selected.

In active (medium-speed) mode, the system clock is switched, and therefore bits CKS3 to CKS0

must be modified to ensure that the frame frequency does not change.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 321 of 462

Table 13.6 Power-Down Modes and Display Operation

Mode Reset Active Sleep Watch Subactive Subsleep Standby Module

Standby

Clock φRuns Runs Runs Stops Stops Stops Stops Stops*4

φwRuns Runs Runs Runs Runs Runs Stops*1Stops*4

Display ACT = 0 Stops Stops Stops Stops Stops Stops Stops*2Stops

operation ACT = 1 Stops Functions Functions Functions*3Functions*3Functions*3Stops*2Stops

Notes: 1. The subclock oscillator does not stop, but clock supply is halted.

2. The LCD drive power supply is turned off regardless of the setting of the PSW bit.

3. Display operation is performed only if φW,φW/2, or φW/4 is selected as the operating

clock.

4. The clock supplied to the LCD stops.

13.4.4 Boosting LCD Drive Power Supply

When the on-chip power supply capacity is insufficient for the LCD panel drivability, the power-

supply impedance must be reduced. This can be done by connecting bypass capacitors of around

0.1 to 0.3 µF to pins V1 to V3, as shown in figure 13.9, or by adding a split-resistor externally.

This LSI

R =

C = 0.1 to 0.3 µF

several kΩ to

several MΩ

Figure 13.9 Connection of External Split-Resistance

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 322 of 462

LVI0000A_000020030300 Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 323 of 462

Section 14 Power-On Reset and Low-Voltage Detection

Circuits (H8/38104 Group Only)

This LSI can include a power-on reset circuit.

The low-voltage detection circuit consists of two circuits: LVDI (interrupt by low voltage detect)

and LVDR (reset by low voltage detect) circuits.

This circuit is used to prevent abnormal operation (runaway execution) from occurring due to the

power supply voltage fall and to recreate the state before the power supply voltage fall when the

power supply voltage rises again.

Even if the power supply voltage falls, the unstable state when the power supply voltage falls

below the guaranteed operating voltage can be removed by entering standby mode when

exceeding the guaranteed operating voltage and during normal operation. Thus, system stability

can be improved. If the power supply voltage falls more, the reset state is automatically entered. If

the power supply voltage rises again, the reset state is held for a specified period, then active mode

is automatically entered.

Figure 14.1 is a block diagram of the power-on reset circuit and the low-voltage detection circuit.

14.1 Features

•Power-on reset circuit

Uses an external capacitor to generate an internal reset signal when power is first supplied.

•Low-voltage detection circuit

LVDR: Monitors the power-supply voltage, and generates an internal reset signal when the

voltage falls below a specified value.

LVDI: Monitors the power-supply voltage, and generates an interrupt when the voltage falls

below or rises above respective specified values.

Two pairs of detection levels for reset generation voltage are available: when only the LVDR

circuit is used, or when the LVDI and LVDR circuits are both used.

In addition, power supply rise/drop detection voltages and a detection voltage reference

voltage may be input from an external source, allowing the detection level to be set freely by

the user.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 324 of 462

PSS:

LVDCR:

LVDSR:

LVDRES:

LVDINT:

Vreset:

Vint:

extD:

extU:

Vref:

Prescaler S

Low-voltage-detection control register

Low-voltage-detection status register

Low-voltage-detection reset signal

Low-voltage-detection interrupt signal

Reset detection voltage

Power-supply fall/rise detection voltage

Power supply drop detection voltage input pin

Power supply rise detection voltage input pin

Reference voltage input pin

RES

φCK

RPSS

Vcc

OVF

Vreset

Vref

extU

extD

Vint

External

reference voltage

generator

On-chip

reference voltage

generator

[Legend]

LVDRES

Interrupt

control

circuit

LVDCR

LVDSR

Internal reset

signal

Power-on reset circuit

Low-voltage detection circuit

Interrupt

request

LVDINT

Noise

canceler

Noise

canceler

−

Ladder

resistor

External

ladder

resistor

External

power

supply

Internal data bus

Figure 14.1 Block Diagram of Power-On Reset Circuit and Low-Voltage Detection Circuit

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 325 of 462

14.2 Register Descriptions

The low-voltage detection circuit has the following registers.

•Low-voltage-detection control register (LVDCR)

•Low-voltage-detection status register (LVDSR)

•Low-voltage detection counter (LVDCNT)

14.2.1 Low-Voltage Detection Control Register (LVDCR)

LVDCR is used to control whether or not the low-voltage detection circuit is used, settings for

external input of power supply drop and rise detection voltages, the LVDR detection level setting,

enabling or disabling of resets triggered by the low-voltage detection reset circuit (LVDR), and

enabling or disabling of interrupts triggered by power supply voltage drops or rises.

Table 14.1 shows the relationship between LVDCR settings and function selections. Refer to table

14.1 when making settings to LVDCR.

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7LVDE 0

*R/W LVD Enable

0: Low-voltage detection circuit not used (standby status)

1: Low-voltage detection circuit used

60 R/W This bit is reserved.

5 VINTDSEL 0 R/W Power Supply Drop (LVDD) Detection Level External

Input Select

0: LVDD detection level generated by on-chip ladder

resistor

1: LVDD detection level input to extD pin

4 VINTUSEL 0 R/W Power Supply Rise (LVDU) Detection Level External

Input Select

0: LVDU detection level generated by on-chip ladder

resistor

1: LVDU detection level input to extU pin

3 LVDSEL 0*R/W LVDR Detection Level Select

0: Reset detection voltage 2.3 V (typ.)

1: Reset detection voltage 3.3 V (typ.)

Select 2.3 V (typical) reset if voltage rise and drop

detection interrupts are to be used. For reset detection

only, Select 3.3 V (typical) reset.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 326 of 462

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

2 LVDRE 0*R/W LVDR Enable

0: LVDR resets disabled

1: LVDR resets enabled

1 LVDDE 0 R/W Voltage Drop Interrupt Enable

0: Voltage drop interrupt requests disabled

1: Voltage drop interrupt requests enabled

0 LVDUE 0 R/W Voltage Rise Interrupt Enable

0: Voltage rise interrupt requests disabled

1: Voltage rise interrupt requests enabled

Note: *These bits are not initialized by resets trigged by LVDR. They are initialized by power-on

resets and watchdog timer resets.

Table 14.1 LVDCR Settings and Select Functions

LVDCR Settings Select Functions

LVDE LVDSEL LVDRE LVDDE LVDUE Power-On

Reset LVDR

Low-Voltage-

Detection

Falling

Interrupt

Low-Voltage-

Detection

Rising

Interrupt

0****O 

11 10 0 O O

10 01 0 O O

10 01 1 O OO

10 11 1 O OO O

[Legend] *means invalid.

14.2.2 Low-Voltage Detection Status Register (LVDSR)

LVDSR is used to control external input selection, indicates when the reference voltage is stable,

and indicates if the power supply voltage goes below or above a specified range.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 327 of 462

Bit Bit Name Initial

Value R/W Description

7OVF0

*R/W LVD Reference Voltage Stabilized Flag

Setting condition:

When the low-voltage detection counter (LVDCNT)

overflows

Clearing condition:

When 0 is written after reading 1

6to4 0 R/W These are read/write enabled reserved bits.

3 VREFSEL 0 R/W Reference Voltage External Input Select

0: The on-chip circuit is used to generate the reference

voltage

1: The reference voltage is input to the Vref pin from an

external source

20 R/W This bit is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be

written to.

1 LVDDF 0*R/W LVD Power Supply Voltage Drop Flag

Setting condition:

When the power supply voltage drops below Vint(D)

Clearing condition:

When 0 is written after reading 1

0 LVDUF 0*R/W LVD Power Supply Voltage Rise Flag

Setting condition:

When the power supply voltage drops below Vint(D) while

the LVDUE bit in LVDCR is set to 1, and it rises above

Vint(U) before dropping below Vreset1

Clearing condition:

When 0 is written after reading 1

Note: *These bits are initialized by resets trigged by LVDR.

14.2.3 Low-Voltage Detection Counter (LVDCNT)

LVDCNT is a read-only 8-bit up-counter. Counting begins when 1 is written to LVDE. The

counter increments using φ/4 as the clock source until it overflows by switching from H'FF to

H'00, at which time the OVF bit in the LVDSR register is set to 1, indicating that the on-chip

reference voltage generator has stabilized. If the LVD function is used, it is necessary to stand by

until the counter has overflowed. The initial value of LVDCNT is H'00.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 328 of 462

14.3 Operation

14.3.1 Power-On Reset Circuit

Figure 14.2 shows the timing of the operation of the power-on reset circuit. As the power-supply

voltage rises, the capacitor which is externally connected to the RES pin is gradually charged via

the on-chip pull-up resistor (typ. 100 kΩ). Since the state of the RES pin is transmitted within the

chip, the prescaler S and the entire chip are in their reset states. When the level on the RES pin

reaches the specified value, the prescaler S is released from its reset state and it starts counting.

The OVF signal is generated to release the internal reset signal after the prescaler S has counted

131,072 clock (φ) cycles. The noise cancellation circuit of approximately 100 ns is incorporated to

prevent the incorrect operation of the chip by noise on the RES pin.

To achieve stable operation of this LSI, the power supply needs to rise to its full level and settles

within the specified time. The maximum time required for the power supply to rise and settle after

power has been supplied (tPWON) is determined by the oscillation frequency (fOSC) and capacitance

which is connected to RES pin (CRES). If tPWON means the time required to reach 90 %of power

supply voltage, the power supply circuit should be designed to satisfy the following formula.

tPWON (ms) ≤80 ×CRES (µF) ±10/fOSC (MHz)

(tPWON ≤3000 ms, CRES ≥0.22 µF, and fOSC = 10 in 2-MHz to 10-MHz operation)

Note that the power supply voltage (Vcc) must fall below Vpor = 100 mV and rise after charge on

the RES pinisremoved.ToremovechargeontheRES pin, it is recommended that the diode

should be placed near Vcc. If the power supply voltage (Vcc) rises from the point above Vpor, a

power-on reset may not occur.

Vcc

PSS-reset

signal

Internal reset

signal

Vss

OVF

131,072 cycles

PSS counter starts Reset released

PWON

Vpor

Figure 14.2 Operational Timing of Power-On Reset Circuit

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 329 of 462

14.3.2 Low-Voltage Detection Circuit

LVDR (Reset by Low Voltage Detect) Circuit:

Figure 14.3 shows the timing of the LVDR function. The LVDR enters the module-standby state

after a power-on reset is canceled. To operate the LVDR, set the LVDE bit in LVDCR to 1, wait

for 100 µs(t

LVDON) until the reference voltage and the low-voltage-detection power supply have

stabilized, based on overflow of LVDCNT, then set the LVDRE bit in LVDCR to 1. After that, the

output settings of ports must be made. To cancel the low-voltage detection circuit, first the

LVDRE bit should be cleared to 0 and then the LVDE bit should be cleared to 0. The LVDE and

LVDRE bits must not be cleared to 0 simultaneously because incorrect operation may occur.

When the power-supply voltage falls below the Vreset voltage (typ. = 2.3 V or 3.3 V), the LVDR

clears the LVDRES signal to 0, and resets the prescaler S. The low-voltage detection reset state

remains in place until a power-on reset is generated. When the power-supply voltage rises above

the Vreset voltage again, the prescaler S starts counting. It counts 131,072 clock (φ)cycles,and

then releases the internal reset signal. In this case, the LVDE, LVDSEL, and LVDRE bits in

LVDCR are not initialized.

Note that if the power supply voltage (Vcc) falls below VLVDRmin = 1.0 V and then rises from that

point, the low-voltage detection reset may not occur.

If the power supply voltage (Vcc) falls below Vpor = 100 mV, a power-on reset occurs.

VCC Vreset

VSS

VLVDRmin

OVF

PSS-reset

signal

Internal reset

signal 131,072 cycles

PSS counter starts Reset released

Figure 14.3 Operational Timing of LVDR Circuit

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 330 of 462

LVDI (Interrupt by Low Voltage Detect) Circuit:

Figure 14.4 shows the timing of LVDI functions. The LVDI enters the module-standby state after

a power-on reset is canceled. To operate the LVDI, set the LVDE bit in LVDCR to 1, wait for 100

µs(t

LVDON) until the reference voltage and the low-voltage-detection power supply have stabilized,

based on overflow of LVDNT, then set the LVDDE and LVDUE bits in LVDCR to 1. After that,

the output settings of ports must be made. To cancel the low-voltage detection circuit, first the

LVDDE and LVDUE bits should all be cleared to 0 and then the LVDE bit should be cleared to 0.

The LVDE bit must not be cleared to 0 at the same timing as the LVDDE and LVDUE bits

because incorrect operation may occur.

When the power-supply voltage falls below Vint (D) (typ. = 3.7 V) voltage, the LVDI clears the

LVDINT signal to 0 and the LVDDF bit in LVDSR is set to 1. If the LVDDE bit is 1 at this time,

an IRQ0 interrupt request is simultaneously generated. In this case, the necessary data must be

saved in the external EEPROM, etc, and a transition must be made to standby mode, watch mode,

or subsleep mode. Until this processing is completed, the power supply voltage must be higher

than the lower limit of the guaranteed operating voltage.

When the power-supply voltage does not fall below Vreset1 (typ. = 2.3 V) voltage but rises above

Vint (U) (typ. = 4.0 V) voltage, the LVDI sets the LVDINT signal to 1. If the LVDUE bit is 1 at

this time, the LVDUF bit in LVDSR is set to 1 and an IRQ0 interrupt request is simultaneously

generated.

If the power supply voltage (Vcc) falls below Vreset1 (typ. = 2.3 V) voltage, the LVDR function

is performed.

Vcc Vint (D)

Vint (U)

VSS

LVDDF

LVDUE

LVDUF

IRQ0 interrupt generated IRQ0 interrupt generated

LVDDE

Vreset1

Figure 14.4 Operational Timing of LVDI Circuit

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 331 of 462

The reference voltage, power supply voltage drop detection level, and power supply voltage rise

detection level can be input to the LSI from external sources via the Vref, extD, and extU pins.

Figure 14.5 shows the operational timing using input from the Vref, extD, and extU pins.

First, make sure that the voltages input to pins extD and extU are set to higher levels than the

interrupt detection voltage Vexd. After initial settings are made, a power supply drop interrupt is

generated if the extD input voltage drops below Vexd. After a power supply drop interrupt is

generated, if the external power supply voltage rises and the extU input voltage rises higher than

Vexd, a power supply rise interrupt is generated. As with the on-chip circuit, the above function

should be used in conjunction with LVDR (Vreset1) when the LVDI function is used.

LVDINTD

extD input voltage

extU input voltage

Vreset1

Vexd

(4)

(3)

(2)

(1)

VSS

LVDINTU

LVDDF

IRQ0 interrupt

generated

IRQ0 interrupt

generated

LVDUF

External power

supply voltage

Figure 14.5 Operational Timing of Low-Voltage Detection Interrupt Circuit

(Using Pins Vref, extD, and extU)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 332 of 462

Figure 14.6 shows a usage example for the LVD function employing pins Vref, extD, and extU.

Setting conditions:

• Vref = 1.3 V external input (This Vref value results in a Vreset value of 2.5 V.)

• Power supply drop detection voltage input of 2.7 V from extD

• Power supply rise detection voltage input of 2.9 V from extU

• 1 MΩ variable resistor connected externally

Vref

extU

extD

R1 =

517 kΩ

R2 =

33 kΩ

R3 =

450 kΩ

External reference

voltage 1.3 V

On-chip reference

voltage generator

LVDRES

Interrupt

controller

LVDCR

LVDSR

Interrupt

request

LVDINT

−

On-chip

ladder

resistor

External power

supply voltage

U1 U2

Figure 14.6 LVD Function Usage Example Employing Pins Vref, extD, and extU

Below is an explanation of the method for calculating the external resistor values when using the

Vref, extD, and extU pins for input of reference and detection voltages from sources external to

the LSI.

Procedure:

1. First, determine the overall resistance value, R. The current consumed by the resistor is

determined by the value of R. A lower R will result in a greater current flow, and a higher R

will result in a reduced current flow. The value of R is dependent on the configuration of the

system in which the LSI is installed.

2. Determine the power supply drop detection voltage (Vint(D) and the power supply rise

detection voltage (Vint(U).

3. Using a resistance value calculation table like the one shown below, plug in values for R,

Vreset1, Vint(D), and Vint(U) to calculate the values of Vref, R1, R2, and R3.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 333 of 462

Resistance Value Calculation Table

Ex. No Vref (V) R (kΩ

ΩΩ

Ω) Vreset1 Vint(D) Vint(U) R1 (kΩ

ΩΩ

Ω)R2(kΩ

ΩΩ

Ω)R3(kΩ

ΩΩ

Ω)

1 1.30 1000 2.5 2.7 2.9 517 33 450

2 1.41 1000 2.7 2.9 3 514 16 470

3 1.57 1000 3 3.2 3.5 511 42 447

4 2.09 1000 4 4.5 4.7 536 20 444

4. Using an error calculation table like the one shown below, plug in values for R1, R2, R3, and

Vref to calculate the deviation of Vreset1, Vint(D), and Vint(U). Make sure to double check

the maximum and minimum values for each value.

Error Calculation Table

Resistance Value

Error (%)

Vref (V) R1

(kΩ

ΩΩ

Ω)R2

(kΩ

ΩΩ

Ω)R3

(kΩ

ΩΩ

Ω)5Comparator

Error (V) Vreset1

(V) Vint(D)

(V) Vint(U)

(V)

1.3 517 33 450 R1+Err, R2/R3-Err 0.1 2.59 2.94 3.15

0 2.49 2.84 3.05

-0.1 2.39 2.74 2.95

R1-Err, R2/R3+Err 0.1 2.59 2.66 2.85

0 2.49 2.56 2.75

-0.1 2.39 2.46 2.65

R1/R2/R3 No Err 0.1 2.59 2.79 2.99

0 2.49 2.69 2.89

-0.1 2.39 2.59 2.79

R1/R2+Err, R3-Err 0.1 2.59 2.93 3.16

0 2.49 2.83 3.06

-0.1 2.39 2.73 2.96

R1/R2-Err, R3+Err 0.1 2.59 2.67 2.84

0 2.49 2.57 2.74

-0.1 2.39 2.47 2.64

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 334 of 462

Procedures for Clearing Settings when Using LVDR and LVDI:

To operate or release the low-voltage detection circuit normally, follow the procedure described

below. Figure 14.7 shows the timing for the operation and release of the low-voltage detection

circuit.

1. To operate the low-voltage detection circuit, set the LVDE bit in LVDCR to 1.

2. Wait for 100 µs(t

LVDON) until the reference voltage and the low-voltage-detection power

supply have stabilized, based on overflow of LVDNT. Then, clear the LVDDF and LVDUF

bits in LVDSR to 0 and set the LVDRE, LVDDE, and LVDUE bits in LVDCR to 1, as

required.

3. To release the low-voltage detection circuit, start by clearing all of the LVDRE, LVDDE, and

LVDUE bits to 0. Then clear the LVDE bit to 0. The LVDE bit must not be cleared to 0 at the

same timing as the LVDRE, LVDDE, and LVDUE bits because incorrect operation may occur.

LVDRE

LVDDE

LVDUE

LVDON

LVDE

Figure 14.7 Timing for Operation/Release of Low-Voltage Detection Circuit

PSCKT00A_000020020200 Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 335 of 462

Section 15 Power Supply Circuit

(H8/38104 Group Only)

This LSI incorporates an internal power supply step-down circuit. Use of this circuit enables the

internal power supply to be fixed at a constant level of approximately 3.0 V, independently of the

voltage of the power supply connected to the external VCC pin. As a result, the current consumed

when an external power supply is used at 3.0 V or above can be held down to virtually the same

low level as when used at approximately 3.0 V. If the external power supply is 3.0 V or below, the

internal voltage will be practically the same as the external voltage. It is, of course, also possible to

use the same level of external power supply voltage and internal power supply voltage without

using the internal power supply step-down circuit.

15.1 When Using Internal Power Supply Step-Down Circuit

Connect the external power supply to the VCC pin, and connect a capacitance of approximately 0.1

µFbetweenCVCC and VSS, as shown in figure 15.1. The internal step-down circuit is made

effective simply by adding this external circuit. In the external circuit interface, the external power

supply voltage connected to VCC and the GND potential connected to VSS are the reference levels.

For example, for port input/output levels, the VCC level is the reference for the high level, and the

VSS level is that for the low level. The A/D converter analog power supply is not affected by the

internal step-down circuit.

Internal

logic

Step-down circuit

Internal

power

supply

Stabilization

capacitance

(approx. 0.1 µF)

= 2.7 to 5.5 V

Figure 15.1 Power Supply Connection when Internal Step-Down Circuit is Used

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 336 of 462

15.2 When Not Using Internal Power Supply Step-Down Circuit

When the internal power supply step-down circuit is not used, connect the external power supply

to the CVCC pin and VCC pin, as shown in figure 15.2. The external power supply is then input

directly to the internal power supply. The permissible range for the power supply voltage is 2.7 V

to 3.6 V. Operation cannot be guaranteed if a voltage outside this range (less than 3.0 V or more

than 3.6 V) is input.

CVCC

VSS

Internal

logic

Step-down circuit

Internal

power

supply

VCC VCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V

Figure 15.2 Power Supply Connection when Internal Step-Down Circuit is Not Used

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 337 of 462

Section 16 List of Registers

The register list gives information on the on-chip I/O register addresses, how the register bits are

configured, and the register states in each operating mode. The information is given as shown

below.

1. Register addresses (address order)

•Registers are listed from the lower allocation addresses.

•Registers are classified by functional modules.

•The data bus width is indicated.

•The number of access states is indicated.

2. Register bits

•Bit configurations of the registers are described in the same order as the register addresses.

•Reserved bits are indicated by in the bit name column.

•When registers consist of 16 bits, bits are described from the MSB side.

3. Register states in each operating mode

•Register states are described in the same order as the register addresses.

•The register states described here are for the basic operating modes. If there is a specific reset

for an on-chip peripheral module, refer to the section on that on-chip peripheral module.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 338 of 462

16.1 Register Addresses (Address Order)

The data bus width indicates the numbers of bits by which the register is accessed.

The number of access states indicates the number of states based on the specified reference clock.

viation Bit No Address Module

Name Data Bus

Width Access

State

Flash memory control register 1 FLMCR1 8 H'F020 ROM 8 2

Flash memory control register 2 FLMCR2 8 H'F021 ROM 8 2

Flash memory power control

Erase block register EBR 8 H'F023 ROM 8 2

Flash memory enable register FENR 8 H'F02B ROM 8 2

Low-voltage detection control

Low-voltage detection status

Event counter PWM compare

Event counter PWM data register

HECPWDRH 8 H'FF8E AEC*182

Event counter PWM data register

LECPWDRL 8 H'FF8F AEC*182

Wakeup edge select register WEGR 8 H'FF90 Interrupts 8 2

Serial port control register SPCR 8 H'FF91 SCI3 8 2

Input pin edge select register AEGSR 8 H'FF92 AEC*182

Event counter control register ECCR 8 H'FF94 AEC*182

Event counter control/status

Event counter H ECH 8 H'FF96 AEC*182

Event counter L ECL 8 H'FF97 AEC*182

Serial mode register SMR 8 H'FFA8 SCI3 8 3

Bit rate register BRR 8 H'FFA9 SCI3 8 3

Serial control register 3 SCR3 8 H'FFAA SCI3 8 3

Transmit data register TDR 8 H'FFAB SCI3 8 3

Serial status register SSR 8 H'FFAC SCI3 8 3

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 339 of 462

viation Bit No Address Module

Name Data Bus

Width Access

State

Receive data register RDR 8 H'FFAD SCI3 8 3

Timer mode register A TMA 8 H'FFB0 Timer A 8 2

Timer counter A TCA 8 H'FFB1 Timer A 8 2

Timer control/status register W TCSRW 8 H'FFB2 WDT*282

Timer counter W TCW 8 H'FFB3 WDT*282

Timer control register F TCRF 8 H'FFB6 Timer F 8 2

Timer control status register F TCSRF 8 H'FFB7 Timer F 8 2

8-bit timer counter FH TCFH 8 H'FFB8 Timer F 8 2

8-bit timer counter FL TCFL 8 H'FFB9 Timer F 8 2

Output compare register FH OCRFH 8 H'FFBA Timer F 8 2

Output compare register FL OCRFL 8 H'FFBB Timer F 8 2

LCD port control register LPCR 8 H'FFC0 LCD*382

LCD control register LCR 8 H'FFC1 LCD*382

LCD control register 2 LCR2 8 H'FFC2 LCD*382

Low-voltage detection counter*4LVDCNT 8 H'FFC3 LVD 8 2

A/D result register H ADRRH 8 H'FFC4 A/D converter 8 2

A/D result register L ADRRL 8 H'FFC5 A/D converter 8 2

A/D mode register AMR 8 H'FFC6 A/D converter 8 2

A/D start register ADSR 8 H'FFC7 A/D converter 8 2

Port mode register 2 PMR2 8 H'FFC9 I/O port 8 2

Port mode register 3 PMR3 8 H'FFCA I/O port 8 2

Port mode register 5 PMR5 8 H'FFCC I/O port 8 2

PWM2 control register PWCR2 8 H'FFCD 10-bit PWM 8 2

PWM2 data register U PWDRU2 8 H'FFCE 10-bit PWM 8 2

PWM2 data register L PWDRL2 8 H'FFCF 10-bit PWM 8 2

PWM1 control register PWCR1 8 H'FFD0 10-bit PWM 8 2

PWM1 data register U PWDRU1 8 H'FFD1 10-bit PWM 8 2

PWM1 data register L PWDRL1 8 H'FFD2 10-bit PWM 8 2

Port data register 3 PDR3 8 H'FFD6 I/O port 8 2

Port data register 4 PDR4 8 H'FFD7 I/O port 8 2

Port data register 5 PDR5 8 H'FFD8 I/O port 8 2

Port data register 6 PDR6 8 H'FFD9 I/O port 8 2

Port data register 7 PDR7 8 H'FFDA I/O port 8 2

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 340 of 462

viation Bit No Address Module

Name Data Bus

Width Access

State

Port data register 8 PDR8 8 H'FFDB I/O port 8 2

Port data register 9 PDR9 8 H'FFDC I/O port 8 2

Port data register A PDRA 8 H'FFDD I/O port 8 2

Port data register B PDRB 8 H'FFDE I/O port 8 2

Port pull-up control register 3 PUCR3 8 H'FFE1 I/O port 8 2

Port pull-up control register 5 PUCR5 8 H'FFE2 I/O port 8 2

Port pull-up control register 6 PUCR6 8 H'FFE3 I/O port 8 2

Port control register 3 PCR3 8 H'FFE6 I/O port 8 2

Port control register 4 PCR4 8 H'FFE7 I/O port 8 2

Port control register 5 PCR5 8 H'FFE8 I/O port 8 2

Port control register 6 PCR6 8 H'FFE9 I/O port 8 2

Port control register 7 PCR7 8 H'FFEA I/O port 8 2

Port control register 8 PCR8 8 H'FFEB I/O port 8 2

Port mode register 9 PMR9 8 H'FFEC I/O port 8 2

Port control register A PCRA 8 H'FFED I/O port 8 2

Port mode register B PMRB 8 H'FFEE I/O port 8 2

System control register 1 SYSCR1 8 H'FFF0 SYSTEM 8 2

System control register 2 SYSCR2 8 H'FFF1 SYSTEM 8 2

IRQ edge select register IEGR 8 H'FFF2 Interrupts 8 2

Interrupt enable register 1 IENR1 8 H'FFF3 Interrupts 8 2

Interrupt enable register 2 IENR2 8 H'FFF4 Interrupts 8 2

Oscillator control register*4OSCCR 8 H'FFF5 CPG 8 2

Interrupt request register 1 IRR1 8 H'FFF6 Interrupts 8 2

Interrupt request register 2 IRR2 8 H'FFF7 Interrupts 8 2

Timer mode register W*4TMW 8 H'FFF8 WDT*282

Wakeup interrupt request register IWPR 8 H’FFF9 Interrupts 8 2

Clock stop register 1 CKSTPR1 8 H'FFFA SYSTEM 8 2

Clock stop register 2 CKSTPR2 8 H'FFFB SYSTEM 8 2

Notes: 1. AEC: Asynchronous event counter

2. WDT: Watchdog timer

3. LCD: LCD controller/driver

4. H8/38104 Group only

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 341 of 462

16.2 Register Bits

AbbreviationBit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Module

Name

FLMCR1 — SWE ESU PSU EV PV E P ROM

FLMCR2FLER———————

FLPWCRPDWND———————

EBR — — — EB4 EB3 EB2 EB1 EB0

FENRFLSHE———————

LVDCR*4LVDE — VINTDSEL VINTUSEL LVDSL LVDRE LVDDE LVDUE

LVDSR*4OVF — — — VREFSEL — LVDDF LVDUF

Low-

voltage

detect

circuit

ECPWCRH ECPWCRH7ECPWCRH6ECPWCRH5 ECPWCRH4ECPWCRH3ECPWCRH2ECPWCRH1ECPWCRH0AEC*1

ECPWCRL ECPWCRL7 ECPWCRL6 ECPWCRL5 ECPWCRL4 ECPWCRL3 ECPWCRL2 ECPWCRL1 ECPWCRL0

ECPWDRH ECPWDRH7ECPWDRH6ECPWDRH5 ECPWDRH4ECPWDRH3ECPWDRH2ECPWDRH1ECPWDRH0

ECPWDRL ECPWDRL7 ECPWDRL6 ECPWDRL5 ECPWDRL4 ECPWDRL3 ECPWDRL2 ECPWDRL1 ECPWDRL0

WEGR WKEGS7 WKEGS6 WKEGS5 WKEGS4 WKEGS3 WKEGS2 WKEGS1 WKEGS0 Interrupts

SPCR — — SPC32 — SCINV3 SCINV2 — — SCI3

AEGSR AHEGS1 AHEGS0 ALEGS1 ALEGS0 AIEGS1 AIEGS0 ECPWME — AEC*1

ECCR ACKH1 ACKH0 ACKL1 ACKL0 PWCK2 PWCK1 PWCK0 —

ECCSR OVH OVL — CH2 CUEH CUEL CRCH CRCL

ECH ECH7 ECH6 ECH5 ECH4 ECH3 ECH2 ECH1 ECH0

ECL ECL7 ECL6 ECL5 ECL4 ECL3 ECL2 ECL1 ECL0

SMR COM CHR PE PM STOP MP CKS1 CKS0 SCI3

BRR BRR7 BRR6 BRR5 BRR4 BRR3 BRR2 BRR1 BRR0

SCR3 TIE RIE TE RE MPIE TEIE CKE1 CKE0

TDR TDR7 TDR6 TDR5 TDR4 TDR3 TDR2 TDR1 TDR0

SSR TDRE RDRF OER FER PER TEND MPBR MPBT

RDR RDR7 RDR6 RDR5 RDR4 RDR3 RDR2 RDR1 RDR0

TMA — — — — TMA3 TMA2 TMA1 TMA0 Timer A

TCA TCA7 TCA6 TCA5 TCA4 TCA3 TCA2 TCA1 TCA0

TCSRW B6WI TCWE B4WI TCSRWE B2WI WDON BOWI WRST WDT*2

TCW TCW7 TCW6 TCW5 TCW4 TCW3 TCW2 TCW1 TCW0

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 342 of 462

AbbreviationBit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Module

Name

TCRF TOLH CKSH2 CKSH1 CKSH0 TOLL CKSL2 CKSL1 CKSL0 Timer F

TCSRF OVFH CMFH OVIEH CCLRH OVFL CMFL OVIEL CCLRL

TCFH TCFH7 TCFH6 TCFH5 TCFH4 TCFH3 TCFH2 TCFH1 TCFH0

TCFL TCFL7 TCFL6 TCFL5 TCFL4 TCFL3 TCFL2 TCFL1 TCFL0

OCRFH OCRFH7 OCRFH6 OCRFH5 OCRFH4 OCRFH3 OCRFH2 OCRFH1 OCRFH0

OCRFL OCRFL7 OCRFL6 OCRFL5 OCRFL4 OCRFL3 OCRFL2 OCRFL1 OCRFL0

LPCR DTS1 DTS0 CMX — SGS3 SGS2 SGS1 SGS0 LCD*3

LCR — PSW ACT DISP CKS3 CKS2 CKS1 CKS0

LCR2 LCDAB — — — CDS3*4CDS2*4CDS1*4CDS0*4

LVDCNT*4CNT7 CNT6 CNT5 CNT4 CNT3 CNT2 CNT1 CNT0 Low-

voltage

detect

circuit

ADRRH ADR9 ADR8 ADR7 ADR6 ADR5 ADR4 ADR3 ADR2

ADRRL ADR1 ADR0 — — — — — —

A/D

converter

AMR CKS — — — CH3 CH2 CH1 CH0

ADSR ADSF — — — — — — —

PMR2——POF1——WDCKS—IRQ0I/Oport

PMR3 AEVL AEVH — — — TMOFH TMOFL —

PMR5 WKP7 WKP6 WKP5 WKP4 WKP3 WKP2 WKP1 WKP0

PWCR2—————PWCR22*4PWCR21 PWCR20

PWDRU2 — — — — — — PWDRU21 PWDRU20

10-bit

PWM

PWDRL2 PWDRL27 PWDRL26 PWDRL25 PWDRL24 PWDRL23 PWDRL22 PWDRL21 PWDRL20

PWCR1—————PWCR12*4PWCR11 PWCR10

PWDRU1 — — — — — — PWDRU11 PWDRU10

PWDRL1 PWDRL17 PWDRL16 PWDRL15 PWDRL14 PWDRL13 PWDRL12 PWDRL11 PWDRL10

PDR3 P37 P36 P35 P34 P33 P32 P31 — I/O port

PDR4————P43P42P41P40

PDR5 P57 P56 P55 P54 P53 P52 P51 P50

PDR6 P67 P66 P65 P64 P63 P62 P61 P60

PDR7 P77 P76 P75 P74 P73 P72 P71 P70

PDR8———————P80

PDR9 — — P95 P94 P93 P92 P91 P90

PDRA — — — — PA3 PA2 PA1 PA0

PDRB — — — — PB3 PB2 PB1 PB0

PUCR3 PUCR37 PUCR36 PUCR35 PUCR34 PUCR33 PUCR32 PUCR31 —

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 343 of 462

AbbreviationBit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Module

Name

PUCR5 PUCR57 PUCR56 PUCR55 PUCR54 PUCR53 PUCR52 PUCR51 PUCR50 I/O port

PUCR6 PUCR67 PUCR66 PUCR65 PUCR64 PUCR63 PUCR62 PUCR61 PUCR60

PCR3 PCR37 PCR36 PCR35 PCR34 PCR33 PCR32 PCR31 —

PCR4 — — — — — PCR42 PCR41 PCR40

PCR5 PCR57 PCR56 PCR55 PCR54 PCR53 PCR52 PCR51 PCR50

PCR6 PCR67 PCR66 PCR65 PCR64 PCR63 PCR62 PCR61 PCR60

PCR7 PCR77 PCR76 PCR75 PCR74 PCR73 PCR72 PCR71 PCR70

PCR8———————PCR80

PMR9————PIOFF—PWM2PWM1

PCRA — — — — PCRA3 PCRA2 PCRA1 PCRA0 I/O port

PMRB————IRQ1———

SYSCR1 SSBY STS2 STS1 STS0 LSON — MA1 MA0 SYSTEM

SYSCR2 — — — NESEL DTON MSON SA1 SA0

IEGR——————IEG1IEG0Interrupts

IENR1 IENTA — IENWP — — IENEC2 IEN1 IEN0

IENR2 IENDT IENAD — — IENTFH IENTFL — IENEC

OSCCR*4SUBSTP — — — — IRQAECF OSCF — CPG

IRR1 IRRTA — — — — IRREC2 IRRI1 IRRI0

IRR2 IRRDT IRRAD — — IRRTFH IRRTFL — IRREC

TMW*4— — — — CKS3 CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 WDT*2

IWPR IWPF7 IWPF6 IWPF5 IWPF4 IWPF3 IWPF2 IWPF1 IWPF0

CKSTPR1 — — S32CKSTP ADCKSTP — TFCKSTP— TACKSTPSYSTEM

CKSTPR2 LVDCKSTP

*4——PW2CKSTP AECKSTPWDCKSTPPW1CKSTP LDCKSTP

Notes: 1.AEC: Asynchronous event counter

2. WDT: Watchdog timer

3. LCD: LCD controller/driver

4. H8/38104 Group only

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 344 of 462

16.3 Register States in Each Operating Mode

Abbreviation Reset Active Sleep Watch Subactive Subsleep Standby Module

FLMCR1 Initialized — — Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized ROM

FLMCR2Initialized——————

FLPWCRInitialized——————

EBR Initialized — — Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized

FENRInitialized——————

LVDCR*4Initialized——————

LVDSR*4Initialized——————

Low-

voltage

detect

circuit

ECPWCRHInitialized——————AEC

ECPWCRLInitialized——————

ECPWDRHInitialized——————

ECPWDRLInitialized——————

WEGR Initialized — — — — — — Interrupts

SPCR Initialized — — — — — — SCI3

AEGSR Initialized — — — — — — AEC*1

ECCRInitialized——————

ECCSR Initialized — — — — — —

ECH Initialized — — — — — —

ECL Initialized — — — — — —

SMR Initialized — — Initialized — — Initialized SCI3

BRR Initialized — — Initialized — — Initialized

SCR3 Initialized — — Initialized — — Initialized

TDR Initialized — — Initialized — — Initialized

SSR Initialized — — Initialized — — Initialized

RDR Initialized — — Initialized — — Initialized

TMA Initialized — — — — — — Timer A

TCA Initialized — — — — — —

TCSRW Initialized — — — — — — WDT*2

TCW Initialized — — — — — —

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 345 of 462

Abbreviation Reset Active Sleep Watch Subactive Subsleep Standby Module

TCRF Initialized——————TimerF

TCSRF Initialized — — — — — —

TCFH Initialized——————

TCFL Initialized——————

OCRFH Initialized — — — — — —

OCRFL Initialized — — — — — —

LPCR Initialized——————LCD

LCR Initialized — — — — — —

LCR2 Initialized——————

LVDCNT*4Initialized——————Low-

voltage

detect

circuit

ADRRH — — — — — — —

ADRRL — — — — — — —

A/D

converter

AMR Initialized — — — — — —

ADSR Initialized — — Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized

PMR2Initialized——————I/Oport

PMR3Initialized——————

PMR5Initialized——————

PWCR2Initialized——————

PWDRU2 Initialized — — — — — —

10-bit

PWM

PWDRL2 Initialized — — — — — —

PWCR1Initialized——————

PWDRU1 Initialized — — — — — —

PWDRL1 Initialized — — — — — —

PDR3 Initialized——————I/Oport

PDR4 Initialized——————

PDR5 Initialized ——————

PDR6 Initialized ——————

PDR7 Initialized ——————

PDR8 Initialized ——————

PDR9 Initialized ——————

PDRA Initialized ——————

PDRB Initialized ——————

PUCR3 Initialized ——————

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 346 of 462

Abbreviation Reset Active Sleep Watch Subactive Subsleep Standby Module

PUCR5 Initialized ——————I/O port

PUCR6 Initialized ——————

PCR3 Initialized ——————

PCR4 Initialized ——————

PCR5 Initialized ——————

PCR6 Initialized ——————

PCR7 Initialized ——————

PCR8 Initialized ——————

PMR9 Initialized ——————

PCRA Initialized ——————

PMRB Initialized ——————

SYSCR1 Initialized ——————SYSTEM

SYSCR2 Initialized ——————

IEGR Initialized ——————Interrupts

IENR1 Initialized ——————

IENR2 Initialized ——————

OSCCR*4Initialized ——————CPG

IRR1 Initialized ——————

IRR2 Initialized ——————

TMW*4Initialized ——————WDT*2

IWPR Initialized —————

CKSTPR1 Initialized ——————SYSTEM

CKSTPR2 Initialized ————

Notes: is not initialized

1.AEC: Asynchronous event counter

2. WDT: Watchdog timer

3. LCD: LCD controller/driver

4. H8/38104 Group only

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 347 of 462

Section 17 Electrical Characteristics

17.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings of H8/3802 Group

Table 17.1 lists the absolute maximum ratings.

Table 17.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings

Item Symbol Value Unit Note

Power supply voltage VCC –0.3 to +7.0 V *

Analog power supply voltage AVCC –0.3 to +7.0 V

Programming voltage VPP –0.3to+13.0 V

Input voltage Other than port B and

IRQAEC Vin –0.3toV

CC +0.3 V

Port B AVin –0.3toAV

CC +0.3 V

IRQAEC HVin –0.3 to +7.3 V

Port 9 pin voltage VP9 –0.3 to +7.3 V

Regular specifications:

–20 to +75

Operating temperature Topr

Wide-range temperature

specifications: –40 to +85

°C

Storage temperature Tstg –55 to +125 °C

Note: *Permanent damage may result if maximum ratings are exceeded. Normal operation

should be under the conditions specified in Electrical Characteristics. Exceeding these

values can result in incorrect operation and reduced reliability.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 348 of 462

17.2 Electrical Characteristics of H8/3802 Group

17.2.1 Power Supply Voltage and Operating Ranges

Power Supply Voltage and Oscillation Frequency Range

38.4

1.8 3.0 5.5

(V)

(kHz)

32.768

4.5

16.0

2.0

10.0

4.0

1.8 2.7 4.5 5.5

(V)

fosc (MHz)

• Active (high-speed) mode

• Sleep (high-speed) mode

Note 1: The fosc values are those when a resonator

is used; when an external clock is used, the

minimum value of fosc is 1 MHz.

• All operating modes

Note 2: When a resonator is used, hold Vcc at 2.2 V

to 5.5 V from power-on until the oscillation

stabilization time has elapsed.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 349 of 462

Power Supply Voltage and Operating Frequency Range

• Subactive mode

• Subsleep mode (except CPU)

• Watch mode (except CPU)

16.384

8.192

4.096

1.8 3.6 5.5

VCC (V)

φSUB (kHz)

19.2

9.6

4.8

8.0

(0.5)

5.0

2.0

1.0

1.8 2.7 4.5 5.5

VCC (V)

φ (MHz)

1000

(7.8125)

625

250

15.625

1.8 2.7 4.5 5.5

VCC (V)

φ (kHz)

• Active (medium-speed) mode

• Sleep (medium-speed) mode

(except A/D converter)

Note 2: The values in parentheses is the minimum operating

frequency when an external clock is input. When

using a resonator, the minimum operating frequency

(φ) is 15.625 kHz.

• Active (high-speed) mode

• Sleep (high-speed) mode (except CPU)

Note 1: The values in parentheses is the minimum operating

frequency when an external clock is input. When

using a resonator, the minimum operating frequency

(φ) is 1 MHz.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 350 of 462

Analog Power Supply Voltage and A/D Converter Operating Range

φ (MHz)

(0.5)

5.0

1.0

1.8 2.7 4.5 5.5

(V)

• Active (high-speed) mode

• Sleep (high-speed) mode

Note: When AVcc = 1.8 V to 2.7 V, the operating range is limited to φ = 1.0 MHz when using a resonator

and is φ = 0.5 MHz to 1.0 MHz when using an external clock.

φ (kHz)

500

1000

625

1.8 2.7 4.5 5.5

(V)

• Active (medium-speed) mode

• Sleep (medium-speed) mode

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 351 of 462

17.2.2 DC Characteristics

Table 17.2 lists the DC characteristics.

Table 17.2 DC Characteristics (1)

VCC = 1.8 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 1.8 V to 5.5 V, VSS =AV

SS = 0.0 V, unless otherwise specified

(including subactive mode), Ta= –20°C to +75°C (product with regular specifications), Ta=–

40°C to +85°C (product with wide-range temperature specifications), Ta=+75°C(baredie

product)

Values

Item Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Notes

Input high

voltage VIH RES,

WKP0 to WKP7,

IRQ0,IRQ1,

AEVL, AEVH,

VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VCC ×0.8 — VCC +0.3 V

SCK32 Other than above VCC ×0.9 — VCC +0.3

RXD32 VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VCC ×0.7 — VCC +0.3 V

Other than above VCC ×0.8 — VCC +0.3

OSC1VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VCC ×0.8 — VCC +0.3 V

Other than above VCC ×0.9 — VCC +0.3

X1 VCC = 1.8 V to 5.5 V VCC ×0.9 — VCC +0.3 V

P31 to P37,

P40 to P43,

P50 to P57,

VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VCC ×0.7 — VCC +0.3 V

P60 to P67,

P70 to P77,

P80,

PA0 to PA3

Other than above VCC ×0.8 — VCC +0.3

PB0 to PB3 VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VCC ×0.7 — AVCC +0.3 V

Other than above VCC ×0.8 — AVCC +0.3

IRQAEC VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VCC ×0.8 — 7.3 V

Other than above VCC ×0.9 — 7.3

Note: Connect the TEST pin to VSS.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 352 of 462

Table 17.2 DC Characteristics (2)

VCC = 1.8 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 1.8 V to 5.5 V, VSS =AV

SS = 0.0 V, unless otherwise specified

(including subactive mode), Ta= –20°C to +75°C (product with regular specifications), Ta=–

40°C to +85°C (product with wide-range temperature specifications), Ta= +75°C (bare die

product)

Values

Item Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Notes

Input low

voltage VIL RES,

WKP0 to WKP7,

IRQ0,IRQ1,

IRQAEC,

VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V – 0.3 — VCC ×0.2 V

AEVL, AEVH,

SCK32 Other than above – 0.3 — VCC ×0.1

RXD32 VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V – 0.3 — VCC ×0.3 V

Other than above – 0.3 — VCC ×0.2

OSC1 VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V – 0.3 — VCC ×0.2 V

Other than above – 0.3 — VCC ×0.1

X1 VCC = 1.8 V to 5.5 V – 0.3 — VCC ×0.1 V

P31 to P37,

P40 to P43,

P50 to P57,

VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V – 0.3 — VCC ×0.3 V

P60 to P67,

P70 to P77,

P80,

PA0 to PA3,

PB0 to PB3

Other than above – 0.3 — VCC ×0.2

VOH VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V

–IOH =1.0mA

VCC –1.0 — — VOutput

high

voltage VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V

–IOH =0.5mA

VCC –0.5 — —

P31 to P37,

P40 to P42,

P50 to P57,

P60 to P67,

P70 to P77,

P80,

PA0 to PA3 –IOH =0.1mA V

CC –0.3 — —

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 353 of 462

Table 17.2 DC Characteristics (3)

VCC = 1.8 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 1.8 V to 5.5 V, VSS =AV

SS = 0.0 V, unless otherwise specified

(including subactive mode), Ta= –20°C to +75°C (product with regular specifications), Ta=–

40°C to +85°C (product with wide-range temperature specifications), Ta= +75°C (bare die

product)

Values

Item Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Notes

Output low

voltage VOL P40 to P42 VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V

IOL =1.6mA

——0.6V

IOL =0.4mA — — 0.5

P50 to P57,

P60 to P67,

P70 to P77,

P80,

PA0 to PA3

IOL =0.4mA — — 0.5

P31 to P37 VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V

IOL =10mA

——1.5

VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V

IOL =1.6mA

——0.6

IOL =0.4mA — — 0.5

P90 to P92 VCC = 2.2 V to 5.5 V

IOL =25mA

——0.5 *5

IOL =15mA

IOL =10mA *6

P93 to P95 IOL =10mA — — 0.5

IL |RES,P43 V

IN =0.5VtoV

CC –

0.5 V — — 20.0 µA *2

——1.0 *1

OSC1, X1,

P31 to P37,

P40 to P42,

P50 to P57,

P60 to P67,

P70 to P77,

P80, IRQAEC,

PA0 to PA3,

P90 to P95

VIN =0.5VtoV

CC –

0.5 V ——1.0µA

Input/

output

leakage

current

PB0 to PB3 VIN =0.5VtoAV

–0.5V ——1.0

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 354 of 462

Table 17.2 DC Characteristics (4)

VCC = 1.8 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 1.8 V to 5.5 V, VSS =AV

SS = 0.0 V, unless otherwise specified

(including subactive mode), Ta= –20°C to +75°C (product with regular specifications), Ta=–

40°C to +85°C (product with wide-range temperature specifications), Ta= +75°C (bare die

product)

Values

Item Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Notes

–IpVCC =5.0V,

VIN =0.0V 50.0 — 300.0 µA

Pull-up

MOS

current

P31 to P37,

P50 to P57,

P60 to P67 VCC =2.7V,

VIN =0.0V — 35.0 — Reference

value

Input

capaci-

tance

Cin All input pins

except power

supply, RES, P43,

IRQAEC, PB0 to

PB3 pins

f=1MHz,

VIN =0.0V,

Ta=25°C

— — 15.0 pF

IRQAEC — — 30.0

RES — — 80.0 *2

— — 15.0 *1

P43 — — 50.0 *2

— — 15.0 *1

PB0 to PB3 — — 15.0

IOPE1 VCC Active (high-speed)

mode

VCC =5.0V,

fOSC =10MHz

— 7.0 10.0 mA *3

Active

mode

current

consump-

tion IOPE2 VCC Active (medium-

speed) mode

VCC =5.0V,

fOSC =10MHz,

φOSC/128

—2.23.0mA

Sleep

mode

current

consump-

tion

ISLEEP VCC VCC =5.0V,

fOSC =10MHz —3.85.0mA

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 355 of 462

Table 17.2 DC Characteristics (5)

VCC = 1.8 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 1.8 V to 5.5 V, VSS =AV

SS = 0.0 V, unless otherwise specified

(including subactive mode), Ta= –20°C to +75°C (product with regular specifications), Ta=–

40°C to +85°C (product with wide-range temperature specifications), Ta= +75°C (bare die

product)

Values

Item Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Notes

Subactive

mode

current

consump-

tion

ISUB VCC VCC =2.7V,

LCD on,

32-kHz crystal

resonator used

(φSUB =φW/2)

— 15.0 30.0 µA *3

VCC =2.7V,

LCD on,

32-kHz crystal

resonator used

(φSUB =φW/8)

—8.0— *3

Reference

value

Subsleep

mode

current

consump-

tion

ISUBSP VCC VCC =2.7V,

LCD on,

32-kHz crystal

resonator used

(φSUB =φW/2)

— 7.5 16.0 µA *3

3.8 µA *2

Watch

mode

current

consump-

tion

IWATCH VCC VCC =2.7V,

LCD not used,

32-kHz crystal

resonator used

—

2.8

6.0

Standby

mode

current

consump-

tion

ISTBY VCC 32-kHz crystal

resonator not

used

—1.05.0 µA

RAM data

retaining

voltage

VRAM VCC 1.5 — — V

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 356 of 462

Table 17.2 DC Characteristics (6)

VCC = 1.8 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 1.8 V to 5.5 V, VSS =AV

SS = 0.0 V, unless otherwise specified

(including subactive mode), Ta= –20°C to +75°C (product with regular specifications), Ta=–

40°C to +85°C (product with wide-range temperature specifications), Ta= +75°C (bare die

product)

Values

Item Symbol Applicable

Pins Test

Condition Min Typ Max Unit Notes

Allowable output low

current (per pin) IOL Output pins

except ports 3

and 9

VCC =4.0Vto

5.5 V ——2.0mA

Port 3 VCC =4.0Vto

5.5 V — — 10.0

Output pins

except port 9 ——0.5

P90 to P92 VCC =2.2Vto

5.5 V — — 25.0 *5

— — 15.0

— — 10.0

P93 to P95 — — 10.0

Allowable output low

current (total) ∑IOL Output pins

except ports 3

and 9

VCC =4.0Vto

5.5 V — — 40.0 mA

Port 3 VCC =4.0Vto

5.5 V — — 80.0

Output pins

except port 9 — — 20.0

Port 9 — — 80.0

–IOH All output pins VCC =4.0Vto

5.5 V ——2.0mAAllowable output high

current (per pin)

Other than

above ——0.2

∑–IOH All output pins VCC =4.0Vto

5.5 V — — 15.0 mAAllowable output high

current (total)

Other than

above — — 10.0

Notes: 1. Applies to the mask-ROM version.

2. Applies to the HD6473802.

3. Pin states when current consumption is measured

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 357 of 462

Mode RES

RESRES

RES Pin Internal State Other Pins LCD Power

Supply Oscillator Pins

Active (high-speed)

mode (IOPE1)

Active (medium-

speed) mode (IOPE2)

VCC Only CPU operates VCC Stops

Sleep mode VCC Only timers operate VCC Stops

System clock:

crystal resonator

Subclock:

PinX1=GND

Subactive mode VCC Only CPU operates VCC Stops

Subsleep mode VCC Only timers operate

CPU stops

VCC Stops

Watch mode VCC Only clock time base

operates

CPU stops

VCC Stops

System clock:

crystal resonator

Subclock:

crystal resonator

Standby mode VCC CPU and timers

both stop VCC Stops System clock:

crystal resonator

Subclock:

PinX1=GND

Notes: 4. Except current which flows to the pull-up MOS or output buffer

5. When the PIOFF bit in the port mode register 9 is 0

6. When the PIOFF bit in the port mode register 9 is 1

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 358 of 462

17.2.3 AC Characteristics

Table 17.3 lists the control signal timing and table 17.4 lists the serial interface timing.

Table 17.3 Control Signal Timing

VCC = 1.8 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 1.8 V to 5.5 V, VSS =AV

SS = 0.0 V, unless otherwise specified

(including subactive mode), Ta= –20°C to +75°C (product with regular specifications), Ta=–

40°C to +85°C (product with wide-range temperature specifications), Ta= +75°C (bare die

product)

licable Values Reference

Item Symbol Pins Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Figure

System clock

oscillation fOSC OSC1,

OSC2 VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V 2.0 — 16.0 MHz

frequency VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V 2.0 — 10.0

Other than above 2.0 — 4.0

500VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V 62.5 — (1000)

500VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V 100 —

(1000)

500

OSC clock (φOSC)

cycle time tOSC OSC1,

OSC2

Other than above 250 —

(1000)

ns Figure 17.1*2

System clock (φ)t

cyc 2 — 128 tOSC

cycle time — — 128 µs

Subclock

oscillation

frequency

fWX1, X2 — 32.768

or 38.4 —kHz

Watch clock (φW)

cycle time tWX1, X2 — 30.5 or

26.0 — µs Figure 17.1

Subclock (φSUB)

cycle time tsubcyc 2— 8 t

W*1

Instruction cycle

time 2— —t

cyc

tsubcyc

trc OSC1,

OSC2 VCC = 2.2 V to 5.5 V

in figure 17.7 — 20 45 µs Figure 17.7Oscillation

stabilization time

Other than above — — 50 ms

X1, X2 VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V — — 2.0 s *3

VCC = 2.2 V to 5.5 V — — 10.0

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 359 of 462

licable Values Reference

Item Symbol Pins Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Figure

External clock tCPH OSC1 VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V 25 — — ns Figure 17.1

high width VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V 40 — —

Other than above 100 — —

X1 — 15.26 or

13.02 —µs

External clock tCPL OSC1 VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V 25 — — ns Figure 17.1

low width VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V 40 — —

Other than above 100 — —

X1 — 15.26 or

13.02 —µs

External clock tCPr OSC1 VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V — — 6 ns Figure 17.1

rise time VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V — — 10

Other than above — — 25

X1 — — 55.0 ns

External clock tCPf OSC1VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V — — 6 ns Figure 17.1

fall time VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V — — 10

Other than above — — 25

X1 — — 55.0 ns

RES pin low

width tREL RES 10 — — tcyc Figure 17.2

Input pin high

width tIH IRQ0,

IRQ1,

IRQAEC,

WKP0 to

WKP7,

2— —t

cyc

tsubcyc

Figure 17.3

AEVL,

AEVH 0.5 — — tOSC

Input pin low

width tIL IRQ0,

IRQ1,

IRQAEC,

WKP0 to

WKP7,

2— —t

cyc

tsubcyc

Figure 17.3

AEVL,

AEVH 0.5 — — tOSC

Notes: 1. Determined by the SA1 and SA0 bits in the system control register 2 (SYSCR2).

2. Values in parentheses indicate tOSC max. when the external clock is used.

3. After powering on, hold VCC at 2.2 V to 5.5 V until the oscillation stabilization time has

elapsed.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 360 of 462

Table 17.4 Serial Interface (SCI3) Timing

VCC = 1.8 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 1.8 V to 5.5 V, VSS =AV

SS = 0.0 V, unless otherwise specified

(including subactive mode), Ta= –20°C to +75°C (product with regular specifications), Ta=–

40°C to +85°C (product with wide-range temperature specifications), Ta= +75°C (bare die

product)

Values Reference

Item Symbol Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Figure

Input clock Asynchronous tscyc 4——t

cyc or tsubcyc Figure 17.4

cycle Clocked

synchronous 6——

Input clock pulse width tSCKW 0.4 — 0.6 tscyc Figure 17.4

tTXD VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V — — 1 tcyc or tsubcyc Figure 17.5Transmit data delay time

(clocked synchronous) Other than above — — 1

tRXS VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 200.0 — — ns Figure 17.5Receive data setup time

(clocked synchronous) Other than above 400.0 — —

tRXH VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 200.0 — — ns Figure 17.5Receive data hold time

(clocked synchronous) Other than above 400.0 — —

17.2.4 A/D Converter Characteristics

Table 17.5 shows the A/D converter characteristics.

Table 17.5 A/D Converter Characteristics

VCC = 1.8 V to 5.5 V, VSS =AV

SS =0.0V,T

a= –20°C to +75°C (product with regular

specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (product with wide-range temperature specifications), Ta=

+75°C (bare die product), unless otherwise specified

licable Test Values Reference

Item Symbol Pins Condition Min Typ Max Unit Figure

Analog power supply

voltage AVCC AVCC 1.8 — 5.5 V *1

Analog input voltage AVIN AN0 to

AN3 –0.3 — AV

CC +0.3 V

Analog power supply

current AIOPE AVCC AVCC = 5.0 V — — 1.5 mA

AISTOP1 AVCC — 600 — µA *2

Reference

value

AISTOP2 AVCC ——5.0µA

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 361 of 462

licable Test Values Reference

Item Symbol Pins Condition Min Typ Max Unit Figure

Analog input

capacitance CAIN AN0 to

AN3 — — 15.0 pF

Allowable signal

source impedance RAIN — — 10.0 kΩ

Resolution

(data length) — — 10 bit

Nonlinearity error AVCC =2.7V

to 5.5 V

VCC =2.7Vto

5.5 V

——±2.5LSB

AVCC =2.0V

to 5.5 V

VCC =2.0Vto

5.5 V

——±5.5

Other than

above ——±7.5 *4

Quantization error — — ±0.5 LSB

Absolute accuracy AVCC =2.7V

to 5.5 V

VCC =2.7Vto

5.5 V

——±3.0LSB

AVCC =2.0V

to 5.5 V

VCC =2.0Vto

5.5 V

——±6.0

Other than

above ——±8.0 *4

Conversion time AVCC =2.7V

to 5.5 V

VCC =2.7Vto

5.5 V

12.4 — 124 µs

Other than

above 62 — 124

Notes: 1. Set AVCC =V

CC when the A/D converter is not used.

2. AISTOP1 is the current in active and sleep modes while the A/D converter is idle.

3. AISTOP2 is the current at reset and in standby, watch, subactive, and subsleep modes

while the A/D converter is idle.

4. The conversion time is 62 µs.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 362 of 462

17.2.5 LCD Characteristics

Table 17.6 shows the LCD characteristics.

Table 17.6 LCD Characteristics

VCC = 1.8 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 1.8 V to 5.5 V, VSS =AV

SS = 0.0 V, unless otherwise specified

(including subactive mode), Ta= –20°C to +75°C (product with regular specifications), Ta=–

40°C to +85°C (product with wide-range temperature specifications), Ta= +75°C (bare die

product)

Applicable Values Reference

Item Symbol Pins Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Figure

Segment driver

step-down voltage VDS SEG1 to

SEG25 ID=2µA

V1 = 2.7 V to 5.5 V ——0.6V

Common driver

step-down voltage VDC COM1 to

COM4 ID=2µA

V1 = 2.7 V to 5.5 V ——0.3V

LCD power supply

split-resistance RLCD Between V1 and

VSS

0.5 3.0 9.0 MΩ

Liquid crystal

display voltage VLCD V1 2.2 — 5.5 V *2

Notes: 1. The voltage step-down from power supply pins V1, V2, V3, and VSS to each segment

pinorcommonpin.

2. When the liquid crystal display voltage is supplied from an external power supply,

ensure that the following relationship is maintained: VCC ≥V1 ≥V2 ≥V3 ≥VSS.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 363 of 462

17.3 Absolute Maximum Ratings of H8/38004 Group

Table 17.7 lists the absolute maximum ratings.

Table 17.7 Absolute Maximum Ratings

Item Symbol Value Unit Note

Power supply voltage VCC –0.3 to +4.3 V *1

Analog power supply voltage AVCC –0.3 to +4.3 V

Input voltage Other than port B Vin –0.3toV

CC +0.3 V

Port B AVin –0.3toAV

CC +0.3 V

Port 9 pin voltage VP9 –0.3toV

CC +0.3 V

Operating temperature Topr Regular specifications:

–20 to +75*2°C

Wide-range temperature

specifications:

–40 to +85*3

Bare die product: +75*4

Storage temperature Tstg –55 to +125 °C

Notes: 1. Permanent damage may result if maximum ratings are exceeded. Normal operation

should be under the conditions specified in Electrical Characteristics. Exceeding these

values can result in incorrect operation and reduced reliability.

2. When the operating voltage is VCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V during flash memory reading, the

operating temperature ranges from –20°Cto+75°C when programming or erasing the

flash memory. When the operating voltage is VCC = 2.2 to 3.6 V during flash memory

reading, the operating temperature ranges from –20°Cto+50°C when programming or

erasing the flash memory.

3. The operating temperature ranges from –20°Cto+75°C when programming or erasing

the flash memory.

4. The current-carrying temperature ranges from –20°Cto+75°C.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 364 of 462

17.4 Electrical Characteristics of H8/38004 Group

17.4.1 Power Supply Voltage and Operating Ranges

Power Supply Voltage and Oscillation Frequency Range (F-ZTAT Version)

10.0 38.4

32.768

4.0

2.0

2.2 2.7 3.6 2.2 2.7 3.6

fw(kHz)

fosc(MHz)

Vcc (V) Vcc (V)

• Active (high-speed) mode

• Sleep (high-speed) mode • All operating modes

Power Supply Voltage and Oscillation Frequency Range (Mask ROM Version)

10.0 38.4

32.768

4.0

2.0

1.8 2.7 3.6 1.8 2.7 3.6

fw(kHz)

fosc(MHz)

Vcc (V) Vcc (V)

• Active (high-speed) mode

• Sleep (high-speed) mode • All operating modes

• When a resonator is used, hold Vcc at

2.2 V to 3.6 V from power-on until the

oscillation stabilization time has elapsed.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 365 of 462

Power Supply Voltage and Operating Frequency Range (F-ZTAT Version)

5.0 19.2

16.384

9.6

8.192

4.8

4.096

2.0

1.0

2.2 2.7 3.6 2.2 2.7 3.6

φ (kHz)

φ (MHz)

Vcc (V) Vcc (V)

• Active (high-speed) mode

• Sleep (high-speed) mode (except CPU)

625

250

15.625

2.2 2.7 3.6

φ (kHz)

Vcc (V)

• Active (medium-speed) mode

• Slee

(

medium-s

eed

)

mode

(

exce

t A/D converter

)

• Subactive mode

• Subsleep mode (except CPU)

• Watch mode (except CPU)

SUB

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 366 of 462

Power Supply Voltage and Operating Frequency Range (Mask ROM Version)

5.0 19.2

16.384

9.6

8.192

4.8

4.096

2.0

1.0

1.8 2.7 3.6 1.8 2.7 3.6

φ (kHz)

φ (MHz)

Vcc (V) Vcc (V)

• Active (high-speed) mode

• Sleep (high-speed) mode (except CPU)

625

250

15.625

1.8 2.7 3.6

φ (kHz)

Vcc (V)

• Active (medium-speed) mode

• Sleep (medium-speed) mode (except A/D converter)

• Subactive mode

• Subsleep mode (except CPU)

• Watch mode (except CPU)

SUB

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 367 of 462

Analog Power Supply Voltage and A/D Converter Operating Range (F-ZTAT Version)

5.0

625

500

1.0

2.2 2.7 3.6 2.7 3.6

φ (kHz)

φ (MHz)

AVcc (V) AVcc (V)

• Active (high-speed) mode

• Sleep (high-speed) mode

Note: When AVcc = 2.2 V to 2.7 V, the operating range is limited to φ = 1.0 MHz.

• Active (medium-speed) mode

• Sleep (medium-speed) mode

Analog Power Supply Voltage and A/D Converter Operating Range (Mask ROM Version)

5.0

625

500

1.0

1.8 2.7 3.6 2.7 3.6

φ (kHz)

φ (MHz)

AVcc (V) AVcc (V)

• Active (high-speed) mode

• Sleep (high-speed) mode

Note: When AVcc = 1.8 V to 2.7 V, the operating range is limited to φ = 1.0 MHz.

• Active (medium-speed) mode

• Sleep (medium-speed) mode

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 368 of 462

17.4.2 DC Characteristics

Table 17.8 lists the DC characteristics.

Table 17.8 DC Characteristics

One of following conditions is applied unless otherwise specified.

Condition A (F-ZTAT version): VCC = 2.7 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 3.6 V,

VSS =AV

SS =0.0V

Condition B (F-ZTAT version): VCC = 2.2 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 2.2 V to 3.6 V,

VSS =AV

SS =0.0V

Condition C (Mask ROM version): VCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V,

VSS =AV

SS =0.0V

Values

Item Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Notes

Input high

voltage VIH RES,

WKP0 to WKP7,

IRQ0,IRQ1,

AEVL, AEVH,

SCK32

VCC ×0.9 — VCC +0.3 V

RXD32 VCC ×0.8 — VCC +0.3 V

OSC1 VCC ×0.9 — VCC +0.3 V

X1 VCC = 1.8 V to 5.5 V VCC ×0.9 — VCC +0.3 V

P31 to P37,

P40 to P43,

P50 to P57,

P60 to P67,

P70 to P77,

P80,

PA0 to PA3

VCC ×0.8 — VCC +0.3 V

PB0 to PB3 VCC ×0.8 — AVCC +

0.3 V

IRQAEC, P95*5VCC ×0.9 — VCC +0.3 V

Input low

voltage VIL RES,

WKP0 to

IRQ0,IRQ1,

IRQAEC,

AEVL, AEVH,

SCK32

–0.3 — V

CC ×0.1 V

RXD32 –0.3 — V

CC ×0.2 V

OSC1 – 0.3 — VCC ×0.1 V

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 369 of 462

Values

Item Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Notes

X1 – 0.3 — VCC ×0.1 VInput low

voltage P31 to P37,

P40 to P43,

P50 to P57,

P60 to P67,

P70 to P77,

P80,

PA0 to PA3,

PB0 to PB3

–0.3 — V

CC ×0.2 V

VOH VCC = 2.7 V to 3.6 V

–IOH =1.0mA

VCC –

1.0 —— VOutput

high

voltage

P31 to P37,

P40 to P42,

P50 to P57,

P60 to P67,

P70 to P77,

P80,

PA0 to PA3

–IOH =0.1mA V

CC –

0.3 ——

Output low

voltage VOL P40 to P42,

P50 to P57,

P60 to P67,

P70 to P77,

P80,

PA0 to PA3,

P31 to P37

IOL =0.4mA — — 0.5 V

P90 to P95 VCC = 2.2 V to 3.6 V

IOL = 10.0 mA

——0.5

VCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V

IOL =8.0mA

Input/

output

leakage

current

IL |RES,P43,

OSC1, X1,

P31 to P37,

P40 to P42,

P50 to P57,

P60 to P67,

P70 to P77,

P80, IRQAEC,

PA0 to PA3,

P90 to P95

VIN =0.5VtoV

CC –

0.5 V ——1.0 µA

PB0 to PB3 VIN =0.5VtoAV

–0.5V ——1.0

Pull-up

MOS

current

–IpP31 to P37,

P50 to P57,

P60 to P67

VCC =3.0V,

VIN =0.0V 30 — 180 µA

Input

capaci-

tance

Cin All input pins

except power

supply pin

f=1MHz,

VIN =0.0V,

Ta=25°C

— — 15.0 pF

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 370 of 462

Values

Item Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Notes

Active (high-speed)

mode

VCC =1.8V,

fOSC =2MHz

—0.4—mA

*1*3*4

Approx.

max. value

=1.1×

Typ.

IOPE1 VCC

Active (high-speed)

mode

VCC =3V,

fOSC =2MHz

—0.6— *1*3*4

Approx.

max. value

=1.1×

Typ.

—1.0— *2*3*4

Approx.

max. value

=1.1×

Typ.

Active (high-speed)

mode

VCC =3V,

fOSC =4MHz

—1.2— *1*3*4

Approx.

max. value

=1.1×

Typ.

—1.62.8 *2*3*4

Condition

—3.16.0 *1*3*4

Active (high-speed)

mode

VCC =3V,

fOSC =10MHz

—3.66.0 *2*3*4

Condition

Active (medium-

speed) mode

VCC =1.8V,

fOSC =2MHz,

φOSC/128

—0.06—mA

*1*3*4

Approx.

max. value

=1.1×

Typ.

Active

mode

current

consump-

tion

IOPE2 VCC

Active (medium-

speed) mode

VCC =3V,

fOSC =2MHz,

φOSC/128

—0.1— *1*3*4

Approx.

max. value

=1.1×

Typ.

—0.5— *2*3*4

Approx.

max. value

=1.1×

Typ.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 371 of 462

Values

Item Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Notes

Active

mode

current

consump-

tion

IOPE2 VCC Active (medium-

speed) mode

VCC =3V,

fOSC =4MHz,

φOSC/128

—0.2— *1*3*4

Approx.

max. value

=1.1×

Typ.

—0.71.3 *2*3*4

Condition

—0.61.8 *1*3*4

Active (medium-

speed) mode

VCC =3V,

fOSC =10MHz,

φOSC/128

—1.01.8 *2*3*4

Condition

VCC =1.8V,

fOSC =2MHz —0.16—mA

*1*3*4

Approx.

max. value

=1.1×

Typ.

Sleep

mode

current

consump-

tion

ISLEEP VCC

VCC =3V,

fOSC =2MHz —0.3— *1*3*4

Approx.

max. value

=1.1×

Typ.

—0.6— *2*3*4

Approx.

max. value

=1.1×

Typ.

VCC =3V,

fOSC =4MHz —0.5— *1*3*4

Approx.

max. value

=1.1×

Typ.

—0.92.2 *2*3*4

Condition

—1.34.8 *1*3*4

VCC =3V,

fOSC =10MHz —1.74.8 *2*3*4

Condition

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 372 of 462

Values

Item Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Notes

VCC =1.8V,

LCD on,

32-kHz crystal

resonator used

(φSUB =φW/2)

—6.2—µA

*1*3*4

Reference

value

—4.4— *1*3*4

Reference

value

VCC =2.7V,

LCD on,

32-kHz crystal

resonator used

(φSUB =φW/8) —8.0— *2*3*4

Reference

value

—1040 *1*3*4

Subactive

mode

current

consump-

tion

ISUB VCC

VCC =2.7V,

LCD on,

32-kHz crystal

resonator used

(φSUB =φW/2)

—2850 *2*3*4

Subsleep

mode

current

consump-

tion

ISUBSP VCC VCC =2.7V,

LCD on,

32-kHz crystal

resonator used

(φSUB =φW/2)

—4.616µA

*3*4

Watch

mode

current

consump-

tion

IWATCH VCC VCC =1.8V,

Ta = 25°C,

32-kHz crystal

resonator used,

LCD not used

—1.2—µA

*1*3*4

Reference

value

VCC =2.7V,

Ta = 25°C,

32-kHz crystal

resonator used,

LCD not used

—2.0— *3*4

Reference

value

VCC =2.7V,

32-kHz crystal

resonator used,

LCD not used

—2.06.0 *3*4

ISTBY VCC VCC =1.8V,

Ta = 25°C,

32-kHz crystal

resonator not used

—0.1—µA

*1*3*4

Reference

value

Standby

mode

current

consump-

tion VCC =3.0V,

Ta = 25°C,

32-kHz crystal

resonator not used

—0.3— *3*4

Reference

value

32-kHz crystal

resonator not used —1.05.0 *3*4

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 373 of 462

Values

Item Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Notes

RAM data

retaining

voltage

VRAM VCC 1.5 — — V

IOL Output pins

except port 9 ——0.5mA

P90 to P95 VCC = 2.2 V to 3.6 V — — 10.0

Allowable

output low

current

(per pin) Other than above — — 8.0

∑IOL Output pins

except port 9 — — 20.0 mAAllowable

output low

current

(total) Port 9 — — 60.0

–IOH All output pins V

C= 2.7 V to 3.6 V — — 2.0 mAAllowable

output

high

current

(per pin)

Other than above — — 0.2

Allowable

output

high

current

(total)

∑–IOH All output pins — — 10.0 mA

Notes: Connect the TEST pin to VSS.

1. Applies to the mask-ROM version.

2. Applies to the F-ZTAT version.

3. Pin states when current consumption is measured

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 374 of 462

Mode RES

RESRES

RES Pin Internal State Other Pins LCD Power

Supply Oscillator Pins

Active (high-speed)

mode (IOPE1)

Active (medium-

speed) mode (IOPE2)

VCC Only CPU operates VCC Stops

Sleep mode VCC Only all on-chip timers

operate VCC Stops

System clock:

crystal resonator

Subclock:

Pin X1=GND

Subactive mode VCC Only CPU operates VCC Stops

Subsleep mode VCC Only all on-chip timers

operate

CPU stops

VCC Stops

Watch mode VCC Only clock time base

operates

CPU stops

VCC Stops

System clock:

crystal resonator

Subclock:

crystal resonator

Standby mode VCC CPU and timers

both stop VCC Stops System clock:

crystal resonator

Subclock:

Pin X1=GND

Notes: 4. Except current which flows to the pull-up MOS or output buffer

5. Used when user mode or boot mode is determined after canceling a reset in the F-

ZTAT version

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 375 of 462

17.4.3 AC Characteristics

Table 17.9 lists the control signal timing and table 17.10 lists the serial interface timing.

Table 17.9 Control Signal Timing

One of following conditions is applied unless otherwise specified.

Condition A (F-ZTAT version): VCC = 2.7 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 3.6 V,

VSS =AV

SS =0.0V

Condition B (F-ZTAT version): VCC = 2.2 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 2.2 V to 3.6 V,

VSS =AV

SS =0.0V

Condition C (Mask ROM version): VCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V,

VSS =AV

SS =0.0V

Applicable Values Reference

Item Symbol Pins Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Figure

System clock

oscillation

frequency

fOSC OSC1, OSC2 VCC = 2.7 V to 3.6

V in conditions A

and C

2.0 — 10.0 MHz

Other than above in

condition C and

condition B

2.0 — 4.0

OSC clock (φOSC)

cycle time tOSC OSC1, OSC2 VCC = 2.7 V to 3.6

V in conditions A

and C

100 — 500 ns Figure 17.1

Other than above in

condition C and

condition B

250 — 500

System clock (φ)t

cyc 2 — 128 tOSC

cycle time —— 64 µs

Subclock oscillation

frequency fWX1, X2 — 32.768

or 38.4 —kHz

Watch clock (φW)

cycle time tWX1, X2 — 30.5 or

26.0 — µs Figure 17.1

Subclock (φSUB)

cycle time tsubcyc 2— 8 t

Instruction cycle

time 2— —t

cyc

tsubcyc

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 376 of 462

Applicable Values Reference

Item Symbol Pins Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Figure

Oscillation

stabilization time trc OSC1,

OSC2 VCC = 2.7 V to 3.6

V when using

crystal resonator in

figure 17.8

— 0.8 2.0 ms Figure 17.8

VCC = 2.2 V to 3.6

V when using

crystal resonator in

figure 17.8 and in

conditions B and C

—1.2 3.0

Other than above in

condition C and

when using crystal

resonator in figure

17.8

—4.0 —

VCC = 2.7 V to 3.6

V when using

ceramic resonator

in figure 17.8 and in

conditions A and C

—20 45 µs

VCC = 2.2 V to 3.6

V when using

ceramic resonator

(1)infigure17.8

and in conditions B

and C

—20 45

Other than above in

condition C and

when using ceramic

resonator (1) in

figure 17.8

—80 —

Other than above — — 50 ms

trc X1, X2 VCC = 2.7 V to 3.6

V—— 2.0 s

VCC = 2.2 V to 3.6

V and in conditions

B and C

—— 2.0

Other than above in

condition C —4.0 —

External clock high

width tCPH OSC1 VCC = 2.7 V to 3.6

V in conditions A

and C

40 — — ns Figure 17.1

Other than above in

condition C and

condition B

100 — —

X1 — 15.26 or

13.02 —µs

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 377 of 462

Applicable Values Reference

Item Symbol Pins Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Figure

External clock low

width tCPL OSC1 VCC = 2.7 V to 3.6

V in conditions A

and C

40 — — ns Figure 17.1

Other than above in

condition C and

condition B

100 — —

X1 — 15.26 or

13.02 —µs

External clock rise

time tCPr OSC1 VCC = 2.7 V to 3.6

V in conditions A

and C

— — 10 ns Figure 17.1

Other than above in

condition C and

condition B

—— 25

X1 — — 55.0 ns

External clock fall

time tCPf OSC1 VCC = 2.7 V to 3.6

V in conditions A

and C

— — 10 ns Figure 17.1

Other than above in

condition C and

condition B

—— 25

X1 — — 55.0 ns

RES pin low

width tREL RES 10 — — tcyc Figure 17.2

Input pin high

width tIH IRQ0,IRQ1,

IRQAEC,

WKP0 to

WKP7,

2— —t

cyc

tsubcyc

Figure 17.3

AEVL, AEVH 0.5 — — tOSC

Input pin low

width tIL IRQ0,IRQ1,

IRQAEC,

WKP0 to

WKP7,

2 ——t

cyc

tsubcyc

Figure 17.3

AEVL, AEVH 0.5 — — tOSC

Note: *Determined by the SA1 and SA0 bits in the system control register 2 (SYSCR2).

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 378 of 462

Table 17.10 Serial Interface (SCI3) Timing

One of following conditions is applied unless otherwise specified.

Condition A (F-ZTAT version): VCC = 2.7 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 3.6 V,

VSS =AV

SS =0.0V

Condition B (F-ZTAT version): VCC = 2.2 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 2.2 V to 3.6 V,

VSS =AV

SS =0.0V

Condition C (Mask ROM version): VCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V,

VSS =AV

SS =0.0V

Values

Item Symbol Test

Condition Min Typ Max Unit Reference

Figure

Asynchronous tscyc 4 ——t

cyc or

tsubcyc

Figure 17.4Input clock

cycle

Clocked synchronous 6 — —

Input clock pulse width tSCKW 0.4 — 0.6 tscyc Figure 17.4

Transmit data delay time

(clocked synchronous) tTXD ——1t

cyc or

tsubcyc

Figure 17.5

Receive data setup time

(clocked synchronous) tRXS 400.0 — — ns Figure 17.5

Receive data hold time

(clocked synchronous) tRXH 400.0 — — ns Figure 17.5

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 379 of 462

17.4.4 A/D Converter Characteristics

Table 17.11 shows the A/D converter characteristics.

Table 17.11 A/D Converter Characteristics

One of following conditions is applied unless otherwise specified.

Condition A (F-ZTAT version): VCC = 2.7 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 3.6 V,

VSS =AV

SS =0.0V

Condition B (F-ZTAT version): VCC = 2.2 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 2.2 V to 3.6 V,

VSS =AV

SS =0.0V

Condition C (Mask ROM version): VCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V,

VSS =AV

SS =0.0V

licable Test Values Reference

Item Symbol Pins Condition Min Typ Max Unit Figure

AVCC AVCC Condition A 2.7 — 3.6 V *1

Analog power supply

voltage Condition B 2.2 — 3.6

Condition C 1.8 — 3.6

Analog input voltage AVIN AN0 to

AN3 –0.3 — AV

CC +0.3 V

AIOPE AVCC AVCC = 3.0 V — — 1.0 mAAnalog power supply

current AISTOP1 AVCC — 600 — µA *2

Reference

value

AISTOP2 AVCC ——5.0 µA*3

Analog input

capacitance CAIN AN0 to

AN3 — — 15.0 pF

Allowable signal

source impedance RAIN — — 10.0 kΩ

Resolution (data

length) — — 10 bit

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 380 of 462

licable Test Values Reference

Item Symbol Pins Condition Min Typ Max Unit Figure

Nonlinearity error AVCC =2.7V

to 3.6 V ——±3.5 LSB

AVCC =2.2V

to 3.6 V in

condition B,

AVCC =2.0V

to 3.6 V in

condition C

——±5.5

Other than

above in

condition C

——±7.5 *4

Quantization error — — ±0.5 LSB

Absolute accuracy AVCC =2.7V

to 3.6 V — ±2.0 ±4.0 LSB

AVCC =2.2V

to 3.6 V in

condition B,

AVCC =2.0V

to 3.6 V in

condition C

— ±2.5 ±6.0

Other than

above in

condition C

— ±2.5 ±8.0 *4

Conversion time AVCC =2.7V

to 3.6 V 12.4 — 124 µs

Other than

above 62 — 124

Notes: 1. Set AVCC =V

CC when the A/D converter is not used.

2. AISTOP1 is the current in active and sleep modes while the A/D converter is idle.

3. AISTOP2 is the current at reset and in standby, watch, subactive, and subsleep modes

while the A/D converter is idle.

4. The conversion time is 62 µs.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 381 of 462

17.4.5 LCD Characteristics

Table 17.12 shows the LCD characteristics.

Table 17.12 LCD Characteristics

One of following conditions is applied unless otherwise specified.

Condition A (F-ZTAT version): VCC = 2.7 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 3.6 V,

VSS =AV

SS =0.0V

Condition B (F-ZTAT version): VCC = 2.2 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 2.2 V to 3.6 V,

VSS =AV

SS =0.0V

Condition C (Mask ROM version): VCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V,

VSS =AV

SS =0.0V

Applicable Values Reference

Item Symbol Pins Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Figure

Segment driver

step-down voltage VDS SEG1 to

SEG25 ID=2µA

V1 = 2.7 V to 3.6 V ——0.6V

Common driver

step-down voltage VDC COM1 to

COM4 ID=2µA

V1 = 2.7 V to 3.6 V ——0.3V

LCD power supply

split-resistance RLCD Between V1 and

VSS

1.5 3.0 7.0 MΩ

Liquid crystal

display voltage VLCD V1 2.2 — 3.6 V *2

Notes: 1. The voltage step-down from power supply pins V1, V2, V3, and VSS to each segment

pinorcommonpin.

2. When the liquid crystal display voltage is supplied from an external power supply,

ensure that the following relationship is maintained: VCC ≥V1 ≥V2 ≥V3 ≥VSS.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 382 of 462

17.4.6 Flash Memory Characteristics

Table 17.13 Flash Memory Characteristics

Condition A: AVCC = 2.7 V to 3.6 V, VSS =AV

SS =0.0V,V

CC = 2.7 V to 3.6 V (range of

operating voltage when reading), VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V (range of operating

voltage when programming/erasing), Ta= –20°C to +75°C (range of operating

temperature when programming/erasing: product with regular specifications,

product with wide-range temperature specifications, bare die product)

Condition B: AVCC = 2.2 V to 3.6 V, VSS =AV

SS =0.0V,V

CC =2.2Vto3.6V(rangeof

operating voltage when reading), VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V (range of operating

voltage when programming/erasing), Ta= –20°C to +50°C (range of operating

temperature when programming/erasing: product with regular specifications)

Values

Item Symbol Test

Conditions Min Typ Max Unit

Programming time*1*2*4tP— 7 200 ms/

128 bytes

Erase time*1*3*5tE— 100 1200 ms/

block

Reprogramming count NWEC 1000*810000

—times

Data retain period tDRP 10*10 — — year

Programming Wait time after

SWE-bit setting*1x1——µs

Wait time after

PSU-bit setting*1y50——µs

z1 1 ≤n≤6283032µs

z2 7 ≤n≤1000 198 200 202 µs

Wait time after

P-bit setting*1*4

z3 Additional

programming 81012µs

Wait time after

P-bit clear*1α5——µs

Wait time after

PSU-bit clear*1β5——µs

Wait time after

PV-bit setting*1γ4——µs

Wait time after

dummy write*1ε2——µs

Wait time after

PV-bit clear*1η2——µs

Wait time after

SWE-bit clear*1θ100 — — µs

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 383 of 462

Values

Item Symbol Test

Conditions Min Typ Max Unit

Programming Maximum

programming

count*1*4*5

N — — 1000 times

Wait time after

SWE-bit setting*1x1——µs

Wait time after

ESU-bit setting*1y 100 — — µs

Wait time after

E-bit setting*1*6z 10 — 100 ms

Wait time after

E-bit clear*1α10 — — µs

Wait time after

ESU-bit clear*1β10 — — µs

Wait time after

EV-bit setting*1γ20 — — µs

Wait time after

dummy write*1ε2——µs

Wait time after

EV-bit clear*1η4——µs

Wait time after

SWE-bit clear*1θ100 — — µs

Erase

Maximum erase

count*1*6*7N — — 120 times

Notes: 1. Set the times according to the program/erase algorithms.

2. Programming time per 128 bytes (Shows the total period for which the P bit in FLMCR1 is set. It

does not include the programming verification time.)

3. Block erase time (Shows the total period for which the E bit in FLMCR1 is set. It does not include

the erase verification time.)

4. Maximum programming time (tP(max))

tP(max) = Wait time after P-bit setting (z) ×maximum number of writes (N)

5. The maximum number of writes (N) should be set according to the actual set value of z1, z2, and

z3 to allow programming within the maximum programming time (tP(max)).

The wait time after P-bit setting (z1 and z2) should be alternated according to the number of writes

(n) as follows:

1≤n≤6z1=30µs

7≤n≤1000 z2 = 200 µs

6. Maximum erase time (tE(max))

tE(max) = Wait time after E-bit setting (z) ×maximum erase count (N)

7. The maximum number of erases (N) should be set according to the actual set value of z to allow

erasing within the maximum erase time (tE(max)).

8. This minimum value guarantees all characteristics after reprogramming (the guaranteed range is

from 1 to the minimum value).

9. Reference value when the temperature is 25°C (normally reprogramming will be performed by this

count).

10. This is a data retain characteristic when reprogramming is performed within the specification range

including this minimum value.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 384 of 462

17.5 Absolute Maximum Ratings of H8/38104 Group

Table 17.14 lists the absolute maximum ratings.

Table 17.14 Absolute Maximum Ratings

Item Symbol Value Unit Note

Power supply voltage VCC –0.3 to +7.0 V *1

CVCC –0.3 to +4.3 V

Analog power supply voltage AVCC –0.3 to +7.0 V

Input voltage Other than port B Vin –0.3toV

CC +0.3 V

Port B AVin –0.3toAV

CC +0.3 V

Port 9 pin voltage VP9 –0.3toV

CC +0.3 V

Operating temperature Topr Regular specifications:

–20 to +75*2°C

Wide-range temperature

specifications:

–40 to +85*2

Storage temperature Tstg –55 to +125 °C

Notes: 1. Permanent damage may result if maximum ratings are exceeded. Normal operation

should be under the conditions specified in Electrical Characteristics. Exceeding these

values can result in incorrect operation and reduced reliability.

2. The operating temperature ranges from –20°Cto+75°C when programming or erasing

the flash memory.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 385 of 462

17.6 Electrical Characteristics of H8/38104 Group

17.6.1 Power Supply Voltage and Operating Ranges

Power Supply Voltage and Oscillation Frequency Range (System Clock Oscillator Selected)

5.5

VCC (V)

fW (kHz)

• All operating modes

32.768

2.7

2.0

16.0

2.7 5.5

VCC (V)

fosc (MHz)

• Active (high-speed) mode

• Sleep (high-speed) mode

Power Supply Voltage and Oscillation Frequency Range (On-Chip Oscillator Selected)

5.5

VCC (V)

fW (kHz)

• All operating modes

32.768

2.7

0.8

2.0

2.7 5.5

VCC (V)

fosc (MHz)

• Active (high-speed) mode

• Sleep (high-speed) mode

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 386 of 462

Power Supply Voltage and Operating Frequency Range (System Clock Oscillator Selected)

• Subactive mode

• Subsleep mode (except CPU)

• Watch mode (except CPU)

16.384

8.192

4.096

2.7 5.5

(V)

SUB

(kHz)

8.0

1.0

2.7 5.5

(V)

φ (MHz)

• Active (high-speed) mode

• Sleep (high-speed) mode (except CPU)

1000

15.625

2.7 5.5

(V)

φ (kHz)

• Active (medium-speed) mode

• Sleep (medium-speed) mode (except A/D converter)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 387 of 462

Power Supply Voltage and Operating Frequency Range (On-Chip Oscillator Selected)

• Subactive mode

• Subsleep mode (except CPU)

• Watch mode (except CPU)

16.384

8.192

4.096

2.7 5.5

(V)

SUB

(kHz)

1.0

0.4

2.7 5.5

(V)

φ (MHz)

• Active (high-speed) mode

• Sleep (high-speed) mode (except CPU)

125

6.25

2.7 5.5

(V)

φ (kHz)

• Active (medium-speed) mode

• Sleep (medium-speed) mode (except A/D converter)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 388 of 462

Analog Power Supply Voltage and A/D Converter Operating Range (System Clock

Oscillator Selected)

5.0

1.0

2.7 5.5

(V)

φ (MHz)

• Active (high-speed) mode

• Sleep (high-speed) mode

625

500

2.7 5.5

(V)

φ (kHz)

• Active (medium-speed) mode

• Sleep (medium-speed) mode

Analog Power Supply Voltage and A/D Converter Operating Range (On-Chip Oscillator

Selected)

1.0

0.4

2.7 5.5

(V)

φ (MHz)

• Active (high-speed) mode

• Sleep (high-speed) mode

125

6.25

2.7 5.5

(V)

φ (kHz)

• Active (medium-speed) mode

• Sleep (medium-speed) mode

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 389 of 462

17.6.2 DC Characteristics

Table 17.15 lists the DC characteristics.

Table 17.15 DC Characteristics (1)

VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS =AV

SS = 0.0 V, unless otherwise specified

Values

Item Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Notes

Input high

voltage VIH RES,

WKP0 to WKP7,

IRQ0,IRQ1,

AEVL, AEVH,

VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VCC ×0.8 — VCC +0.3 V

SCK32 Other than above VCC ×0.9 — VCC +0.3

RXD32 VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VCC ×0.7 — VCC +0.3 V

Other than above VCC ×0.8 — VCC +0.3

OSC1VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VCC ×0.8 — VCC +0.3 V

Other than above VCC ×0.9 — VCC +0.3

P31 to P37,

P40 to P43,

P50 to P57,

VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VCC ×0.7 — VCC +0.3 V

P60 to P67,

P70 to P77,

P80,

PA0 to PA3

Other than above VCC ×0.8 — VCC +0.3

PB0 to PB3 VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VCC ×0.7 — AVCC +0.3 V

Other than above VCC ×0.8 — AVCC +0.3

IRQAEC, P95*5VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VCC ×0.8 — VCC +0.3 V

Other than above VCC ×0.9 — VCC +0.3

Note: Connect the TEST pin to VSS.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 390 of 462

Table 17.15 DC Characteristics (2)

VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS =AV

SS = 0.0 V, unless otherwise specified

Values

Item Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Notes

Input low

voltage VIL RES,

WKP0 to WKP7,

IRQ0,IRQ1,

IRQAEC, P95*5,

VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V – 0.3 — VCC ×0.2 V

AEVL, AEVH,

SCK32 Other than above – 0.3 — VCC ×0.1

RXD32 VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V – 0.3 — VCC ×0.3 V

Other than above – 0.3 — VCC ×0.2

OSC1 VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V – 0.3 — VCC ×0.2 V

Other than above – 0.3 — VCC ×0.1

P31 to P37,

P40 to P43,

P50 to P57,

VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V – 0.3 — VCC ×0.3 V

P60 to P67,

P70 to P77,

P80,

PA0 to PA3,

PB0 to PB3

Other than above – 0.3 — VCC ×0.2

VOH VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V

–IOH =1.0mA

VCC –1.0 — — VOutput

high

voltage VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V

–IOH =0.5mA

VCC –0.5 — —

P31 to P37,

P40 to P42,

P50 to P57,

P60 to P67,

P70 to P77,

P80,

PA0 to PA3 –IOH =0.1mA V

CC –0.3 — —

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 391 of 462

Table 17.15 DC Characteristics (3)

VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS =AV

SS = 0.0 V, unless otherwise specified

Values

Item Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Notes

Output low

voltage VOL VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V

IOL =1.6mA

——0.6V

P40 to P42

P50 to P57,

P60 to P67,

P70 to P77,

P80,

PA0 to PA3

IOL =0.4mA — — 0.5

P31 to P37 VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V

IOL =10mA

——1.0

VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V

IOL =1.6mA

——0.6

IOL =0.4mA — — 0.5

P90 to P93, P95 VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V

IOL =25mA

——1.5

VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V

IOL =15mA

——1.0

VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V

IOL =10mA

——0.8

IOL =5mA — — 1.0

IOL =1.6mA — — 0.6

IOL =0.4mA — — 0.5

IL |RES,P43

OSC1, X1,

P31 to P37,

P40 to P42,

P50 to P57,

P60 to P67,

P70 to P77,

P80, IRQAEC,

PA0 to PA3,

P90 to P93, P95

VIN =0.5VtoV

CC –

0.5 V ——1.0µAInput/

output

leakage

current

PB0 to PB3 VIN =0.5VtoAV

–0.5V ——1.0

–IpVCC =5.0V,

VIN =0.0V 20 — 200 µA

Pull-up

MOS

current

P31 to P37,

P50 to P57,

P60 to P67 VCC =2.7V,

VIN =0.0V —40— Refer-

ence

value

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 392 of 462

Table 17.15 DC Characteristics (4)

VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS =AV

SS = 0.0 V, unless otherwise specified

Values

Item Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Notes

Input

capaci-

tance

Cin All input pins

except power

supply pin

f=1MHz,

VIN =0.0V,

Ta=25°C

— — 15.0 µA

Active

mode

current

consump-

tion

IOPE1 VCC Active (high-speed)

mode

VCC =2.7V,

fOSC =2MHz

—TBD—mA

*1*3*4

Approx.

max. value

=1.1×

Typ.

—1.0— *2*3*4

Approx.

max. value

=1.1×

Typ.

Active (high-speed)

mode

VCC =5V,

fOSC =2MHz

—TBD— *1*3*4

Approx.

max. value

=1.1×

Typ.

—1.8— *2*3*4

Approx.

max. value

=1.1×

Typ.

Active (high-speed)

mode

VCC =5V,

fOSC =4MHz

—TBD— *1*3*4

Approx.

max. value

=1.1×

Typ.

—2.0— *2*3*4

Approx.

max. value

=1.1×

Typ.

—TBDTBD *1*3*4

Active (high-speed)

mode

VCC =5V,

fOSC =10MHz

—4.07.0 *2*3*4

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 393 of 462

Table 17.15 DC Characteristics (5)

VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS =AV

SS = 0.0 V, unless otherwise specified

Values

Item Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Notes

Active

mode

current

consump-

tion

IOPE2 VCC Active (medium-

speed) mode

VCC =2.7V,

fOSC =2MHz,

φOSC/128

—TBD—mA

*1*3*4

Approx.

max. value

=1.1×

Typ.

—0.5— *2*3*4

Approx.

max. value

=1.1×

Typ.

Active (medium-

speed) mode

VCC =5V,

fOSC =2MHz,

φOSC/128

—TBD— *1*3*4

Approx.

max. value

=1.1×

Typ.

—0.8— *2*3*4

Approx.

max. value

=1.1×

Typ.

Active (medium-

speed) mode

VCC =5V,

fOSC =4MHz,

φOSC/128

—TBD— *1*3*4

Approx.

max. value

=1.1×

Typ.

—0.9— *2*3*4

Approx.

max. value

=1.1×

Typ.

—TBDTBD *1*3*4

Active (medium-

speed) mode

VCC =5V,

fOSC =10MHz,

φOSC/128

—1.23.0 *2*3*4

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 394 of 462

Values

Item Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Notes

Sleep

mode

current

consump-

tion

ISLEEP VCC VCC =2.7V,

fOSC =2MHz —TBD—mA

*1*3*4

Approx.

max. value

=1.1×

Typ.

—0.8— *2*3*4

Approx.

max. value

=1.1×

Typ.

VCC =5V,

fOSC =2MHz —TBD— *1*3*4

Approx.

max. value

=1.1×

Typ.

—0.9— *2*3*4

Approx.

max. value

=1.1×

Typ.

VCC =5V,

fOSC =4MHz —TBD— *1*3*4

Approx.

max. value

=1.1×

Typ.

—1.3— *2*3*4

Approx.

max. value

=1.1×

Typ.

—TBDTBD *1*3*4

VCC =5V,

fOSC =10MHz —2.25.0 *2*3*4

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 395 of 462

Values

Item Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Notes

ISUB VCC —TBD—µA

*1*3*4

Reference

value

Subactive

mode

current

consump-

tion

VCC =2.7V,

LCD on,

32-kHz crystal

resonator used

(φSUB =φW/8) —10— *2*3*4

Reference

value

—TBDTBD *1*3*4

VCC =2.7V,

LCD on,

32-kHz crystal

resonator used

(φSUB =φW/2)

—3050 *2*3*4

Subsleep

mode

current

consump-

tion

ISUBSP VCC VCC =2.7V,

LCD on,

32-kHz crystal

resonator used

(φSUB =φW/2)

—4.016µA

*3*4

IWATCH VCC —TBD— *1*3*4

Reference

value

VCC =2.7V,

Ta = 25°C,

32-kHz crystal

resonator used,

LCD not used —1.8— *2*3*4

Reference

value

Watch

mode

current

consump-

tion

VCC =2.7V,

32-kHz crystal

resonator used,

LCD not used

—1.86.0 *3*4

ISTBY VCC VCC =2.7V,

Ta = 25°C,

32-kHz crystal

resonator not used

—TBD—µA

*1*3*4

Reference

value

Standby

mode

current

consump-

tion VCC =3.0V,

Ta = 25°C,

32-kHz crystal

resonator not used

—0.5— *3*4

Reference

value

32-kHz crystal

resonator not used —1.05.0 *3*4

RAM data

retaining

voltage

VRAM VCC 2.0 — — V

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 396 of 462

Values

Item Symbol Applicable

Pins Test

Condition Min Typ Max Unit Notes

Allowable output low

current (per pin) IOL Output pins

except ports 3

and 9

VCC =4.0Vto

5.5 V ——2.0mA

Port 3 VCC =4.0Vto

5.5 V — — 10.0

Output pins

except port 9 ——0.5

— — 15.0 *5

P90 to P93,

P95 VCC =4.0Vto

5.5 V — — 10.0

——8.0

Allowable output low

current (total) ∑IOL Output pins

except ports 3

and 9

VCC =4.0Vto

5.5 V — — 40.0 mA

Port 3 VCC =4.0Vto

5.5 V — — 80.0

Output pins

except port 9 — — 20.0

Port 9 — — 80.0

–IOH All output pins VCC =4.0Vto

5.5 V ——2.0mAAllowable output high

current (per pin)

Other than

above ——0.2

∑–IOH All output pins VCC =4.0Vto

5.5 V — — 15.0 mAAllowable output high

current (total)

Other than

above — — 10.0

Notes: Connect the TEST pin to VSS.

1. Applies to the mask-ROM version.

2. Applies to the F-ZTAT version.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 397 of 462

3. Pin states when current consumption is measured.

Mode RES

RESRES

RES Pin Internal State Other Pins LCD Power

Supply Oscillator Pins

Active (high-speed)

mode (IOPE1)

Active (medium-

speed) mode (IOPE2)

VCC Only CPU operates VCC Stops

Sleep mode VCC Only all on-chip timers

operate VCC Stops

System clock:

crystal resonator

Subclock:

Pin X1=GND

Subactive mode VCC Only CPU operates VCC Stops

Subsleep mode VCC Only all on-chip timers

operate

CPU stops

VCC Stops

Watch mode VCC Only clock time base

operates

CPU stops

VCC Stops

System clock:

crystal resonator

Subclock:

crystal resonator

Standby mode VCC CPU and timers

both stop VCC Stops System clock:

crystal resonator

Subclock:

Pin X1=GND

4. Except current which flows to the pull-up MOS or output buffer

5. Used when user mode or boot mode is determined after canceling a reset in the F-

ZTAT version

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 398 of 462

17.6.3 AC Characteristics

Table 17.16 lists the control signal timing and table 17.17 lists the serial interface timing.

Table 17.16 Control Signal Timing

VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS =AV

SS = 0.0 V, unless otherwise specified

Values

Item Symbol Applicable

Pins Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Reference

Figure

fOSC OSC1,OSC

22.0 — 16.0 MHzSystem clock

oscillation

frequency On-chip oscillator

selected 0.8 — 2.0

tOSC OSC1,OSC

262.5 — 500 ns Figure 17.1

OSC clock (φOSC)

cycle time On-chip oscillator

selected 500 — 1250

tcyc 2 — 128 tOSC

System clock (φ)

cycle time — — 160 µs

Subclock oscillation

frequency fWX1,X

2— 32.768 — kHz

Watch clock (φW)

cycle time tWX1,X

2— 30.5 — µs Figure 17.1

Subclock (φSUB)

cycle time tsubcyc 2— 8 t

Instruction cycle

time 2— —t

cyc

tsubcyc

Oscillation

stabilization time trc OSC1,

OSC2

—— 20 ms

X1,X

2—— 2.0 s

External clock high

width tCPH OSC125 — — ns Figure 17.1

External clock low

width tCPL OSC125 — — ns Figure 17.1

External clock rise

time tCPr OSC1— — 6 ns Figure 17.1

External clock fall

time tCPf OSC1— — 6 ns Figure 17.1

RES pin low

width tREL RES 10 — — tcyc Figure 17.2

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 399 of 462

Values

Item Symbol Applicable

Pins Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Reference

Figure

Input pin high

width tIH IRQ0,IRQ1,

IRQAEC,

WKP0 to

WKP7,

2— —t

cyc

tsubcyc

Figure 17.3

AEVL, AEVH 0.5 — — tOSC

Input pin low

width tIL IRQ0,IRQ1,

IRQAEC,

WKP0 to

WKP7,

2— —t

cyc

tsubcyc

Figure 173

AEVL, AEVH 0.5 — — tOSC

Note: *Determined by the SA1 and SA0 bits in the system control register 2 (SYSCR2).

Table 17.17 Serial Interface (SCI3) Timing

VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS =AV

SS = 0.0 V, unless otherwise specified

Values

Item Symbol

Test

Condition Min Typ Max Unit Reference

Figure

Asynchronous tscyc 4 — — Figure 17.4Input clock

cycle Clocked synchronous 6 — —

tcyc or

tsubcyc

Input clock pulse width tSCKW 0.4 — 0.6 tscyc Figure 17.4

Transmit data delay time

(clocked synchronous) tTXD ——1t

cyc or

tsubcyc

Figure 17.5

Receive data setup time

(clocked synchronous) tRXS 400.0 — — ns Figure 17.5

Receive data hold time

(clocked synchronous) tRXH 400.0 — — ns Figure 17.5

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 400 of 462

17.6.4 A/D Converter Characteristics

Table 17.18 shows the A/D converter characteristics.

Table 17.18 A/D Converter Characteristics

VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS =AV

SS = 0.0 V, unless otherwise specified

Values

Item Symbol Applicable

Pins Test

Condition Min Typ Max Unit Reference

Figure

Analog power supply

voltage AVCC AVCC 2.7 — 5.5 V *1

Analog input voltage AVIN AN0to

AN3

–0.3 — AV

CC +0.3 V

AIOPE AVCC AVCC = 5.0 V — — 1.5 mAAnalog power supply

current AISTOP1 AVCC — 600 — µA *2

Reference

value

AISTOP2 AVCC ——5.0 µA*3

Analog input

capacitance CAIN AN0to

AN3

— — 15.0 pF

Allowable signal

source impedance RAIN — — 10.0 kΩ

Resolution (data

length) — — 10 bit

Nonlinearity error AV

C=4.0V

to 5.5 V ——±3.5 LSB

C=2.7V

to 5.5 V ——±7.5

Quantization error — — ±0.5 LSB

Absolute accuracy AV

C=4.0V

to 5.5 V — ±2.0 ±4.0 LSB

C=2.7V

to 5.5 V — ±2.0 ±8.0

Conversion time 7.8 — 124 µs

Notes: 1. Set AVCC =V

CC when the A/D converter is not used.

2. AISTOP1 is the current in active and sleep modes while the A/D converter is idle.

3. AISTOP2 is the current at reset and in standby, watch, subactive, and subsleep modes

while the A/D converter is idle.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 401 of 462

17.6.5 LCD Characteristics

Table 17.19 shows the LCD characteristics.

Table 17.19 LCD Characteristics

VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS =AV

SS = 0.0 V, unless otherwise specified

Values

Item Symbol Applicable

Pins Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Reference

Figure

Segment driver

step-down voltage VDS SEG1to

SEG25

ID=2µA

V1 = 2.7 V to 5.5 V ——0.6V

Common driver

step-down voltage VDC COM1to

COM4

ID=2µA

V1 = 2.7 V to 5.5 V ——0.3V

LCD power supply

split-resistance RLCD Between V1 and

VSS

1.5 3.0 7.0 MΩ

Liquid crystal

display voltage VLCD V12.2 — 5.5 V *2

Notes: 1. The voltage step-down from power supply pins V1, V2, V3, and VSS to each segment

pinorcommonpin.

2. When the liquid crystal display voltage is supplied from an external power supply,

ensure that the following relationship is maintained: VCC ≥V1 ≥V2 ≥V3 ≥VSS.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 402 of 462

17.6.6 Flash Memory Characteristics

Table 17.20 Flash Memory Characteristics

Condition A: AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS =AV

SS =0.0V,V

CC =2.7Vto5.5V(rangeof

operating voltage when reading), VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V (range of operating voltage

when programming/erasing), Ta= –20°C to +75°C (range of operating temperature

when programming/erasing: product with regular specifications, product with wide-

range temperature specifications) Values

Item Symbol Test

Conditions Min Typ Max Unit

Programming time*1*2*4tP— 7 200 ms/128 bytes

Erase time*1*3*5tE— 100 1200 ms/block

Reprogramming count NWEC 1000*810000*9—times

Data retain period tDRP 10*10 ——year

Programming Wait time after

SWE-bit setting*1x 1 ——µs

Wait time after

PSU-bit setting*1y 50——µs

z1 1 ≤n≤6 283032µs

z2 7 ≤n≤1000 198 200 202 µs

Wait time after

P-bit setting*1*4

z3 Additional

programming 8 1012µs

Wait time after

P-bit clear*1α5 ——µs

Wait time after

PSU-bit clear*1β5 ——µs

Wait time after

PV-bit setting*1γ4 ——µs

Wait time after

dummy write*1ε2 ——µs

Wait time after

PV-bit clear*1η2 ——µs

Wait time after

SWE-bit clear*1θ100 — — µs

Maximum

programming

count*1*4*5

N — — 1000 times

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 403 of 462

Values

Item Symbol Test

Conditions Min Typ Max Unit

Wait time after

SWE-bit setting*1x 1 ——µs

Wait time after

ESU-bit setting*1y 100 — — µs

Wait time after

E-bit setting*1*6z 10 — 100 ms

Wait time after

E-bit clear*1α10——µs

Wait time after

ESU-bit clear*1β10——µs

Wait time after

EV-bit setting*1γ20——µs

Wait time after

dummy write*1ε2 ——µs

Wait time after

EV-bit clear*1η4 ——µs

Wait time after

SWE-bit clear*1θ100 — — µs

Erase

Maximum erase

count*1*6*7N — — 120 times

Notes: 1. Set the times according to the program/erase algorithms.

2. Programming time per 128 bytes (Shows the total period for which the P bit in FLMCR1

is set. It does not include the programming verification time.)

3. Block erase time (Shows the total period for which the E bit in FLMCR1 is set. It does

not include the erase verification time.)

4. Maximum programming time (tP(max))

tP(max) = Wait time after P-bit setting (z) ×maximum number of writes (N)

5. The maximum number of writes (N) should be set according to the actual set value of

z1, z2, and z3 to allow programming within the maximum programming time (tP(max)).

The wait time after P-bit setting (z1 and z2) should be alternated according to the

number of writes (n) as follows:

1≤n≤6z1=30µs

7≤n≤1000 z2 = 200 µs

6. Maximum erase time (tE(max))

tE(max) = Wait time after E-bit setting (z) ×maximum erase count (N)

7. The maximum number of erases (N) should be set according to the actual set value of z

to allow erasing within the maximum erase time (tE(max)).

8. This minimum value guarantees all characteristics after reprogramming (the guaranteed

range is from 1 to the minimum value).

9. Reference value when the temperature is 25°C (normally reprogramming will be

performed by this count).

10.This is a data retain characteristic when reprogramming is performed within the

specification range including this minimum value.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 404 of 462

17.6.7 Power Supply Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics (Preliminary)

Table 17.21 Power Supply Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics (1)

VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS =AV

SS = 0.0 V, unless otherwise specified

Rated Values

Item Symbol Test Conditions Min Typ Max Unit

LVDR operation drop

voltage*VLVDRmin 1.0——V

LVD stabilization time VLVDON 100 — — µs

Standby mode current

consumption ISTBY LVDE = 1

VCC =5.0V

32 oscillator not

used

— — 100 µA

Note: *In some cases no reset may occur if the power supply voltage, VCC,dropsbelow

VLVDRmin = 1.0 V and then rises, so thorough evaluation is called for.

Table 17.22 Power Supply Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics (2)

Using on-chip reference voltage and ladder resistor (VREFSEL = VINTDSEL = VINTUSEL = 0)

Rated Values

Item Symbol Test Conditions Min Typ Max Unit

Power supply drop

detection voltage Vint(D)*3LVDSEL = 0 3.3 3.7 4.2 V

Power supply rise

detection voltage Vint(U)*3LVDSEL = 0 3.6 4.0 4.5 V

Reset detection voltage

1*1Vreset1*3LVDSEL = 0 2.0 2.3 2.7 V

Reset detection voltage

2*2Vreset2*3LVDSEL = 1 2.7 3.3 3.9 V

Notes: 1. The above function should be used in conjunction with the voltage drop/rise detection

function.

2. Low-voltage detection reset should be selected for low-voltage detection reset only.

3. The values of Vint(D), Vint(U), Vreset1, and Vreset2 change relative to each other.

Example: If Vint(D) is the minimum value, Vint(U), Vreset1, and Vreset2 are also the

minimum values.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 405 of 462

Table 17.23 Power Supply Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics (3)

Using on-chip reference voltage and detect voltage external input (VREFSEL = 0, VINTDSEL

and VINTUSEL = 1)

Rated Values

Item Symbol Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit

extD/extU interrupt

detection level Vexd 0.80 1.20 1.60 V

VCC = 2.7 to 3.3 V –0.3 — VCC +0.3orAV

+ 0.3, whichever is

lower

extD/extU pin input

voltage*2VextD*1

VextU*1

VCC = 3.3 to 5.5 V –0.3 — 3.6 or AVCC +0.3,

whichever is lower V

Notes: 1. The VextD voltage must always be greater than the VextU voltage.

2. The maximum input voltage of the extD and extU pins is 3.6 V.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 406 of 462

Table 17.24 Power Supply Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics (4)

Using external reference voltage and ladder resistor (VREFSEL = 1, VINTDSEL = VINTUSEL =

Rated Values

Item Symbol Test

Condition Min Typ Max Unit

Power supply drop

detection voltage Vint(D) *1LVDSEL = 0 3.08 *(Vref1 –0.1) 3.08 *Vref1 3.08 *(Vref1 + 0.1) V

Vref input voltage

(Vint(D)) Vref1*2Vint(D) 0.98 — 1.68 V

Power supply rise

detection voltage Vint(U) *1LVDSEL = 0 3.33 *(Vref2 –0.1) 3.33 *Vref2 3.33 *(Vref2 + 0.1) V

Vref input voltage

(Vint(U)) Vref2*2Vint(U) 0.91 — 1.55 V

Reset detection

voltage 1 Vreset1*1LVDSEL = 0 1.91 *(Vref3 –0.1) 1.91 *Vref3 1.91 *(Vref3 + 0.1) V

Vref input voltage

(Vreset1) Vref3*2Vreset1 0.89 — 2.77 V

Reset detection

voltage 2 Vreset2*1LVDSEL = 1 2.76 *(Vref4 –0.1) 2.76 *Vref4 2.76 *(Vref4 + 0.1) V

Vref input voltage

(Vreset2) Vref4*2Vreset2 1.08 — 1.89 V

Notes: 1. The values of Vint(D), Vint(U), Vreset1, and Vreset2 change relative to each other.

Example: If Vint(D) is the minimum value, Vint(U), Vreset1, and Vreset2 are also the

minimum values.

2. The Vref input voltage is calculated using the following formula.

2.7 V (= VCC min) < Vint(D), Vint(U), Vreset2 < 5.5 V (= VCC max)

1.5 V (= RAM retention voltage) < Vreset1 < 5.5 V (= VCC max)

Vref1: 2.7 < 3.08 *(Vref1 – 0.1), 3.08 *(Vref1 + 0.1) < 5.5 →0.98 < Vref1 < 1.68

Vref2: 2.7 < 3.33 *(Vref2 – 0.1), 3.33 *(Vref2 + 0.1) < 5.5 →0.91 < Vref2 < 1.55

Vref3: 1.5 < 1.91 *(Vref3 – 0.1), 1.91 *(Vref3 + 0.1) < 5.5 →0.89 < Vref3 < 2.77

Vref4: 2.7 < 2.76 *(Vref4 – 0.1), 2.76 *(Vref4 + 0.1) < 5.5 →1.08 < Vref4 < 1.89

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 407 of 462

Table 17.25 Power Supply Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics (5)

Using external reference voltage and detect voltage external input (VREFSEL = VINTDSEL =

VINTUSEL = 1)

Rated Values

Item Symbol Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit

Comparator detection

accuracy Vcdl | VextU – Vref |

|VextD–Vref| 0.1 — — V

VCC = 2.7 to 3.3 V –0.3 — VCC +0.3or

AVCC +0.3,

whichever is

lower

extD/extU pin input

voltage VextD*

VextU*

VCC = 3.3 to 5.5 V –0.3 — 3.6 or AVCC

+ 0.3, whichever

is lower

Vref pin input voltage Vref5 VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V 0.8 — 2.8 V

Note: *The VextD voltage must always be greater than the VextU voltage.

17.6.8 Power-On Reset Circuit Characteristics (Preliminary)

Table 17.26 Power-On Reset Circuit Characteristics

VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS =AV

SS = 0.0 V, unless otherwise specified

Rated Values

Item Symbol Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit

RES pin pull-up

resistance RRES 65 100 — kΩ

Power-on reset start

voltage Vpor — — 100 mV

Note: Make sure to drop the power supply voltage, VCC, to below Vpor = 100 mV and then raise it

after the RES pin load had thoroughly dissipated. To drain the load of the RES pin,

attaching a diode to the VCC side is recommended. The power-on reset function may not

work properly if the power supply voltage, VCC, is raised from a level exceeding 100 mV.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 408 of 462

17.6.9 Watchdog Timer Characteristics

Table 17.27 Watchdog Timer Characteristics

AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS =AV

SS = 0.0 V, unless otherwise specified

Rated Values

Item Symbol Applicable

Pins Test

Condition Min Typ Max Unit Note

On-chip oscillator

overflow time tOVF 0.2 0.4 — s *

Note: *When the on-chip oscillator is selected, the timer counts from 0 to 255, indicating the time

remaining until an internal reset is generated.

17.7 Operation Timing

Figures 17.1 to 17.5 show the operation timings.

OSC1

OSC,

cpr

CPH

CPL

CPf

Figure 17.1 Clock Input Timing

REL

Figure 17.2 RES

RESRES

RES Low Width Timing

, ,

to ,

IRQAEC,

AEVL, AEVH

Figure 17.3 Input Timing

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 409 of 462

SCK32

SCKW

scyc

Figure 17.4 SCK3 Input Clock Timing

SCK32

TXD32

(transmit data)

RXD32

(receive data)

scyc

VIH or VOH*

VIL or VOL*

TXD

RXS

RXH

Note: * Output timing reference levels

Load conditions are shown in figure 17.6.

Output high

Output low

= 1/2V

+ 0.2 V

= 0.8 V

Figure 17.5 SCI3 Input/Output Timing in Clocked Synchronous Mode

17.8 Output Load Condition

2.4 kΩ

12 kΩ30 pF

LSI output pin

Figure 17.6 Output Load Circuit

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 410 of 462

17.9 Resonator Equivalent Circuit

OSC1

LSCS

OSC2

Crystal Resonator Parameter

Frequency (MHz)

RS (max)

CO (max)

4.193

100 Ω

16 pF

100 Ω

16 pF

30 Ω

16 pF

Ceramic Resonator Parameter

Frequency (MHz)

RS (max)

CO (max)

6.8 Ω

36.72 pF

18.3 Ω

36.94 pF

4.6 Ω

32.31 pF

Figure 17.7 Resonator Equivalent Circuit

OSC1

Crystal Resonator Parameter

(Nominal Values by Manufacturer) Ceramic Resonator Parameter (1)

(Nominal Values by Manufacturer)

Ceramic Resonator Parameter (2)

(Nominal Values by Manufacturer)

4Frequency

OSC2

100Ω

16pF

Rs (max)

Manufacturer

NIHON DEMPA

KOGYO

CO., LTD.

Murata

Manufacturing

Co., Ltd.

Co (max)

Frequency

Rs (max)

Manufacturer

Co (max)

Murata

Manufacturing

Co., Ltd.

Frequency

Rs (max)

Manufacturer

Co (max)

18.3Ω

36.94pF

4.6Ω

32.31pF

Figure 17.8 Resonator Equivalent Circuit

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 411 of 462

17.10 Usage Note

The ZTAT, F-ZTAT, and mask ROM versions satisfy the electrical characteristics shown in this

manual, but actual electrical characteristic values, operating margins, noise margins, and other

properties may vary due to differences in manufacturing process, on-chip ROM, layout patterns,

andsoon.

When system evaluation testing is carried out using the ZTAT or F-ZTAT version, the same

evaluation testing should also be conducted for the mask ROM version when changing over to that

version.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 412 of 462

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 413 of 462

Appendix A Instruction Set

A.1 Instruction List

Operation Notation

Symbol Description

Rd8/16 General register (destination) (8 or 16 bits)

Rs8/16 General register (source) (8 or 16 bits)

Rn8/16 General register (8 or 16 bits )

CCR Condition-code register

N N (negative) flag in CCR

Z Z (zero) flag in CCR

V V (overflow) flag in CCR

C C (carry) flag in CCR

PC Program counter

SP Stack pointer

#xx:3/8/16 Immediate data (3, 8, or 16 bits)

d:8/16 Displacement (8 or 16 bits)

@aa:8/16 Absolute address (8 or 16 bits)

+ Addition

– Subtraction

×Multiplication

÷ Division

∧Logical AND

∨Logical OR

⊕Logical exclusive OR

→Move

Logical complement

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 414 of 462

Condition Code Notation

Symbol Description

Changed according to execution result

*Undetermined (no guaranteed value)

0 Cleared to 0

— Not affected by execution result

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 415 of 462

Table A.1 Instruction Set

Mnemonic

Operand

Size

Operation

MOV.B #xx:8, Rd

MOV.B Rs, Rd

MOV.B @Rs, Rd

MOV.B @(d:16, Rs), Rd

MOV.B @Rs+, Rd

MOV.B @aa:8, Rd

MOV.B @aa:16, Rd

MOV.B Rs, @Rd

MOV.B Rs, @(d:16, Rd)

MOV.B Rs, @-Rd

MOV.B Rs, @aa:8

MOV.B Rs, @aa:16

MOV.W #xx:16, Rd

MOV.W Rs, Rd

MOV.W @Rs, Rd

MOV.W @(d:16, Rs), Rd

MOV.W @Rs+, Rd

MOV.W @aa:16, Rd

MOV.W Rs, @Rd

MOV.W Rs, @(d:16, Rd)

#xx:8→Rd8

Rs8→Rd8

@Rs16→Rd8

@(d:16, Rs16)→Rd8

@Rs16→Rd8

Rs16+1→Rs16

@aa:8→Rd8

@aa:16→Rd8

Rs8→@Rd16

Rs8→@(d:16, Rd16)

Rd16-1→Rd16

Rs8→@Rd16

Rs8→@aa:8

Rs8→@aa:16

#xx:16→Rd

Rs16→Rd16

@Rs16→Rd16

@(d:16, Rs16)→Rd16

@Rs16→Rd16

Rs16+2→Rs16

@aa:16→Rd16

Rs16→@Rd16

Rs16→@(d:16, Rd16)

—

MOV

Addressing Modes/Instruction Length (bytes) Condition Code

Number

of Execution

States

#xx:8/16 Rn @Rn @(d:16, Rn) @-Rn/@Rn+ @aa:8/16 @(d:8, PC) @@aa — I H N Z V C

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 416 of 462

MOV.W Rs, @-Rd

MOV.W Rs, @aa:16

POP Rd

PUSH Rs

ADD.B #xx:8, Rd

ADD.B Rs, Rd

ADD.W Rs, Rd

ADDX.B #xx:8, Rd

ADDX.B Rs, Rd

ADDS.W #1, Rd

ADDS.W #2, Rd

INC.B Rd

DAA.B Rd

SUB.B Rs, Rd

SUB.W Rs, Rd

SUBX.B #xx:8, Rd

SUBX.B Rs, Rd

Rd16-2→Rd16

Rs16→@Rd16

Rs16→@aa:16

@SP→Rd16

SP+2→SP

SP-2→SP

Rs16→@SP

Rd8+#xx:8→Rd8

Rd8+Rs8→Rd8

Rd16+Rs16→Rd16

Rd8+#xx:8+C→Rd8

Rd8+Rs8+C→Rd8

Rd16+1→Rd16

Rd16+2→Rd16

Rd8+1→Rd8

Rd8 decimal adjust→Rd8

Rd8-Rs8→Rd8

Rd16-Rs16→Rd16

Rd8-#xx:8-C→Rd8

Rd8-Rs8-C→Rd8

—

(2)

—

(2)

—

(1)

—

(1)

—

(3)

—

MOV

POP

PUSH

ADD

ADDX

ADDS

INC

DAA

SUB

SUBX

#xx:8/16 Rn @Rn @(d:16, Rn) @-Rn/@Rn+ @aa:8/16 @(d:8, PC) @@aa —IHNZVC

Mnemonic

Operand

Size

Operation

Addressing Modes/Instruction Length (bytes) Condition Code

Number

of Execution

States

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 417 of 462

SUBS.W #1, Rd

SUBS.W #2, Rd

DEC.B Rd

DAS.B Rd

NEG.B Rd

CMP.B #xx:8, Rd

CMP.B Rs, Rd

CMP.W Rs, Rd

MULXU.B Rs, Rd

DIVXU.B Rs, Rd

AND.B #xx:8, Rd

AND.B Rs, Rd

OR.B #xx:8, Rd

OR.B Rs, Rd

XOR.B #xx:8, Rd

XOR.B Rs, Rd

NOT.B Rd

SHAL.B Rd

Rd16-1→Rd16

Rd16-2→Rd16

Rd8-1→Rd8

Rd8 decimal adjust→Rd8

0-Rd→Rd

Rd8-#xx:8

Rd8-Rs8

Rd16-Rs16

Rd8×Rs8→Rd16

Rd16 ÷ Rs8→Rd16

(RdH: remainder, RdL: quotient)

Rd8∧#xx:8→Rd8

Rd8∧Rs8→Rd8

Rd8∨#xx:8→Rd8

Rd8∨Rs8→Rd8

Rd8 ⊕ #xx:8→Rd8

Rd8 ⊕ Rs8→Rd8

→Rd

—

(1)

—

(5)

—

(6)

—

SUBS

DEC

DAS

NEG

CMP

MULXU

DIVXU

AND

XOR

NOT

SHAL

#xx:8/16 Rn @Rn @(d:16, Rn) @-Rn/@Rn+ @aa:8/16 @(d:8, PC) @@aa —IHNZVC

Mnemonic

Operand

Size

Operation

Addressing Modes/Instruction Length (bytes) Condition Code

Number

of Execution

States

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 418 of 462

SHAR.B Rd

SHLL.B Rd

SHLR.B Rd

ROTXL.B Rd

ROTXR.B Rd

ROTL.B Rd

ROTR.B Rd

BSET #xx:3, Rd

BSET #xx:3, @Rd

(#xx:3 of Rd8) 1

(#xx:3 of @Rd16) 1

—

SHAR

SHLL

SHLR

ROTXL

ROTXR

ROTL

ROTR

BSET —

—

#xx:8/16 Rn @Rn @(d:16, Rn) @-Rn/@Rn+ @aa:8/16 @(d:8, PC) @@aa —IHNZVC

Mnemonic

Operand

Size

Operation

Addressing Modes/Instruction Length (bytes) Condition Code

Number

of Execution

States

→

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 419 of 462

BSET #xx:3, @aa:8

BSET Rn, Rd

BSET Rn, @Rd

BSET Rn, @aa:8

BCLR #xx:3, Rd

BCLR #xx:3, @Rd

BCLR #xx:3, @aa:8

BCLR Rn, Rd

BCLR Rn, @Rd

BCLR Rn, @aa:8

BNOT #xx:3, Rd

BNOT #xx:3, @Rd

BNOT #xx:3, @aa:8

BNOT Rn, Rd

BNOT Rn, @Rd

BNOT Rn, @aa:8

BTST #xx:3, Rd

BTST #xx:3, @Rd

BTST #xx:3, @aa:8

BTST Rn, Rd

(#xx:3 of @aa:8) 1

(Rn8 of Rd8) 1

(Rn8 of @Rd16) 1

(Rn8 of @aa:8) 1

(#xx:3 of Rd8) 0

(#xx:3 of @Rd16) 0

(#xx:3 of @aa:8) 0

(Rn8 of Rd8) 0

(Rn8 of @Rd16) 0

(Rn8 of @aa:8) 0

(#xx:3 of Rd8) (#xx:3 of Rd8)

(#xx:3 of @Rd16)

(#xx:3 of @aa:8)

(Rn8 of Rd8) (Rn8 of Rd8)

(Rn8 of @Rd16) (Rn8 of @Rd16)

(Rn8 of @aa:8) (Rn8 of @aa:8)

(#xx:3 of Rd8)→Z

(#xx:3 of @Rd16)→Z

(#xx:3 of @aa:8)→Z

(Rn8 of Rd8)→Z

—

BSET

BCLR

BNOT

BTST

#xx:8/16 Rn @Rn @(d:16, Rn) @-Rn/@Rn+ @aa:8/16 @(d:8, PC) @@aa —IHNZVC

Mnemonic

Operand

Size

Operation

Addressing Modes/Instruction Length (bytes) Condition Code

Number

of Execution

States

→

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 420 of 462

BTST Rn, @Rd

BTST Rn, @aa:8

BLD #xx:3, Rd

BLD #xx:3, @Rd

BLD #xx:3, @aa:8

BILD #xx:3, Rd

BILD #xx:3, @Rd

BILD #xx:3, @aa:8

BST #xx:3, Rd

BST #xx:3, @Rd

BST #xx:3, @aa:8

BIST #xx:3, Rd

BIST #xx:3, @Rd

BIST #xx:3, @aa:8

BAND #xx:3, Rd

BAND #xx:3, @Rd

BAND #xx:3, @aa:8

BIAND #xx:3, Rd

BIAND #xx:3, @Rd

BIAND #xx:3, @aa:8

BOR #xx:3, Rd

BOR #xx:3, @Rd

BOR #xx:3, @aa:8

(Rn8 of @Rd16)→Z

(Rn8 of @aa:8)→Z

(#xx:3 of Rd8)→C

(#xx:3 of @Rd16)→C

(#xx:3 of @aa:8)→C

(#xx:3 of Rd8)→C

(#xx:3 of @Rd16)→C

(#xx:3 of @aa:8)→C

C→(#xx:3 of Rd8)

C→(#xx:3 of @Rd16)

C→(#xx:3 of @aa:8)

→(#xx:3 of Rd8)

→(#xx:3 of @Rd16)

→(#xx:3 of @aa:8)

∧

(#xx:3 of Rd8)→C

∧

(#xx:3 of @Rd16)→C

∧

(#xx:3 of @aa:8)→C

∧

(#xx:3 of Rd8)→C

∧

(#xx:3 of @Rd16)→C

∧

(#xx:3 of @aa:8)→C

∨

(#xx:3 of Rd8)→C

∨

(#xx:3 of @Rd16)→C

∨

(#xx:3 of @aa:8)→C

—

BTST

BLD

BILD

BST

BIST

BAND

BIAND

BOR

#xx:8/16 Rn @Rn @(d:16, Rn) @-Rn/@Rn+ @aa:8/16 @(d:8, PC) @@aa —IHNZVC

Mnemonic

Operand

Size

Operation

Addressing Modes/Instruction Length (bytes) Condition Code

Number

of Execution

States

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 421 of 462

BIOR #xx:3, Rd

BIOR #xx:3, @Rd

BIOR #xx:3, @aa:8

BXOR #xx:3, Rd

BXOR #xx:3, @Rd

BXOR #xx:3, @aa:8

BIXOR #xx:3, Rd

BIXOR #xx:3, @Rd

BIXOR #xx:3, @aa:8

BRA d:8 (BT d:8)

BRN d:8 (BF d:8)

BHI d:8

BLS d:8

BCC d:8 (BHS d:8)

BCS d:8 (BLO d:8)

BNE d:8

BEQ d:8

BVC d:8

BVS d:8

BPL d:8

BMI d:8

BGE d:8

BLT d:8

BGT d:8

BLE d:8

—

C∨(#xx:3 of Rd8)→C

C∨(#xx:3 of @Rd16)→C

C∨(#xx:3 of @aa:8)→C

C ⊕ (#xx:3 of Rd8)→C

C ⊕ (#xx:3 of @Rd16)→C

C ⊕ (#xx:3 of @aa:8)→C

C ⊕ (#xx:3 of Rd8)→C

C ⊕ (#xx:3 of @Rd16)→C

C ⊕ (#xx:3 of @aa:8)→C

PC PC+d:8

PC PC+2

If condition

is true then

PC PC+d:8

else next;

C∨Z=0

C∨Z=1

C=0

C=1

Z=0

Z=1

V=0

V=1

N=0

N=1

N ⊕ V=0

N ⊕ V=1

Z∨(N ⊕ V)=0

Z∨(N ⊕ V)=1

—

BIOR

BXOR

BIXOR

#xx:8/16 Rn @Rn @(d:16, Rn) @-Rn/@Rn+ @aa:8/16 @(d:8, PC) @@aa —IHNZVC

Mnemonic

Operand

Size

Operation

Branching Condition

Addressing Modes/Instruction Length (bytes) Condition Code

Number

of Execution

States

→

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 422 of 462

JMP @Rn

JMP @aa:16

JMP @@aa:8

BSR d:8

JSR @Rn

JSR @aa:16

JSR @@aa:8

RTS

RTE

—

PC Rn16

PC aa:16

PC @aa:8

SP-2→SP

PC→@SP

PC PC+d:8

SP-2→SP

PC→@SP

PC Rn16

SP-2→SP

PC→@SP

PC aa:16

SP-2→SP

PC→@SP

PC @aa:8

PC @SP

SP+2→SP

CCR @SP

SP+2→SP

PC @SP

SP+2→SP

—

JMP

BSR

JSR

RTS

RTE

#xx:8/16 Rn @Rn @(d:16, Rn) @-Rn/@Rn+ @aa:8/16 @(d:8, PC) @@aa —IHNZVC

Mnemonic

Operand

Size

Operation

Addressing Modes/Instruction Length (bytes) Condition Code

Number

of Execution

States

→

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 423 of 462

SLEEP

LDC #xx:8, CCR

LDC Rs, CCR

STC CCR, Rd

ANDC #xx:8, CCR

ORC #xx:8, CCR

XORC #xx:8, CCR

NOP

EEPMOV



Transit to power-down mode.

#xx:8→CCR

Rs8→CCR

CCR→Rd8

CCR∧#xx:8→CCR

CCR∨#xx:8→CCR

CCR ⊕ #xx:8→CCR

PC PC+2

if R4L≠0

Repeat @R5→@R6

R5+1→R5

R6+1→R6

R4L-1→R4L

Until R4L=0

else next;



(4)

SLEEP

LDC

STC

ANDC

ORC

XORC

NOP

EEPMOV

Notes: (1) Set to 1 when a carry or borrow occurs at bit 11; otherwise cleared to 0.

(2) Retains its previous value when the result is zero; otherwise cleared to 0.

(3) Set to 1 when the adjustment produces a carry; otherwise retains its previous value.

(4) The number of states required for execution is 4n + 9 (n = value of R4L). In the

H8/38004 Group and H8/38104 Group, the number of states required for execution is 4n + 8.

(5) Set to 1 when the divisor is negative; otherwise cleared to 0.

(6) Set to 1 when the divisor is zero; otherwise cleared to 0.

#xx:8/16 Rn @Rn @(d:16, Rn) @-Rn/@Rn+ @aa:8/16 @(d:8, PC) @@aa I H N Z V C

Mnemonic

Operand

Size

Operation

Addressing Modes/Instruction Length (bytes) Condition Code

Number

of Execution

States

→



Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 424 of 462

A.2 Operation Code Map

Table A.2 is an operation code map. It shows the operation codes contained in the first byte of the

instruction code (bits 15 to 8 of the first instruction word).

Instruction when first bit of byte 2 (bit 7 of first instruction word) is 0.

Instruction when first bit of byte 2 (bit 7 of first instruction word) is 1.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 425 of 462

Table A.2 Operation Code Map

ADD

ADDX

CMP

SUBX

XOR

AND

MOV

NOP

BRA

MULXU

SLEEP

BRN

DIVXU

STC

BHI

LDC

BLS

ORC

BCC

RTS

XORC

XOR

BCS

BSR

ANDC

AND

BNE

RTE

LDC

BEQ

BVC

ADD

SUB

MOV

CMP

Bit manipulation instructions

MOV

BVS

MOV

INC

DEC

BPL

JMP

ADDS

SUBS

BMI

EEPMOV

BGE

BLT

ADDX

SUBX

BGT

JSR

DAA

DAS

BLE

BSET BNOT BCLR BTST

MOV

SHLLSHAL SHLR

SHAR

ROTXL

ROTL

ROTXR

ROTR NOT NEG

BST BIST

BLT BILD

BAND

BIAND

BXOR

BIXOR

BOR BIOR

Note: * The PUSH and POP instructions are identical in machine language to MOV instructions.

Low

High

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 426 of 462

A.3 Number of Execution States

The status of execution for each instruction of the H8/300L CPU and the method of calculating the

number of states required for instruction execution are shown below. Table A.4 shows the number

of cycles of each type occurring in each instruction, such as instruction fetch and data read/write.

Table A.3 shows the number of states required for each cycle. The total number of states required

for execution of an instruction can be calculated by the following expression:

Execution states = I ×SI+J×SJ+K×SK+L×SL+M×SM+N×SN

Examples: When an instruction is fetched from the on-chip ROM, and the on-chip RAM is

accessed.

BSET #0, @FF00

From table A.4:

I=L=2, J=K=M=N=0

From table A.3:

SI=2, S

L=2

Number of states required for execution = 2 ×2+2×2=8

When an instruction is fetched from the on-chip ROM, a branch address is read from the on-chip

ROM, and the on-chip RAM is used for stack area.

JSR @@ 30

From table A.4:

I = 2, J = K = 1, L = M = N = 0

From table A.3:

SI=S

J=S

K=2

Number of states required for execution = 2 ×2+1×2+ 1 ×2=8

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 427 of 462

Table A.3 Number of States Required for Execution

Execution Status Access Location

(Instruction Cycle) On-Chip Memory On-Chip Peripheral Module

Instruction fetch SI2—

Branch address read SJ

Stack operation SK

Byte data access SL2or3

Word data access SM—

Internal operation SN1

Note: *Depends on which on-chip peripheral module is accessed. See section 16.1, Register

Addresses (Address Order).

Table A.4 Number of Cycles in Each Instruction

Instruction Mnemonic

Instruction

Fetch

Branch

Addr. Read

Stack

Operation

Byte Data

Access

Word Data

Access

Internal

Operation

ADD ADD.B #xx:8, Rd

ADD.B Rs, Rd

ADD.W Rs, Rd

ADDS ADDS.W #1, Rd

ADDS.W #2, Rd

ADDX ADDX.B #xx:8, Rd

ADDX.B Rs, Rd

AND AND.B #xx:8, Rd

AND.B Rs, Rd

ANDC ANDC #xx:8, CCR 1

BAND BAND #xx:3, Rd

BAND #xx:3, @Rd

BAND #xx:3, @aa:8

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 428 of 462

Instruction Mnemonic

Instruction

Fetch

Branch

Addr. Read

Stack

Operation

Byte Data

Access

Word Data

Access

Internal

Operation

Bcc BRA d:8 (BT d:8)

BRN d:8 (BF d:8)

BHI d:8

BLS d:8

BCC d:8 (BHS d:8)

BCS d:8 (BLO d:8)

BNE d:8

BEQ d:8

BVC d:8

BVS d:8

BPL d:8

BMI d:8

BGE d:8

Bcc BLT d:8

BGT d:8

BLE d:8

BCLR BCLR #xx:3, Rd

BCLR #xx:3, @Rd

BCLR #xx:3, @aa:8

BCLR Rn, Rd

BCLR Rn, @Rd

BCLR Rn, @aa:8

BIAND BIAND #xx:3, Rd

BIAND #xx:3, @Rd

BIAND #xx:3, @aa:8

BILD BILD #xx:3, Rd

BILD #xx:3, @Rd

BILD #xx:3, @aa:8

BIOR BIOR #xx:3, Rd

BIOR #xx:3, @Rd

BIOR #xx:3, @aa:8

BIST BIST #xx:3, Rd

BIST #xx:3, @Rd

BIST #xx:3, @aa:8

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 429 of 462

Instruction Mnemonic

Instruction

Fetch

Branch

Addr. Read

Stack

Operation

Byte Data

Access

Word Data

Access

Internal

Operation

BIXOR BIXOR #xx:3, Rd

BIXOR #xx:3, @Rd

BIXOR #xx:3, @aa:8

BLD BLD #xx:3, Rd

BLD #xx:3, @Rd

BLD #xx:3, @aa:8

BNOT BNOT #xx:3, Rd

BNOT #xx:3, @Rd

BNOT #xx:3, @aa:8

BNOT Rn, Rd

BNOT Rn, @Rd

BNOT Rn, @aa:8

BOR BOR #xx:3, Rd

BOR #xx:3, @Rd

BOR #xx:3, @aa:8

BSET BSET #xx:3, Rd

BSET #xx:3, @Rd

BSET #xx:3, @aa:8

BSET Rn, Rd

BSET Rn, @Rd

BSET Rn, @aa:8

BSR BSR d:8 2 1

BST BST #xx:3, Rd

BST #xx:3, @Rd

BST #xx:3, @aa:8

BTST BTST #xx:3, Rd

BTST #xx:3, @Rd

BTST #xx:3, @aa:8

BTST Rn, Rd

BTST Rn, @Rd

BTST Rn, @aa:8

BXOR BXOR #xx:3, Rd

BXOR #xx:3, @Rd

BXOR #xx:3, @aa:8

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 430 of 462

Instruction Mnemonic

Instruction

Fetch

Branch

Addr. Read

Stack

Operation

Byte Data

Access

Word Data

Access

Internal

Operation

CMP CMP.B #xx:8, Rd

CMP.B Rs, Rd

CMP.W Rs, Rd

DAA DAA.B Rd 1

DAS DAS.B Rd 1

DEC DEC.B Rd 1

DIVXU DIVXU.B Rs, Rd 1 12

EEPMOV EEPMOV 2 2n+2*1

INC INC.B Rd 1

JMP JMP @Rn

JMP @aa:16

JMP @@aa:8

JSR JSR @Rn

JSR @aa:16

JSR @@aa:8

LDC LDC #xx:8, CCR

LDC Rs, CCR

MOV MOV.B #xx:8, Rd

MOV.B Rs, Rd

MOV.B @Rs, Rd

MOV.B @(d:16, Rs), Rd

MOV.B @Rs+, Rd

MOV.B @aa:8, Rd

MOV.B @aa:16, Rd

MOV.B Rs, @Rd

MOV.B Rs, @(d:16, Rd)

MOV.B Rs, @-Rd

MOV.B Rs, @aa:8

MOV.B Rs, @aa:16

MOV.W #xx:16, Rd

MOV.W Rs, Rd

MOV.W @Rs, Rd

MOV.W @(d:16, Rs), Rd

MOV.W @Rs+, Rd

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 431 of 462

Instruction Mnemonic

Instruction

Fetch

Branch

Addr. Read

Stack

Operation

Byte Data

Access

Word Data

Access

Internal

Operation

MOV MOV.W @aa:16, Rd

MOV.W Rs, @Rd

MOV.W Rs, @(d:16, Rd)

MOV.W Rs, @-Rd

MOV.W Rs, @aa:16

MULXU MULXU.B Rs, Rd 1 12

NEG NEG.B Rd 1

NOP NOP 1

NOT NOT.B Rd 1

OR OR.B #xx:8, Rd

OR.B Rs, Rd

ORC ORC #xx:8, CCR 1

ROTL ROTL.B Rd 1

ROTR ROTR.B Rd 1

ROTXL ROTXL.B Rd 1

ROTXR ROTXR.B Rd 1

RTE RTE 2 2 2

RTS RTS 2 1 2

SHAL SHAL.B Rd 1

SHAR SHAR.B Rd 1

SHLL SHLL.B Rd 1

SHLR SHLR.B Rd 1

SLEEP SLEEP 1

STC STC CCR, Rd 1

SUB SUB.B Rs, Rd

SUB.W Rs, Rd

SUBS SUBS.W #1, Rd

SUBS.W #2, Rd

POP POP Rd 1 1 2

PUSH PUSH Rs 1 1 2

SUBX SUBX.B #xx:8, Rd

SUBX.B Rs, Rd

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 432 of 462

Instruction Mnemonic

Instruction

Fetch

Branch

Addr. Read

Stack

Operation

Byte Data

Access

Word Data

Access

Internal

Operation

XOR XOR.B #xx:8, Rd

XOR.B Rs, Rd

XORC XORC #xx:8, CCR 1

Note: n: Specified value in R4L. The source and destination operands are accessed n+1 times

respectively.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 433 of 462

Appendix B I/O Port Block Diagrams

B.1 Port 3 Block Diagrams

PUCR3

Internal data bus

PMR3

PDR3

PCR3

AEC module

AEVH(P36)

AEVL(P37)

PDR3:

PCR3:

PMR3:

PUCR3:

Port data register 3

Port control register 3

Port mode register 3

Port pull-up control register 3

n = 7 or 6

Figure B.1(a) Port 3 Block Diagram (Pins P37 and P36)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 434 of 462

P35

PUCR3

Internal data bus

PMR2

PDR3

PCR3

PDR3:

PCR3:

PMR2:

PUCR3:

Port data register 3

Port control register 3

Port mode register 2

Port pull-up control register 3

Figure B.1(b) Port 3 Block Diagram (Pin P35)

PDR3

PUCR3

PCR3

Internal data bus

PUCR3:

PDR3:

PCR3:

n = 4 or 3

Port pull-up control register 3

Port data register 3

Port control register 3

Figure B.1(c) Port 3 Block Diagram (Pins P34 and P33)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 435 of 462

PUCR3

PMR3

Internal data bus

PDR3

PCR3

PDR3:

PCR3:

PMR3:

PUCR3:

n = 2 or 1

Port data register 3

Port control register 3

Port mode register 3

Port pull-up control register 3

TMOFH (P32)

TMOFL (P31)

Figure B.1(d) Port 3 Block Diagram (Pins P32 and P31)

B.2 Port 4 Block Diagrams

P43

PMR2

Internal data bus

PMR2: Port mode register 2

Figure B.2(a) Port 4 Block Diagram (Pin P43)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 436 of 462

P42 PDR4

PCR4

PDR4:

PCR4: Port data register 4

Port control register 4

SCINV3

TXD32

SCI3 module

Internal data bus

SPC32

Figure B.2(b) Port 4 Block Diagram (Pin P42)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 437 of 462

P41

SCI3 module

PDR4

Internal data bus

PCR4

PDR4:

PCR4: Port data register 4

Port control register 4

RE32

RXD32

SCINV2

Figure B.2(c) Port 4 Block Diagram (Pin P41)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 438 of 462

P40

SCI3 module

PDR4

PCR4

PDR4:

PCR4: Port data register 4

Port control register 4

SCKIE32

SCKOE32

SCKO32

SCKI32

Internal data bus

Figure B.2(d) Port 4 Block Diagram (Pin P40)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 439 of 462

B.3 Port 5 Block Diagram

PUCR5

Internal data bus

PMR5

PDR5

PCR5

PDR5:

PCR5:

PMR5:

PUCR5:

n = 7 to 0

Port data register 5

Port control register 5

Port mode register 5

Port pull-up control register 5

Figure B.3 Port 5 Block Diagram

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 440 of 462

B.4 Port 6 Block Diagram

PUCR6

PDR6

PCR6

Internal data bus

PDR6:

PCR6:

PUCR6:

n = 7 to 0

Port data register 6

Port control register 6

Port pull-up control register 6

Figure B.4 Port 6 Block Diagram

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 441 of 462

B.5 Port 7 Block Diagram

PDR7

PCR7

Internal data bus

PDR7:

PCR7:

n = 7 to 0

Port data register 7

Port control register 7

Figure B.5 Port 7 Block Diagram

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 442 of 462

B.6 Port 8 Block Diagram

PDR8

PCR8

Internal data bus

PDR8:

PCR8: Port data register 8

Port control register 8

Figure B.6 Port 8 Block Diagram (Pin P80)

B.7 Port 9 Block Diagrams

P9n

PDR9

PMR9

Internal data bus

VSS

PMR9:

PDR9:

n = 1 or 0

Port mode register 9

Port data register 9

PWM module

PWMn + 1

Figure B.7(a) Port 9 Block Diagram (Pins P91 and P90)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 443 of 462

PDR9

Internal data bus

PDR9:

n = 5 to 2

Port data register 9

Figure B.7(b) Port 9 Block Diagram (Pins P95 to P92)

B.8 Port A Block Diagram

PDRA

PCRA

Internal data bus

PDRA:

PCRA:

n = 3 to 0

Port data register A

Port control register A

Figure B.8 Port A Block Diagram

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 444 of 462

B.9 Port B Block Diagram

DEC

Internal data bus

A/D module

AMR3 to AMR0

n = 3 to 0

Figure B.9 Port B Block Diagram

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 445 of 462

Appendix C Port States in Each Operating State

Table C.1 Port States

Port Reset Sleep Subsleep Standby Watch Subactive Active

P37toP31 High

impedance Retained Retained High

impedance*Retained Functioning Functioning

P43toP40 High

impedance Retained Retained High

impedance Retained Functioning Functioning

P57toP50 High

impedance Retained Retained High

impedance*Retained Functioning Functioning

P67toP60 High

impedance Retained Retained High

impedance*Retained Functioning Functioning

P77toP70 High

impedance Retained Retained High

impedance Retained Functioning Functioning

P80 High

impedance Retained Retained High

impedance Retained Functioning Functioning

P95toP90 High

impedance Retained Retained High

impedance Retained Functioning Functioning

PA3 to PA0 High

impedance Retained Retained High

impedance Retained Functioning Functioning

PB3 to PB0 High

impedance High

impedance

Note: *High level output when the pull-up MOS is in on state.

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 446 of 462

Appendix D Product Code Lineup

Table D.1 Product Code Lineup of H8/3802 Group

Product Type Product Code Model Marking Package

(Package Code)

HD6473802H HD6473802H 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)

HD6473802FP HD6473802FP 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

Regular

product

HD6473802P HD6473802P 64-pin DILP (DP-64S)

HD6473802D HD6473802H 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)

HD6473802FPI HD6473802FP 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

PROM

version

Product with

wide-range

temperature

specifications HD6473802Q HD6473802P 64-pin DILP (DP-64S)

HD6433802H HD6433802 (***) H 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)

HD6433802FP HD6433802 (***) FP 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

HD6433802P HD6433802 (***) P 64-pin DILP (DP-64S)

Regular

product

HCD6433802 Die

HD6433802D HD6433802 (***) H 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)

HD6433802FPI HD6433802 (***) FP 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

H8/3802

Mask ROM

version

Product with

wide-range

temperature

specifications HD6433802Q HD6433802 (***) P 64-pin DILP (DP-64S)

HD6433801H HD6433801 (***) H 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)

HD6433801FP HD6433801 (***) FP 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

HD6433801P HD6433801 (***) P 64-pin DILP (DP-64S)

Regular

product

HCD6433801 Die

HD6433801D HD6433801 (***) H 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)

HD6433801FPI HD6433801 (***) FP 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

H8/3801 Mask ROM

version

Product with

wide-range

temperature

specifications HD6433801Q HD6433801 (***) P 64-pin DILP (DP-64S)

HD6433800H HD6433800 (***) H 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)

HD6433800FP HD6433800 (***) FP 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

HD6433800P HD6433800 (***) P 64-pin DILP (DP-64S)

Regular

product

HCD6433800 Die

HD6433800D HD6433800 (***) H 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)

HD6433800FPI HD6433800 (***) FP 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

H8/3800 Mask ROM

version

Product with

wide-range

temperature

specifications HD6433800Q HD6433800 (***) P 64-pin DILP (DP-64S)

[Legend]

(***): ROM code

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 447 of 462

Table D.2 Product Code Lineup of H8/38004 Group

Product Type Product Code Model Marking Package

(Package Code)

HD64F38004H10 64F38004H10 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)

HD64F38004FP10 F38004FP10 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

Regular

product

(2.7 V) HCD64F38004 Die

HD64F38004H4 64F38004H4 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)

HD64F38004FP4 F38004FP4 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

Regular

product

(2.2 V) HCD64F38004C4 Die

HD64F38004H10W 64F38004H10 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)

Flash

memory

version

Product with

wide-range

temperature

specifications

(2.7 V)

HD64F38004FP10W F38004FP10 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

HD64338004H HD64338004H 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)

HD64338004FP 38004 (***) FP 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

Regular

product

HCD64338004 Die

HD64338004HW HD64338004H 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)

H8/38004

Mask ROM

version

Product with

wide-range

temperature

specifications

HD64338004FPW 38004 (***) FP 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

HD64338003H HD64338003H 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)

HD64338003FP 38003 (***) FP 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

Regular

product

HCD64338003 Die

HD64338003HW HD64338003H 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)

H8/38003 Mask ROM

version

Product with

wide-range

temperature

specifications

HD64338003FPW 38003 (***) FP 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

HD64F38002H10 64F38002H10 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)

HD64F38002FP10 F38002FP10 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

Regular

product

(2.7 V) HCD64F38002 Die

HD64F38002H4 64F38002H4 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)

HD64F38002FP4 F38002FP4 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

Regular

product

(2.2 V) HCD64F38002C4 Die

HD64F38002H10W 64F38002H10 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)

H8/38002 Flash

memory

version

Product with

wide-range

temperature

specifications

(2.7 V)

HD64F38002FP10W F38002FP10 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 448 of 462

Product Type Product Code Model Marking Package

(Package Code)

HD64338002H HD64338002H 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)

HD64338002FP 38002 (***) FP 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

Regular

product

HCD64338002 Die

HD64338002HW HD64338002H 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)

H8/38002 Mask ROM

version

Product with

wide-range

temperature

specifications

HD64338002FPW 38002 (***) FP 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

HD64338001H HD64338001H 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)

HD64338001FP 38001 (***) FP 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

Regular

product

HCD64338001 Die

HD64338001HW HD64338001H 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)

H8/38001 Mask ROM

version

Product with

wide-range

temperature

specifications

HD64338001FPW 38001 (***) FP 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

HD64338000H HD64338000H 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)

HD64338000FP 38000 (***) FP 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

Regular

product

HCD64338000 Die

HD64338000HW HD64338000H 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)

H8/38000 Mask ROM

version

Product with

wide-range

temperature

specifications

HD64338000FPW 38000 (***) FP 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

[Legend]

(***): ROM code

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 449 of 462

Table D.3 Product Code Lineup of H8/38104 Group

Product Type Product Code Model Marking Package

(Package Code)

H8/38104 HD64F38104H F38104H 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)

Regular

product HD64F38104FP F38104FP 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

Flash

memory

version HD64F38104HW F38104H 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)

Product with

wide-range

temperature

specifications

HD64F38104FPW F38104FP 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

HD64338104H 38104(***)H 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)Mask ROM

version Regular

product HD64338104FP 38104(***) 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

HD64338104HW 38104(***)H 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)Product with

wide-range

temperature

specifications

HD64338104FPW 38104(***) 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

H8/38103 HD64338103H 38103(***)H 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)Mask ROM

version Regular

product HD64338103FP 38103(***) 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

HD64338103HW 38103(***)H 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)Product with

wide-range

temperature

specifications

HD64338103FPW 38103(***) 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

H8/38102 HD64F38102H F38102H 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)Regular

product HD64F38102FP F38102FP 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

Flash

memory

version HD64F38102HW F38102H 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)

Product with

wide-range

temperature

specifications

HD64F38102FPW F38102FP 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

HD64338102H 38102(***)H 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)Mask ROM

version Regular

product HD64338102FP 38102(***) 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

HD64338102HW 38102(***)H 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)Product with

wide-range

temperature

specifications

HD64338102FPW 38102(***) 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

H8/38101 HD64338101H 38101(***)H 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)Mask ROM

version Regular

product HD64338101FP 38101(***) 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

HD64338101HW 38101(***)H 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)Product with

wide-range

temperature

specifications

HD64338101FPW 38101(***) 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 450 of 462

Product Type Product Code Model Marking Package

(Package Code)

H8/38100 HD64338100H 38100(***)H 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)

Mask ROM

version Regular

product HD64338100FP 38100(***) 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

HD64338100HW 38100(***)H 64-pin QFP (FP-64A)Product with

wide-range

temperature

specifications

HD64338100FPW 38100(***) 64-pin LQFP (FP-64E)

[Legend]

(***): ROM code

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 451 of 462

Appendix E Package Dimensions

The package dimensions for the H8/38027 Group, H8/38004 Group, and H8/38104 Group are

shown in figure E.1 (FP-64A), figure E.2 (FP-64E), and figure E.3 (DP-64S).

Package Code

JEDEC

JEITA

Mass

(reference value)

FP-64A

—

Conforms

1.2 g

*Dimension including the plating thickness

Base material dimension

0.10

0.15 M

17.2 ± 0.3

48 33

64 116

17.2 ± 0.3

0.35 ± 0.06

0.8

3.05 Max

2.70

0˚ – 8˚

1.6

0.8

± 0.3

*0.17 ± 0.05

0.10

+0.15

–0.10

1.0

*0.37 ± 0.08

0.15 ± 0.04

Unit: mm

Figure E.1 Package Dimensions (FP-64A)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 452 of 462

Package Code

JEDEC

JEITA

Mass

(reference value)

FP-64E

—

Conforms

0.4 g

*Dimension including the plating thickness

Base material dimension

12.0 ± 0.2

48 33

116

*0.22 ± 0.05 0.08

0.5

12.0 ± 0.2

0.10

1.70 Max

*0.17 ± 0.05

0.5 ± 0.2

0˚ – 8˚

1.0

1.45

0.10 ± 0.10

1.25

0.20 ± 0.04

0.15 ± 0.04

Unit: mm

Figure E.2 Package Dimensions (FP-64E)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 453 of 462

Package Code

JEDEC

JEITA

Mass

(reference value)

DP-64S

—

Conforms

8.8 g

0.25+ 0.11

– 0.05

0˚ – 15˚

1.78 ± 0.25 0.48 ± 0.10

0.51 Min

2.54 Min 5.08 Max

19.05

57.6

58.5 Max

1.0

17.0

18.6 Max

1.46 Max

Unit: mm

Figure E.3 Package Dimensions (DP-64S)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 454 of 462

Appendix F Chip Form Specifications

Y direction 3.73 ± 0.05

X direction 3.60 ± 0.05

Y direction 3.73 ± 0.25

X direction 3.60 ± 0.25

Unit: mm

Maximum dimensions

in chip's plane

0.28 ± 0.02

Max 0.03

Figure F.1 Cross-Sectional View of Chip (HCD6433802, HCD6433801, and HCD6433800)

Y direction 3.27 ± 0.05

X direction 2.73 ± 0.05

Y direction 3.27 ± 0.25

X direction 2.73 ± 0.25

Unit: mm

Maximum dimensions

in chip's plane

0.28 ± 0.02

Max 0.03

Figure F.2 Cross-Sectional View of Chip (HCD64338004, HCD64338003, HCD64338002,

HCD64338001, and HCD64338000)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 455 of 462

0.28 ± 0.02

max 0.03

Y direction 3.82 ± 0.05

X direction 4.09 ± 0.05

Y direction 3.82 ± 0.25

X direction 4.09 ± 0.25

Unit: mm

Maximum dimensions

in chip's plane

Figure F.3 Cross-Sectional View of Chip (HCD64F38004 and HCD64F38002)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 456 of 462

Appendix G Bonding Pad Form

72µm5µm

5µm72µm

Bonding area

Metallic film is visible

from here

Figure G.1 Bonding Pad Form (HCD6433802, HCD6433801, HCD6433800, HCD64338004,

HCD64338003, HCD64338002, HCD64338001, HCD64338000, HCD64F38004,

and HCD64F38002)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 457 of 462

Appendix H Chip Tray Specifications

Chip orientation

Chip tray code

Manufactured by DAINIPPON INK

AND CHEMICALS, INCORPORATED

Product code: CT065

Characteristic engraving: TCT4040-060

Product

name

Chip

3.60

3.73

4.9 ± 0.1

Cross-sectional view: X to X'

4.0 ± 0.05

0.6 ± 0.1

1.8 ± 0.1

5.9 ± 0.1 Unit: mm

XX'

4.9 ± 0.15.9 ± 0.14.0 ± 0.1

Figure H.1 Chip Tray Specifications (HCD6433802, HCD6433801, and HCD6433800)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 458 of 462

2.73

3.27

4.48 ± 0.1

3.6 ± 0.05

0.6 ± 0.1

1.8 ± 0.1

5.34 ± 0.1

XX'

4.48 ± 0.15.34 ± 0.14.0 ± 0.1

Chip orientation

Chip tray code

Manufactured by DAINIPPON INK

AND CHEMICALS, INCORPORATED

Product code: CT022

Characteristic engraving: TCT036036-060

Product

name

Chip

Cross-sectional view: X to X' Unit: mm

Figure H.2 Chip Tray Specifications (HCD64338004, HCD64338003, HCD64338002,

HCD64338001, and HCD64338000)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 459 of 462

4.09

3.82

6.2 ± 0.1

4.5 ± 0.05

0.6 ± 0.1

1.8 ± 0.1

6.9 ± 0.1

XX'

6.2 ± 0.16.9 ± 0.154.0 ± 0.1

Chip orientation

Chip tray code

Manufactured by DAINIPPON INK

AND CHEMICALS, INCORPORATED

Product code: CT015

Characteristic engraving: TCT45-060P

Product

name

Chip

Cross-sectional view: X to X' Unit: mm

Figure H.3 Chip Tray Specifications (HCD64F38004 and HCD64F38002)

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 460 of 462

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 461 of 462

Index

10-bit PWM............................................287

A/D converter .........................................293

Clock pulse generators

Prescaler S ............................................95

Prescaler W...........................................95

Subclock generator ...............................93

System clock generator......................... 90

Exception handling...................................69

Reset exception handling...................... 78

Stack status ...........................................81

Flash memory ......................................... 129

Auto-erase mode.................................154

Auto-program mode............................152

Boot mode...........................................136

Boot program...................................... 136

Erase/erase-verify ...............................144

Erasing units .......................................131

Error protection...................................146

Hardware protection ........................... 146

Memory read mode.............................150

On-board programming modes...........136

Power-down state................................159

Program/program-verify.....................141

Programmer mode...............................147

Programming units..............................131

Socket adapter.....................................147

Software protection.............................146

Status polling......................................157

Status read mode.................................156

Interrupt

Internal interrupts..................................79

Interrupt response time .........................81

IRQ interrupts.......................................78

WKP interrupts.....................................78

Interrupt mask bit (I).................................34

LCD controller/driver .............................305

LCD display........................................314

LCD RAM...........................................315

Package.......................................................3

Pin arrangement ..........................................7

Power-down modes.................................101

Module standby function.....................117

Sleep mode..........................................110

Standby mode......................................111

Subactive mode...................................112

Subsleep mode ....................................112

ADRR .........................295, 339, 342, 345

ADSR..........................296, 339, 342, 345

AEGSR .......................223, 338, 341, 344

AMR ...........................296, 339, 342, 345

BRR.............................250, 338, 341, 344

CKSTPR1 ...................105, 340, 343, 346

CKSTPR2 ...................105, 340, 343, 346

EBR.............................134, 338, 341, 344

ECCR..........................224, 338, 341, 344

ECCSR........................225, 338, 341, 344

ECPWCR....................221, 338, 341, 344

ECPWDR....................222, 338, 341, 344

FENR ..........................135, 338, 341, 344

FLMCR1.....................133, 338, 341, 344

FLMCR2.....................134, 338, 341, 344

FLPWCR.....................135, 338, 341, 344

IEGR.............................72, 340, 343, 346

IENR.............................73, 340, 343, 346

IRR................................75, 340, 343, 346

IWPR ............................77, 340, 343, 346

LCR.............................311, 339, 342, 345

LCR2...........................313, 339, 342, 345

Rev. 4.00, 03/04, page 462 of 462

LPCR.......................... 309, 339, 342, 345

OCR............................ 205, 339, 342, 345

PCR3........................... 166, 340, 343, 346

PCR4........................... 173, 340, 343, 346

PCR5........................... 177, 340, 343, 346

PCR6........................... 181, 340, 343, 346

PCR7........................... 185, 340, 343, 346

PCR8........................... 187, 340, 343, 346

PCRA.......................... 191, 340, 343, 346

PDR3 .......................... 166, 339, 342, 345

PDR4 .......................... 172, 339, 342, 345

PDR5 .......................... 177, 339, 342, 345

PDR6 .......................... 181, 339, 342, 345

PDR7 .......................... 184, 339, 342, 345

PDR8 .......................... 187, 340, 342, 345

PDR9 .......................... 188, 340, 342, 345

PDRA.......................... 190, 340, 342, 345

PDRB.......................... 193, 340, 342, 345

PMR2.......................... 169, 339, 342, 345

PMR3.......................... 168, 339, 342, 345

PMR5.......................... 178, 339, 342, 345

PMR9.......................... 189, 340, 343, 346

PMRB......................... 193, 340, 343, 346

PUCR3........................ 167, 340, 342, 345

PUCR5........................ 178, 340, 343, 346

PUCR6........................ 182, 340, 343, 346

PWCR......................... 289, 339, 342, 345

PWDR......................... 290, 339, 342, 345

RDR............................ 243, 339, 341, 344

RSR..................................................... 243

SCR3........................... 246, 338, 341, 344

SMR............................ 244, 338, 341, 344

SPCR .......................... 173, 338, 341, 344

SSR............................. 248, 338, 341, 344

SYSCR1......................102, 340, 343, 346

SYSCR2......................104, 340, 343, 346

TCA ............................201, 339, 341, 344

TCR............................. 206, 339, 342, 345

TCSR ..........................207, 339, 342, 345

TCSRW.......................235, 339, 341, 344

TCW ...........................237, 339, 341, 344

TDR ............................244, 338, 341, 344

TMA............................200, 339, 341, 344

TSR.....................................................244

WEGR...........................77, 338, 341, 344

Serial communication interface 3 (SCI3)241

Asynchronous mode............................256

Bit rate.................................................250

Break...................................................282

Clocked synchronous mode ................268

Framing error......................................264

Mark state............................................282

Multiprocessor communication function

........................................................274

Overrun error ......................................264

Parity error..........................................264

Timer A...................................................199

Timer F ...................................................203

16-bit timer mode................................211

8-bit timer mode..................................212

Vector address...........................................71

Watchdog timer.......................................234

Renesas 8-Bit Single-Chip Microcomputer

Hardware Manual

H8/3802, H8/38004, H8/38104 Group

Publication Date: 1st Edition, November, 1999

Rev.4.00, March 16, 2004

Published by: Sales Strategic Planning Div.

Renesas Technology Corp.

Edited by: Technical Documentation & Information Department

Renesas Kodaira Semiconductor Co., Ltd.

Colophon 1.0

Sales Strategic Planning Div. Nippon Bldg., 2-6-2, Ohte-machi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 100-0004, Japan

http://www.renesas.com

Renesas Technology America, Inc.

450 Holger Way, San Jose, CA 95134-1368, U.S.A

Tel: <1> (408) 382-7500 Fax: <1> (408) 382-7501

Renesas Technology Europe Limited.

Dukes Meadow, Millboard Road, Bourne End, Buckinghamshire, SL8 5FH, United Kingdom

Tel: <44> (1628) 585 100, Fax: <44> (1628) 585 900

Renesas Technology Europe GmbH

Dornacher Str. 3, D-85622 Feldkirchen, Germany

Tel: <49> (89) 380 70 0, Fax: <49> (89) 929 30 11

Renesas Technology Hong Kong Ltd.

7/F., North Tower, World Finance Centre, Harbour City, Canton Road, Hong Kong

Tel: <852> 2265-6688, Fax: <852> 2375-6836

Renesas Technology Taiwan Co., Ltd.

FL 10, #99, Fu-Hsing N. Rd., Taipei, Taiwan

Tel: <886> (2) 2715-2888, Fax: <886> (2) 2713-2999

Renesas Technology (Shanghai) Co., Ltd.

26/F., Ruijin Building, No.205 Maoming Road (S), Shanghai 200020, China

Tel: <86> (21) 6472-1001, Fax: <86> (21) 6415-2952

Renesas Technology Singapore Pte. Ltd.

1, Harbour Front Avenue, #06-10, Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632

Tel: <65> 6213-0200, Fax: <65> 6278-8001

RENESAS SALES OFFICES

H8/3802, H8/38004,

H8/38104 Group